Pcs Cdma Minicell

PCS Systems
CDMA Minicell
Description, Operation, and
Maintenance
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Lucent Technologies Proprietary
This document contains proprietary information of
Lucent Technologies and is not to be disclosed or used
except in accordance with applicable agreements
Copyright 1999 Lucent Technologies
Unpublished and Not for Publication
All Rights Reserved
This material is protected by the copyright and trade secret laws of the United States and other countries. It
may not be reproduced, distributed, or altered in any fashion by any entity (either internal or external to
Lucent Technologies), except in accordance with applicable agreements, contracts or licensing, without the
express written consent of the Customer Training and Information Products organization and the business
management owner of the material.
For permission to reproduce or distribute, please contact:
Product Development Manager1 888 LTINFO6 (domestic)
1 317 322 6848 (international)
Notice
Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time
of printing. However, information is subject to change.
Mandatory Customer Information

Federal Communication Commission Statement (FCC) Notification and Repair Information
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in
a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at his/her own expense.
Security Statement
In rare instances, unauthorized individuals make connections to the telecommunications network through the
use of remote access features.
In such event, applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all network charges for traffic. Lucent
Technologies cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give credit for
charges that result from unauthorized access.
Trademarks
AUTOPLEX is a registered trademark of Lucent Technologies
Cadweld is registered trademark of ERICO Products, Inc.
Twist-Lock is a registered trademark of Hubbell Inc.
Support Telephone Number

Lucent Technologies provides a telephone number for you to report errors or to ask questions about the
information in this document.
1 888-LTINFO6
Lucent Technologies provides a telephone number for technical support from the Customer Technical
Support Organization (CTSO).
1-800-225-4672
E-mail addresses have been created that allow CTIP Wireless customers to send in comments about
Wireless customer documents and training courses. The e-mail address for comments on customer
documents is:
wirelessdocs@lucent.com
Developed by the Lucent Technologies Customer Technical Support and Information Organization.

See notice on first page
How Are We Doing?

Title: PCS CDMA Description, Operation and Maintenance
Identification No.: 401-703-301
Issue No.: Issue 8
Date: April 1999
Lucent Technologies welcomes your feedback on this Customer Information Product (CIP). Your
comments can be of great value in helping us improve our CIPs.
1. Please rate the effectiveness of this CIP in the following areas:
Excellent
Good
Fair
Not
Applicable
Poor
Clarity
//////////////////
//////////////////
Completeness
//////////////////
Accuracy
//////////////////
Organization
//////////////////
Appearance
//////////////////
Ease of Use
Examples
Illustrations
//////////////////
Overall Satisfaction
2. Please check the ways you feel we could improve this CIP.
r
r
r
r
r
r
Improve the overview/introduction

Improve the table of contents
Improve the organization
Include more figures
Add more examples
Add more detail
r
r
r
r
r
r
Make it more concise/brief

Add more step-by-step procedures/tutorials
Add more troubleshooting information
Make it less technical
Add more/better quick reference aids
Improve the index
Please provide details for the suggested improvement.
3. What did you like most about this CIP?
4. Feel free to write any comments below or on an attached sheet.
If we may contact you concerning your comments, please complete the following:
Name:
Company/Organization:
Telephone Number:
Date:
Address:
When you have completed this form, please fold, tape and return to address on back
or Fax to: 910 727-3043.
------------------------------------------------------------ Do Not Cut Fold Here And Tape ---------------------------------------------------------------------
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL

FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 1999 GREENSBORO, NC
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
DOCUMENTATION SERVICES
2400 Reynolda Road
Winston-Salem, NC 27199-2029
How Are We Doing?

Title: PCS CDMA Description, Operation and Maintenance
Identification No.: 401-703-301
Issue No.: Issue 8
Date: April 1999
Lucent Technologies welcomes your feedback on this Customer Information Product (CIP). Your
comments can be of great value in helping us improve our CIPs.
1. Please rate the effectiveness of this CIP in the following areas:
Excellent
Good
Fair
Not
Applicable
Poor
Clarity
//////////////////
//////////////////
Completeness
//////////////////
Accuracy
//////////////////
Organization
//////////////////
Appearance
//////////////////
Ease of Use
Examples
Illustrations
//////////////////
Overall Satisifaction
2. Please check the ways you feel we could improve this CIP.
r
r
r
r
r
r
Improve the overview/introduction

Improve the table of contents
Improve the organization
Include more figures
Add more examples
Add more detail
r
r
r
r
r
r
Make it more concise/brief

Add more step-by-step procedures/tutorials
Add more troubleshooting information
Make it less technical
Add more/better quick reference aids
Improve the index
Please provide details for the suggested improvement.
3. What did you like most about this CIP?
4. Feel free to write any comments below or on an attached sheet.
If we may contact you concerning your comments, please complete the following:
Name:
Company/Organization:
Telephone Number:
Date:
Address:
When you have completed this form, please fold, tape and return to address on back
or Fax to: 910 727-3043.
------------------------------------------------------------ Do Not Cut Fold Here And Tape ---------------------------------------------------------------------
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL

FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 1999 GREENSBORO, NC
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
DOCUMENTATION SERVICES
2400 Reynolda Road
Winston-Salem, NC 27199-2029
Preface
0-1
1.
Introduction to PCS CDMA
1-1
2.
PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description
2-1
3.
Cabling, Connections, and Software
3-1
4.
Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell
4-1
5.
PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance
5-1
6.
Diagnostics
6-1
7.
Troubleshooting
7-1
8.
Repairs
8-1
9.
Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell
9-1
10.
Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting Techniques
Glossary
10-1
GL-1
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Lucent Technologies - Proprietary

Contents - 3
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Contents - 4
Lucent TechnologiesProprietary
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Preface
Contents
Contents
Preface-1
Manual Coverage and Revisions
Preface-2
Sources of Information
Preface-3
Electromagnetic Interference
Preface-4
Service Available
Preface-5
Introduction
Preface-6
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

-1
Manual Coverage and Revisions
Preface
Manual
Coverage and Revisions
.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Reason for Reissue
Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this
manual reflects hardware configuration at the time of shipment. Lucent
Technologies continually strives to improve the quality and reliability
of all its products, and in some instances, product changes may occur
just prior to shipment. Therefore, because of printing and distribution
requirements, some information in this manual may not reflect
hardware configuration as delivered. However, in all cases, when
required, updated information will be issued to you as rapidly as
possible.
Whenever this manual is reissued, the reason for reissue will be given
in this paragraph.
Issue 8 corrects errors from Issue 7.
Manual Organization
For ease of access, the information contained in this manual is divided

and organized under major headings and subheadings as listed in the
table of contents.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
-2
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Preface
Sources
of Information
.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Documentation
Sources
Document Comments
The documentation useful in maintaining the Minicell comes from two

primary sources: Lucent Technologies manuals and records maintained
on the cell maintenance.
E-mail addresses have been created that allow CTIP Wireless
customers to send in comments about Wireless customer documents
and training courses.
e-mail address for comments on is
customer documents
wirelessdocs@lucent.com
training courses and student guides wirelesscourse@lucent.com.

Obtaining Related
Documentation
The AUTOPLEX Cellular Telecommunications Systems System 1000

Customer Documentation Catalog (401-610-000) is a guide to all
AUTOPLEX System 1000 customer documents and includes document
descriptions and ordering information.
To order AUTOPLEX System 1000 documents, including documents
on CD-ROM, and all other Lucent Technologies product
documentation by phone, please use the following numbers:
Within the United States:
Voice: 1-888-LUCENT8 or 1-888-582-3688, prompt 1
FAX: 1-800-566-9568
Locations outside of the United States:
Australia and all European countries
(317) 322-6416
Asia Pacific and China
(317) 322-6411
North America (excluding U.S.) and all

other countries
(317) 322-6646
FAX for all international customers
(317) 322-6699
To order documentation by mail, please use the following address:

Lucent Technologies Customer Information Center
Attention: Order Entry Section
2855 N. Franklin Road
P.O. Box 19901
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

-3
Preface
Indianapolis, IN 46219
U.S.A.
To order documentation electronically, visit the Lucent Technologies
Customer Information Center web site at:
http://www.cic.lucent.com
Related Documentation
For related documentation, refer to the table below:
Document
Cell Site Antenna Equipment Installation Planning Guide
Cell Site Diagnostic Description
Cell Site I/O Manual
PCS CDMA Minicell Installation
Recommended Spare Parts, Tools, and Test Equipment
Reference
401-200-300
401-660-101
401-610-107
401-703-300
401-610-120
System Description and Planning Guide

System Routine and Corrective Maintenance (Series II)
401-610-006
401-610-175
Hardware/Software
Options Information
To determine which hardware/software options are currently available,

please contact your Account Executive.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
-4
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Electromagnetic Interference
Preface
Electromagnetic
Interference
.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Electromagnetic
Interference
Lucent Technologies runs extensive tests on all its products to ensure

that they do not cause interference to radio communications by the
radiation of radio frequency energy. Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules require that you be notified of the following:
RF Interference
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy.
If not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause interference to radio communications.
It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
B computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC
Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection
against such interference when operated in a commercial
environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause interference, in which case the user, at his own
expense, will be required to take whatever measures may be
required to correct the interference.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

-5
Service Available
Preface
Service
Available
.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Engineering Services
The PCS CDMA Minicells are designed to provide self-contained

systems requiring no equipment engineering. However, site engineering
and custom configuration services are available to meet your special
requirements. Lucent Technologies has a wide range of services to help
you in selecting the right configuration for your needs, installing and
maintaining your system, and planning for future growth.
Warranty and Repair

Services
The Minicell is warranted upon shipment for 24 months. If installed by

Lucent Technologies, the product is warranted upon the acceptance
date or thirty (30) days from the installation completion date, whichever
is sooner. For repaired product or product provided as a replacement,
the warranty period is the greater of 6 months or the unexpired term of
the new product warranty. A complete and detailed description of the
warranty and repair policy is available from your Account Executive.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
-6
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Introduction
Preface
Introduction
.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
General
Preventive maintenance is defined as those activities performed at

regular intervals and designed to identify, as soon as possible, potential
failure conditions and/or equipment failures. The goal of preventive
maintenance is to maintain normal system operations and to prevent
loss of service by the use of software and manual routines. These
routines consist of software-controlled diagnostic tests and a number of
manual tests as defined by the Equipment Test List (ETL).
Product Warranty
Lucent Technologies warrants that all PCS System equipment that it

sells and installs is free from defects in materials and workmanship as
specified in the sales agreement. Lucent Technologies, at its own
option, will either repair or replace defective units without charge for
parts or labor during the warranty period. Unless otherwise negotiated,
or the system is altered due to customer actions, the warranty period
begins at the time of turnover, or as specified in the sales agreement.
Customer Options
As a customer option, it may be to your advantage to become involved

with the operation and maintenance activities prior to normal turnover.
By doing so, you will have access to your system earlier than normal,
and your maintenance personnel will become familiar with the
equipment sooner.
The opportunity for your involvement is in no way intended to replace
the formal training offered by Lucent Technologies. Nor is involvement
intended for maintenance personnel who are inexperienced in
maintaining switching and radio systems. The mutual benefits of your
involvement opportunities must be negotiated prior to turnover. The
options which may be negotiated are summarized as follows:
Full or partial operation of the system from the MSC
Full or partial system maintenance
Cutover prior to the completion of system testing by Lucent
Technologies
Customer additions to and/or involvement in system-level tests.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

-7
Introduction
Preface
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
-8
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
PCS stands for Personal Communication Services, and designates a

portion of the radio frequency spectrum in the 1.8-to 2.0-GHz range.
CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access) is a method of supporting
multiple voice calls within an allocated frequency band using special
codes to differentiate the calls.
The PCS CDMA standard is defined within the IS-95 document, which
was produced by the Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA)
TR45.5 Subcommittee on Wideband Spectrum Digital Technology.
Contents
PCS CDMA Overview

1-3
Comparison between Multiple Access Schemes - - - - - - - 1-4
PCS CDMA Frequency Assignments - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-6
PCS CDMA Receive/Transmit Bands and Channel Assignment 1-7
Channel Number vs. PCS Frequency Assignment - - - - - - 1-9
Call Processing Overview
PCS System Description - - - - - - - - - PCS CDMA Environment for the Minicell Key Parts: PCS Switching Center (PCSC) - Key Parts: PCS Access Manager - - - - - Key Parts: 5ESS--2000 Switching Platform
CDMA Packet Pipe Trunk Group - - - - - Packet Pipe Connection -- Minicell Interface
Key Parts: The Minicell Site - - - - - - - -
1-11
- 1-12
- 1-13
- 1-16
- 1-17
- 1-19
- 1-21
- 1-23
- 1-25
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

1 - 1
Packet Pipe Connection - Daisy Chain

CDMA Implementation - - - - - - CDMA Channel Element Encoding Codes Used in a CDMA Transmission
Display of Walsh Codes - - - - - - Details of Walsh Codes Display - - The CDMA Interference - - - - - - Diversity and CDMA - - - - - - - CDMA Traffic Channels - - - - - -
1-27
1-29
1-32
1-34
1-36
1-37
1-39
1-40
1-43
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 2

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
PCS CDMA Overview

OverviewObjectives
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Review and Identification
This unit provides an introduction to the Personal Communications

Services (PCS) System. It describes the distributed architecture
approach on which this system is based.
This unit is designed to enable cell technicians to identify the
components and define the major functions of the PCS CDMA System
by doing the following:
Naming elements of a PCS CDMA architecture
Identifying the components of a PCS CDMA Minicell
Stating the functions performed by Data Links
Naming the Walsh codes assigned to specific communication

channels
Stating the role of the different codes used in CDMA

transmissions
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

1 - 3
Comparison between Multiple Access Schemes
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Definitions
Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) This access scheme

divides the spectrum into a series of 30-kHz channels. Each channel
supports a single user.
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) TDMA divides each 30-kHz
channel into six time slots. The present TDMA standard allocates two
time slots per user, enabling three simultaneous users per 30-kHz
channel.
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) This access scheme divides
the spectrum into a series of 1.25-MHz channels. Each channel allows
multiple users. Each user is assigned a unique code to differentiate
each call.
The CDMA standard allows up to 61 simultaneous users in one
1.2288-MHz channel. By processing each voice packet with two PN
codes, it is virtually impossible to monitor a CDMA conversation or
fraudulently access ESNs, PINs, or credit card numbers.
Although there are 61 Walsh codes available to differentiate calls and
theoretical limits are around 40 calls, the operational limitations and
quality issues will reduce the maximum number of calls somewhat
below this value.
Multiple Access Schemes

Diagram
The diagram below compares the ability of an encoding scheme to

utilize a frequency band.
30 kHz FDMA 30 kHz

One user per channel
30 kHz
30 kHz
TDMA
Three users (2 timeslots per user) per channel
12
41 1 42
29
27 2 39 21 28
6 23 10
40
61
25 51 34
16 55 24
0
48 13
4
15
20
3
17 7 59
58 53 46 37
35
14 43
45 31
44
30
22
49 50
5 56
18
9
33 11
54
8
19
32
60
47
36
57
62
52 63 38 26
1.2288 MHz CDMA Channel
As many as 61 Simultaneous users per 1.2288 MHz channel
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 4

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Selected Features of
Lucent Technologies
CDMA Implementation
The Lucent Technologies PCS CDMA Minicells implement the

features of the PCS CDMA standard. In particular, they enable:
Up to 10 times the capacity of analog cellular
Soft handoff (which improves dropped call performance and voice

quality at the edges of the cell)
An air interface compatible with the IS-41 switch interface for

intersystem operations (handoff, call delivery, and roaming),
ISUP (trunk signaling, delivery of calling party number, and other
advanced services), enhanced privacy, and INAP (intelligent
network protocols)
Superior voice quality (supports 13-kbps speech coding

algorithms that can provide voice quality comparable to landline)
Higher quality RF coverage
Simplified RF engineering and planning (allows the support of

N=1 frequency reuse pattern)
Low power consumption and enhanced terminal battery life
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

1 - 5
PCS CDMA Frequency Assignments
PCS CDMA Frequency Assignments
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Frequency Assignments
Diagram
PCS transmissions occur in the 1.8-GHz to 2.0-GHz frequency range,

which has been divided into six bands, labelled from A to F. The
Lucent Technologies PCS CDMA Minicell can support customers in
all bands.
The diagram shows a call in the A-band spectrum begins with 1850.000
MHz for receiving and 1930.000 MHz for transmitting channel number
0. Likewise, the B-band spectrum begins at 1870.000 MHz for
receiving and 1950.000 MHz for transmitting. The remaining bands are
shown in the graphic.
PCS Minicell Receive
Frequency
Bands (MHz)
1850
D
B
1865
1870
E
1885
1890
1895
F
C
PCS Minicell Transmit

Frequency
Bands (MHz)
1910
1930
D
B
1945
1950
E
1965
1970
1975
F
C
1990
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 6

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
PCS CDMA Receive/Transmit Bands and

Channel Assignment
PCS CDMA Receive/Transmit Bands and Channel Assignment
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The PCS spectrum is divided into 1200 50-kHz wide channels,

numbered consecutively, in both receive and transmit frequencies. For
a given channel, the Receive Frequency is 80 MHz lower than the
Transmit Frequency.
Channel Assignment Table
Frequency up-conversion is the process by which channels in the 800MHz band are converted to the 1900-MHz band. Frequency downconversion is the process by which channels in the 1900-MHz PCS
band are converted to corresponding channels in the 800-MHz band.
The table shows the relationship between channel number and the
transmit and receive frequency ranges.
Allowed Channels
PCS Channel
Band
PCS CDMA
Channel
Numbers
Receive
Frequency
Range
(MHz)
Transmit
Frequency
Range
(MHz)
000-299
1850-1865
1930-1945
300-399
1865-1870
1945-1950
400-699
1870-1885
1950-1965
700-799
1885-1890
1965-1970
800-899
1890-1895
1970-1975
900-1199
1895-1910
1975-1990
Note that channels 0-24 and channels 1176-1199 are not allowed, and
that there are upper and lower limits for each band.
Frequency
Band
Allowed
Channels
25-275
325-375
425-675
725-775
825-875
925-1175
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

1 - 7
PCS CDMA Receive/Transmit Bands and

Channel Assignment
Frequencies for Korean
Installations
The frequency band used for the Korean market consists of 600 pairs of
radio frequencies, divided into three bands. Each band is 10-MHz wide.
K-PCS
K-PCS CDMA
Tx Frequency
Channel Block Channel Numbers Range (MHz)
Rx Frequency
Range (MHz)
Ak
0-199
1840-1850
1750-1760
Bk
200-399
1850-1860
1760-1770
Ck
400-599
1860-1870
1770-1780
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 8

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Channel Number vs. PCS Frequency Assignment
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Formula for Frequency

Assignment
Center frequency for a given channel can be computed from the

channel number, using a simple arithmetic formula.
The formula for frequency assignment is as follows:
Channel Frequency = [Channel Number] * 0.050MHz + Lower Band
Frequency. The asterisk (*) stands for the multiplication sign.
Where lower band frequency is:
Computing Center Channel

Frequency Table

Frequency Example 1

Frequency Example 2
1850 MHz for a Receive Channel
1930 MHz for a Transmit Channel.
For PCS channel number and PCS frequency assignments, refer to the
following table. The center frequency in megahertz corresponding to
any channel number (N) can be calculated as shown in the table.
Channel #
Center
Frequency
(N)
(MHz)
Minicell
Receive
1<N<1199
0.05N+1850
Minicell
Transmit
1<N<1199
0.05N+1930
For Handset transmit and Minicell receive:

Step
Value
Example
First Channel
325
Times Constant
0.05 MHz
Equals
16.25 MHz
Plus
1850.000 MHz
Equals
1866.2250 MHz
For Minicell transmit and Handset receive:
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

1 - 9
Step
Value
Example
First Channel
325
Times Constant
0.05 MHz
Equals
16.25 MHz
Plus
1930.000 MHz
Equals
1946.2250 MHz
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 10

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Call Processing Overview

System Overview
Purpose
This unit is designed to enable you to identify the components and

define the major functions of the PCS CDMA System by doing the
following:
Naming elements of a PCS CDMA architecture
Identifying the components of a PCS CDMA Minicell
Stating the functions performed by Data Links
Naming the Walsh codes assigned to specific communication

channels
Stating the role of the different codes used in CDMA

transmissions.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

1 - 11
PCS System Description
PCS System Description
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Operational Perspective of
the PCS CDMA System
Architecture
Switching Center Diagram
Operations
Network
From an operational perspective, the PCS CDMA System is centered

about a distributed architecture approach that consists of four essential
elements:
1.
PCS Switching Center (PCSC)
2.
Associated T1(or E1) network interfaces
3.
Minicell or Base Station
4.
Mobile terminal
The four components of a PCS System are shown in the following

diagram:
Lucent Technologies PCS Switching
Center (PCSC)
PCS Access
Manager
OMP
T1 or E1
SS7
Public Networks
Centralized Control Center
X.25
Base
Station
5ESS Switch
In addition to these elements, a separate centralized control center may

be employed to monitor and control system functions from one
location. The centralized control center may be staffed on a 24-hour,
7-day per week basis, and it is capable of monitoring and controlling
several service areas (different cities) simultaneously. Under these
circumstances, the MSC is normally unattended. However, the MSC is
staffed and used as a centralized control center when a separate
centralized control center is not used.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 12

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
PCS CDMA Environment for the Minicell
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Maintenance of the Minicell requires an understanding of the

components that connect the Minicell to the phone network.
PCS CDMA Environment
From a structural standpoint, the key parts of a PCS CDMA

environment are the:
PCS Switching Center
T1/E1 Network
PCS CDMA Minicell, which is the subject of this course
Receive/Transmit Antenna at the Minicell site
User mobile terminal, at the mobile user location.
Under normal conditions, the two data links between the Switch and
the Minicell are assigned the following roles:
PCS CDMA Minicell

Environment Diagram
DL0 (Data Link 0) carries call processing messages.
DL1 (Data Link 1) carries maintenance messages.
The diagram below shows the key parts of the PCS CDMA system:
PCSC
OMP
Rake Receiver
PCS ACCESS
MANAGER
Interference
GPS
CSN
ECP
IMS
Rake Receiver
Soft
Hand-Off
CNI
5ESS-2000 DCS
5E10
AM
DL0
DL1
CDMA minicell Site

RCC CSC
CM
Public
Switched
Telephone
Network
NCT
SM
PSU2
P
H
A
P
H
V
T1/E1
Network
F
R
P
H
DLTU2 ECSU
RFTG
SCT
DFI
C
C
C
TSI
Pilot Channel
Sync Channel
Paging Channel
CE
CE
A
C
U
B
C
R
C
T
U
DLTU2
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

1 - 13
Acronyms
The following table lists some of the acronyms used in a PCS CDMA
environment.
ACU
Analog Conversion Unit
FRPH Frame Relay Protocol Handler
AM
Administrative Module
GPS
Global Positioning System
BCR
Baseband Combiner Radio
IMS
Interprocessor Message Switch
CCC
CDMA Cluster Controller
NCT
Network Communication Trunk
CE
Channel Element
OMP
Operations and Management Platform
CM
Communication Module
PCSC PCS Switching Center
CNI
Common Network Interface
PHA
Protocol Handler ATM (Asynchronous

Transfer Mode)
CSC
Cell Site Controller
PHV
Protocol Handler Voice
CSN
Cell Site Node
PSU2
Packet Switching Unit Version 2
CTU
CDMA Transmit Unit
RCC
Radio Control Complex
DFI
Digital Facility Interface
RFTG Reference Frequency and Timing

Generator
DLTU2 Digital Line Trunk Unit

Version 2
SCT
Synchronized Clock and Tone
ECP
Executive Cellular Processor
SM
Switch Module
ECSU
Echo Cancelling Unit
TSI
Time Slot Interchange
PCSC
The PCSC is equipped with switching and interface equipment and

provides all the cellular network switching required to process calls to
and from the cellular subscriber. The PCSC also provides an interface
into the PSTN. Calls from and to the standard telephone network and
calls from cellular subscriber to cellular subscriber pass through the
PCSC.
Base Station
The base station consists of a primary radio cabinet, up to two optional

growth cabinets (for adding up to two additional carriers for 3-sector
applications), a power cabinet, and an optional battery cabinet or an
optional DC generator cabinet. The system can be installed indoors or
outdoors.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 14

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Network Interfaces
Transmit/Receive Antenna
The T1 network is a digital transmission system using time division

multiplexing to carry 24 DS0 channels. A DS0 channel is a digital
signal of up to 64-kbps for a total on the T1 of 1.544-Mbps.
One transmit and two receive antennas are provided for each face of the
cell site when using simplex filters. For example, on a three sector cell
site there would be 6 receive antennas and 3 transmit antennas.
For duplex filters there are 2 antennas for the Tx and 2 Rxs. The Tx
shares an antenna with one of the Rx filters.
Mobile Terminals
Two categories of units are used by the cellular subscriber: vehiclemounted and transportable units (Class I) and hand-held units (Class
III). A variety of styles and options are available in each category;
however, the basic functional operations of the vehicle-mounted units
and the hand-held units are identical. The subscribers unit contains a
microprocessor and is continually performing operations and
communicating with the cell site, even when not being used by the
subscriber. The subscribers unit performs these functions so that it can
be ready to receive an incoming call or make a call.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

1 - 15
Key Parts: PCS Switching Center (PCSC)
Key Parts: PCS Switching Center (PCSC)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PCSC Components
PCSC Diagram
A PCSC has three components:
An Operation and Maintenance Platform (OMP), which provides

a computer platform dedicated to the support of all operation,
administration, and maintenance activities, including the support
of remote data communication with the Minicell site
A PCS Access Manager, which performs the mobility

management functions between base station and the switch
The 5ESS-2000 Switch Platform, which provides the network

connectivity with other PCS Switching Centers, PSTN, and local
carriers.
The diagram below provides a view ofPCSC

the switching center.
PCS ACCESS
MANAGER
OMP
ECP
SS7 Links
IMS
CSN
CNI
5E10
AM
CM
5ESS-2000 DCS
NCT
SM
PSU2
Soft Handoff
Public
Switched
Telephone
Network
P
H
A
P
H
V
F
R
P
H
TSI
DLTU2
ECSU
DLTU2
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 16

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Key Parts: PCS Access Manager
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PCS Access Manager

Components
The Access Manager is composed of the Executive Cellular Processor

(ECP).
The ECP controls the operation of the AUTOPLEX System 1000.
The ECP is responsible for mobility management, call processing,
system maintenance, technician interface, and system integrity. In
particular, the ECP maintains the database and the translation tables
that contain the operating parameters of the cells connected to the
switch.
Access Manager Diagram
The diagram below shows the key parts of the PCS Access Manager:
PCSC
OMP
PCS ACCESS
MANAGER
ECP
CSN
IMS
SS7 Links
Access Manager
Key Features
The PCS Access Manager provides Wireless terminal mobility

management, including:
Home Location Register/Visitor Location Register (HLR/VLR)

paging
Autonomous registrations
Subscriber management
Roaming support
Intelligent Network support
Authentication and enciphering.
The Access Manager also supports stand-alone HLR capabilities.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

1 - 17
Access Manager
Capabilities
The PCS Access Manager supports:
The expected traffic loads (plus sparing) of the various call types
up to the engineered capacity of the platform. Depending on these
system traffic loads, some number of Wireless Call Processing
Servers will be equipped (where each Call Processing Server
handles a specific engineered capacity)
The desired number of subscriber records (HLR). The HLR

supports incremental growth up to the platform capacity.
Each Access Manager is sized to support the desired number of PCS

Base Stations.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 18

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Key Parts: 5ESS--2000 Switching Platform
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5ESS-2000 Switching
Platform Key Features
5ESS Overview Diagram
The following list describes the key features of the 5ESS-2000

Switching Platform:
Provides the PCS switching function between PCS Base Stations

and various networks
Supports both wireless and wired applications simultaneously
Is a proven market leader
Provides multiple applications on the same switch
Provides increased switching capacity
Provides highest reliability
Co-exists with existing module or reduced footprint 5ESS

equipment.
The diagram below shows the main components of the 5ESS-2000

Switching Platform.
CNI
Soft
Hand-Off
5ESS-2000 DCS
5E10
AM
DL0
DL1
CM
NCT
SM
PSU2
Public
Switched
Telephone
Network
P
H
A
F
R
P
H
To PCS CDMA Minicell

To PCS CDMA Minicell
TSI
DLTU2
Functions
P
H
V
ECSU
DLTU2
The PCS Switch is based on the 5ESS-2000 switch. The PCS switching
function manages the connectivity between the PCS Base Stations and
the various networks (Local Exchange Carrier (LEC), Inter-Exchange
Carrier (IEC), Private, Signaling, Intelligent Networks, etc.).
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

1 - 19
The 5ESS-2000 switch is engineered to support the expected traffic

loads, up to the engineered capacity of the platform. Depending on
these traffic loads, a certain number of traffic-handler channels and
network trunks will be equipped.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 20

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
CDMA Packet Pipe Trunk Group
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Packet Pipe Sizes
All communications are carried by the T1/E1 line. Voice

communications between the switch and a minicell are carried by
packet pipes.
Packet pipes are the result of multiplexing 64-kB wide or 56-kB wide
bandwidths (DSOs) on a T1 span, going from the Digital Cellular
Switch (DCS) to the minicell site.
The number of DSOs (packet pipe size) that can be accommodated in a
packet pipe depends on RF Engineering considerations (processing
gain, voice activity, intersector interference, required service level),
and on the minicell configuration. The packet pipe size for a given
minicell is defined in the minicell translation tables maintained by the
ECP. Changes in minicell configuration may require changes in the
Packet Pipe size.
In ECP 12, the packet pipe size is from two DS0s to eight DS0s.
In ECP 13, the packet pipe size is increased from eight DS0 to 16
DS0s. The packet pipe size can then be of variable length from two
DS0s to 16 DS0s. This enhancement of packet pipe size further
provides the flexibility and efficiency of the usage of the T1 line.
Packet Pipe Trunk Group
Packet Pipe Definition and

Allocation
In the minicell translation table, each Packet Pipe is assigned a Packet

Pipe Trunk Group Member (PPTM) number. This number corresponds
to the number assigned to a circuit CDMA Cluster Controller (CCC) in
the Minicell frame that provides the interface to the Minicell Time
Division Multiplex (TDM) bus. Therefore, there is a one-to-one
mapping between PPTM number and CCC number. When a PPT M of
a given number is equipped, it is associated with the CCC with the
same number at the Minicell site.
Packet pipes are defined in the minicell translation table and must be
contained within the same T1 line. Packet pipes do not need to be
assigned to contiguous DSOs.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

1 - 21
Packet Pipe Diagram
The diagram below shows the data path in the Switch and Minicell.
Packet Pipes originate at the Frame Relay Protocol Handler (FRPH)
and terminate at a CDMA Cluster Controller.
Switch Module(s)
PSU2
DLTU2
DFI-2
ECSU
TSI
PHV
FRPH
CE
DLTU2
DFI
DFI
CCC
CE
PSTN
T1 Fac.
(PCM)
CE
Nailed-up Packet Pipes

(20ms packets)
Packet Pipe Creation
The definition of the Packet Pipe is done through the PPTG (Packet
Pipe Trunk Group) form of the AUTOPLEX RC/V system.
A further discussion on Packet Pipes is provided in Unit 9.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 22

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Packet Pipe Connection -- Minicell Interface
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The Packet Pipes physical interface with the Minicell is through the
Digital Facilities Interface (DFI) that provides serial-to-parallel and
parallel-to-serial data conversion between the T1 lines and the TDM
buses internal to the Minicell. The Packet Pipe terminates at the CDMA
Cluster Controller.
Cluster Controller
The CDMA Cluster Controller passes the signals to Channel Elements

(CEs) contained in the CCU.
Channel Elements
A CE contains the circuitry necessary to support a full duplex CDMA

channel, i.e., to perform forward link and reverse link CDMA
spread-spectrum processing. Each CE supports one CDMA channel. A
CE is capable of performing the modulation/demodulation of a CDMA
channel, or in some cases, more than one channel.
Cluster
A Cluster is a logically associated group of CEs that can be controlled

by a single CCC. All of the conversations on the CEs within a Cluster
are backhauled to the PCSC through the same Packet Pipe.
Subcell
A Subcell is a group of interconnected Clusters that allow all the CE

within the Subcell to act as share resources for the sectors.
Minicell Interface Diagram
The diagram below shows the Packet Pipe connection to the Minicell.
PCS CDMA Minicell Site

CE
1
Nailed-up
Packet Pipe
DFI
CCC
CE
24
CE
Role of the Channel

Element
Each CE can be assigned to perform one or more of the following

functions:
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

1 - 23
Pilot Channel functions, which enables the CDMA mobile to

establish communication with the Minicell
Sync Channel functions, used by the mobile to acquire initial time

synchronization
Access Channel, reverse of the Paging Channel, is used to receive

various types of messages from the mobile
Paging Channel functions, used by the Minicell to transmit system

overhead information to the mobile
Traffic (User) Channel, which carries voice communication
Several functions can be combined into a single CE.

TCU and ECU
The PCS CDMA Minicell can presently support two different CUs, the
Thirteen Kilobit Channel Unit (TCU) and the Enhanced Channel Unit
(ECU).
The Packet Pipe size (i.e., the number of 64-kB DSOs allocated to a
Packet Pipe) is, at most, four for CCCs equipped with TCU Channel
Elements; more than four DSOs will be unused, unless channel pooling
is enabled. CCCs equipped with ECUs may be configured for larger
size Packet Pipes, up to a maximum of 16 DSOs on the same T1 line.
RF Engineering considerations determine that maximum.
Line Support
Current software supports only one T1/E1 line interface port.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 24

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Key Parts: The Minicell Site
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The PCS CDMA Minicell

Site
Minicell Diagram
The PCS CDMA Minicell Site contains a PCS CDMA Minicell that is
designed to optimize performance for voice and data services at the
1.8-GHz to 2.0-GHz range. The Minicell maintains maximum
commonality with 800-MHz standards for CDMA (that is, IS-95 and its
extensions for PCS).
The diagram below represents the key components in a Minicell
receive or transmit path.
RCC
RFTG
SCT
CSC
CDMA Minicell Site

19.6608 MHz
DFI
C
C
C
CE
CE
A
C
U
B
C
R
C
T
U
Important! The acronyms RCC and CSC represent the same

piece of equipment.
Advantages of PCS CDMA
Minicells
The PCS CDMA Minicell offers the following advantages:
Offers high capacity - ten times the capacity of analog cellular
Has larger Minicell radii - three to four times that of GSM
Uses multipath to enhance signal strength and to combat fading
Offers good voice quality (i.e., lower frame error rates with
reduced fading, multiple base station communication, soft
handoffs, and no recognizable noise or cross talk)
Imposes lower power requirements for mobiles providing longer

battery life for handheld units
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

1 - 25
Minicell Translation Forms
About Vocoders
Provides a degree of built-in privacy
All configuration and operating parameters relative to a given Minicell

are stored in data tables called Translation Forms. These forms are
maintained in the PCSC (Access Manager) computer. With proper
authorization, these forms can be updated via a laptop and a modem
connection, therefore enabling changes in a Minicell configuration
from a remote location.
Current vocoders do not support data transmission, even if the cell
design is optimized for that mode of operation.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 26

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
This feature provides Lucent customers with a more efficient

utilization of T1/E1 transport facilities. This is also called Fractional T1 facilities.
Fractional T1 Example
Diagram
The figure below illustrates an example of daisy chaining three cells

solely on the downstream path from the MSC to the cell sites. The
analogous upstream path is not depicted in the picture.
Cell Site 1
1-7
Full T1
CDMA
Radio
CSU
Cell Site 2
1-7
1-8 9-16 17-24
CSU
CDMA
Radio
Cell Site 3
1-8 9-16 17-24
1-7
CSU
CDMA
Radio
1-8 9-16 17-24
Detailed Operation
Description
In PCS networks, every Cell is connected to the DCS via T1/E1

transport, even if a fraction of the T1/E1 facility is in use. This feature
provides a mechanism for customers to drop/insert any number of
DS0s to/from multiple cells daisy chained together via T1/E1 facilities.
This example describes one T1 line daisy chained across three cell
sites.
1.
A full T1 comes into the first CSU from the MSC. This CSU reads
the first eight DS0s from the incoming T1 (i.e., DS1-1 through 8)
and writes them to the first eight DS0s of the T1 going to Base
Station 1. The 8th line is the POTS line.
The remaining DS0s are written to the T1 going to the second
CSU. In this example they occupy the last 16 DS0s (i.e. DS1-9
through 24).
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

1 - 27
2.
At the second CSU we have a similar situation. This CSU reads

the second eight DS0s from the incoming T1 (i.e., DS1-9 through
16) and writes them to the first eight DS0s of the T1 going to Base
Station 2. The remaining DS0s are written to the T1 going to the
third CSU. In this example they occupy the last eight DS0s (i.e.
DS1-17 through 24)
3.
At the third CSU we again have a similar situation. This CSU

reads the last eight DS0s from the incoming T1 (i.e., DS1-17
through 24) and writes them to the first eight DS0s of the T1 going
to Base Station 3. This is the last cell in the chain.
POTS Line
The POTS sub-feature work as follows. When the customer would like
to use the POTS line, they will provision a particular DSO for that
purpose. This DS0 will be dedicated as a POTS line until it is
deprovisioned by an operator.
Administrative Port
The remotely accessible administrative port sub-feature works in a

fashion similar to the POTS line. When a technician wishes to access
the port locally, they only need to connect their laptop to the RS-232
port. When a technician wishes to access the port remotely, an operator
may need to provision a particular DS0 for that purpose.
Data Lines
Each cell site needs two DS0s allocated for DL1 and DL0. The CSU
will translate the packet to the expected position of DS0 13 and 24. For
simplicity the example shows each eight DSOs allocated to the next
cell site. Actual use of this feature will likely be different.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 28

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
CDMA Implementation
CDMA Implementation
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
T1/E1 Lines
Transmit
Lucent Technologies PCS CDMA Minicell implementation is

compliant with the IS-95 Standard. Transmit and Receive functions are
performed in hardware.
Current software supports only one T1/E1 line interface port.
On the Transmit Path:
.......................................................................................................................................
The PCSC has speech handling circuitry to encode land-originated

communications. Once encoded, communications destined to a given
Minicell are bundled into Packet Pipes assigned to that Minicell and sent
to the Minicell site over a T1 line.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The Minicell site unbundles the Packet Pipes, provides channel

encoding and bit interleaving to reduce communication errors, provides
long code encryption, Walsh function modulation, signal spreading, and
carrier modulation.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Receive
Bit interleaving is used to reduce the effects of RF fading and large

interference bursts.
On the Receive Path:
.......................................................................................................................................
The Minicell site provides carrier demodulation, signal despreading, deencryption, Walsh function demodulation, deinterleaving, channel
decoding, and sends the resulting signal to the PCSC in a Packet Pipe
over a T1 line.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The PCSC converts the received signal into a voice communication and
sends it over the PSTN.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

1 - 29
CDMA Implementation
CDMA Encoding Process

Diagram
The following diagram shows the signal encoding that occurs in the
Minicell.
10
10
99
88
77
66
55
44
33
22
CTU
minicell Site
Carrier Modulation
Carrier Demodulation
11
11
Signal Despreading
12
12
Baseband Combiner & Radio

PN Offset
Bus Interface Unit
Signal Spreading,
Walsh function
Modulation
64 bit Orthogonal
Symbol Demodulation
13
13
CCU
Encryption: Long
Code Scrambling
CDMA Channel Element
Bit Interleaving
Channel Coding
T1/E1
T1/E1
Packet Pipe in
DS1
BBA
CRC
Frame Relay
Bit Deinterleaving
15
15
16
16
MSC
Speech Handler: Variable Low Bit

Rate Speech Coding
11
14
14
Channel Decoding
Packet Pipe
Encoding
Decryption: Long Code

Unscrambling
Decoding
17
17
PSTN
18
CL3805 - L1V7.0
CDMA Encoding Process
tT h l i
i t
The call process steps are as follows:

.......................................................................................................................................
PSTN: Phone call originates

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Encode the digitized signal

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Channel coding: (see page 1-32) duplicate the signal

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Bit Interleaving: rearrange the bits to limit burst errors

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Encryption, long code scrambling: apply the users long code to provide
secure transmission (see page 1-32)
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Signal spreading, Walsh function modulation (see page 1-32)
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 30

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
CDMA Implementation
...........................................................................................................................................................................
PN offset (see page 1-32)

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Carrier modulation: prepare the encoded signal for transmission

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Transmit to mobile terminal: the handset decodes the signal and encodes
the mobile users voice
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
Mobile phone responds: Receive signal from mobile terminal

...........................................................................................................................................................................
11
Carrier demodulation
...........................................................................................................................................................................
12
Signal despreading (see page 1-32)

...........................................................................................................................................................................
13
64 bit orthogonal symbol demodulation

...........................................................................................................................................................................
14
Decryption, long code unscrambling (see page 1-32)

...........................................................................................................................................................................
15
Bit deinterleaving
...........................................................................................................................................................................
16
Channel decoding
...........................................................................................................................................................................
17
Decoding: convert voice data from vocoder to 64-kB digitized data

...........................................................................................................................................................................
18
PSTN: the send and return sides of a call are completed
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

1 - 31
CDMA Channel Element Encoding
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The Channel Elements encode the signal three ways to maintain

privacy and identify the call to the receiver.
Encoding the Transmit

Signal
The encoding process is as follows:

.......................................................................................................................................
The forward traffic is encoded with the Long Mask code, and provided
through multiplexing with a power control bit that will be used by the
mobile to maintain its receive/transmit level.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The Walsh function is then applied to ensure the orthogonality of the

channel against the remaining channels.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The encoded signal is then assigned codes that are used to identify the
base station and sector to the mobile.
Channel Element Encoding

Diagram
The diagram below shows the CDMA channel element encoding:

I Channel Pilot PN
Sequence 1.2288 Mbps
cos
9.6 kbps
or 14.4 kbps
19.2 kbps
Speech
Processor
Power Control
Bits (800 bps)
Block
Interleaver
Walsh Function
I
Baseband
Filter
MUX
s(t)
Q
Baseband
Filter
19.2 kbps
Long Code
Mask for
User m
Long Code
Generator
Decimator
1/64
1.2288 Mbps
sin
Q Channel Pilot PN
Sequence 1.2288 Mbps
Legend:
= summed
Power Control
The Power control bit is used during call processing to maintain the
relative power of each individual active traffic channel, and to power it
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 32

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
up or down to maintain acceptable Frame Error Rate (FER)

measurements by the mobile on the channel.
Units Used
These relative power settings are defined in the Minicell translation

tables, and expressed in terms of digital gain units.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

1 - 33
Codes Used in a CDMA Transmission
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The codes used in a CDMA transmission are assigned specific

functions.
Long Code
The Long Code is used to encrypt the content of the transmitted signal,
and thus ensures privacy.
Pilot Channel PN Code
This code, transmitted from the base station to the mobile, informs the
mobile which antenna face and base station the mobile is
communicating with.
Walsh Function
This function provides orthogonal encoding.

Orthogonal encoding is characterized by the following properties when
they are combined (multiplexed):
If they were encoded with the same code, the result is

acknowledged by the receiving system.
If they were encoded with different codes, the result is ignored by

the receiving system.
Walsh codes are orthogonal mathematical codes. As such, if two

Walsh codes are correlated, the result is intelligible only if these two
codes are the same. As a result, when a Walsh-encoded signal is
received by a PCS CDMA-capable mobile terminal it appears as
random noise to that terminal, unless that terminal uses the same code
as the one encoding the incoming signal.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 34

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
CDMA Codes Table
Code Name
Long code mask
Walsh function
Pilot channel PN
code (short code)
Result of CDMA Encoding
This table provides a summary of the various CDMA coding functions.

Description
AArandom,
random,42-bit
42-bitbinary
binarynumber,
number,
providing
16
trillion
providing 16 trillioncombinations
combinationsofof0s
0s
and
and1s.
1s.
AA64-bit
64-bitorthogonal
orthogonalcode.
code.Walsh
Walshfunctions
functions
are
used
to
provide
orthogonal
are used to provide orthogonal
channelization
channelizationamong
amongall
allcode
codeCDMA
CDMA
forward
channels
(pilot,
paging,
forward channels (pilot, paging,sync,
sync,and
and
traffic).
traffic).
AA15
15bit
bitcode
codewith
with512
512combinations
combinationsthat
that
isisunique
to
minicell
face
unique to minicell face(sectorized
(sectorizedor
or
omni).
omni).
Function
Voice privacy
Channel Formation,
0 - 63
Time Offset
The illustration below depicts different voice communications, mixed

within a 1.2288-MHz bandwidth.
12
39
41 1 42
29 0
2
17 28
10
6 23
25 51 34
43
16 55 24
40
48
4
37
15
35 13
3 58 20 46
21 7 59
39
53
14 43
41
49
45
22
30
11
44 5
31
50
56
18
54
8
9 33 38
19
32
60
47
36
57
62
63 26
52
27
40
1.2288 MHz CDMA Channel

As many as 61 Simultaneous users per 1.2288 MHz channel
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

1 - 35
Display of Walsh Codes
Display of Walsh Codes
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
PCS CDMA transmissions require two types of channels:
Supervision channels (Pilot, Paging, Sync)
Traffic (Voice) channels
PCS CDMA Channels
When the CDMA signal is monitored on a test set running in the code
domain mode, each channel is represented by a separate bar
corresponding to its assigned Walsh code.
Walsh Code Display

Diagram
On the display, the supervision channels will have a higher power level
than the voice channels. The Pilot channel (Walsh code 0) is always the
first on the left of the display.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 36

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Details of Walsh Codes Display
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Total transmit power is distributed among the different Walsh codes.

Signal strengths for the CDMA channels can be displayed with relative
powers shown. The supervision channels are set to stronger values.
The Pilot Channel
The pilot channel (Walsh code 0) is transmitted at all times by the

Minicell site on each active carrier. The following actions take place:
The CDMA mobile constantly monitors the pilot channel and

measures the signal strength of the pilot signal.
Prior to origination, the mobile monitors the pilot channel and

estimates the power level to use for origination (open-loop power
control).
The mobile unit also assists the Minicell site in the handoff
process by measuring and reporting the strengths of the received
pilot signals.
Because the power of the pilot channel determines the initial power of
the mobiles transmitting origination, page response, or autonomous
registration messages, the mobile units relative power level is
adjustable. Its maximum value is 1.2W (or 108 Digital Gain Units
(DGUs) representing 15% of the 8W total power when using a normal
CTU.
The Sync Channel
The sync channel is used by mobile units operating within the coverage
area of the Minicell site to acquire initial time synchronization. The
sync channel is always spread with Walsh function 32, transmits at
1200 bps, and its function is assigned to the same CE as the pilot for the
Minicell site or face.
Its nominal strength is 0.12 W (34DGUs) or 1.5% of total power.
Paging Channels
Paging channels are used by the Minicell site to transmit system

overhead information and mobile-specific information (such as pages)
to the mobiles, as follows:
Paging channel 1 is the primary paging channel
The paging channel is divided into 2048 80-ms timeslots
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

1 - 37
Mobiles may monitor all slots, referred to as nonslotted mode.

Mobiles may also monitor certain slots, referred to as slotted
mode. The slotted mode is required for optional mobile features
such as sleep mode.
Paging channels:
Are spread with Walsh functions 1 through 7
Transmit data at either 9600 or 4800 kbps
Are assigned to specific CEs at the Minicell or face
Because there may be one or as many as seven paging channels from

Minicell to Minicell, an unused paging channel (Walsh code) may be
used randomly by the Minicell to handle voice traffic. Strength of
Paging Channel is 0.44 W (64DGUs), or 5.5% of a total 8W signal.
Access Channel
The access channel is used to receive various types of messages from

the mobiles, such as call origination requests, autonomous
registrations, and page responses. Functionally, it is the reverse of the
paging channel. Physically, it is on the receive side of the CE used for
the pilot and sync channels.
Traffic Channels
The rest of the CDMA Walsh codes (or 78%) will be used to carry
voice traffic.
Walsh Code Relative Power

Levels Diagram
The diagram below provides a comparison of the power levels

allocated to the Walsh codes shown as channels on a meter display.
Pilot (W0)
Paging (W1-7)
Sync (W32)
Voice Traffic
Voice Traffic
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 38

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
The CDMA Interference
The CDMA Interference
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
CDMA is based on the use of a spread-spectrum form of modulation to

encode a signal for its transmission and retrieval.
Noise Sources
In spread-spectrum technology, radio signals are spread across a single

1.23-MHz wide frequency band. Each subscriber is assigned PN
(pseudorandom noise) codes. Signals that match the PN codes are
decoded and processed. Signals that do not contain the code matches
are treated as noise and ignored.
The predominant interference to CDMA users are other CDMA users.
A CDMA signal experiences high levels of interference dominated by
the coded signals of other CDMA users. This takes two forms:
interference from other users in the same Minicell, and interference
from adjacent cells. The total interference also includes background
noise and other spurious signals.
Signal Processing:
Transmit
CDMA starts with an encoded narrowband signal, shown at the full

data rate of 9600 bps. This is spread with the use of the PN codes to a
bandwidth of 1.23 MHz.
Signal Processing: Receive
When the signal is received, it is filtered and processed to recover the

desired signal. This processing is done by a correlator that eliminates
interference sources because they are uncorrelated with the desired
signal. By using this method, a large number of CDMA calls may
occupy the same frequency spectrum simultaneously.
Frame Error Rate
The number of transmission errors, measured in terms of Frame Error

Rate (FER), increases with the number of calls. To overcome this
problem, both the Minicell site and mobile can increase power until
neither the mobile nor the Minicell site can power up further to
decrease FER to an acceptable amount. This event gives a soft limit
of calls of a particular Minicell, and depends on:
Noise Source Diagram
The noise floor - naturally occurring and man-made interference
Interference from calls on this Minicell
Interference from calls on other cells
The diagram below displays the four sources of interference to a

CDMA call. This includes the noise of other CDMA calls.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

1 - 39
Diversity and CDMA
1.23 MHz
1.23 MHz
10 KHz
9.6 Kbps Data
TX
RX
Correlator
Digital
Filter
Encoding &
Inter-leaving
PN Source
10 KHz
Filter
1.2288 Mbps
Signal Processing
1.25 MHz
Baseband
Filter
1.25 MHz
Baseband
Filter
Data
De-interleave
& Decode
PN Source
Signal Processing
Carrier
Carrier
Background
Noise
External
Interference
Other minicell
Interference
Other User
Interference
Diversity and CDMA
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Diversity
Diversity is a method of radio transmission and/or reception, which

counteracts the effects of fading by combining several signals, all
having the same information.
The three types of diversity that impact PCS CDMA are:
Diversity Diagram
Time
Path
Frequency.
The diagram below shows the various sources of echoes and other
multipath signals that can be utilized to improve signal quality.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 40

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diversity and CDMA
Rake Receiver
Interference
Interference
Rake Receiver Interference
MSC
Lucent Technologies
Rake Receivers
A rake receiver significantly improves reception reliability, particularly

in areas where most signals are weak.
A rake receiver contains multiple tuning fingers, which are
continuously trying to lock into the three strongest signals. Additional
circuitry is used to correlate signals, and search for alternate multipaths
and neighboring base station signals.
Rake receivers:
Enable soft handoffs
Provide significant gain
Protect against fading
Enable diversity
The base station rake receiver has four fingers that can access multiple
antennas, whereas the handset rake receiver has one antenna with three
elements.
Time Delay
With time delay, each digital bit of information in the data packet that
is received by the cell site over the Packet Pipe is duplicated (9.6 kbps
becomes 19.2 kbps). The position of each new bit in the data stream is
rearranged in relation to the original bit. Thus, a loss of consecutive bits
during transmission will have little or no effect on the entire data
message. This is because their near duplicates are stored elsewhere in
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

1 - 41
Diversity and CDMA
the data stream and can be used to recreate the data. This common time
delay method is used to improve digital transmission of data packets.
Path Delay
In multipath data streams, identical data is received from more than one
path. It is received several microseconds apart due to the varying
lengths of the paths. Because the CDMA mobile has a rake receiver
with three receiver elements, as many as three multipath data streams
may be received independently. The mobile selects the best (lowest
FER (frame error rate)) packet of voice data in 20-ms frames from the
available signal source.
Frequency Delay
Frequency changes are inherent in spread-spectrum systems due to

fading. Fading is caused by, and is a function of, the time delays in the
alternate multipaths. A fade appears as a notch filter that moves across
a band. As the user moves, the frequency of the notch changes. The
width of the notch is on the order of one over the difference in arrival
time of two signals. For a 1-ms delay, the notch is approximately 1MHz wide. The CDMA system uses a 1.23-MHz bandwidth. So only
those delays in time of less than 1 microsecond, actually cause the
signal to experience a deep fade.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 42

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
CDMA Traffic Channels
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Signal Transmission
Primary Traffic Data and

Signaling Data
CDMA traffic channels are used to transmit user and signaling

information between the Minicell site and the mobile unit during a call.
Transmission occurs in the following ways:
CDMA traffic channels transmit at variable data rates of 9600,

4800, 2400, and 1200 bps.
The rate is based on the activity of the speech sample.
Traffic channels transmit data packets containing 20 ms of speech

samples.
All data rates include a frame quality indicator as part of the 20ms packet, which is also called a frame.
Traffic channels may simultaneously handle voice and signaling data,

such as powerup/powerdown commands.
When voice data is present, signaling data is transmitted via dim

and burst, where both primary traffic and signaling data share the
same frame.
When primary data is not present, signaling data is transmitted via

blank and burst, where signaling data uses the entire frame.
Traffic channels are assigned to unique CEs in the Minicell site or face.
Number of Traffic Channels
per Minicell Site
The maximum number of traffic channels per Minicell site is

determined by the elements installed in the PCS CDMA Minicell
primary frame, and by engineering (Packet Pipes and RF)
considerations.
Traffic channels are randomly assigned by call processing to

Walsh functions 8 through 63 (but not 32) during a call. This
yields 55 possible Walsh codes.
In addition, Walsh functions for unused paging channels may also

be selected during call processing. This means that as many as six
additional Walsh codes may be selected during call processing, for
a combined total of 61 possible Walsh codes that may be used for
traffic channels.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

1 - 43
Because each additional traffic channel creates additional

interference for each established call, the number of simultaneous
traffic channels is less than the theoretical value of 61.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 - 44

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
PCS CDMA Minicell Physical

Description
Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Objectives
This unit provides the cell site technician with the ability to locate
Minicell components that will need to be worked on as part of the
maintenance process.
The objectives to be achieved are as follows:
1.
Locate Components
This unit is designed to enable cell technicians to locate the
physical components in a Minicell so that they can maintain and/
or perform maintenance actions on them.
2.
Identify Functions
Another objective is to enable cell technicians to identify the role
of the different components that they have located.
3.
List Components in the Data and RF Paths

The objective here is to enable cell technicians to follow the data
and RF path, in order to perform troubleshooting procedures.
About the Signal Path
A PCS CDMA Minicell provides connectivity between the land-based

telephone network and wireless terminals, and between wireless
terminals that are within the wireless coverage area. The physical
description of Minicell components will enable the Cell Site technician
to perform necessary maintenance tasks. Receive and Transmit paths
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 1
are part of the Minicell overall signal path that also includes signaling
and control paths.
Contents

2-4
CDMA Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-5
Concepts of the PCS CDMA Minicell Base Station
2-6
The PCS CDMA Minicell Base Station - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-7
Primary Cabinet Layout and Signal Flows
Primary Radio Cabinet Version 2 (Front) - - - - - - - - Primary Radio Cabinet Version 2 (Back) - - - - - - - - Primary Radio Cabinet Version 2 Layout Detail - - - - Configuration Changes in PCS CDMA Minicell Version 4.
Cabinet Technical Specifications (Standard Minicell) - - PCS CDMA Minicell Signal Flows - - - - - - - - - - PCS CDMA Minicell Receive Data Path - - - - - - - - PCS CDMA Minicell Transmit Path - - - - - - - - - - -
Primary Cabinet Shelf Descriptions

CDMA Radio Test Unit - - - - - - - - - CDMA Radio Test Unit Module - - - - - Radio Test Unit Switch Panel (RSP) - - - Radio Switch Panel Connections - - - - - Channel Service Unit (Optional) - - - - - Reference Frequency and Timing Generator
Radio Control Complex Shelf - - - - - - Radio Control Complex Shelf Description CDMA Transmit Unit (CTU) Shelf - - - CTU Assembly Description - - - - - - - Front Filter Assembly - - - - - - - - - - Filter Assembly--Simplex Filters - - - - - CDMA Radio Complex (CRC) Shelves - CRC Shelf Details - - - - - - - - - - - - CRC Shelf Descriptions - - - - - - - - - Digital Facilities Interface Board - - - - - Frame Pedestal - - - - - - - - - - - - - Circuit Breaker Panel - - - - - - - - - - Alarm Interface Module - - - - - - - - - Alarm Interface Panel -- User Alarm Board -
2-22
- 2-23
- 2-25
- 2-27
- 2-28
- 2-30
- 2-32
- 2-34
- 2-35
- 2-37
- 2-39
- 2-40
- 2-42
- 2-43
- 2-45
- 2-47
- 2-49
- 2-50
- 2-51
- 2-53
- 2-55
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-15
2-16
2-18
2-20
Side and Rear Panel Descriptions

2-56
Side Panel (Version 2 Only) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-57
Rear Interface Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-58
Heat Exchanger - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-60
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 2

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Other Base Station Cabinets

Special Omni - - - - - - - - - - - - - Growth Cabinets - - - - - - - - - - - - Growth I Cabinet Layout - - - - - - - Growth II Cabinet Layout - - - - - - - Growth III Cabinet Layout - - - - - - - Rack-Mounted Growth - - - - - - - - - Range Extension Option - - - - - - - - Minicell Primary Power Cabinet (Optional)
Minicell Power Cabinet Layout - - - - - Backup Battery Cabinet (Optional) - - - -
2-62
- 2-63
- 2-64
- 2-65
- 2-66
- 2-67
- 2-69
- 2-74
- 2-76
- 2-79
- 2-80
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 3
PCS CDMA Minicell Physical

Description
Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
The PCS CDMA Minicell is the physical interface between the T1 line
from the 5ESS-2000 system and the wireless system antenna.
Equipment designed for a base station includes radio and power
cabinets.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 4

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
CDMA Overview
CDMA Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
A PCS CDMA Minicell provides connectivity between the switch and

wireless terminals. The switch is connected to a caller on the landbased telephone network or another wireless terminal that is within the
wireless coverage area of the switch.
Features
The Minicell features are as follows:
Transmit Configurations
Omni, 2-sector, or 3-sector operation in a single cabinet
Environmentally-hardened cabinets
Can be installed outdoors on rooftop or concrete slab
Sub-rate multiplexing (allows multiple packet pipes to occupy the

same facility) on base station-to-switch links
Works with existing AUTOPLEX System 1000 equipment
CDMA technology.
The Minicell supports a maximum of three transmit antennas and six

receive antennas (including diversity receive) per carrier. The
following configurations are supported:
Omni antenna with one CDMA carrier
3-sector directional antennas with one CDMA carrier
Omni and 3-sector directional antennas with up to three CDMA

carriers (requires growth cabinets).
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 5
Concepts of the PCS CDMA Minicell Base

Station
Concepts of the PCS CDMA Minicell Base Station
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The PCS CDMA Minicell Base Station is the physical interface

between the T1 line from the 5ESS-2000 System and a wireless mobile.
Because CDMA requires synchronization between all the cells in the
network, each cell receives timing signals from GPS satellites using a
GPS antenna.
Acronyms
CDMA Code Division Multiple Access

GPS Global Positioning System
PCS Personal Communications Services
TDM Time Division Multiplex
T-Smart Channel Service Unit
DFI Digital Facilities Interface
CDMA Minicell
Connections Diagram
The diagram below shows the external connections to a PCS CDMA

Minicell.
GPS Antenna
T1/E1 from
5ESS-2000
Growth
Cabinets
(Optional)
Receive (RF)
Transmit (RF)
Timing Ref.
T-Smart-to-DFI
Alarms
TDM Bus
l
l
l
PCS
CDMA
Minicell
Power and Alarms
Power
Cabinet
.0
Battery
Backup
Power
Cabinet
(Optional)
Commercial
Power (220 VAC)
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 6

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
The PCS CDMA Minicell Base Station
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
A PCS CDMA Base Station contains the PCS CDMA Minicell and the
Receive/Transmit Antenna. The Minicell itself is composed, at a
minimum, of a Primary Radio Cabinet and a Primary Power Cabinet.
Optional cabinets include one or more Growth Cabinets and one or
more types of Backup Power Cabinets.
Base Station Graphic
The graphic below shows one of the possible layouts of a base station.
Primary
Radio
Cabinet
Growth Cabinets
Location (Optional)
Power
Cabinet
Battery Backup
Cabinet (Optional)
Primary Radio Cabinets
The Primary Radio Cabinet contains the foundational complement of

radios for a Minicell. When ECU equipped, a primary cabinet can
support up to 120 control and traffic channels. Two functionally
equivalent models of Primary Radio Cabinets (Version 2 and Version
4) are currently available. Differences between these two models are
essentially related to the physical location of some of their electronic
components.
Growth Radio Cabinets
Two growth cabinets are available to support larger traffic volumes,

and also give the possibility of using different carriers. These cabinets
are Growth I and Growth II.
Growth I
When equipped with ECUs, the Growth I cabinet can support an

additional 120 control and traffic channels to those available in the
Primary Radio Cabinet.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 7
Growth II
When equipped with ECUs, the Growth II cabinet can support an

additional 120 control and traffic channels to those available in the
Primary Radio Cabinet and the Growth I Cabinet.
Primary Power Cabinet
The primary power cabinet provides the power (240 VAC and 24
VDC) necessary for the functioning of the various circuits in the
primary and growth cabinets.
Backup Battery Cabinet
The backup battery cabinet is an optional piece of equipment that

provides temporary power in case of failure of primary power.
Backup Generator Cabinet
Antenna
The backup power cabinet is an optional piece of equipment that

provides generator supplied power in case of failure of primary power.
Receives and transmits RF signals.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 8

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Primary Cabinet Layout and Signal

Flows
Overview
Purpose
This section provides an overview of the PCS CDMA primary Minicell

hardware and signal flows.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 9
Primary Radio Cabinet Version 2 (Front)
Primary Radio Cabinet Version 2 (Front)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Primary Radio Cabinet

Diagram (Front)
This is the front view of the PCS CDMA Minicell with the receive
units and filters on the left side.
CRTUm
RSP
CSU
RFTG-m
Rb
RFTG-m
CSC 0
CTUs
PCU
ACB
PCU
Filters
(RUs 1,3,5
behind TFUs)
SIDE 0
SIDE 1
C
T
U
C
T
U
C
T
U
A
C
B
TFU TFU TFU

RFU RFU RFU
Side
Interface
Panel

Components
CSC 1
RCC
(Hidden behind Fan)
X0
CSC
Heat
Exchanger
CCC 2
CCC 4
CRC
CCC 6
Alarm
Panel
The front of a primary cabinet shows the radio components, from top to
bottom:
Component Description
CRTUm
CDMA Radio Test Unit Module for testing cell operation
RSP
Radio Switch Panel, for switching signals to and from the CRTU
CSU
Channel Service Unit, for interface with the T1 line(s)
RFTG
Reference Frequency Timing Generator to maintain cell timing.
RCC
Radio Control Complex contains two CSCs for redundancy
CSC
Cell Site Controller, Part of the RCC, for control of the cell operations
CRC
CDMA Radio Complex (Labeled CCC2, 4, and 6 for historical reasons)
CTU
CDMA Transmit Unit for transmission to a filter for clean-up of transmit

signals
Filters
Filters for the transmit and receive paths.
RU
Receive Unit passes the received signal to a filter for clean-up
PCU
Power Conversion Unit provides +15V output from a +24V input
ACB
Alarm Control Board, routes alarm signals to the switch
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 10

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Primary Radio Cabinet Version 2 (Back)
Primary Radio Cabinet Version 2 (Back)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The back of the cabinet contains the antenna and power connections.
DANGER
Electrical Burns
Serious burns may occur.
Antennas may need to be disconnected to perform
measurements. Make sure that there is no RF Power applied to
the antenna leads before disconnecting.
Components

Diagram (Back)
The back of the primary cabinet has limited service or maintenance

requirements by cell technicians.
The diagram below shows the components on the back of a Version 3
Minicell..
CRTU
CSU
BACK PLANE
RCC
BACK PLANE
CCC2
BACK PLANE
Side Interface
Panel
CCC4
BACK PLANE
Power Distribution
Assembly
CCC6
BACK PLANE
TX TX TX TX
S3P S3G S2P
S2G
TX TX
S1P
RX RX RX RX RX
LIGHTNING
PLATE
Connections
SAGE
S1G
RX
S3D0 S3D1 S2D0 S2D1 S1D0 S1D1
GPS
AIP
Antenna Interface Panel
The following connections are accessible from the back of the radio
cabinet:
Antennas, which are connected through the Antenna Interface

Panel (AIP)
BCR to CTU connectors (CTU Backplane)
Access to CSU connections
Power distribution, which is made through the Power Distribution

Assembly (PDA).
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 11
Primary Radio Cabinet Version 2 Layout Detail
Primary Radio Cabinet Version 2 Layout Detail
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Layout
The diagram below shows the layout of the primary radio cabinet.
CRTU
DUPLEX
J8
SIU
CSU 1
J7
RFTG 0
CSU 2
CSU 3
RFTG 1
CSC0
C
T
U
0
J6 -50
J4 -50
J5 -40
J3 -40
J9
C
T
U
1
TX
S1P
C
T
U
2
TX
S2P
CSC1
P
AC
CU
B
P
C
U
C
C N M C C MN C R
P C E P P EC P T
I I M U U MI IU
0 1
i
4 A
1 F
5 I
A
C
RSP
4
1
5
A
C
* * * *
cCC CC CC CC CC BI CA CB
cC U1 U2 U3 U4 U U R
c
CCC2
CCC4
TX
S3P
RX 0 RX 0 RX 0
J10
INTERFACE
PANEL
CCC6
Air
Duct
J1
S
C
T
/
D
F
I
44
1
5
A
A
C
C
BBA Group
Circuit
Breakers
AIM0
SIDE
EXT ALM 6
CLOSE
ON
ALARM
AIM 1
A
F
I
AIM1
SIDE
OPEN
ON
ALARM
AIM 0
CSU Remote
Optioning Port
EXT ALM 0
Shelf Layout
Each shelf is composed of individual boards. Exact position of boards

on a given shelf may differ from site to site. However, shelf location
will not be affected. Details on the individual boards are provided later
on in this unit.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 12

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Configuration Changes in PCS CDMA Minicell

Version 4.
Configuration Changes in PCS CDMA Minicell Version 4.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The Version 4.0 Minicell functions like its predecessor, with some
rearrangement of components to ease access and manufacturing, and to
enhance reliability.
The PCS CDMA Minicell

Version 4
The PCS CDMA Minicell Version 4 enables a smaller footprint than a

Version 2 installation when it includes Growth cabinets. This is
achieved by making all filters accessible from the front of the cabinet.
Version 4 also presents a more efficient cooling system, eliminating the
need for a second heat exchanger when using High Power CTUs.
PCS CDMA Minicell

Version 4 Diagram
The components moved to new locations are shown in the picture

below:
Air Ducts
CTU
RFTGm
Larger Heat
Exchanger
6 Filters
Combined
CRTUm and RSP
Physical Differences
between Version 2 and
Version 4
Front
Front
Back
Back
The major physical differences between the two versions are as

follows:
The RFTGms have been moved below the CTUs. In their place
are air ducts that enable vertical air flow for cooling the inside of
the Minicell. The RFTGms are now placed on top of each other,
rather than side-by-side.
The Heat Exchanger is larger than in the Version 2 Minicell,

eliminating the need for a back panel Heat Exchanger.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 13
Configuration Changes in PCS CDMA Minicell

Version 4.
Location Changes
The CTU cooling fan is now in the back of the Primary Cabinet.
This leaves clear access to the CTUs for replacement or upgrade
to HPCTU. That configuration, coupled with the more powerful
Heat Exchanger and the improved cooling air flow eliminates the
need for a secondary Heat Exchanger for either HPCTU operation,
or high temperature environments.
Receive Filters that were in the Side Panel have been moved and
there are now six filters accessible from the front of the primary
cabinet.
The Network Facilities Interface (NFI) has been moved to the

back of the Primary Cabinet, providing easier access to the bottom
part of the front of that cabinet.
The CRTUm has been combined with the RSP into one unit and
moved to the bottom right front corner. It is now called a CDMA
Test Module.
The following components remain in the same location as the Primary

Minicell but the functionality has changed.
The heat exchanger is now larger, so that only one exchanger is

needed for all configurations.
Air ducts and fans have been put where the RFTGm was formerly
located.
The following components have been moved:

Equipment Primary Location
V2
Enhanced Primary
Location V4
CTU Fan
front, CTU shelf
back, CTU shelf
NFI
front, bottom left
back center
Filters
front and side panel
front, bottom left
RFTGm
front, top
front, center left
CRTUm/
RSP
front, top
front, bottom rightt
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 14

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Cabinet Technical Specifications (Standard

Minicell)
Cabinet Technical Specifications (Standard Minicell)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Technical specifications covering equipment and environmental

requirements are given in the equipment table and the environment
table.
Equipment Table for the

Standard Minicell
This table displays the technical specifications covering equipment

space and weight requirements.
Height
Width
Depth
Approx. Weight
Primary
Growth
Power
60 in. (152 cm)

30 in. (76 cm)
30 in. (76 cm)
840 lb. (382
kg)
60 in. (152 cm)

22 in. (76 cm)
30 in. (76 cm)
750 lb. (341
kg)
60 in (152 cm)
31 in. (79 cm)
30 in. (76 cm)
500 lb. empty
(227 kg)
48/220 AC
Input Power Amps/

Volts
Environment Table
This table covers the technical specifications environmental

requirements.
Parameter
Outdoor
-Temperature Range
-Humidity Range
Indoor
-Temperature Range
Normal
Short-term (Not to exceed 3
days at a time and 15 days per
year.)
-Humidity Range
Normal
Short-term
Specification
-40 C to +46 C (-40 F to +115 F)

10 percent to 100 percent
+5 C to +38 C (+41 F to +100 F)

+2 C to +49 C (+36 F to +120 F)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 15
PCS CDMA Minicell Signal Flows
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
PCS CDMA Minicell Flow

Diagram
The signal flow through a PCS CDMA Minicell has three components:
Traffic (Voice) data: carries communication
Control (Date Link) data: carries signals that manage the cell
operation
Test data: enables verification of the good health of the cell.
The following diagram shows the three signal flows (i.e., traffic;
control; and test) through the Minicell.
T1
3
PSU
Rx
Tx
8
3
C
S
U
M
E
M
N
C
I
C
P
I
C
R
T
U
i
C
R
T
U
m
A
F
I
D Packet Pipe
Data Link
F
TDM BUS
I
R
S
P
ANT
CRTU Testing
C
P
U
BIU
C
C
C
C CC C
C CC C
U UU U
Tx
A
C
U
B
C
R
C
T
U
Rx
Depending on configuration,
can be ECUs or TCUs
CL3805 - L2V7.0
04/08/1999
10
Tx
Rx
Packet Pipe
Rx
FILTER
Tx
PCSC
PROTECTOR BLOCK
CSC1
Tx
Rx
A
I
P
RU
Analog
Signal
Transmit path
The following describes the Transmit path process:

.......................................................................................................................................
Digitally encoded signals from the switch (voice and control data) go
through a Protector Block.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Signals are fed to an optioned CSU connecting with the switch.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Signals go then to a DFI board that interfaces them to the TDM bus.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 16

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Voice Data
Control Data
Receive path
Test data
Acronyms
ACU
AIP
BCR
CCC
CSC
CPU
CRTUi
CSU
DFI
NCI
PSU
RSP
Rx
The signal is split with voice data directed by a CCC in the CRC and
the control data sent to the CSC.
The voice data is processed and transmitted.
1.
Processed in a CCU for digital baseband signal.
2.
Converted by an ACU from digital encoding to analog.
3.
Processed by the BCR as an RF signal.
4.
Upbanded and amplified in the CTU.
5.
Filtered and sent to the antenna through the AIP.
Control data is processed in the CPI and sent from the NCI to the
other CSC units on the TDM bus.
The Receive path is essentially the reverse of the Transmit path, except
that the signals go through the RU while bypassing the CTU.
Test data is supported by a CRTUm that feeds test signals emulating a
mobile. Test data will be covered in more detail in unit 3.
Acronyms in the Minicell have the following meanings:

Baseband Combiner Radio
Communication Processing Interface
CRTU Interface
Channel Service Unit
Digital Facilities Interface
Network Control Interface
Packet Switch Unit
Radio Switching Panel
Receive
AFI
ANT
BIU
CCU
CPI
CRTU
CRTUm
CTU
MEM
PCSC
RCC
RU
Tx
Alarm and Fits Interface

Antenna
Bus Interface Unit
CDMA Channel Unit
Core Processing Unit
CDMA Radio Test Unit
CRTU Module
CDMA Transmit Unit
Memory Unit
PCS Switching Center
Radio Control Complex - 2 CSCs
Receive Unit
Transmit
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 17
PCS CDMA Minicell Receive Data Path
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The receive path for the Minicell follows 10 main steps. Note that the
antenna connections are at the back of the cell.
Receive Path Diagram
The following diagram shows the receive path for the PCS CDMA
Minicell. The antenna feed, item 1, enters the back of the Minicell.
7 65 4
10
From Mobile to Switch
Antenna
Receive Filter and Receive Unit
Baseband Combiner/Radio
Analog Converter Unit
CDMA Channel Unit
Protector Block
T1 Line to the MSC
CL3805 - L2V7.0
04/08/1999
11
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
Signals from a mobile source are received by the Antenna. Their path
through the cell is:
.......................................................................................................................................
From the Antenna to the Antenna Interface Panel

...........................................................................................................................................................................
From the Antenna Interface Panel to the Receive Filter

...........................................................................................................................................................................
From the Receive Filter to the Receive Unit

...........................................................................................................................................................................
From the Receive Unit to the Baseband Combiner/Radio
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 18

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
...........................................................................................................................................................................
From the Baseband/Combiner/Radio to the Analog Converter Unit

...........................................................................................................................................................................
From the Analog Converter Unit to the CDMA Channel Unit

...........................................................................................................................................................................
From the CDMA Channel Unit to the Cluster Controller

...........................................................................................................................................................................
From the Cluster Controller to the Digital Facilities Interface

...........................................................................................................................................................................
From the Digital Facilities Interface to the Channel Service Unit

...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
From the Channel Service Unit to the Protector Block

...........................................................................................................................................................................
11
From the Protector Block to the Switch through the T1 line
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 19
PCS CDMA Minicell Transmit Path
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The transmit path covers 10 main steps and is almost the reverse of the
receive path.
Transmit Path Diagram
The follwoing diagram shows the transmit path of the PCS CDMA
Minicell. The antenna feed, Item 10, comes out the back of the cabinet.
T1 Line from the MSC
4 5 6 7
8
3
9
1
10
From Switch to Mobile
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
Protector Block
CDMA Channel Unit
Baseband Combiner/Radio
CTU and Transmit Filter
Antenna

Signals from land-based sources are carried to the cell through a T1
line, connected at a protector block. Their path through the cell is:
.......................................................................................................................................
From the protector block to the Channel Service Unit

...........................................................................................................................................................................
From the Channel Service Unit to the Digital Facilities Interface

...........................................................................................................................................................................
From the Digital Facilities Interface to the CDMA Cluster Controllers

...........................................................................................................................................................................
From a CDMA Cluster Controller to its assigned CDMA Channel Unit
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 20

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
...........................................................................................................................................................................
From the CDMA Channel Unit to the Analog Conversion Unit

...........................................................................................................................................................................
From the Analog Conversion Unit to the Baseband Combiner/Radio

...........................................................................................................................................................................
From the Baseband Combiner/Radio to the CDMA Transmit Unit

...........................................................................................................................................................................
From the CDMA Transmit Unit to the Transmit Filter

...........................................................................................................................................................................
From the Transmit Filter to the Antenna Interface Panel

...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
From the Antenna Interface Panel to the Antenna
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 21
Primary Cabinet Shelf Descriptions

Overview
Objectives
The primary cabinet consists of the following shelves:
Reference Frequency and Timing Generator
Radio Control Complex Shelf
CDMA Transmit Unit (CTU) Shelf
CTU Shelf -- Alarm Control Board
Filter Assembly
Filter Assembly--Simplex Filters
CDMA Radio Complex (CRC) Shelves
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 22

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The CDMA Radio Test Unit enables the testing of a Minicell by

emulating a mobile unit. Under the current software release, its use is
limited to functional tests (overhead channels, traffic path and pilot
power setting).
The CRTU is composed of three major subassemblies: the CDMA
Radio Test Unit Module (CRTUm), the Radio Test Unit Switch Panel
(RSP), and the CDMA Radio Test Unit Interface (CRTUi).
CRTU Diagram
The diagram below shows the location of the CRTU components in the
PCS CDMA Minicell.
FRONT
CRTUm
CSU
Rb RFTG-m
RFTG-m
CSC0
CRTUi
(Frame 1, Slot 15)
C
T
U
C
T
U
C
T
U
TFU
RFU
TFU
X0
RTU Switch
Panel (RSP)
CSC1
A
C
B
CCC2
CCC4
TFU
RFU
RFU
CCC6
P
D
A
CRTU Detailed Description
The CDMA Radio Test Unit enables the testing of a Minicell by

emulating a mobile unit. It is composed of three major subassemblies
as follows:
CRTUm - occupies the top shelf in the Primary Radio Cabinet. It

consists of an IS-95A compliant CDMA/AMPS dual-mode
mobile, a duplexer containing a three-port RF circulator, an EIA422 to TTL signal converter, and a 24-V DC to 12-V DC power
converter. The duplexer provides separate RF transmit and receive
paths for the single-ported CDMA/AMPS dual-mode mobile.
RSP - the Radio Switch Panel contains RF switches, combiners,

and splitters that provides connectivity to the selected test face.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 23
CRTUi Functional
Description
CRTUi Faceplate
Description
CRTUi - The CRTUi is a plug-in board installed in the CSC1, that

provides a transparent communications interface between the
Radio Control Complex (RCC) and the CRTUm, and between the
RCC and the RSP.
The CRTUi contains the firmware needed to run the CDMA functional
tests. In response to functional test messages from the RCC, the CRTUi
carries out the specified actions and returns the test information to the
RCC. The message exchange is through TDM bus 0.
The CRTUi faceplate has three light-emitting diode(LED) indicators,
one red, one yellow, and one green. Their meanings are as follows:
The RED LED is:
Controlled by the CRTUi
Lighted during the self-test initiated upon power-up or after a

reset and goes off after successful completion of the self-test
Lighted during normal operation if the CRTUi has a board

error or is insane
The YELLOW LED is:
Controlled by cell site system software
Lighted during non-volatile memory (NVM) update
The GREEN LED is:
Controlled by the CRTUi
Lighted when a CDMA functional test is executing
The term CRTU will be used in this document to refer to both

components except when it is necessary to distinguish between the
CRTUi and CRTUm.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 24

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
CDMA Radio Test Unit Module
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
CRTUm Position in the

Signal Flow
The CRTUm is connected to the directional couplers of the transmit

and receive filter panels through the Radio Test Unit Switch Panel.
The diagram below shows the CRTUm position in the Minicell signal
flow.
CSC1
T1
PSU
3
Rx
Tx
8
C
S
U
C
R
T
U
i
C
P
I
A
F
I
C
R
T
U
m
R
S
P
ANT
CRTU Testing
PCSC
M N
E C
M I
Packet Pipe
D Data Link
F
I
BIU
TDM BUS
Tx
Rx
Packet Pipe
Rx
C
C
C
Tx
C CC C
C CC C
U UU U
A
C
U
B
C
R
C
T
U
Tx
FILTER
Tx
PROTECTOR BLOCK
C
P
U
A
I
P
Rx
Rx
Depending on configuration, can be

ECUs or TCUs
CRTUm Functions
RU
Analog
Signal
The CRTUm has RF connections to the directional couplers of the

transmit and receive filter panels.
The CRTUm communicates with the CRTUi through an EIA-422
asynchronous data link. It is over this data link that the CRTUi, under
the direction of the RCC, instructs the CRTUm to perform individual
CDMA functional tests, and over which the CRTUi and RCC collect
the test results. The CRTUi or RCC can turn off the CRTUm by
disabling power to the CRTUm.
More about the CRTU
The CRTUm is a full-featured wireless terminal, that has been

programmed to respond to specific signals from the PCSC. The CRTU
can be invoked through the RCC either on schedule, automatically, or
manually.
In all cases, the RCC instructs the CRTU to dial a specific MOST
(Mobile Operating System Test) number stored at the PCSC. The ECP
at the PCSC identifies the MOST call and initiates Functional Tests.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 25
The RCC can trigger any one of several MOST test functions including
forced handoff. (The term forced handoff means to change to another
Channel Element.)
In the Overhead Channel Functional Test, the signals are used to check
the Access Channel, the signal is recognized by the CCC, but does not
go back to the Switch.
In the Traffic Path Functional Test, the signal goes back to the ECP.
Version 4 Minicell
In version 4 of the minicell the RSP is combined with the CRTUm.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 26

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Radio Test Unit Switch Panel (RSP)
Radio Test Unit Switch Panel (RSP)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The RSP connects the CDMA Radio Test Unit Module (CRTUm) and
the PCS Receive and Transmit chains for functional and diagnostic
tests.
Physical Location
In the Version 2 Minicell, the RSP is located directly under the

CRTUm shelf. In the Version 4 Minicell, the RSP is in the same circuit
pack as the CRTUm.
RSP Position in the Signal

Flow
The diagram below shows the RSP position in the Minicell signal flow.
CSC1
T1
PSU
3
Rx
Tx
8
3
C
S
U
C
R
T
U
i
C
P
I
A
F
I
C
R
T
U
m
R
S
P
ANT
CRTU Testing
M N
E C
M I
Packet Pipe
D Data Link
F
I
TDM
BIU
BUS
Tx
Rx
Packet Pipe
Rx
C
C
C
Tx
C CC C
C CC C
U UU U
A
C
U
B
C
R
C
T
U
FILTERT
Tx
PCSC
PROTECTOR BLOCK
C
P
U
A
I
P
Rx
Rx

ECUs or TCUs
RU
Analog
Signal
Function
The CRTUm transmit output power is fed to the PCS receive chain
dual directional couplers. The coupled transmit output ports of the PCS
TX chain is fed to the CRTUm receive input port.
RSP Combiner
Minicells with more than one CDMA carrier require combining RF

signals from the primary and growth transmit carriers. The RSP
combiner performs this function. The combiner is attached directly to
the rear of the RSP. Omni and three sector Minicell configurations use
different combiners.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 27
Radio Switch Panel Connections
Radio Switch Panel Connections
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RSP Connections Diagram
The diagram below shows the RSP.
RF Ports to and from dual directional couplers

Tx
J16
J10 J12
J14
J5 J6 J7 J8 J9 J11
J13 J15
Rx
J17
J18 J20 J22 J24 J26 J28
J19 J21 J23 J25 J27
J1 to CRTUm Rx
J2 from CRTUm Tx
J30 15-pin (14.25 to 30V)

J3 TX Test Monitor
Power Switch
CL3805 - L2V7.0
4/08/1999
16
Operation
RSP Connections
J29 9-pin
(Unused)
J4 RX Test Monitor
Removable microprocessor board

with lightning arrestors
The RSP is controlled by the CRTUi via an RS422 control bus. The
RSP contains a microcontroller board, and SP6T and SP12T RF
switches.
The table shows the RSP connections for 3-sector, 1-carrier
configuration.
RSP
Port
WH1
WH1 Cable # Filter Assy
Cable # Out of
Location
Into RSP Coupler
Coupler Port
Carrier
Tx Sector
Rx Sector /
Diversity
Forward -50 dB
Reflected -40 dB
J5
P1
P28
A1
J6
C1 Tx 1
Fwd -50
J6
P2
P48
A13
J6
C2 Tx 1
J7
P3
P27
A1
J5
C1 Tx 1
J8
P4
P47
A13
J5
C2 Tx 1
J9
P5
P30
A2
J6
C1 Tx 2
Fwd -50
Ref -40
Ref -40
Fwd -50
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 28

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Channel Service Unit (Optional)
Forward -50 dB
Reflected -40 dB
RSP
Port
WH1
WH1 Cable # Filter Assy
Cable # Out of
Location
Into RSP Coupler
Coupler Port
Carrier
Tx Sector
Rx Sector /
Diversity
J10
P6
P43
A15
J6
C2 Tx 2
J11
P7
P29
A2
J5
C1 Tx 2
J12
P8
P44
A15
J5
C2 Tx 2
J13
P9
P33
A3
J6
C1 Tx 3
J14
P10
P40
A17
J6
C2 Tx 3
J15
P11
P34
A3
J5
C1 Tx 3
J16
P12
P39
A17
J5
C2 Tx 3
J17
P13
P25
A1
J4
Rx 1 / D0
Fwd -50
J18
P14
P26
A1
J3
Rx 1 / D0
Ref -40
J19
P15
P46
A13
J4
Rx 1 / D1
Fwd -50
J20
P16
P45
A13
J3
Rx 1 / D1
Ref -40
J21
P17
P32
A2
J4
Rx 2 / D0
Fwd -50
J22
P18
P31
A2
J3
Rx 2 / D0
Ref -40
J23
P19
P41
A15
J4
Rx 2 / D1
Fwd -50
J24
P20
P42
A15
J3
Rx 2 / D1
Ref -40
J25
P21
P35
A3
J4
Rx 3 / D0
Fwd -50
J26
P22
P36
A3
J3
Rx 3 / D0
Ref -40
J27
P23
P37
A17
J4
Rx 3 / D1
Fwd -50
J28
P24
P38
A17
J3
Rx 3 / D1
Ref -40
Fwd -50
Ref -40
Fwd -40
Fwd -50
Fwd -50
Ref -40
Ref -40

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OverviewOverview
The Channel Service Unit (CSU) is an optional component and shelf,

for which space is provided at the top of the cabinet.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 29
CSU Position in the

Minicell Signal Flow
Growth I
Primary Cabinet
Growth II
CSC1
PCSC
8
T1
PSU
3
Rx
Tx
8
C
S
U
M
E
M
N
C
I
C
R
T
U
i
C
P
I
A
F
I
C
R
T
U
m
R
S
P
ANT
CRTU Testing
Tx
PROTECTOR BLOCK
C
P
U
Packet Pipe
D Data Link
F
I
BIU
TDM BUS
Tx
Rx
Packet Pipe
Rx
C
C
C
Tx
C CC C
C CC C
U UU U
A
C
U
B
C
R
C
T
U
FILTERT
SIU
The diagram below shows the position of the CSU in the Minicell and
the Minicell signal flow.
A
I
P
Rx
Rx

ECUs or TCUs
RU
Analog
Signal
CSU Function
The CSU provides T1 or E1 interface to the primary cabinet. It is a

network interface, the major role of which is to help in troubleshooting
by enabling loop-backs between cell and switch.
CSU Features
The following describes the Kentrox CSU, one of the CSUs used with
the Lucent PCS CDMA Minicell.
Lucents CSU shelf is designed as a four-slot shelf with up to

three CSUs and one shelf interface unit (SIU). The SIU is located
in slot 0, primary cabinet first T1 line in slot 2, growth I cabinet
T1 line in slot 1, and T1 line interface for growth II cabinet in slot
3.
The SIU provides the interface between the CSU and the
operators control terminal or the automated Network
Management System (NMS).
Each CSU handles only one T1 line. Each T1 line is a four-wire

connection.
The CSU shelf terminal and network connections are via separate
15-pin female connectors on the back of the CSU shelf.
The CSU shelf receives DC power via a +24 V feeder pair.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 30

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
CSU Connections
CSU Option
By-passing the CSU
The CSUs connect to the digital facilities interfaces (DFIs) in the

CDMA Radio Complex Shelf 2 to provide the T1 or E1 signals. The
DFI is selectable for either a T1 or E1.
The T1 (network) side of the interface will be connected to a T1

terminal lightning protection block, which is also used to lightning
protect external user alarms.
The terminal side of the CSU is connected to the DFI.
This description is for a standard CSU. Because the device is an

optioned item, some customers have selected other brands, or adopted
alternate configurations, such as having the CSU mounted on a wall
adjacent to the cell.
In case of failure of the CSU, it is possible to maintain service by
bypassing the device altogether.
If the DFI board options are set the same as the network side of the
CSU, the CSU can be bypassed.
Remove the plugs from the back of the unit and connect the lines
together. The lines are gendered correctly to allow this connection.
Reference
Find more information in the Kentrox Documentation. This can be

ordered from the CIC. The bus connections are described on page 3-8.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 31
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The Reference Frequency and Timing Generator for the Minicell

(RFTG-m) provides the reference frequency and timing source for the
Minicell.
RFTG Position in the

Minicell
The diagram below shows the RFTG position in the Minicell cabinet.
Version 2
Description
Normal Operation
Version 4
The RFTGm consists of the following:
Side 0, a rubidium (Rb) oscillator
Side 1, a crystal controlled oscillator with a Global Positioning

System (GPS) receiver (the GPS receiver is located inside the
crystal controlled unit)
GPS antenna interface
RF circuits for receiving GPS signals.
Only one unit is active at a time and during normal operation the
rubidium unit:
Is active
Provides a 1-pulse-per-second (1 PPS) timing signal which is

synchronized to the receive signal from the GPS satellite through
an antenna
Provides a 15-MHz reference frequency for all receiver units

(RUs), CDMA Transmit Units (CTUs), baseband combiner/radio
(BCR) assemblies, and the synchronized clock-and-tone (SCT)
units on the CRC0 and CRC1
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 32

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Backup Operation
RFTG-m Specifications
The crystal controlled unit gets activated by an automatic failure

triggered sequence when the rubidium unit experiences failure.
The rubidium and crystal controlled reference signal output level is
(+17.0 +/- 2.0) dBm.
The RFTG-m provides a 1-PPS signal output which is synchronized to
the GPS time clock. The RFTG-m requires GPS updating once per 24hour period.
The maximum loss of the GPS antenna cable can be 10 dB without the
need for an additional external antenna mounted amplifier.
The RFTG-m operates over an input voltage range of +19 to +32 V
DC. A minimum of +22 V DC is required during a 5 minute warm-up
period. The crystal oscillator also provides the 5 V DC power required
by the GPS receiver.
An RS-485 data cable provides RFTG signals to the growth cabinets.
RFTG Testing Program
SDP
Other Information
About the need for GPS
The RFTG testing program can be ordered from the CIC. The order
includes the program, manual, and cables.
There is an icon on the Status Display Page 2138 to warn of a possible
synchronization problem. This icon is labeled Cell_Sync. A
combination of errors from the RFTG units, SCT board, and the CCC
are used to display MINOR, MAJOR, or CRITICAL Cell_Sync Status.
For more information on the GPS, see Lucent 401-660-128.
The RFTG-m requires GPS updating once per 24-hour period. In the
absence of GPS signal, the Minicell goes into a flywheel mode,
where the Minicell continues to operate for up to 24 hours on the
rubidium oscillator, or up to 4 hours on the crystal unit. This is
explained in more detail in Lucent 401-660-128.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 33
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
RCC Diagram
The Radio Control Complex controls the minicell and contains two
CSCs for redundancy.
The diagram below shows the RCC position in the Minicell and signal
flows.
CSC1
T1
PSU
3
Rx
Tx
8
C
S
U
N
C
I
C
R
T
U
i
C
P
I
A
F
I
C
R
T
U
m
R
S
P
ANT
CRTU Testing
PCSC
M
E
M
Packet Pipe
D Data Link
F
I
BIU
TDM BUS
Tx
Rx
Packet Pipe
Rx
C
C
C
Tx
C CC C
C CC C
U UU U
A
C
U
B
C
R
C
T
U
Tx
FILTER
Tx
PROTECTOR BLOCK
C
P
U
A
I
P
Rx
Rx

ECUs or TCUs
RCC Description
RCC Components
RU
Analog
Signal
The controller is equipped with two identical sides; one is active while
the other is on stand-by. The active side receives/sends control and data
information from/to the PCSC and other cell site components. The
stand-by side tracks what the online side is doing so that it may come
online as needed. Only one side is online at a time.
The radio control complex (RCC) shelf is fully redundant with
independent power circuits for each side of the controller for the
primary frame.
The RCC shelf is comprised of two Cell Site Controllers (CSC). Each
CSC consists of the following circuit packs:
Core Processor Unit (CPU)
8 Meg Memory (MEM)
Network Control Interface (NCI)
Communications Processor Interface (CPI)
Alarm and Fits Interface (AFI)
415AC 5V DC Power Conversion Unit (PCU).
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 34

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Radio Control Complex Shelf Description
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
RCC Shelf Diagram
+5V
4
1
5
A
C
Shelf components are referenced by their slot number and the position
of their connection pins in the backplane.
The diagram below shows the board positions on the RCC shelf.
2 D 1D 0D
A
F
I
C
P
I
N M
C E
I M
4D 5D 6D
C
P
U
0
C
P
U
1
C
M N C R
E C P T
M I I U
i
CSC0
+5V
A
F
I
4
1
5
A
C
CSC1
Operation
The controller is equipped with two identical sides; one is active while
the other is on stand-by. The active side receives/sends control and data
information from/to the PCSC and other cell site components. The
stand-by side tracks what the on-line side is doing so that it may come
on-line as needed. Only one side is on-line at a time.
Acronyms
Acronyms in the table below are used for the boards of the RCC shelf.
Core Processor Unit
CSC
CPI
Communications Processor Interface
CPU
Core Processor Unit
NCI
AFI
Alarm FITS Interface
MEM
Memory
The core processor controls the cell site controller which is made up of
the alarm/FITS board, NCI board, MEM board, and the CPI board.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 35
Each side of the controller uses one core processor board. This
arrangement comprises a duplex controller that provides reliability
through redundancy. In this arrangement, the CPU in one side (active
side) is always in control of the call processing, while the CPU in the
other side (the mate) is kept in a stand-by state, and its memory is
continually being updated via the update bus. In the event of a failure in
the active side of the controller, this mode allows an immediate transfer
of control from the active CPU to the mate with a minimum loss of
control information. On each side of the controller, the CPU uses the
system bus to communicate with the other circuit boards on the same
side.
Alarm/FITS Interface
The Alarm and Factory Installation Test Set (FITS) Interface circuit
pack provide the interface required to store/process cell site alarms and
to send alarm status to the MSC via the Core Processor Unit (CPU). In
addition, the circuit pack contains the circuitry necessary to interface
the FITS to the cell site. The FITS provides a number of diagnostic
tests used to initially check out the Minicell after installation by Lucent
Technologies.

(NCI)
The NCI provides synchronization of control channel messages

between the CPU and the distributed network of port circuit packs that
are connected to the TDM bus. The NCI interfaces with the CPU
through a 512-byte System Dual-Port Memory. The NCI functions as a
full-duplex message switch (Archangel function) between the CPU and
the microprocessors (Angels) in the port boards. Besides being the
mediator of the CPU, the NCI monitors the sanity of all the
microprocessors and reports any changes it detects to the CPU.
8-Megabyte Memory
One memory board is used with each side of the controller. The
memory circuit pack has a storage capacity of 8 Mb. It contains a
memory array which includes a 32-bit data array with one parity bit for
every eight bits of data. The memory and interrupt control
logic-write-protect and parity error latching functions are contained in
each circuit pack, which provides independent operation on a per-pack
level.
Communication Processor
Interface
The CPI board is part of the core processor complex. The CPI is a
multiprocessor circuit pack that provides the data connectivity between
the controller and any of the other terminating entities in the cellular
system. The CPI manages two point-to-point programmable, full
duplex, independent data links that implement the X.25 protocol.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 36

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CTU Position Diagram
The diagram below shows the CTU position in the Minicell and signal
flow.
CSC1
T1
PSU
3
Rx
Tx
8
C
S
U
C
R
T
U
i
C
P
I
A
F
I
C
R
T
U
m
R
S
P
ANT
CRTU Testing
M N
E C
M I
Packet Pipe
D Data Link
F
I
BIU
TDM BUS
Tx
Rx
Packet Pipe
Rx
C
C
C
Tx
C CC C
C CC C
U UU U
A
C
U
B
C
R
C
T
U
FILTERT
Tx
PCSC
PROTECTOR BLOCK
C
P
U
A
I
P
Rx
Rx

ECUs or TCUs
Components
CDMA Transmit Unit

Description
RU
Analog
Signal
The CDMA Transmit Unit (CTU) shelf contains the following circuit
packs:
CDMA Transmit Unit Assembly (three total in the primary

cabinet), which houses circuitry to convert the cellular band
frequencies (800-MHz range) to PCS frequency bands (1.91-to
1.99 GHz) and to amplify the signal to an eight or 16 Watt level
Alarm Control Board (1), used in the primary frame
Power Conversion Unit (2), used only in the primary frame (the
+24 V DC is input from the frame and +15 V DC is output to the
Receive Units via the ACB)
Alarm light on each CTU (these lights are difficult to see with the
fan in place)
The CDMA Transmit Unit (CTU) consists of:
The transmit upconverter a fiberglass circuit board with a sheet

metal shield that takes the +24 V DC power and returns from the
backplane and feeds them to the transmit amplifier
The transmit amplifier a cast aluminum housing/heat sink

provided with cavities for shielding between circuit boards
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 37
The upconverter and the amplifier sections connect together to form a

circuit pack which slides into the CTU card cage. Two lateral
connectors provide interconnections with the TX upconverter section.
Each Minicell primary frame contains only one CTU backplane.
A frame cooling fan is located in front of the CTU card cage for
cooling purposes.
High Power CTU (HPCTU)
The HPCTU is designed to provide 16 W output and may be useful to

compensate for the use of dual pole antennas, or to overcome
intermodulation problems caused by nearby TDMA cell sites.
If output power is set in translation to eight W instead of 16 W,
HPCTUs will draw more power than CTUs. When replacing CTUs by
HPCTUs, ensure that the output power set in translation has been
changed to 16 W before bringing the Minicell back into service.
No CTUs with HPCTUs in

the Same Cell Site
Swap-Out Rules
Because all amplifiers in a single shelf and in a single sector must be of

the same amplifier type, HPCTUs and CTUs cannot coexist in a cell
site.
A CTU shelf can accommodate up to 3 HPCTUs. However, the
HPCTUs are bigger than the CTUs. To install HPCTUs in a radio
cabinet, it will be necessary to:
Remove the cooling fan
Remove the card cage
Use the HPCTU mounting bracket to install that unit directly in

the cabinet
Replace the cooling fan.
Cooling
Cooling for HPCTUs is provided by fans in the front of the radio

cabinet, and, if necessary, by a heat exchanger mounted on the radio
cabinet back panel.
Enhanced Primary Minicell
On the Enhanced Minicell the cooling fan is in the back of the CTU
shelf.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 38

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
CTU Assembly Description
CTU Assembly Description
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
CTU Shelf Diagram
The Transmit Unit Boards (CTUs or HPCTUs) are mounted within an

overall cage. The CTUs are mounted into individual frames within that
cage. The thicker HPCTUs are directly mounted on that cage.
The diagram below shows the components on the CTU shelf.
Alarm Control Board
(ACB)
CTU 0/1/2
Fan*
(Version 2 Only)
*In Version 4, CTU Fan is
in the back of the Cabinet
ALM
STBY
ACT
ALM 1
ALM 2
ALM 3
ALM 4
ALM 5
ALM 6
ALM
RU
AMP
RST
Power Conversion Units
Growth Frame CTU Filter

Connections
The Growth Frame CTU can be connected to either a simplex or duplex

filter unit. Connection to a duplex filter uses the original RX1/G
antenna as its TX/G antenna, thus not requiring additional antennas.
ACB and Frequency

Assignment
The ACB also contains switches that determine the frequency Receive
and Transmit bands used by the Minicell. The settings of these switches
are used to set the CTU and RU filters.
Alarm Control Board
The Alarm Control Board (ACB) monitors the alarms from the
Minicell frame PCS components and reports the alarm status to the AFI
board located within the Radio Control Complex (RCC).
The ACB continuously scans and analyzes the alarms in its equipment
sector until it is interrupted by AFI polling, at which time it reports both
amplifier alarms (LAC alarms) and frame alarm status information to
the AFI. The LAC alarm is used for reporting any CDMA transmit unit
(CTU) and/or receive unit (RU) failures; a frame alarm reports power
converter unit (PCU) failures in the CTU shelf. The AFI can send out
up to 32 unique polling requests in approximately a two-second period
of time.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 39
Front Filter Assembly
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Filter Assembly Diagram
The diagram below shows the position of the filters in the Minicell
cabinet and the signal flow. There is a view of the side panel filters on
page 2-57.
CSC1
T1
PSU
3
Rx
Tx
8
C
S
U
N
C
I
C
R
T
U
i
C
P
I
A
F
I
C
R
T
U
m
R
S
P
ANT
CRTU Testing
M
E
M
Packet Pipe
D Data Link
F
I
BIU
TDM BUS
Tx
Rx
Packet Pipe
Rx
C
C
C
Tx
C CC C
C CC C
U UU U
A
C
U
B
C
R
C
T
U
FILTERT
Tx
PCSC
PROTECTOR BLOCK
C
P
U
A
I
P
Rx
Rx

ECUs or TCUs
Duplex and Simplex Filters
RU
Analog
Signal
The Primary Radio Cabinet can be fitted with either duplex or simplex
filters.
Up to three sets of filters (transmit and receive diversity 0 and diversity
1) are installed:
Inside the primary cabinet
On the left side of the primary cabinet for receive diversity 1.
Each receive filter contains a receiver unit (RU) which amplifies a

received signal and converts it from the PCS band (1.85-to 1.91GHz) to
the cellular band (850-MHz frequency).
For duplex configuration, the Transmit Filter Unit (TFU) and the
Receive Filter Diversity 0 Unit (RFU) will be replaced by the Duplex
Filter Unit (DFU).
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 40

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Filters / RU Shelf Interfaces

and Connections
The following table shows the interfaces and connections to the

different types of filter units.
Filter Unit...
Interfaces the primary frame

to...
Is connected to the Filter/RU and

has...
TFU
The transmit antenna in the

simplex operation
Four coaxial connections to the TFU input

signal:
RFU Div0
DFU
(Combined
TFU and
RFU Div0)
Input from CTU

Antenna connection
Two test path signals
The receive antenna in the

simplex mode
Four coaxial connections:
Antenna
Eight coaxial connections:
Receive signal
Antenna connection
Two test path signals
15-MHz Reference Signal
Transmit signal
Antenna interface
Receive signal
Four test path signals
Enhanced Primary inicell
The PCS CDMA Enhanced Primary Minicell has all 6 filters in the
front.
Range Extension Option

(REO)
The REO means there are two filter types for replacement purposes.
The Tower Top Low Noise Amplifier (TTLNA) portion of the REO
requires new filter types to account for the Masthead Amplifier Unit
(MAU).
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 41
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Simplex Filters Diagram
The diagram below shows the components of the simplex filters.

Receive Unit (RU)
Transmit
Filter Unit
(TFU)
Receive
Filter Unit
(RFU)
L3805 L2V7 0
Simplex Configuration
Simplex Filter Connections
The simplex configuration includes:
A TFU, interfacing the primary cabinet to the transmit antenna
An RFU, interfacing the primary cabinet to the receive antenna
An RU, that provides amplification and down conversion of the

received signal
There are three coaxial connections to the RU assembly:
Input PCS signal
Output cellular band signal
15-MHZ reference signal
A 9-pin, D-subminiature connector is used for connecting regulated

+15 V DC power and alarm signals.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 42

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
CRC Shelf Position

Diagram
A PCS CDMA Minicell Primary cabinet contains three CDMA Radio

Complex (CRC) shelves arranged in a cross-connected configuration.
The diagram below shows the position of the CRC shelf in the Minicell
cabinet and the signal flow.
CSC1
T1
PSU
3
Rx
Tx
8
3
C
S
U
C
R
T
U
i
C
P
I
A
F
I
C
R
T
U
m
R
S
P
ANT
CRTU Testing
PCSC
M N
E C
M I
Packet Pipe
D Data Link
F
I
TDM
BIU
BUS
Tx
Rx
Packet Pipe
Rx
C
C
C
Tx
C CC C
C CC C
U UU U
A
C
U
B
C
R
C
T
U
Tx
FILTER
Tx
PROTECTOR BLOCK
C
P
U
A
I
P
Rx
Rx

ECUs or TCUs
Description
RU
Analog
Signal
Each shelf supports up to four CDMA Channel Units (CCUs) forming

one cluster, which is supported by a CDMA Cluster Controller (CCC).
In addition to the CCC and CCU, each shelf contains:
One analog conversion unit (ACU)
One baseband combiner/radio unit (BCR)
One bus interface unit (BIU)
One 415 AC converter
In addition, shelves CRC0 and CRC1 have Synchronized Clock and

Tone (SCT) circuit packs to generate the 19.6608 MHz, GPS time of
day, EVENSEC TIC and bus clocks.
On shelf CRC2, the Digital Facilities Interface (DFI) circuit pack is put
in place of the SCT board.
The BIU contains the TDM bus interface to support the BBA trio. Has
DC-DC converter to supply voltages other than digital +5 volts needed
by the ACU, BIU, and BCR.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 43
The 415 AC converter makes the conversion of the +24 V DC feeder

voltage to +5 V DC. The +5 V DC output gets distributed to the CDMA
circuit packs.
BCR and Operating
Frequency
Frequency Distribution
15 MHz Reference
Frequency
The Channel Number, set in translation, determines the frequency at

which the BCR operates.
The 19.6608-MHz primary and delayed clock signals, which are
generated on the SCT circuit pack, are distributed to the three CRC
shelves ACU.
The 15-MHz reference frequency is separately received by each SCT
on the CRC shelves 0 and 1, as well as by the BCR in each CRC.
There is no 15-MHz reference input to shelf 2, except for the BCR.
Backplane Signal
Terminations
The CRC backplane also supports the terminations for the 19.6608MHz clocks, the GPS time-of-day clock, the Cluster bus clocks, the
TDM bus, and other control signals.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 44

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
CRC Shelf Details
CRC Shelf Details
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CRC Shelf Diagram
The diagram shows the board for the three CRC shelves.
Slot #
Shelf 0
Slot #
Shelf 1
Slot #
Shelf 2
Clusters and Cluster

Controllers
10
C
C
C
C
C
U
1
C
C
U
2
C
C
U
3
C
C
U
4
B
I
U
A
C
U
B
C
R
S
C
T
4
1
5
AC
P3
EQL
016
P4
EQL
022
P5
EQL
025
P6
EQL
034
P7
EQL
040
P8
EQL
046
P10
EQL
052
P11
EQL
062
P13
EQL
072
P19
EQL
080
10
C
C
C
C
C
U
1
C
C
U
2
C
C
U
3
C
C
U
4
B
I
U
A
C
U
B
C
R
S
C
T
4
1
5
AC
P3
EQL
016
P4
EQL
022
P5
EQL
025
P6
EQL
034
P7
EQL
040
P8
EQL
046
P10
EQL
052
P11
EQL
062
P13
EQL
072
P19
EQL
080
10
C
C
C
C
C
U
1
C
C
U
2
C
C
U
3
C
C
U
4
B
I
U
A
C
U
B
C
R
D
F
I
4
1
5
AC
P3
EQL
016
P4
EQL
022
P5
EQL
025
P6
EQL
034
P7
EQL
040
P8
EQL
046
P10
EQL
052
P11
EQL
062
P13
EQL
072
P19
EQL
080
Clusters are logically associated groups of CEs associated to a single

Packet Pipe. A CCC is a circuit pack that controls one cluster. While
there can be only one Packet Pipe per CCC, it is possible to have
configurations where Clusters are not assigned to a Packet Pipe so that
their CEs can be shared resources (overhead channels) in a subcell.
A Cluster must be homogeneous with respect to the type of CCU that
can be equipped on a given shelf, but there can be a mixture of TCU
and ECU shelves.
Mixing TCUs and ECUs in a

Minicell
This ability to mix shelves provides flexibility in growing the capacity

of a Minicell.
The ECU may be used within a CDMA cluster in exactly the same
manner as the TCU.
The maximum number of ECUs is currently set at 4 to provide 40 CEs,
but only 30 of those may be used for traffic channels. The remaining 10
CEs may be used for overhead channels. (A 3-sector configuration
requires 6 overhead channels, leaving 4 unallocated CEs for
redundancy.)
The Subcell concept enables softer handoff, and provides greater
efficiency, allowing fewer CEs to be equipped to support a given
communication load.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 45
CRC Shelf Details
ECU Board Numbers
There are going to be three (3) types of ECUs (Enhanced Channel

Units), that are functionally the same. The various ECU circuit packs
can be mixed and matched on the shelves or in the cabinet. The
designations for the ECUs are TN 1711, TN 1716 (available December
1998), and TN 1718 (available in 1999).
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 46

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
CRC Shelf Descriptions
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CRC Shelf Boards

(CCC) Board TN1852
The boards on the CRC Shelf are as follows:

CCC
BCR
Baseband Combiner and Radio
ACU
BIU
Bus Interface Unit
CCU
CDMA Channel Unit (TCU or ECU)
DFI
SCT
CDMA Synchronized Clock and Tone
415AC
Power Converter Unit
The CCC provides a control and data interface between the TDM bus
and up to four 13-kbps CDMA channel units (CCUs). The CCC
manages the CCUs.
A CCC and its CCUs form a CDMA cluster; there is one cluster per
shelf.
Each CCC terminates the dedicated packet pipe associated with its
CDMA cluster. The CCC extracts the voice data from the incoming
packets and distributes the data to the appropriate CCUs for processing.
In the reverse direction, the CCC receives voice data from its CCUs,
assembles the data into packets, and then multiplexes the packets onto
the packet pipe.
CDMA Channel Unit (TCU/

ECU)
The TCU/ECU performs the digital baseband signal processing,

including spreading and despreading.
TCU Capacity
Each TCU contains two CEs; thus, a fully loaded CDMA cluster
contains 8 CEs.
ECU Capacity
Each ECU contains 10 CEs; thus a fully loaded CDMA cluster contains
40 CEs. Each CE is configured to interface with a 13-kbps vocoder and
can support 8-kbps as well.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 47
Vocoder Rates
For earlier releases an entire Cellular Geographic Service Area

(CGSA) must operate at the same vocoder rate; the mixing of 13-kbps
and 8-kbps vocoders in a CGSA is not supported in the early release of
CDMA.
CDMA Bus Interface Unit

(BIU) TN1702
The BIU provides a control bus interface between the TDM bus and its
associated ACU and BCR. It also provides power conversion for its
associated ACU and BCR as explained below.
The BIU has an on-board converter circuit that converts +24 V DC to a
precise +5 V DC, -5.2 V DC, and +12 V DC. The ACU uses the +5 V
DC and -5.2 V DC, while the BCR uses all three voltages.

(ACU) TN1853
The ACU combines the digital transmit signals from the cluster and
then converts the signals to analog for input to the BCR.
In the reverse direction, the ACU converts the analog receive signals
from the BCR to digital and then distributes the digital signals to the
cluster.
CDMA Baseband
Combiner/Radio (BCR)
44WR1
CDMA Synchronized Clock
and Tone (SCT) Unit
TN1703

(DFI) Board TN3500B
Power Converter 415AC

Board (+5 V)
The BCR accepts analog signals from and sends analog signals to its
associated ACU. The BCR is responsible for RF transmission and
reception.
The SCT generates the CDMA clock signals for the Minicell. The SCT
performs the following TDM bus functions: bus clock generation and
monitoring for the TDM bus, maintenance tone generation, and
maintenance tone detection.
The DFI provides serial-to-parallel and parallel-to-serial data
conversion between the T1 or E1 lines and the TDM buses internal to
the Minicell. Current software supports only one T1/E1 line interface
port.
This is the same unit used with each side of the RCC and has the
following features:
output current rating of 43 amperes
built-in programmable over-current protection circuit
Each circuit board that is plugged into the power plane has a
programmable resistor that corresponds to the current drawn by the
board.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 48

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Digital Facilities Interface Board
Digital Facilities Interface Board
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DFI Board Diagram
The diagram below shows the switches on the DFI board for a T1 line.
1
OFF
OFF
ON
SW 1
ON
ON
ON
SW 6
OFF
SW 4
OFF
ON
SW 2
ON
OFF
SW 3
Function
DFI Functionality
OFF
SW 5
ON
OFF
SW 7
The DFI provides the interface between the TDM bus and the CSU.
One DFI can be accommodated in the primary frame.
The Minicell platform uses TDM timeslots to nail up the logical
connection between a packet pipe on the T1 or E1 line and the
associated CDMA cluster. The TN3500B supports two T1/E1 lines
although the system supports only one. The newer DFI board,
TN1713B, supports only one T1/E1 line.
The DFI is located in shelf 2 (lowest shelf) of the CRC.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 49
Frame Pedestal
Frame Pedestal
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Frame Pedestal Diagram
This diagram below shows the positions of the components near the
bottom of the Minicell.
Composed of
Circuit Breaker Panel
Alarm Interface Panel
Side Interface Panel
Rear Interface Assembly
L2V7 0
Description
In Minicell Version 2, the Frame Pedestal contains interface panels that

connect the Primary Radio Cabinet to signals and power sources.
In Version 4, the Frame Pedestal also contains the combined CRTU
and RSP.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 50

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Service Interruption
There is a chance of unnecessarily powering down
equipment causing service interruptions.
Some of the breakers are easy to trip. Be careful not to touch
them inadvertently when working around them.
Circuit Breaker Diagram
Function
The circuit breaker panel diagram:
The circuit breaker panel distributes the DC and AC power in the

frame.
If it becomes necessary to power down one of the radio cabinets, the
prescribed sequence is to turn off all the BCR faceplate switches, then
turn off the circuit breakers in the following order:
1.
CB19
2.
CB17
3.
CB15
4.
CB20
5.
CB18
6.
CB16
7.
the remaining circuit breakers from CB1 to CB14 (except CB6 &
7)
To power the radio cabinet back up, the prescribed sequence is CB1 to
CB20, and then the BCR faceplate switches.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 51
Whenever it is necessary to turn the power off on a radio cabinet, it will

be necessary to wait at least 15 minutes after power has been restored
before the RFTGs can be put back into service.
Circuit Breaker Description
Reference
For more information on the circuit breaker see page 3-14.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 52

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Alarm Interface Module
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AIM Position Diagram
Description
The diagram below shows the position of the alarm panel in the
Minicell cabinet.
The Alarm Interface Module:
Collects all alarm connections
Handles both equipment and user alarms
Alarm Interface Panel provides connections to user defined alarms
The User Alarm Cross Connect Board provides the customer with a
pre-wired (fixed) user alarm interface board. It is wired during
installation as per the customer requirement for external user alarms.
Two alarm interface modules connect to the primary frame. They are as
follows:
AIM0, which connects to a board on the backplane and ultimately

routes alarm signals back to the switch
AIM1, which connects to the lightning protection block and

provides 18 opto-isolator user alarms, of which eight are available
for customer assignment to equipment external to the cell.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 53
User and User Reserved

Alarms
Equipment that is part of the Minicell assembly (namely, the primary

cabinet, power cabinet, battery or generator backup cabinet) uses some
of the user alarms for reporting their status to the PCSC and therefore
have been categorized as external user alarms.
User Alarms are discussed in detail in Unit 6.
User Alarms
The external user alarms can be wired to monitor equipment alarms in

two states:
Open on alarm (normally closed)
Close on alarm (normally open)
There are eight alarms available to the user, and seven can be set to
open on alarm or close on alarm, but the 8th alarm is close on
alarm only.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 54

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Alarm Interface Panel -- User Alarm Board
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Alarm Board Diagram
Description
The diagram below shows the user alarm board.
User alarm connection definitions are made using slide switches on the
circuit board and are located in the primary cabinet just above the T1
facilities and alarm interface board.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 55
Side and Rear Panel Descriptions

Overview
Objectives - Side and Back
Panels
The side and rear panels contain fewer components than the front panel
but are still important to maintenance of the Minicell. This section
consists of information on the side and back of the Minicell:
Side Panel
Rear Interface Panel
Heat Exchangers
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 56

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Side Panel (Version 2 Only)
Side Panel (Version 2 Only)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Side Panel Diagram
The diagram below shows the components on the left side of the
Minicell.
Receive Units
RX1
Receive Filter/RX1
Receive Unit Assemblies
(Simplex only)
FRONT
Side Interface
Panel for Growth
Description
This panel, equipped only in Minicell Version 2, is located on the left

of the primary cabinet to provide access to the RX1 Receive
Assemblies.
In Minicell Version 4, the filter assembly is accessible from the front of
the cabinet.
In both versions, the bottom of that panel has a side interface panel
(SIP) that is used for connections to the Growth Cabinets.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 57
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The Rear Interface Panel (RIP) contains the Antenna Interface Panel
(AIP) and the Power Distribution Assembly (PDA).
Electrical Burn Danger
Risk of serious burns.
To avoid injury be sure that the cell cannot transmit when
disconnecting the antennas.
Rear Interface Diagram
The diagram below shows the rear interface panel.

2 or 3 Sector
TX
S3P
S3G
S2P
S2G
S1P
RF
Test
S1G
RX/DX
S3D0/P S3D1/G S2D0/P S2D1/G S1D0/P S1D1/G
GPS
OMNI
TX
C3P
C6G
C5G
C4G
RF
Test
DX
D1(C2P)
Function
D0(C1P)
GPS
The rear interface panel provides the interface for the antenna cables,
power cables (AC/DC), T1/E1 lines, and external user alarms.
The Antenna Interface Panel (AIP) provides access to antenna leads
and is used to input or measure test signals during performance testing.
Connections are clearly marked according to a simple code, that
identifies sector (S) and frame (P=Primary, G=Growth). For example,
S1D0/P is Sector 1 Transmit and Receive (Diversity) zero for a
Primary frame with duplex filter panels.
Three-Sector Configuration
For a three-sector configuration, the rear interface panel shows:
The TX section (top) is where the transmit antennas are

terminated when SIMPLEX FILTERS are equipped.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 58

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
The RX/DX section (bottom) is where the transmit antennas are

terminated when DUPLEX FILTERS are equipped.
The RX/DX section (bottom) is also where RX0 and RX1

receive antennas are terminated for any filter type.
Antennas are hooked to the appropriate sectors.
Connections, identified in the table below, are the same for each sector,
and depend on the type of equipped filter.
Primary Filters Primary Simplex Primary Simplex Primary Duplex
Growth Filters Growth Simplex Growth Duplex Growth Simplex
Primary Duplex
Growth Duplex
TX Primary
S1/P (Top row)
TX Growth
S1/G (Top Row)
RX0 Primary /
RX0 Growth
RX1 Primary /
RX1 Growth
S1D0/P (Bottom
Row) (Splitter)
S1D1/G (Bottom
Row) (Splitter)
S1D0/P
(Bottom Row)
S1D1/G
(Bottom Row)
S1D0/P (Bottom
Row) (Splitter)
S1D1/G (Bottom
Row) (Splitter)
Omni Configuration
Power Distribution
Assembly
S1/P (Top Row)
S1D0/P
(Bottom Row)
S1D1/G (Bottom S1/G (Top Row)
Row) (Splitter)
S1D0/P (Bottom S1D0/P (Bottom
Row) (Splitter)
Row) (Splitter)
S1D1/G (Bottom S1D1/G (Bottom
Row) (Splitter)
Row) (Splitter)
For an omni configuration, the rear interface panel shows:

1.
D0 (C1P) is always Duplex. It is the first Carrier Transmit and

Diversity 0 Receive.
2.
D1 (C2P) is always Duplex. It is the Diversity 1 Receive and, if

equipped, the second Carrier Transmit.
3.
C3P is the Transmit for Carrier 3 (Primary) and C4G - C6G are
Carrier 4 - 6 and may be equipped in a Growth Frame.
Has power cables (AC/DC), T1/E1 lines, and external user alarms.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 59
Heat Exchanger
Heat Exchanger
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Heat Exchanger Diagram
Outdoor applications require a heat exchanger that is mounted on the

front panel. The heat exchanger regulates the internal temperature of
the Primary Radio Cabinet, and is activated when the outside ambient
temperature reaches 70 F.
The diagram below shows the heat exchanger for the Minicell.
Before Working on a
Minicell Cabinet
When opening a door fitted with a heat exchanger, make sure that you
have secured it in the open position.
Structure of a Version 2
Primary Cabinet Heat
Exchanger
The heat exchanger does not have a redundant set of internal and
external blowers, mounts on the front door of the primary cabinet and is
designed for the outdoor application. Insect screens are mounted inside
the door in the lower area.
The heat exchanger supports cooling fans and heaters, and is alarmed.
Minicell Air Movers not Part

of the Heat Exchanger
There is one internal and one external blower powered by the

same +24 V feeder.
There are also 240 V AC heaters within the heat exchanger,

necessitating 240 V AC input from the Minicell power system.
The only other air movers within the Minicell primary cabinet are a
single CTU shelf fan for cooling the CTUs, and a frame fan (located
below the bottom CRC shelf).
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 60

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Heat Exchanger
Minicell Fan Alarms
Fan Electrical and Alarm

Connections
The conditions for, and the reporting of, fan alarms follows:
A fan failure, loss of +24 V, or rotation, causes an alarm of failure

(logic 0) for each fan which gets reported back to the AFI via
separate interface cabling.
A heater alarm is activated when the +24 V powered controller

circuit is calling for heat and it is not provided. If the controller is
not calling for heat, the alarm will not be activated even if the AC
power is disconnected.
Five electrical wires (two for +24V and +24V return, and three for
alarms) are connected to each of these fans.
The three alarm output connections are isolated from the two
+24V input connections.
Fan alarm electronics are powered from the +15 V CTU shelf
power converter. The output is an open collector type, which
switches on low if fan speed drops below a predetermined level.
These fan alarms are run to the AFI circuit pack and have the same
ground reference.
Self Test Panel
Some heat exchangers have self-testing key pads. See page 8-63 for
more information.
High Power CTU

Applications (Version 2
Only)
High Power CTU applications require an additional heat exchanger that

is mounted on the back of the Primary Radio Cabinet.
Enhanced Minicell Primary
The heat exchanger for the Enhanced Primary Minicell is able to cool
the cell and no back unit is needed for HPCTU equipped Minicells. The
associated heater can put out 1100 watts.
CAUTION
Handling the HPCTU Heat Exchanger Panel
The HPCTU exchanger is a heavy unit.
Seek assistance before removing the heat exchanger to prevent
injury.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 61
Heat Exchanger
Other Base Station Cabinets

Overview
Objectives - Other Cabinets
The Minicell can contain other cabinets and are described in this
section. These cabinets are as follows:
Special Omni: page 2-63
Growth I Cabinet Layout: page 2-65
Growth II Cabinet Layout: page 2-66
Growth III Cabinet Layout: page 2-67
Rack-Mounted Growth: page 2-69
Minicell Primary Power Cabinet (Optional): page 2-76
Backup Battery Cabinet (Optional): page 2-80
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 62

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Special Omni
Special Omni
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Special Omni
The Special Omni PCS CDMA Minicell is a single-sector,

single-carrier configuration of the PCS CDMA Minicell. It can be
upgraded to a two-or three sector Minicell as needed. The kit contains
the steps needed to upgrade the cell from omni to two-or-three sector,
depending on the kit used.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 63
Growth Cabinets
Growth Cabinets
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Besides the Primary Radio Cabinet, a PCS CDMA Minicell can have
growth cabinets. The growth cabinets have basically the same
structure. Like a primary cabinet, the growth cabinets contain three
CRC shelves and one CTU Assembly (with fan in the back of the unit).
Growth Cabinet Position in

the Minicell
The diagram below shows the growth cabinets position in the minicell.
Primary
Growth I
Growth II
Growth I Cabinet
The Growth I Cabinet is required when adding additional carriers to an

existing primary cabinet, or to provide capacity for additional traffic
channels. Growth I supports two-sector two-carriers, three-sector twocarriers, and three carriers for omni. The Growth I also supports six
sector one carrier for CATV.
Growth II Cabinet
The Growth II Cabinet is added to a Growth I Cabinet to provide for

two-sector three-carrier and three-sector three-carrier operations.
Growth II Cabinets have additional antenna leads and corresponding
filters.
Combinations
Other combinations of sectors and carriers can be accommodated with

the fully configured cell, such as:
Nine-Carrier Omni
Three-Sector Multiband
Each Growth Cabinet contains a DFI board to accommodate the

additional traffic.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 64

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Growth I Cabinet Layout
Growth I Cabinet Layout
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Growth I Layout
The Growth I Cabinet contains CRC and CTU Shelves.

CTU fans are located in the back of the cabinet.
Growth I Layout Diagram
The diagram below shows the layout of the Growth I cabinet.

CTU Air Exhaust
CRC Blower
C C C CC BA B S P
C C C CC I C C CC
C U U UU UU R T U
2
CRC0
C C C C C BA B S P
C C CC C I C C C C
C U UU U UU R T U
3
CRC1
C C C CC B A B D P
C C C CC I C C F C
C U U UU U U R I U
2
CRC2
CRC Air Intake

C
T
U
1
C
T
U
2
C
T
U
3
A
C
B
P
C
U
1
P
C
U
2
CTU Blower
AC
DC
PDA
Digital Cables
FRONT VIEW
PDA
REAR VIEW
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 65
Growth II Cabinet Layout
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In addition to CRC and CTU shelves, Growth II contains filters for

additional carrier operation.

Diagram
The diagram below shows the layout of the Growth II cabinet.
CTU Air Exhaust

CRC Blower
T
F
U
T
F
U
T
F
U
C C C CC BA B S P
C C C CC I C C CC
C U U U U UU R T U
4
CRC0
C C CC C BA B S P
C C CC C I C C C C
C U U U U UU R T U
5
CRC1
C C C CC B A BD P
C C C CC I C CF C
C U U UU U U R I U
3
CRC2
CRC Air Intake

C
T
U
1
C
T
U
2
C
T
U
3
P
A C
C U
B 1
CTU Blower
P
C
U
2
AC
DC
PD A
Digital Cables
FRONT VIEW
PD A
AIP
REAR VIEW
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 66

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Growth III Cabinet Layout
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In addition to CRC and CTU shelves, Growth III contains filters and
CSU for additional carrier operation. It is to be available Autumn 1998.
Growth III Simplex Filter

Configuration Changes
from Growth II
The Growth III Simplex filter configuration is the same as the Growth
II, including simplex filter cage and simplex transmit filters, except for:
Growth III Duplex Filter

Configuration Changes
from Growth II
Addition of a 5 AMP circuit breaker to the PDA for the CSU
Addition of the Minicell Primary water tight connector to the AIP

for a T1 line
Addition of the Minicell Primary CSU, mounted where the duplex

filter plate would be
Addition of the 110ANA (6 pair) lightning protection block to the

floor of the cabinet
Addition of a 24:6 combiner mounted where the CATV transmit

couplers would be mounted
Addition of a twisted pair power cable from the PDA to the CSU
Change in the length of the interconnection cables.
The Growth III Duplex filter configuration is the same as the Growth
II, except for:
Addition of a 5 AMP circuit breaker to the PDA for the CSU
Addition of the Minicell Primary water tight connector to the AIP

for a T1 line
Addition of the Minicell Primary CSU, mounted where the duplex

filter plate would be
Addition of the 110ANA (6 pair) lightning protection block to the

floor of the cabinet
Addition of a 24:6 combiner mounted where the CATV transmit

couplers would be mounted
Deletion of the Simplex Filter Cage and Simplex Filter Tray

Assemblies
Addition of the Simplex Filter Plate
Addition of a new AIP with longer cables to reach duplex filters
Addition of a twisted pair power cable from the PDA to the CSU
Change in the length of the interconnection cables.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 67

Diagram
The diagram below shows the layout of the Growth III cabinet.
CTU Air Exhaust

CRC Blower
CSU
T
F
U
T
F
U
C C C CC BA B S P
C C C CC I C C CC
C U U UU UU R T U
4
CRC0
C C CC C BA B S P
C C CC C I C C C C
C U U U U UU R T U
5
CRC1
T C C C CC B A BD P
F C C C CC I C CF C
U C U U UU U U R I U
3
CRC2
CRC Air Intake

C
T
U
1
C
T
U
2
C
T
U
3
P
A C
C U
B 1
P
C
U
2
CTU Blower
AC
DC
PDA
Digital Cables
FRONT VIEW
AIP
PDA
REAR VIEW
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 68

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Rack-Mounted Growth
Rack-Mounted Growth
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Component Differences
The rack-mounted growth cabinet supports up to two PCS CDMA

carriers in two- or three-sector configurations. It provides the following
items:
Indoor cabinet
Smaller footprint
CTU and Fan
Integrated interface panel including antenna, power, T1/E1
The components of the rack-mounted growth cabinet vary from those

of the primary and growth cabinets. The following table provides
information on these differences.:
Cabinet
Rack-mounted growth cabinet is being designed only for

indoor installations.
CTU
The CTU is same as the current module of PCS CDMA

Minicell.
TDM Bus
Since the capacity of a TDM bus is limited supporting up to

nine radio shelves, a second TDM bus will be added beyond
a nine radio shelf configuration.
CSU
Because the rack-mounted growth cabinet does not contain

sufficient internal space to install a CSU shelf, it only
provides an external indoor CSU shelf. Since the primary
cabinet affords an internal CSU shelf for the first three T1
connections, the external CSU shelf supports T1/E1
connections beyond nine radio shelf configuration.
Interface Panel The interface panel integrates the power, antenna, and T1/E1
interface. This interface is protected from lightning and
electronic surge.
Power
Carrier Locations
Same power sources are supported as the current PCS

CDMA Mincell.
Within a cabinet, the location of the carriers varies by component.
For CRC shelves, the first carrier number goes on the right. The
second carrier goes on the left CRC.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 69
Rack-Mounted Growth
Antenna Reduction
Program
Rack Mounted Growth

Filter Configuration
Carrier Assignments
The bottom CTU gets the first carrier and the upper CTU gets the
second carrier.
The circuit breakers at the top of the cabinet are the reverse of the
CRC shelves. The circuit breaker for the first carrier is on the left
and the second carrier is on the right.
This feature will ensure that the number of antennas required to support
a PCS CDMA Minicell with up to six CDMA carriers (up to five
growth cabinets) is within limits imposed on service providers by
zoning restrictions. The current limit is believed to be 12 antennas per
cell tower. The number of antennas will be minimized with the use of
duplexers, dual-carrier linear amplifiers, or high-power combiners.
According to the RF and antenna conditions, either a simplex or
diplexer filter supports the transmission. The receive filter in the
primary cabinet is shared by all CDMA carriers.
Each rack-mounted growth cabinet contains two carriers. The cabinet
services the next two carriers in the minicell configuration. For
example, a minicell site with a primary, growth 1 and rack-mounted
growth 2 would place carrier 2 in growth 1 and carriers 3 and 4 in RG2.
A similar minicell arrangement would contain the primary cabinet,
RG1, and growth III with carriers 2 and 3 in the RG1 cabinet and
carrier 4 in growth III.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 70

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Rack-Mounted Growth
Rack Mounted Growth

Cabinet
The diagram below shows the layout of the rack-mounted growth

cabinet.
PDA
PDA
CRC0
CRC0
CRC0
CRC1
CRC1
CRC2
CRC2
CRC0
CRC1
CRC1
CRC2
CRC2
CRC FANS
CRC FAN
C3
C2
15MHZ 1:8 SPL 15MHZ 1:8 SPL

S
0
S
1
S
2
15MHZ 1:6 SPL
C
T
U
0
C
T
U
1
C
T
U
2
CTU
FAN 2
C
T
U
0
C
T
U
1
C
T
U
2
CTU
FAN 1
S
1
S
0
REAR VIEW
FRONT VIEW
CTU Logical Number vs.

Physical Number
S
2
The table below shows the CTU logical number versus physical
number in Status Display Page 2136.
Sect
or
Circuit
ID
CTU
No.
Carriers
29
30
31
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 71
Rack-Mounted Growth
CTU/RU Hardware Shelf

Equipment Name
Sect
or
Circuit
ID
CTU
No.
Carriers
10
11
10
12
11
13
12
14
13
15
14
16
15
17
The table below shows the CTU/RU hardware shelf equipment name
(physical ID and the logical ID) for various cell configurations.
S/
U
elf
uip.
me
RU/
CTU
Name
SDP/TI
3 sector/3 carrier
6 sector/1 carrier
9 carrier OMNI
PCA
Address
Name
Usage
sectorcarrier
PCA
Address
Name
Usage
sectorcarrier
PCA
Address
Name
Usage
Sectorcarrier
PCA
Address
Name
Usage
sector
carrier
U1
CTU29
LAC29
Sl-C1
LAC29
Sl-Cl
LAC29
Cl
LAC29
Sl-Cl-BA
RU29-0
LAC29
S1-D0
LAC29
Sl-D0
LAC29
D0
LAC29
S1-D0-BA
RU29-1
LAC29
Sl-D1
LAC29
Sl-Dl
LAC29
D1
LAC29
Sl-Dl-BA
U2
CTU30
LAC30
S2-C1
LAC30
S2-Cl
LAC30
C2
LAC30
S2-Cl-BA
RU30-0
LAC30
S2-D0
LAC30
S2-D0
na
na
LAC30
S2-D0-BA
RU30-l
LAC30
S2-D1
LAC30
S2-D1
na
na
LAC30
S2-D1-BA
U3
CTU31
LAC31
S3-C1
LAC31
S3-Cl
LAC31
C3
LAC31
S3-C1-BA
RU31-0
LAC31
S3-D0
LAC31
S3-D0
na
na
LAC31
S3-D0-BA
RU31-1
LAC31
S3-D1
LAC31
S3-D1
na
na
LAC31
S3-D1-BA
U4
CTU4
LAC4
S1-C2
LAC4
S4-C1
LAC4
C4
LAC4
Sl-Cl-BE
RU4-0
na
na
LAC4
S4-D0
na
na
LAC4
S1-D0-BE
RU4-1
na
na
LAC4
S4-D1
na
na
LAC4
Sl-Dl-BE
3 sector sharedcarrier
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 72

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Rack-Mounted Growth
3 sector/3 carrier
6 sector/1 carrier
9 carrier OMNI
3 sector sharedcarrier
PCA
Address
Name
Usage
sectorcarrier
PCA
Address
Name
Usage
sectorcarrier
PCA
Address
Name
Usage
Sectorcarrier
PCA
Address
Name
Usage
sector
carrier
CTU5
LAC5
S2-C2
LAC5
S5-C1
LAC5
C5
LAC5
S2-C1-BE
RU9
RU5-0
na
na
LAC5
S5-D0
na
na
LAC5
S2-D0-BE
RU10
RU5-1
na
na
LAC5
S5-D1
na
na
LAC5
S2-D1-BE
CTU6
CTU6
LAC6
S3-C2
LAC6
S6-C1
LAC6
C6
LAC6
S3-C1-BE
RU11
RU6-0
na
na
LAC6
S6-D0
na
na
LAC6
S3-D0-BE
RU12
RU6-1
na
na
LAC6
S6-D1
na
na
LAC6
S3-D1-BE
CTU7
CTU1
LAC1
S1-C3
na
na
LAC1
C7
LAC1
S1-C2-BA/
E
CTU8
CTU2
LAC2
S2-C3
na
na
LAC2
C8
LAC2
S2-C2-BA/
E
CTU9
CTU3
LAC3
S3-C3
na
na
LAC3
C9
LAC3
S3-C2-BA/
E
PCS/
CTU
Shelf
Equip.
Name
RU/
CTU
Name
SDP/TI
CTU5
Notes: S#-Sector Number, C# - Carrier Number, B[A-F] - PCS band letter
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 73
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Principle of the REO
TTLNA Diagram
The Range Extension Option (REO) requires a Tower Top Low Noise
Amplifier (TTLNA) and a cell equipped with HPCTUs. Its purpose is
to extend the range of the Minicell.
Increasing the Minicell range requires a balanced link budget. Gain
must be increased in the transmit path and the noise figure must be
reduced in the receive path.
The HPCTU improves the transmit (downlink) performance of the

Minicell.
The TTLNA improves the receiver signal-to-noise ratio on the

receive path (uplink), potentially extending the range and
lowering the average reverse link power required of mobiles.
The diagram below shows the components of the TTLNA as attached

to the Minicell.
Masthead
Amplifier Unit
(six used)
TX
TX
TX
PCS CDMA
Minicell
RX
RX
RX
DC BIAS/
ALARM
DC BIAS/
ALARM
DC BIAS/
ALARM
Alpha
Sector
Diversity 0
Gamma
Sector
Diversity 1
Alpha
Sector
Diversity 1
Power
Distribution
Unit
+24 V From
Power Cabinet
Two
Alarm Outputs
H
P
C
T
U
H
P
C
T
U
H
P
C
T
U
High Power
Amplifiers
MAS
RU
DC Bias Tees
(six used)
TX/RX Duplex Coaxial Cables
Masthead Amplifier System

Receiver Units
MAS
RU
MAS
RU
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 74

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Structure of the TTLNA
The TTLNA Power

Distribution Unit
The TTLNA is composed of:
Masthead Amplifiers (one per diversity antenna)
A Power Distribution Unit (mounted on a panel, placed in the

back of the Primary Cabinet frame pedestal).
The Power Distribution Unit is composed of one main power switch

assembly, and one power unit for each of the amplifiers.
Each Amplifier Power Unit is provided with separate ON/OFF
switches for Power and Alarm.
Each TTLNA is provided with two alarms: one for power, and the other
for the DC bias applied to the amplifier.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 75
Minicell Primary Power Cabinet (Optional)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The primary power cabinet provides the rectifiers for converting 220 V
AC to +24 V DC as needed by the Minicell. The power cabinet shown
is the 60C.

Diagram
The diagram below shows the Minicell power cabinet.
Fan Unit
Secondary Shelf
Rectifier
Assemblies
Primary Shelf
DC Distribution
Alarm Panel
AC Input Panel
Backup
Batteries
Battery String 1
Battery String 2
3805 L2V7 0
Key Components
The key components of the PCS primary power cabinet include:
Ten Rectifiers (five per shelf)
750 W each
Engineered based on Minicell load requirements
N + 1 redundancy
Two Battery Strings (IR-125)
30 minutes @ 3 kW each
Engineered based on holdover required
Maximum holdover
30 minutes @ 6 kW (Max. Minicell config.)
60 minutes @ 3 kW
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 76

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Backup Batteries
90 minutes @ 2 kW (Typical for three-sector Minicell with

ten effective voice channels per sector)
AC Service Entrance
The power cabinet contains batteries capable of providing up to 6 kW

of DC power holdover for a minimum of 30 minutes in the event of
either a 208/240 volt AC (local utility) power interruption or any power
system failure resulting in loss of DC output power.
The power cabinet has temperature-compensated float charging
capability for the batteries in both the power cabinet and the battery
cabinet; the maximum battery recharge is no greater than 6 times the
battery discharge time. The temperature of the batteries in these two
cabinets is maintained within a range specified by the battery vendor to
prevent overcharging or damage to one of the battery strings.
The power cabinet contains a low voltage disconnect circuit which
activates when the batteries discharge to 20.25 volts DC. This prevents
voltage reversal of battery cells and severe performance degradation of
the connected equipment. The low voltage disconnect is setable in the
power cabinet.
The combination of the power cabinet and battery cabinet provides a
minimum of 4 hours of holdover at end of life.
Battery Reserve Time
The table gives approximate battery reserve times for an installation at

full load conditions for new battery strings. For batteries near then end
of their life these times are reduced approximately 25%.
PCS CDMA Minicell Configuration
Maximum
DC Load
Number of Battery Strings
Battery Reserve Time

Initial Capacity (hours)
10
12
14
16
Primary with Standard CTUs
1600 W
2.9 6.9 11.4 16.4 21.6 27.2 33.0 38.9
Primary and 1 Growth with Standard

CTUs
3100 W
1.3 3.0 5.0
7.2
9.5
11.9 14.4 17.0
Primary and 2 Growth with Standard

CTUs
4600 W
0.8 1.8 3.1
4.4
5.8
7.3
Primary with High Power CTU
2100 W
2.1 4.9 8.1
11.7 15.4 19.3 23.5 27.7
Primary and 1 Growth with High Power

CTU
4050 W
0.9 2.2 3.6
5.1
6.8
8.5
10.3 12.2
Primary and 2 Growth with High Power

CTUs
6000 W
0.6 1.3 2.2
3.1
4.1
5.2
6.3
8.8
10.4
7.5
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 77
For More Information
More information on Minicell power requirements can be found in PCS

CDMA Minicell Site Preparation Guidelines, 401-703-025.
Indoor Version
There is a version of the power cabinet made for indoor Minicells. The
indoor primary doesnt need heat exchangers. Their physical
appearance may change from installation to installation, with power
bays usually built without the protective enclosure required for outdoor
operation.
Optioned Items
The Power Cabinets and Power Bays are optional items.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 78

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Minicell Power Cabinet Layout
Minicell Power Cabinet Layout
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Power Cabinet Layout

Diagram
The diagram below shows the layout of the Minicell power cabinet.
31 in./79 cm
FAN UNIT
CPS(2)
(SECONDARY SHELF)
CPS (1)
(PRIMARY SHELF)
DC DISTRIBUTION
AC INPUT
POWER
PANEL
ALARM
PANEL
BATTERIES
STRING 1
STRING 2
.ppt
Components of a Power
Cabinet
The main components of a Power Cabinet are batteries and rectifiers.

In a Power Cabinet, batteries are placed into 2 battery strings. A battery
string is formed by placing 2 batteries in series to provide +24 volts
DC. Each battery string is placed in parallel to provide 6 kW of DC
power holdover for about 30 minutes in the event of a commercial
power failure.
Up to four rectifiers are needed for the primary cabinet.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

2 - 79
Backup Battery Cabinet (Optional)
Backup Battery Cabinet (Optional)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OverviewDescription

Diagram
The battery backup cabinet is linked to the primary cabinet to provide

extended holdover time.
The diagram below shows the layout of the backup battery cabinet.
S t r in g 9
S t r in g 7
2
S t r in g 6
2
S t r in g 4
S t r in g 1

Components
S t r in g 3
Output Bus
and Protection
S t r in g 8
S t r in g 5
2
S t r in g 1 0
2
S t r in g 2
The key components/features of the PCS battery backup cabinet

include:
Ten Battery strings
Four hours @ 600 W each
Engineered based on holdover required
Maximum holdover
Four hours @ 6 kW (Max. Minicell configuration)
Eight hours @ 3 kW
12 Hours @ 2 kW (typical for three-sector Minicell with ten

effective voice channels per sector)
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 - 80

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Cabling, Connections, and

Software
Overview
Purpose
Minicell components are internally connected through cables that carry

voice/traffic data (receive and transmit paths), controls (alarms and
timing signals), and services (DC and AC power). The data and control
paths are also used for testing purposes.
Data paths were outlined in Unit 2. The purpose of this unit is to
identify the cabling and connections that support the delivery of data,
controls, and services to the cell components.
Connections and
Schematic Drawings (SDs)
Contents
Schematic drawings (SDs) are discussed in unit 4, as part of the

discussion of the tools used to communicate with the cell.
Minicell Connections
Filter and Antenna Connections - - - - - - - - - - Signal Buses - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Minicell TDM Bus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Channel Service Unit, TDM Bus, and MSC Interface
Minicell Omni Configuration - - - - - - - - - - Minicell Three-Sector Configuration - - - - - - - Signal Path Distribution - - - - - - - - - - - - - 15 MHz Reference Frequency Distribution - - - - Power Distribution - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Network Facilities Interface - - - - - - - - - - - User Alarms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Primary to Growth I Cabinet Connections - - - - - Growth II Cabinet Connections - - - - - - - - - - -
3-3
- 3-5
- 3-6
- 3-7
- 3-8
- 3-9
- 3-10
- 3-11
- 3-12
- 3-14
- 3-18
- 3-19
- 3-20
- 3-21
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

3 - 1
Test Paths
3-22
Example of Test Path: Transmit Path (Simplex Configuration) 3-23
Example of Test Path: Receive Path (Simplex Configuration) 3-24
Example of Test Path: Rx and Tx in a Duplex Configuration 3-25
Functional Tests - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-26
Functional Tests -- Overhead Channels -- Pilot/Sync/Paging - 3-27
Functional Tests -- Overhead Channel-- Access Channel - - 3-29
Functional Tests -- Traffic Path - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-31
Functional Tests -- Pilot Level - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-33
Functional Tests -- Antenna - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-35
Functional Tests -- Single Channel Selective - - - - - - - - 3-37
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 2

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Minicell Connections
Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Cable View
Identifying Data, Control,

and Service Paths
Identifying Cables and

Connections
The three major types of connections that support the functioning of a

Minicell are:
Voice (traffic)
Data Links (control)
Power.
The picture below shows the cabling connections at the back of the
primary cabinet.
The Lucent Technologies PCS CDMA Minicell can support different

operating modes. One objective of this unit is to identify the different
paths that support these operating modes.
Cables running through the cell are dedicated to specific functions.
Understanding their role is necessary to the performance of
troubleshooting tasks. Testing for the Minicell is done via the
connections that are part of the voice and data link paths.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

3 - 3
Cell Configuration and Data

Path
Control Signal Distribution
Power Distribution and

Grounding
A PCS CDMA Minicell can be configured to support one to six

interconnected antenna faces.
Timing signals are critical to CDMA encoding. This unit outlines the
path followed by these control signals.
AC and DC power is distributed throughout the cell, and proper
grounding ensures isolation of the signal path from stray current from
the power distribution system.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 4

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Filter and Antenna Connections
Filter and Antenna Connections
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Minicell Version 2 Filter

Configurations
Two filter configurations are available for Version 2 Minicells:

Simplex
Simplex configurations require three filters:
One filter for Receive Diversity 0 signals
One filter for Transmit signals
One filter for Receive Diversity 1 signals on the side panel
Duplex:
Duplex configuration require two filters:
Antenna Connections
Diagram
Rx1
One filter for Receive Diversity 0 and Transmit signals
One filter for Receive Diversity 1 signals on the side panel
The diagram below shows the simplex and duplex antenna connections
for the Minicell.
Version 4.0
Version 2.0
Rx1
Tx
Simplex Filters
Rx1
Rx0 and Tx
Rx0 and Tx
Rx0
Duplex Filters
Minicell Version 4
Configuration
All Receive and Transmit filters are placed side-by-side and are
accessible from the front of the Version 4 Primary Cabinet.
Growth Cabinet II
Filters are placed side-by-side and are accessible from the front of the
Growth II Cabinet.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

3 - 5
Signal Buses
Signal Buses
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Buses are physical connections mounted on the radio cabinet backplane

that link the different circuit packs on the RCC Shelf, and are used to
carry a variety of signals.
Update Bus
This bus carries signals that enable the stand-by CPU to shadow the
primary CPU, so that it can take over cell operation whenever the
primary CPU experiences a failure.
System Bus
There are two separate system buses to enable communication between

circuit packs within each CSC.
TDM Bus
The Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) bus is used to carry signals

between RCC and CRC shelves.
Cluster Bus
This bus connects a CCC to all the CEs it controls. There is one Cluster
bus for each Cluster Controller.
Signal Bus Diagram
The diagram below shows the various system buses.

UPDATE BUS
CPU 0
CPU 1
SYSTEM BUSES
A
F
I
N
C
I
C
C
C
C
P
I
B
I
U
M
E
M
S
C
T
A
F
I
TDM BUS
C
C
C
B
I
U
S
C
T
CE
ACU
ACU
BCR
BCR
N
C
I
C
C
C
C
R
T
U
i
C
P
I
B
I
U
M
E
M
D
F
I
RX 0
TX TO CTU
RX 1
Cluster Bus
BBA TRIO
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 6

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Minicell TDM Bus
Minicell TDM Bus
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TDM Bus Diagram
The diagram shows the TDM bus.

C
P
U
C
P
U
U p d a te B u s
S y stem B u s 0
C
P
I
N
C
I
S y stem B u s 1
M
E
M
M
E
M
N
C
I
C
P
I
TD M B us A
TD M B us B
C
C
C
B
I
U
S
C
T
C
C
C
CRC0
B
I
U
S
C
T
C
C
C
CRC1
B
I
U
D
F
I
CRC2
C P U - C o re P ro c e s s U n it
C P I - C o m m u n ic a tio n s P ro c e s s o r In te rfa c e
N C I - N e tw o rk C o n tro l In te rfa c e
M E M - M em o ry
B IU - B u s In te rfa c e U n it
C C C - C D M A C lu s te r C o n tro lle r
D F I - D ig ita l F a c ilitie s In te rfa c e
T D M - T im e D iv is io n M u ltip le x
.p p t
Legend
Description
The following are devices connected to the TDM and System buses:
Acronym
Text
BIU
Bus Interface Unit
CCC
CPI
Communications Processor Interface
CPU
Core Process Unit
DFI
MEM
Memory
NCI
TDM
Time Division Multiplex
The TDM bus permits voice, data, or control connectivity to any circuit
pack connected to the TDM bus. The bus is separated into two
physically separate buses to improve system reliability.
Synchronization of TDM bus control channel messages between the
CPU and a circuit pack connected to the TDM bus is performed by the
NCI.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

3 - 7
Channel Service Unit, TDM Bus, and MSC

Interface
Channel Service Unit, TDM Bus, and MSC Interface
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Channel Service Unit (CSU)

Shelf
The optional CSU shelf is an ADC Kentrox 4-slot shelf housing one to
three T-SMART CSUs and one Shelf Interface Unit (SIU). The SIU
provides a common interface for all CSUs within a shelf for a single
Video Display Terminal (VDT) or a Network Management System
(NMS). The VDT is required to option the T-SMART CSU. VDT
interface options are switch selectable. Default options are 9600 bps,
one stop bit, 8 bits per word/character, and no parity. Refer to
Kentrox Operators Manual 77000-GD for detailed information on
the T-SMART CSU.
The CSUs connect to the DFI(s) in CRC shelf 2 (lowest shelf) on the
Minicell (terminal) side of the interface. The T1 (network) side of the
interface is connected to a T1 terminal lightning protection block,
which is also used to protect external user alarms. The DFI circuit pack
can be optioned for either a T1 or E1/CEPT interface, and each DFI
provides two DS1 lines. Each CSU handles only one DS1 line, so each
fully loaded DFI requires two CSUs. Each DS1 line is a 4-wire
connection.
T-SMART
T-SMART is a registered trademark of ADC Kentrox Industries.

Kentrox
Kentrox is a registered trademark of ADC Kentrox Industries.

TDM Bus
The TDM bus in the primary cabinet provides communication between

components in the CRC and the RCC. It can be expanded to
accommodate growth cabinets.
MSC Interface
The primary cabinet is connected to the MSC via T1/E1 facilities. The
number of facility interfaces is determined by the number of voice
circuits and data links that the cell supports. Voice traffic is transmitted
between the cell and the MSC over packet pipes. Control and status
information is transmitted via one or two data links.
Reference
For more information on the CSU see 2-29.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 8

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Minicell Omni Configuration
Minicell Omni Configuration
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Omni Configuration
Omni Diagram
In Omni configuration, the three CDMA Clusters are logically

connected to provide one CDMA train.
The diagram below is a schematic of the signal paths from the CDMA
cluster to the antenna.
Shelf
CDMA Cluster
CDMA RF Train
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

3 - 9
Minicell Three-Sector Configuration
Minicell Three-Sector Configuration
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Three-Sector Configuration
In a Three-Sector configuration, each cluster can be interconnected to

all sectors, enabling flexibility and features such as softer handoff.
3-Sector Diagram
The diagram below is a schematic of the signal paths from the CDMA
clusters to the antenna for the 3-sector configuration.
Shelf 0
CDMA Cluster
CDMA RF Train
Shelf 1
CDMA Cluster
CDMA RF Train
Shelf 2
CDMA Cluster
CDMA RF Train
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 10

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Signal Path Distribution
Signal Path Distribution
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Packet Pipe Allocation
CE Pooling
Signal Path Diagram
Every CCC that has Traffic CEs is assigned a Packet Pipe to carry
traffic to/from the MSC.
CE pooling enables cross-connection between Clusters. Consequently,
there is no relationship between the packet pipe and the RF sector that
is being broadcast by the BCR equipped on the corresponding shelf. As
a result, to reach a given level of service, a cluster may need to be
equipped with more CEs than required from RF engineering
computations.
The diagram below shows the signal path cross connections between
the ACUs and the BCRs.
TDM Bus
CSC
BIU
CCU
ACU
BIU
CCU
B
C
R
ACU
BIU
CCU
B
C
R
B
C
R
ACU
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

3 - 11
15 MHz Reference Frequency Distribution
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Reference signals are generated by the active Reference Frequency and

Timing Generator. These signals are synchronized by a GPS signal.
The GPS receiver is in the Crystal Oscillator.
Reference Frequency
Distribution Diagram
The diagram below shows the distribution of the reference signal to the
Minicell.
J7
J7
RFTG
Rubidium
Crystal
P25
1
:
6
3
4
5
6
GPS
J4
P47
2:4
P44
1
:
3
P36
RU2 (S1D1)
P28
P15
RU5 (S3D0)
P27
P13
P26
P11
P48
P52
RU4 (S2D1)
RU3 (S2D0)
RU1 (S1D0)
P49
P54
P50
P56
P46
1
:
6
CTU 1 (S2P)
CTU 0 (S1P)
P61
P75
P60
P59
P73
SCT 0
P70
3
4
BCR 1
P58
P68
SCT 1
P57
P64
BCR 2 CRC2
5
6
2-to-4 Splitter
P38
SIP
Timing Signals
P29
RU6 (S3D1)
CTU 2 (S3P)
J7
Signal Divider
P39
P34
P45
P40
P30
J4
P35
P37
P31
BCR 0
CRC0
CRC1
50 ohm
terminator
Reference signals are fed through dividers to four different groups of

circuits:
Receiver Units
CDMA Transmit Units
Baseband Combiner/Radio and the Sync Clock and Tone boards
Side Interface Panel for distribution to the Growth Cabinets.
Timing signals are routed out of the P1 connector (RS485 connector) to

provide timing to each individual frame.
The primary cabinet is equipped with one 2-to-4 splitter. The splitter
has two inputs, but only one is present at a time (The Rb oscillator is
the primary input unless it is down, in which case the XO ocillator
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 12

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
becomes the primary.). The function of the 2-to-4 splitter is to split the
incoming 15 MHz reference signal into four separate output signals for
the RU, CTU, CRC complexes, and growth frame.
1-to-3 Splitter
The primary cabinet is equipped with one 1-to-3 splitter. The 1-to-3
splitter splits the 15 MHz reference signals from the 2-to-4 splitter into
three separate signals for CTUs in the primary cabinet.
1-to-6 Splitter
The primary cabinet is equipped with two 1-to-6 splitters. Each splits
the 15-MHz reference signal from the 2-to-4 splitters into six separate
signals for the RU and the CRC complexes.
1-to-2 Splitter
There are six 1-to-2 splitters, not part of the reference signal, which
split the receive signals from the RU to three separate signals for the
CRC complex in the primary cabinet and growth cabinet. Three are
assembled together so there are 2 assemblies each containing three
1-to-2 splitters.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

3 - 13
Power Distribution
Power Distribution
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
24 Volt Power Source
220 Volt Power Source
The PCS Minicell requires a +24 V DC and 220 V AC power source.

The following applies to the +24 V DC power source:
The primary frame is supplied by five pairs of +24 V DC and +24

return (RTN) feeds from the power cabinet.
Power cables are first connected to the terminal block on the PDA
and then to the DC power conditioners.
Each set of power and return cables is then connected to the

optional feed through capacitors for Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) protection.
The +24 V DC power feeds are then distributed to their respective

circuit breakers, while the +24 RTN connects to a common bus
bar on the circuit breaker panel assembly which is isolated from
the frame ground.
The +24 V DC power is distributed to the different components in

the system from these breakers.
In addition to DC power, the PCS CDMA Minicell also requires AC

power for the heating elements of the heat exchanger; 220 V AC power
is supplied to the primary frame by the power cabinet.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 14

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Power Distribution
Power Distribution
Diagram
The diagram below shows the +24-V power distribution in the

Minicell.
+ 24v from DC Power Plant

5
24v RTN to DC Power Plant
DC Power Conditioner
Terminal Lugs
35 A
35 A
35 A
35 A
Feeder Circuit Breakers

Lightning Protectors
EMC Feed-through Capacitors
Terminal Lugs
5
Transient Capacitors
2
2
2
Circuit
Breakers
220AC
CRC 0
CB20 (25A)
CB19 (10A)
CB18 (25A)
CB17 (10A)
CB16 (25A)
CB15 (25A)
CB14 (5A)
CB13 (15A)
CB12 (2.5A)
CB1 (7.5A)
CB2 (5A)
CB3 (5A)
CB4 (5A)
CB5 (15A)
CB8 (2.5A)
CB9 (7.5A)
CB10 (10A)
CTU 0
CRC 1
CTU 1
CRC 2
CTU 2
RFTG Side 0
CB6 (5A)
RCC Side 0
CRTU
CTU Shelf - PCU1 (15v )

Fan 0
Fan 1
RFTG Side 1
CB7 (5A)
RCC Side 1
CSU Shelf
1
G
2
CTU Shelf - PCU2 (15v)

CB11
Heat Exc. Fans
Heat Exchanger
Lightning Protector
Power Distribution
Assembly Diagram
Transient Capacitor Ground Bus
35 A
The diagram below shows the power distribution assembly.

AC Feeder
Antenna Interface
DC Feeder
Tx
S3p S3g S2p S2g S 1p S1g RF Tes t
Rx/dx
6
Gnd L1
Gps
S 3d0 /pS3 d1/g S2 d0/p S2 d1/g S 1d0/ p S 1d1 /g
L2
240 Ac
3
2
Dc Feed
1
Pw r
Cab
Alar ms
Power Cabinet Alarm Access Hole

T1 Facilities Access Hole
External User Alarm
Access Hole
T 1/e1
Ex t
U ser
Al arm s
Antenna Receive Connection

For GPS
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

3 - 15
Power Distribution
Note
The diagram depicts the 3-sector Minicell. The omni Minicell is quite
different.
Panel Description
The panel consists of the following components:
Antenna lightning protector (also known as antenna interface)

(14)
DC power conditioner (5)
AC power conditioner (1)
+24-volt return common bus bar (1)
Transient capacitors (5)
0.25-inch copper grounding plate with grounding studs and

terminal blocks.
The circuit breaker panel distributes the DC and AC power in the

cabinet through the circuit breakers. The components used in the circuit
breaker panel are shown in the table below.
Component Name
Qty
25A Circuit Breaker (CRC)
15A Circuit Breaker (RCC)
20A Circuit Breaker (CTU)
10A Circuit Breaker (15 V PCU)
5A Circuit Breaker (RFTG and Fans)
5A Circuit Breaker (CRTU and CSU)
10A AC Circuit Breaker (Heat Exchanger)
Circuit breaker values in this table depend on the version of PDA the
customer might have.
Powering Sequence
If it becomes necessary to power down one of the radio cabinets, the

prescribed sequence is to turn off all the BCR faceplate switches, then
turn off the circuit breakers in the order CB19, CB17, CB15, CB20,
CB18, CB16, and the remaining circuit breakers from CB1 to CB14.
To power the radio cabinet back up, the prescribed sequence is CB1 to
CB20, and then the BCR faceplate switches.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 16

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Power Distribution
Whenever it is necessary to turn the power off on a radio cabinet, it will

be necessary to wait at least 15 minutes after power has been restored
before the RFTGs can be put back into service.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

3 - 17
Network Facilities Interface
Network Facilities Interface
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
T1 Facilities Interface
Diagram
The diagram below shows the T1 facilities interface.
OSP
(Network
Side)
OSP (Network Side)

CPE (Terminal Side)
Lightning Protector
Positions for:
Growth I: 1 and 6
Growth II: 5 and 10
Primary: 3 and 8
T
GND
R
Front of
Cabinet
01
06
CPE
(Terminal
Side)
05
. 10
11
15
16
20
21
Receive CSU Lightning Protector

Power Cabinet Alarm Protectors
External User Alarm Protectors
. 25
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
XMT to TELCO
RCV From Telco
Transmit CSU Lightning Protector
6 7 8 9 10 6 7 8 9 10
From CSU
To CSU
11 12 13 14 15 11 12 13 14 15
16 17 18 19 20 16 17 18 19 20
21 22 23 24 25 21 22 23 24 25
Description
Punch downs 3 and 8 for Primary T1/E1

Punch downs 1 and 6 for Growth I T1/E1
Punch downs 5 and 10 for Growth II T1/E1
The Network Facilities Interface is connected to the Primary Cabinet

by way of an interface board located at the bottom of the Primary
Cabinet (left hand side front in Minicell Version 2, and right hand side
back in Minicell Version 4). The interface board provides the circuit
path back to the carrier facilities and also provides lightning protection
to this path. Lightning protectors plug into one half of the board while
alarm punch-down connections occupy the other half.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 18

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
User Alarms
User Alarms
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Alarm Connections
User Alarm Diagram
Setting user alarm connections to open or close on alarm is done by

using the slide switches on a circuit board located in the Primary
cabinet just above the T1 facilities and alarm interface board.
The diagram below shows the user alarm standard cross connect.
EXT ALM 6
AIM0
SIDE
AIM1
SIDE
CLOSE
ON
ALARM
O PE N
ON
A LARM
USER ALARM
STANDARD CROSS CONN EC T
ASSY 847576303
Wiring Options
The user alarms can be wired through slide switches to monitor

equipment alarms in two states:
Open on alarm (normally closed)
Close on alarm (normally open)
More information on alarms is provided in Unit 6.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

3 - 19
Primary to Growth I Cabinet Connections
Primary to Growth I Cabinet Connections
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connections
Signal cables running through the Side Interface Panel connect the
Primary and Growth I cabinets. These cables carry the Receive and
Transmit RF signals, the 15MHz reference, and the Alarm signals. In
addition, there are connections from the CSU in the Primary to the
Growth I DFI, and from the primary RFTG to the Growth I CRC0,
terminating at the SCT board.
24V DC and 240 V AC power is directly provided to the Growth I from
the Power cabinet.
Growth I Cabinet
Connections Diagram
The diagram below shows the Growth I cabinet connections to the

Minicell primary cabinet and the power cabinet.
Up to six Receive Ant.
Up to six Transmit Ant
External User Alarms

T1/E1 Lines
GPS Receive Ant
SIP
Receive (RF)
Transmit (RF)
15 MHz Ref
Growth
Cabinet 1
240 V AC 50/60 Hz
Primary
Cabinet
RS-485 Bus
(RFTG to SCT)
CSU to DFI
Alarms
Power
Cabinet
TDM Bus
Alarms
+24 V DC
240 V AC
+ 24 V DC
240 V AC
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 20

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Growth II Cabinet Connections
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Growth II Cabinet
Connections Diagram
The diagram below shows the Growth II connections to the antennas,

Growth I cabinet, and the power cabinet.
Up to six Receive Ant.
Up to six Transmit Ant
Up to three Transmit Ant.
External User Alarms

GPS Receive Ant
SIP T1/E1 Lines

Receive (RF)
Transmit (RF)
15 MHz Ref
Receive RF
Signals
Growth
Cabinet 2
Growth
Cabinet 1
240 V AC 50/60 Hz
Primary
Cabinet
RS-485 Bus
(RFTG to SCT)
CSU to DFI
Alarms
Power
Cabinet
TDM Bus
Digital &
Control
Signals
Alarms
+24 V DC
240 V AC
+ 24 V DC
240 V AC
+ 24 V DC
240 V AC
Connections
The Growth II cabinet sends digital and control signals to the Primary
through the Growth I cabinet. The Primary cabinet sends RF receive,
digital and control signals to the Growth II cabinet through the Growth
I cabinet.
The 24 V DC and 240 V AC power is directly fed by the power cabinet
to the Growth II cabinet.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

3 - 21
Test Paths
Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Test paths are used to verify that the cell Receive and Transmit control
paths are operating properly. These paths make use of the CRTU unit.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 22

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Example of Test Path: Transmit Path (Simplex

Configuration)
Example of Test Path: Transmit Path (Simplex Configuration)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
One of the tests involves measurement of the transmit signal, both in

incident and in reflected modes. For that purpose, the CRTU receives a
fraction of the signal generated by the BCR and amplified by the CTU
through a coupler connected to the antenna.
The RSP allows the test to be performed on all faces of the antenna.
Test Transmit Path

(Simplex) Diagram
The diagram below shows the test path for a transmission in a simplex
configuration.
CTU
BCR
TX
Upconverter
Power
Amp
TX
Filter
-50 dB
(Frwd)
Coupler
-40 dB
(Refl)
RS-422 control bus
CRTU
CDMA PCS RSP
}
}
other sectors/
antennas
other sectors/
antennas
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

3 - 23
Example of Test Path: Receive Path (Simplex

Configuration)
Example of Test Path: Receive Path (Simplex Configuration)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Measurement of the incident and reflected receive signals is done

through the CRTU, which receives a fraction of the signal received by
the antenna, then sends it to the frequency downconverter through a
coupler connected to the antenna.
The RSP allows the test to be performed on all faces of the antenna.
Test Receive Path

(Simplex) Diagram
The diagram below shows the test path for reception in a simplex
configuration.
BCR
RX
RX Coupler
Filter
LNA / Downconverter
(RX MODULE)
+ -50 dB
(Frwd)
-40 dB
(Refl)
other
...
/
} sectors
diversity
}other
sectors / diversity
...
CDMA PCS RSP

CRTU
RS-422 control bus
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 24

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Example of Test Path: Rx and Tx in a Duplex

Configuration
Example of Test Path: Rx and Tx in a Duplex Configuration
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The CRTU can also be used to measure incident and reflected signals
in case the Minicell is equipped with duplex filters. The complexity of
the diagram reflects the increased number of components affected by
the test beyond those of the test paths for the simplex receive and
simplex transmit. The test path shows:
Transmit filters
Receive filters
Incident and reflected RF energy for:
Test Path Rx and Tx

(Duplex)
Antenna 1
Antenna 2
Reflected and incident RF energy for:
Diversity 0
Diversity 1
The diagram below shows the test path for transmission and reception
in a duplex configuration.
Ant1
RX 1
LNA / Downconverter (RX Module)
RX 0
LNA / Downconverter (RX Module)
Upconverter
TX
Incident Ant1 TX
Reflected Ant1 TX
Reflected Ant2 TX
Incident Ant2 TX
Reflected Div 0 RX
Incident Div 0 RX
Incident Div 1 RX
Reflected Div 1 RX
Power
Ampl.
Duplexer
-50
CDMA PCS RSP
RS-422 Control bus
Rx
-40
TX Module
BCR
C
R
T
U
-50
Ant2
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
} other sectors
} other sectors
} other sectors
} other sectors
other sectors}
other sectors}
other sectors }
Coupler
Tx
-40
Duplexer
-50
Coupler
Rx
-40
other sectors}
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

3 - 25
Functional Tests
Functional Tests
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Test Types
The CDMA Radio Test unit (CRTU) can perform functional tests on
the minicell.
There are several aspects of the minicell which are tested with
functional tests. These are as follows:
Overhead Channels -- Pilot/Sync/Paging
Overhead Channel-- Access Channel
Traffic Path
Pilot Level
Antenna
Single Channel Selective Functional Test
Manual Overhead Channel

Placement
Manual overhead channel placement addresses the issue of overhead

channels being moved to less than optimum locations as a result of
routine diagnostics or fault recovery. This allows a customer to
manually select the location of overhead channels. Once a channel has
been manually placed, it will not be re-migrated by the "Automatic
Overhead Channel Placement Algorithm Feature." Fault recovery or
routine diagnostics, however, can cause the migration of the overhead
channels. At this time, the "Automatic Overhead Channel Placement
Algorithm Feature" will become operable again.
HEH Functions if Overhead

Channels Fail
If any of the overhead channels fail, then the Functional Test (FT) will
inform the Hardware Error Handler (HEH) of the failure. HEH will
then instruct the Maintenance Request Administrator (MRA) to
migrate the overhead channel assignment to a different CE. If HEH
determines that the overhead channel FT has detected three failures on
a minicell within a 15-minute period then HEH will request MRA to
remove the CRTUm from service. The reason for this is that it is
suspected that the CRTUm is faulty and not the CEs. If a faulty
CRTUm is left in-service it could cause overhead channel migration to
migrate through all available traffic CEs and eventually none would be
left to handle calls.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 26

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Functional Tests -- Overhead Channels -- Pilot/

Sync/Paging
Functional Tests -- Overhead Channels -- Pilot/Sync/Paging
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Overhead Channel Test
This test verifies that the cell can transmit overhead channels and that
the mobile can access the overhead channel. The test uses the CRTU.
The overhead channel functional test is used to verify that the pilot,
sync, page, and access special purpose channels are working properly
by establishing a CDMA MOST call. This functional test first checks
the status of the mobile, then instructs the CRTUm to originate a call.
When the call is established, FT requests the status of CDMA overhead
channels from the CRTUm. When the call completes, it demonstrates
the proper operation of the carrier on which the call was made.
Test Overview
Depending on the test command, either one or all faces can be tested.
The test proceeds automatically, as follows:
The CRTU interface (CRTUi) instructs the CRTUm to connect to one

antenna face through the RSP.
.......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The mobile in the CRTUm acquires the pilot, sync, and paging
channels for that face.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The mobile transitions to the system idle state.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
The CRTUi queries the status of the CRTUm.

Result:
If the response indicates that the system is idle, the test has passed.
If the response indicates otherwise, the test has failed.
Pilot/Sync/Paging
Functional Test Diagram
The diagram below shows the overhead channel functional test signal
flows for the pilot/sync/paging channels. The line between the CRTUi
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

3 - 27
Functional Tests -- Overhead Channels -- Pilot/

Sync/Paging
and the RSP and the line between the CRTUi and the CRTUm are
control lines. All other lines are voice.
RCC
PILOT/SYNC
PAGE CEs
MOBILE
CRTUm
CRTUi
C
C
C
Nature of the Test Signals
C
C
U
A
C
U
B
C
R
C
T
U
RSP
C
O
U
P
L
E
R
S
TX
ANT
The signals sent to and received from the CRTUm simulate

communication with a wireless terminal. Because the CRTUm is a
hard-wired mobile, the test signals do not need to be sent over the air.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 28

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Functional Tests -- Overhead Channel-- Access

Channel
Functional Tests -- Overhead Channel-- Access Channel
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
This test verifies that the cell can receive Overhead Channels. The test
uses the CRTU.
Access Channel Functional

Test Diagram
The diagram below shows the signal flows for the functional test of the
overhead channel access channel. The line between the CRTUi and the
RSP and the line between the CRTUi and the CRTUm are control
lines. All other lines are voice.
RCC
MOBILE
CRTUm
CRTUi
CTU
C
C
C
C
C
U
A
C
U
B
C
R
RU
Test Overview
RSP
C
O
U
P
L
E
R
S
TX
ANT
RX
ANT
The test proceeds as follows:
.......................................................................................................................................
The CRTUi performs the pilot/sync/paging tests as before.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
If this test has passed, the CRTUi instructs the CRTUm to dial the
(MOST) directory number.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The Pilot/Sync/Access Channel element receives an over the air

origination message and passes it to the CDMA Cluster Controller.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The CCC instructs the Page Channel to acknowledge the mobile

origination.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

3 - 29
Functional Tests -- Overhead Channel-- Access

Channel
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The Page CE sends an over the air acknowledgment to the mobile.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
The CCC informs the RCC (CRTUi) that the mobile has originated a
call.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The RCC instructs the mobile to release the MOST number, and the
CRTUm releases the call and control of the RSP.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 30

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Functional Tests -- Traffic Path
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
This test checks the entire traffic path in active and idle states, using the
CRTU. The objective of the traffic path functional test is to ensure that
a CDMA traffic path can be established through every traffic CE in the
Minicell and the established path is operational when used in a call.
Resource Usage
In order to perform the traffic path functional test, the CRTUm will
originate a call to a speech handler on the DCS and then the call is
handed-off to the next active non-busy CE in the Minicell. This handoff continues until all active, non-busy traffic CEs are tested. A CDMA
MOST call will be established to the DCS and forced handoff will be
performed to verify the traffic channel functionality. This test is very
resource intensive at the cell as the call is cycled through all CEs. The
design goal is to make this test less resource intensive at the ECP and
DCS and at the same time automate the process of CE selection for
handoff.
Error Handling
When a Traffic Path test is executed, an Overhead Channel test is

performed. If any failures are detected during the execution of the
Overhead Channel portion of the Traffic Path test, then FT will notify
HEH of the failure. HEH will apply the same recovery and migration
strategy as described in the page 26. If the Overhead Channel portion of
the test passes, then the Traffic Path part of the test is executed. If any
CEs fail during the Traffic Path test, then HEH is informed and HEH
will report only to the technician. HEH does not take any recovery
action on failed CEs.
Test Overview
.......................................................................................................................................
The CRTUi selects an antenna face through the RSP.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
The complete Overhead Channel Functional Test is performed.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
The RCC requests message and subscriber validation to the ECP.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

3 - 31
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The ECP:
1.
Identifies the call as a CRTU-designated MOST call
2.
Sends a traffic-channel assignment message to the RCC
3.
Sets up PHV at the switch
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The RCC instructs a CCC to select a specific CE assigned to the antenna

face being tested to handle the CRTU origination.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Traffic Channels
Functional Test Diagram
The RCC queries the status of the CRTUm. The CRTUm returns the
traffic channel state, indicating that the CRTUm is in a talk state.
Handoff procedures follow.
The diagram below shows the signal flows for the functional tests on
the traffic channels. The line between the CRTUi and the RSP and the
line between the CRTUi and the CRTUm are control lines. All other
lines are voice.
RCC
MOBILE
CRTUm
CRTUi
ACCESS MGR/
SWITCH
M
O
S
T
E
C
P
D
F
I
D
F
I
CTU
C
C
C
C
C
U
A
C
U
B
C
R
RU
RSP
C
O
U
P
L
E
R
S
TX ANT
RX ANT
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 32

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Functional Tests -- Pilot Level
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
This functional test provides the technician with the power level (in
dBm) of the CDMA pilot channel. This is an important factor in
determining the physical size of the Minicell coverage area.
Through the automatic initiated request, this test provides continuous
monitoring of the pilot signal strength and will report when the value
becomes out-of -tolerance. This test provides the technician with more
information to help detect and isolate hardware faults within the
Minicell.
Calibration Settings
Test Overview
During the calibration procedure for the Minicell, a value is determined

that compensates for attenuation variances in the CRTUs RF signal
path due to differing cable lengths, unit variations, different cell
configurations, etc. This calibration value is assigned to a translatable
parameter and is used by FT to adjust the CRTUs reported pilot signal
strength.
.......................................................................................................................................
When a Pilot Level test is executed, an Overhead Channel test is

performed.
Result: If any failures are detected during the execution of the Overhead
Channel portion of the Pilot Level test, then FT will notify HEH of the
failure. HEH will apply the same recovery and migration strategy as
described on page 3-26.
.......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the Overhead Channel portion of the test passes then the pilot signal
strength measurement is taken.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the signal is out-of-tolerance then HEH is informed and HEH will

report only to the technician.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

3 - 33
Recovery: No recovery action is done by HEH if the pilot signal is

out-of-tolerance. Also, if the pilot signal is out-of-tolerance, an alarm
indication is set on the CDMA Minicell Equipment status display page.
Pilot Level Functional Test
Description
The test is a modified version of the Overhead Channel FT. Like other
FTs, PL can be executed manually or automatically. Frequency of
automatic (scheduled) PLFT is set in translations.
PLFT Errors and Output
PLFT generates ROP output and alarms on the Status Display Pages
(Cartoon Pages) for out-of-tolerance Pilot Levels. The ROP indicates
the actual measured pilot level value and the expected pilot level value
(calculated by the software, based on amplifier type, pilot dgu, and
BCR attenuation values in translations).
Pilot Level Calibration

Occurrence
The Pilot Levels need to be calibrated when any of these procedures are
performed on the Minicell:
PLFT Diagnostics
Initial load of cell generic or installation of new cell
Changing of components in the RF test path (CRTUm, RSP,

cabling, filters)
Changing of amplifier type, pilot dgu, or BCR attenuation fields in

translations
A failed PLFT will cause the cell status to show a major alarm (red) on
the 2121 page. The 2131 page will show CDMA equipment in trouble
(red). The 2138 page will show the affected CCC and PAF as degraded
(yellow). The PLFT must be executed with ATP results, or the cell
must be stable cleared to clear the alarm.
As with OCFT and TPFT, a manually initiated PL test will generate
ROP output. Scheduled PLFTs run silently unless an error occurs.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 34

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Functional Tests -- Antenna
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Reason for the Test
This test informs the operator when a CDMA transmit antenna is not
operating correctly.
A CDMA antenna can become inoperable for several reasons. The
most common is damage to the antenna from adverse weather. Without
this test the operator might be unaware that there is no transmission
from a sector of a cell which appears to be operating correctly.
CRTU fault Isolation - Antenna Test, commonly referred to as the
Antenna Functional Test (ANT FT) provides a means for maintenance
technicians to verify the proper operation of the CDMA cell sites. ANT
FT provides an alarmed output report on the ROP and an alarm
indication on the status and display page (SDP) when the tests indicate
that the antenna is not operating properly. This feature can be executed
in the manual mode or automatic mode.
Description
The CRTU Transmit Antenna Test is done by comparing the incident

power to the antenna with reflected power from the antenna. The Pilot
Channel shall be measured for this comparison. The incident power
being much larger than the reflected power shows that the transmit
antenna does not have a fault.
The value by which the incident power must be greater than the
reflected power to show that the transmit antenna does not have a fault
will be determined in testing. An expected value is 7 dB, with an
additional allowance for uncertainties in the measurement.
When the CRTU is used for antenna testing in the automatic mode,
results are reported only when the results indicate an antenna fault.
Antenna Test Process
The test is performed on a specified sector by measuring the RF energy

incident to and reflected from the transmit antenna.
.......................................................................................................................................
The CRTU is switched by the RSP between directional couplers that

extract RF energy in the two directions from the transmit antenna.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The CRTU measures the strength of the incident and reflected pilot
signal.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

3 - 35
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the energy reflected from the antenna is excessive, the test indicates
that insufficient RF energy may be being transmitted from the antenna
under test and therefore there may be an antenna fault.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The antenna is not taken out of service if the test fails.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Transmit Antenna Tests on that sector are inhibited and the operator is
notified, who then decides on further maintenance action.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 36

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Functional Tests -- Single Channel Selective
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Reason for the Test
Description
More Information
Single Channel Selective

Functional Test Process
Although this is a functional test, it is not executed as a part of routine

functional testing but on demand by a TI command.
This capability extends the traffic path functional test so that the
operator can isolate a fault along the traffic channel from a specified
CE to a specified sector. In addition, Markov signals will be
transmitted between the CRTU and the CE so that even minor
distortions in the transmission path can be detected.
A typical way to identify a fault on a traffic channel is with the traffic
path functional test, which tests all the equipped CEs in a cell in
sequence. If a fault is detected, however, it is not known in which of the
equipment items on the channel the fault is located. The fault could be
in the CCU, the CCC, the ACU, BCR, or on the path connecting two of
the equipment items. The operator can apply the single channel
selective functional test several times on channels that partly overlap
the channel on which the fault was found. The fault can be isolated on
the basis of which tests succeed and which tests fail. A second way this
test may be used is to verify a repair after it is completed.
For more information see the section "Single Channel Selective
Functional Test" on page 7-22.
For this test, the operator selects the CE, carrier, and sector on which
the test is to be performed and enters this information through a TI
input command. The carrier is specified because a CE may be able to
operate on different carriers. When the cell receives the message
associated with the test, it will perform one of the following:
.......................................................................................................................................
If the CE is idle, the cell will instruct the CRTU to originate a call to a
pre-defined DN. When the cell sees the call origination from the CRTU
mobile, normal traffic channel allocation will be bypassed and the preselected CE is assigned to this call. If the call reaches the talk state, the
test will have passed.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the CE is busy with a call the cell, will attempt to execute the test with
a camp-on or other mechanism. If the attempt is successful, the test
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

3 - 37
described in item 1 will be performed on the CE that is designated;

otherwise the test will be canceled.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the CE is maintenance busy or unequipped, the test will be canceled.

Result:
Possible results returned to the operator are as follows:

1.
The test was satisfactory.
2.
The test was performed but the test identified deficiencies that are
given in the results.
3.
It was not possible to perform the test (together with the reason
why it was not possible to perform the test).
The results of the test will identify the speech handler (SH) in the test
path, the cell, the CE, the CCC, the BBA, the sector, and the carrier.
The CE implies a specific carrier and it is included as a convenience to
the operator. No recovery or fault isolation will be attempted if the test
fails.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 - 38

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Communicating with the PCS

CDMA Minicell
Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Contents

4-3
Objectives - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4
Interfacing with the Minicell
The User Interface - - - - - - - - Access Options to the PCSC - - - Operation and Management Platform
Accessing the OMP - - - - - - - -
4-5
- 4-6
- 4-8
- 4-9
- 4-10
Craftshell Interface and Read Only Printer Basics

Purpose of Craftshell Commands - - - - - - - - Craftshell Commands Syntax - - - - - - - - - - Output Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Sample of Craftshell Listing - - - - - - - - - - Read-Only Printer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
4-12
- 4-13
- 4-14
- 4-15
- 4-16
- 4-17
Status Display Pages Basics

SDP - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Status Display Pages - - - - - - - - - - - - Status Display Pages Linkage - - - - - - - - Accessing Status Display Pages from the OMP
SDP Layout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Video States of SDP Display - - - - - - - - -
4-18
- 4-19
- 4-20
- 4-21
- 4-23
- 4-25
- 4-27
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

4 - 1
APX Index - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SDP 2121 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SDP 2131 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SDP 2138 CDMA Equipment Status Page
Sample Status Display Page - 2139 - - - -
4-30
4-31
4-32
4-33
4-34
RC/V Screens Basics

RC/V Screens Overview - - - - - - - - - - - Access Manager Forms - - - - - - - - - - - 5ESS-2000 Switch Views - - - - - - - - - Example of Switch Views - - - - - - - - - - RC/V Access Manager Forms - - - - - - - - Accessing the RC/V Form - - - - - - - - - - Inserting, Reviewing, or Updating an RC/V Form
Required Fields - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Required Fields -- Results - - - - - - - - - - Getting Help For RC/V Screens - - - - - - - ceqccu Form - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - cell2 Form - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ceqcom2 Form - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ceqface Form - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
4-35
4-36
4-37
4-38
4-39
4-40
4-41
4-42
4-44
4-45
4-46
4-47
4-48
4-49
4-50
Getting Information
4-51
Schematic Drawings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-52
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 2

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Communicating with the PCS CDMA

Minicell
Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Operators need to interface with the Minicell to enter commands and

receive status reports on the condition of the Minicell.
This unit covers the different ways to perform these actions.
SDP/ROP Screens
SDP Reference
The screen images in the graphic below show the 2121 SDP and a
sample of the ROP output.
The SDPs are covered in detail in Chapter 10 of the 401-610-160

manual.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

4 - 3
Objectives
Objectives
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Identifying the Tools
Using the Tools
Several tools are available to support communication between the

Minicell and the PCSC. This lesson is designed to enable students to
identify them and to differentiate the conditions of their use.
This lesson is also designed to enable students to identify the format of
commands and responses for each of the described tools.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 4

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Objectives
Interfacing with the Minicell

Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
The operational status (health) of the PCS CDMA Minicell may be

viewed via the following:
Equipment status read-only reports (ROPs)
Graphical Status Display Pages (SDPs)
A command line interface tool called a craftshell
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

4 - 5
The User Interface
The User Interface
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Electronic Access to the

PCSC
Interfaces Supported at the

PCSC
Electronic access to the ECP at the PCSC can be done through a user
interface, using a laptop computer, provided that the Minicell site is
equipped with a regular telephone line. Depending on configuration
and login authorization, access to the ECP may be provided directly or
through the OMP.
The PCS CDMA Minicell user interfaces are supported by the
AUTOPLEX 1000 system.
Craftshell
This is a command line interface that enables you to perform

diagnostics. Craftshell can be invoked:
Through a dial-up modem, using a communication package, such

as ProComm Plus
Through a data line, using the Unix command TIpdunix at the

Unix prompt.
Status Display Pages (SDP or Cartoon Page)
This is a graphic interface available on the OMP. The cell site is

connected to the PCSC and controlled by the OMP with appropriate
authorization.
Read (Receive) Only Printer (ROP)
This is a one-way interface that provides a running report of activities

seen from the MSC. Display of only those activities that are relevant to
a specific Minicell is possible through specific craftshell commands.
Recent Change/Verify (RC/V) Screens
Forms provide a means to change and view the operating parameters of

a Minicell. Forms are accessed through a command line. Two types of
screens are available from the PCSC:
Craftshell Interface vs.

Status Display Page (SDP)
Forms used for interactions with the Access Manager
Views used for interactions with the 5ESS-2000 Switch.
The craftshell interface and the SDP are two different ways of
obtaining information pertinent to PCS CDMA Minicell performance,
and responding to that information. Although the ways are not the
same, the information that is returned is identical in scope.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 6

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
The User Interface
The craftshell interface demands a higher level of knowledge on the

part of the user, compared to SDPs, but it covers the entire spectrum of
commands that may be needed to perform complex troubleshooting.
The SDPs are simpler to use than the craftshell, and are well designed
to provide a birds eye view of the status of a Minicell. Alarms are
displayed on SDPs and printed to the ROP as soon as they are
activated. Commands and output messages are displayed in real time
on the craftshell and the ROP. However, corresponding updates of SDP
displays are done at preset intervals and may lag by a few minutes
behind craftshell and ROP outputs.
When access to SDP is allowed, specific keystrokes can be used to
toggle back and forth between SDP and craftshell, giving the operator
the flexibility of selecting the best tool for the task at hand.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

4 - 7
Access Options to the PCSC
Access Options to the PCSC
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Two access options are potentially available to the technician:
Direct access to the computer that controls the call processing of

the PCSC and Cell sites
Access through the front-end Operation and Maintenance

Platform (OMP) workstation.
Mode of access is determined by the telephone connection available to

the Minicell.
ECP Access
This mode of access can potentially provide access to all the

functionalities of the switch, including network management, most of
which are not relevant to Minicell maintenance.
OMP Access
This mode of access enables a more precise control of the

functionalities available to the technician.
Reference
More information on the OMP and ECP can be found in the 401-610160 manual.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 8

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Operation and Management Platform
Operation and Management Platform
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Using the OMP
The OMP is a workstation that acts as a front end to the ECP.

From a user perspective, the OMP provides the combined flexibility of
all user interfaces in a multi-tasking environment.
Reference
Adjunct Processor
Provides additional terminal support
Provides off-line processing
Provides enhanced data management
Provides added interfaces to the APX-1000
Main purpose of the OMP is to improve operation and

maintenance effectiveness by providing a single point access to all
user interfaces and multi-tasking from the same terminal.
More information on the OMP can be found in the 401-610-160

manual.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

4 - 9
Accessing the OMP
Accessing the OMP
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Communication with the Minicell is done through the OMP.

Depending on the type of connection installed at the Minicell, that
communication may be through a dial-up line.
Accessing the Craftshell

Interface
Be aware of the following when accessing the craftshell interface:
PC (laptop) software settings:
E-7-1, 9600 baud
Termtype emulation = vt-100, or similar
You may have to set certain Unix environment variables at the

login prompt, to achieve correct terminal behavior. For instance,
you may have to set terminal type (by typing TERM =
<termtype>; export TERM) at the system prompt if this variable is
not present in your user .profile (or .login) file.
Your system administrator will advise you if you must enter

environment variables at the Unix command line.
Your system administrator will explain how to use the history
command, and similar commands, for reviewing entries you have made
at the Unix prompt.
Once logged in, your system displays an AUTOPLEX main menu and
windows that provide a path to the craftshell.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 10

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Accessing the OMP
Craftshell Access Diagram
The graphic below depicts menus the user passes through to access the
craftshell.
1 Autoplex(R) OMP Technican menu

AUTOPLEX(R) System 1000 ECP Access
5ESS(R)-2000 Switch DCS Access
DEFINITY(R) DCS Translations and Maintenance
DEFINITY(R) DCS Hardcopy control
> OMP Status
Miscellaneous Applications
Exit
2 Autoplex(R) System 1000 ECP Access menu
ECP Recent Change/Verify
> ECP Craft Shell
ECP RTR Shell
ECP Control and Display
ECP EAI MCRTms Inc. SunOS 5.5.1 Generic May 1996
ECP ROP Log Viewererase character
ECP Physical ROP (Including PRMs) Log Viewer
Site Dependencies
Number and nature of windows for accessing the craftshell, as well as

access methods, may vary from installation to installation.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

4 - 11
Accessing the OMP
Craftshell Interface and Read Only

Printer Basics
Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
The craftshell provides the most flexible means to input commands

into, and get output messages from, a Minicell. The output messages
occur in response to craftshell commands and ROP output.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 12

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Purpose of Craftshell Commands
Purpose of Craftshell Commands
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Standard Craftshell
Craftshell commands are used to:
Identify operational status
Remove and restore a unit from service
Diagnose a unit
Download Non-Volatile Memory
Stop a command
Initialize a site
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

4 - 13
Craftshell Commands Syntax
Craftshell Commands Syntax
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Craftshell Syntax
Syntax Diagram
Entering commands at the craftshell requires attention to precise

syntax.
The graphic below shows a sample command line and explanations of
the various elements.
Follow strict syntax, punctuation, spacing (space before a numeral) and
capitalization rules.
Action: What is to be performed, e.g., DGN, followed by :.
Identification: Where to perform the task, e.g., cell #, with a space
between the word cell and the cell number, and a comma between
elements.
Options (if applicable), e.g., ucl, preceded by a ;.
Data (if applicable), e.g., tlp, preceded by a :.
DGN: CELL 21,CRTU ;UCL :TLP
Lucent Technologies Cell Site/DCS Input/Output Messages, 410-610107
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 14

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Output Messages
Output Messages
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Output messages are formatted system responses to technician

commands or events in the system.
Output Messages Diagram
The graphic below shows an example of output from the DGN

craftshell command and explanations of the fields.
Include the following fields:
Priority : Alarm (*C = Critical, ** = Major, * = Minor); M = Manual,
A = Automatically generated. Field is blank for informational
message.
Abbreviated time, Message body, Date, Sequence Number.
M 52 DGN:CELL 21 CRTU ATP
05/14/96 08:52:45 #034389
M 52 REPT:CELL 21 CRTU OOS. MANUAL. RMVD
05/14/96 08:52:45 #034390
Output messages are explained in detail in Lucent documentation Cell

Site/DCS Input/Output Messages, 401-610-107.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

4 - 15
Sample of Craftshell Listing
Sample of Craftshell Listing
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Sample Listing Graphic
A craftshell display is a continuous listing of input commands and

output messages.
The graphic below shows the listing received when issuing the
OP:CELL craftshell command.
M 47 OP:CELL 1 COMPLETED
DEVICE - tty&
02/17/97 47 #001816
M 47 OP:CELL 1 DL 0 CONNECTED
DEVICE - tty&
02/17/97 47 #001817
M 47 OP:CELL 1 DL 1 CONNECTED
DEVICE - tty&
02/17/97 47 #001818
M 47 OP:CELL 1 STATUS & CONTROLS
BOOT ALW, CP ALW, PH MON ALW, PH STATE ACTIVE, DL(S) UP
FORWARD SETUP CHANNEL CONTROL NORMAL (INH)
DEVICE - tty&
02/17/97 47 #001821
dgn:cell 1, crtu
Craftshell Syntax
Entering commands at the craftshell requires attention to precise

syntax. See page Craftshell Commands Syntax: page 4-14 for the
syntax
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 16

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Read-Only Printer
Read-Only Printer
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
The Read-Only Printer (ROP) is a continuous report of system

activities, that can be configured by a Selective Cell Site Messages
command from a Minicell to the PCSC to display only data related to
the operation of a Minicell or a group of Minicells.
Appearance
The ROP appears as a craftshell output.
Sample ROP Output
The graphic shows a selected portion of the ROP output as samples of

the messages displayed.
M 05 RST:CELL 169 CRTU, COMPLETED, ALL TESTS PASSED

10/22/96 14:05:20 #084038
* 05 OP:CELL 169, CRTU, ACTIVE
10/22/96 14:05:20 #084039
Report Types
There are two types of output reports: solicited and spontaneous.

Solicited reports are generated in response to the commands entered by
the technician. Spontaneous reports are generated without any input
from the technician; they are initiated automatically by system events
or conditions. An example of a spontaneous report is the reporting of a
cell site hardware error and corresponding automatic recovery action.
Report Access
The HEH and CPFail messages are printed at the ROP and may reflect
problems not displayed on the SDPs. The ROP printouts should be
reviewed at least once a day for CDMA-related messages. To make this
easier, tools will be provided which will allow these messages to be
filtered from the normal stream of ROP messages and routed to a
CDMA log file at the OMP. These tools will also analyze these
messages and sort and summarize them by specific equipment unit.
Reference
Format and meaning of ROP output are explained in the Lucent

Technologies AUTOPLEX 1000 Output Messages Manual, 401-610107.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

4 - 17
Read-Only Printer
Status Display Pages Basics

Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Reference
SDPs present predesigned scenarios for accessing and/or viewing a

Minicell operating condition.
More information on the SDPs can be found in 401-610-160.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 18

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
SDP
SDP
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
SDP Sample
SDPs provide a user friendly tool to monitor the status of a Minicell,

using a consistent display format.
The graphic below is a sample of the 2131 SDP.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

4 - 19
Status Display Pages
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
SDPs provide a birds-eye view of the Minicell site.

Status display pages (SDPs) graphically represent the hardware and
software subsystems of the Minicell site, DCS, ECP, and IMS. They
also provide tools for interaction between the Switch and the Minicell.
SDPs make extensive use of colors and flashing indicators (status
display pages are often referred to as cartoon pages).
Interaction with the Minicell
Interaction with the Minicell can be done through:
Poke commands
Craftshell commands
Depending on the volume of activities on the network, there may be a

noticeable delay between completion of a command and its
acknowledgment by display on the SDP.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 20

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Status Display Pages Linkage
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SDP Links Diagram
The diagram below shows the summary of page access syntax for the
more common pages and information associations between pages.
TRUNK
Alarm
2132,c
CellSoftware
2100
CELL
Alarm
Index
2150,d
TRKGRP
2130 or 2121
Cell
2131,c
2151,d,t
TRKGRP
2134,c
DS-1
2136,c
LAC
CCU, CE Trouble
DCS
Trouble
Cell Trouble
Relationships between
2138,c
CDMA
2152,d,t
TRKGRP
Packet Pipe Trouble

CCC Trouble
2139,c,n
CCU, CE
SDPs are linked according to a hierarchy.

SDPs show the technician/operator the inner workings of the PCS
CDMA Minicell system. The SDPs allow the technician to do the
following:
View system status
Enter commands
Receive system responses
The commands entered by the technician/operator offer the ability to

communicate detailed and specific instructions to any of the Minicell
sites serving the ECP. If the ECP receives a fault from any Minicell site
in the network, that fault is graphically indicated, using colors to
indicate levels of severity. While the fault is in progress, the technician
invokes one or more SDPs to further isolate the Minicell site that
communicated the fault condition.
Tasks Performed with
SDPs
SDPs provide an easy method of entering maintenance commands for

accomplishing the following tasks:
Removing (deactivating) units
Restoring (activating) units
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

4 - 21
Accessing Status Display

Pages
Diagnosing (testing) units
Generating status output message reports on units
Inhibiting/Allowing:
Audits
Audit/HEH output
Call processing
Forward setup channel control
Functional tests
Interrupts
Routine diagnostics
Diversity error imbalance output
Depending on which system function needs analysis, you can call up

the associated SDP from the Operations and Management Platform
(OMP) or from the MCRT as described in the following procedures. To
access an SDP, enter the SDP number at the command line of any SDP
that is already in view. SDP access is not hierarchical; you can access
any SDP from any other SDP.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 22

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Accessing Status Display Pages from the OMP
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Backing Out of the Menus
Status display pages can be accessed from the OMP or the MCRT.
To back out of the menus, simultaneously press the Control-f and 6
keys. To exit, simultaneously press the Control-f and 3 keys.
Procedure 4-1. Accessing Status Display Pages from the OMP
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This is one method of accessing the SDPs. Local practice may vary.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select OMP Software Applications from the Workspace menu.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select AUTOPLEX System 1000 ECP Access from the OMP

Technician menu.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select ECP Control & Display from the AUTOPLEX System 1000
ECP Access menu.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The cursor is positioned at the CMD< line and appears as CMD<

The CMD function allows graphic display and menu command input;
MSG allows message keyboard input.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
To open the display, enter the unique status display page number
(command) and press RETURN.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
The requested SDP is displayed.

Procedure 4-2. Accessing Status Display Pages from the MCRT
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This is one method of accessing the SDPs. Local practice may vary.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

4 - 23
...........................................................................................................................................................................
At MCRT, press F2 (NORM DISP) function key.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select command mode by pressing the F3 (CMD/MSG) function key.

The CMD< prompt is displayed (Cursor is in CMD input area).
The CMD function allows graphic display and menu command input;
MSG allows message keyboard input.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
To open the display, enter the unique status display page number
(command) and press RETURN.
Status display page numbers (commands) are identified (listed) under
the CMD heading on the System 1000 index pages (100 - Page
Index page and/or 2100 - APX Index page).
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Result
The status display page is shown.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 24

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
SDP Layout
SDP Layout
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
General Layout
The following identifies the different areas of an SDP:
A = Header area
1st line - ECP location, generic release, terminal id, date,

time & time zone
2nd & 3rd lines - system status
B = Command entry (CMD<) to enter poke commands on this

line
C = Page contents area
D = Scrolling area
SDP Sample
A
B
User enters messages in Craft Shell mode
The graphic below shows a sample of a Status Display Page to show

the main screen area is an SDP.
Dublin ECP 01
APX-1000 L7.0
SYS EMER CRITICAL
MAJOR
MINOR
OVERLOAD SYS INH
CU
CU PERPH
CMD<
CMD
PAGE TITLE
2130
Site Status
2120
- Cell
APX System
StatusSummary
2131,c
Cell
c Equipment
Status
2121
- System
Equipage Summary
2132,c
- Cell c Software
Status
2133 ,
c
SI
Cell c VRG Status
2133,c,sg,a SII
Cell c VR Status
2134,c
- Cell c DS-1 Unit Status
2135,c
- Cell c LC/SU/BC
Status
2136 ,
c
- Cell c LAC Status
2137,c
- Cell c OTU/LMT Status
2138,c
- Cell c CDMA Equipment Status
2139,c,n - Cell c CCC n CCU Status
ttyj-cdJ TTY 07
IMS
CELL
CDN
CCS7
LINK
MSC
DCS
TRUNK
2100 - APX INDEX
SYS NORM
CMD
PAGE TITLE
2142,d
TMS/MC
Status
2140
- DCS
DCS d
Status
Summary
2143,d
DCS
2141,d
- DCS d
d DS-1/AFAC
Equipment Status
Status
2150,d
- DCS d TRKGRP Summary
2151,d,t - DCS d TRKGRP t Status
2152,d,t - DCS d Cell TRKGRP t Status
2160
- CDN Status Summary
2170
- Direct Networked-MSC Summary
2171,m
- MSC m [B]X.25 Link Status
2180
- CCS7 Link Set Summary
2181
- CCS7 Link Set Specifics
2182
- CCS7 Link Summary
2183
- CCS7 Link Specifics
2184
- CCS7 Point Code SS Status
REPT APXSHL TERMINAL IN SERVICE
SDPs You Use with the

PCS CDMA Minicell
While there are dozens of SDPs that are available at the MCRT for
analyzing PCS equipment, the following are most useful in analyzing
PCS CDMA Minicell performance. These SDPs are:
2100 - APX Index Page
2121 - Minicell Site Status Summary
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

4 - 25
SDP Layout
2131 - Minicell Equipment - Status Page
2132 - Minicell Software Status Page
2134 - Minicell DS-1 Unit Status Page
2136 - Minicell LAC Status Page
2138 - Minicell CDMA Equipment Status Page
2139 - Minicell CCC CCU Status Page
2150 - TRKGRP Summary Page
2152 - DCS Minicell TRKGRP Status Page
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 26

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Video States of SDP Display
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Color Scheme
SDP Video States Table
In the PCS CDMA Minicell, the color red on an SDP generally

signifies a non-normal condition; the color green denotes normalcy.
Other background colors are used to signify specific conditions that
may or may not require attention.
The graphic below lists the more common video states seen on Status
Display Pages.
Critical: white on red
critical
Major : white on red
major
O.O.S.: black on red steady
Minor: white on red
minor
Unavail.: black on purple steady
unav
Standby: white on blue steady
stby
oos
Normal: black on green steady
<none>
Alarm: white on red flashing
alarm
Active: black on green steady
act
Trouble: white on red steady
trbl
Steady or Flashing
Indicators
The table below shows the alarm types for indicators.
Logical
State
Text
Displayed
Color
Terminal
critical alarm
<none> or critical
white on red
major alarm
<none> or major
white on red
minor alarm
<none> or minor
white on red
alarm
alarm
white on red
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

4 - 27
IndicatorsBlack Text
The table below shows the alarm types for indicators with black text.
Logical
State
Text
Displayed
Color
Terminal
system normal
<none>
black on green
active
act
black on green
out-of-service
oos or <none>
black on red
unavailable
unav
black on cyan
initialization pending
Init
black on magenta
overload
ovld
black on white
diagnose
dgn
black on red
inhibit
inh
black on white
indeterminate
indt or <none>
black on yellow
busy
busy
black on green
warning
warn or <none>
black on yellow
soft fault
soft
black on yellow
DS1 alarm
ds1a
black on red
OOS limit exceeded
oos_ex
black on red
WARNING isolated
WARNING or
black on yellow
<none>
IndicatorsWhite Text
The table below shows the alarm types for indicators with white text.
Logical
State
Text
Displayed
Color
Terminal
unknown
<none>
white on black
standby
stby
white on blue
trouble
trbl
white on red
equipped
equip
white on black
growth
grow
or <none>
white on magenta
black on blue
initializing
init
white on magenta
idle
idle
white on black
reverse busy
rbsy
white on red
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 28

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
assigned
asgn
white on magenta
transient
tran
white on red
guard
gard
white on red
periodic reset
rset
white on red
audit
aud
white on magenta
no_psa (no
pilot/sync/access)
<none>
white on red
normal
norm
white on green
out-of-service isolated
OOS ISOL
white on red (Ring)
out-of-service normal
OOS NORM
white on red (Ring)
arr_oos
<none>
white on red
IndicatorsColored Text
The table below shows the alarm types for indicators with colored text.
Logical
State
Text
Displayed
Color
Terminal
off-line
OFL
blue-green on red (Ring)
arr_warning
<none>
blue on yellow
blocked
<none>
blue on yellow
arr_active (automatic <none>

radio reconfiguration)
green on black
unequipped
or <none>
magenta on black
red on yellow (Ring)
OTU alarm
otu
red on yellow
camp_on
camp_on or <none>
red on green
LAC alarm
lac or <none>
red on yellow
no_page
<none>
yellow on red
uneq
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

4 - 29
APX Index
APX Index
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2100 Snapshot Description
SDP Index Graphic
The 2100 - APX Index page lists all the display pages that are
accessible for the application.
The graphic below is SDP 2100: the APX INDEX.
Dublin ECP 01
APX-1000 L7.0
SYS EMER CRITICAL
MAJOR
MINOR
OVERLOAD SYS INH
CU
CU PERPH
CMD<
ttyj-cdJ TTY 07
IMS
CELL
CDN
CCS7
LINK
MSC
DCS
TRUNK
2100 - APX INDEX
SYS NORM
CMD
PAGE TITLE
2120
- APX System Status
2121
- System Equipage Summary
2130
- Cell Site Status Summary
2131,c
- Cell c Equipment Status
2132,c
- Cell c Software
Status
2133,c
- SI
Cell c VRG Status
2133,c,sg,a SII
Cell c VR Status
2134,c
- Cell c DS-1 Unit Status
2135,c
- Cell c LC/SU/BC
Status
2136,c
- Cell c LAC Status
2137,c
- Cell c OTU/LMT Status
CMD
PAGE TITLE
2140
- DCS Status Summary
2141,d
- DCS d Equipment Status
2142,d
- DCS d TMS/MC Status
2143,d
- DCS d DS-1/AFAC Status
2150,d
- DCS d TRKGRP Summary
2151,d,t - DCS d TRKGRP t Status
2152,d,t - DCS d Cell TRKGRP t Status
2160
- CDN Status Summary
2170
- Direct Networked-MSC Summary
2171,m
- MSC m [B]X.25 Link Status
2180
- CCS7 Link Set Summary
2181
- CCS7 Link Set Specifics
2182
- CCS7 Link Summary
2138,c
- Cell c CDMA Equipment Status 2183
- CCS7 Link Specifics
2139,c,n - Cell c CCC n CCU Status
2184
- CCS7 Point Code SS Status
Legend
The APX INDEX gives a summary of the syntax to access a given SDP
and a description of the information provided on that SDP.
SDP code Description
SDP Access Example
Physical Antenna Face
Minicell Site Numbers
DCS Number
CDMA Cluster Controller Number
sg
Server Group
Trunk Group Number
VR
Voice Radio
VRG
Voice Radio Group
Mobile Switching Center
To view CDMA equipment status for cell 81, enter the command:
2138,81
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 30

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
SDP 2121
SDP 2121
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Snapshot Description
The 2121 - System Equipage Status page displays the disposition of the
Minicell sites.
2121 Sample
The graphic below is a sample of the 2121 SDP. Each cell is shown by
the cell site number using the color codes (4-27) to indicate the cell
status.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

4 - 31
SDP 2131
SDP 2131
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2131 Snapshot Description
The 2131 - Minicell Equipment Status page displays the configuration

of the Minicell site hardware units and provides a status summary of
each unit or group of units.
In addition, this page also has maintenance commands which can be
used to:
2131 Sample
Change the Minicell hardware configuration
Generate a Minicell status output message report
Dump the Minicell maintenance request administrator queue

(MRAQ)
The graphic below shows the 2131 SDP. The status of various
equipment groups is shown using the color codes (4-27).
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 32

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
SDP 2138 CDMA Equipment Status Page
SDP 2138 CDMA Equipment Status Page
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Screen
Fields of the 2138 SDP
The 2138 and 2139 SDPs are the only CDMA specific pages.
The diagram below shows the 2138 Status Display Page.
Fields of interest in the 2138 SDP:
Tells which CCC is equipped and its status
Gives the operating channel number (set in translations) for the

BBA
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

4 - 33
Sample Status Display Page - 2139
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Screen
The screen image is used as an example to show the general look of

these screens. The 2139 screen was chosen specifically because it
changed substantially from an earlier ECP release.
The graphic below is a sample of an SDP with the areas of interest
noted with the callouts.
1
2
Fields
Features of interest (the number of the field corresponds to the number

in the diagram):
1.
SDP screen number, cell number, and ccc in the upper right corner
2.
CCUs (TCU or ECU) are displayed across the top of the table
3.
CEs (0 - 9 for the ECU) are displayed down the table
With the cross connect of the CRC shelves, any channel element can be
used for the various functions. In this example the psa (Paging, Sync,
Access) and page for each of the Physical Antenna Faces (PAF) occur
as the first six CEs of the first CCU.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 34

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
RC/V Screens Basics

Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Minicell configuration data, ranging from its operating frequencies to

its equipage, is stored in a database. Any change in that Minicell
configuration must be reflected in its database. This is done through
interactive Recent Change / Verify (RC/V) screens.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

4 - 35
RC/V Screens Overview
RC/V Screens Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose of the RC/V

Screens
RC/V Screen Functions and
Features
RC/V screens provide the user interface to a Minicell database.
Recent Change/Verify (RC/V) screens are used to change and

check on the configuration of a cell.
All RC/V screens share the same look and feel.
Inputs to the cell database corresponding to a given configuration

are called translations.
Some of the changes are service affecting.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 36

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Access Manager Forms
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Screen Formats
5ESS-2000 Switch Views
Reference
Forms are used to access the Access Manager, to view and set the
Minicell operating parameters.
Two different screen formats are used to access the 5ESS-2000 and the
Access Manager:
Switch screen views relate to the 5ESS-2000 operating parameters
Access Manager forms relate to the Minicell operating parameters
The RC/V screens are grouped into 28 classes for accessing the 5ESS2000 switch.
The forms of particular interest to the Minicell functioning are as
follows:
ecp
Executive cellular processor
cell2
Basic Minicell equipage
ceqcom2
Specific Minicell equipage
ceqface
Specific Minicell face equipage
ceqccu
Specific Minicell CDMA CCU equipage.
See Lucent Technologies 235-118-251 for RC/V procedures.

For the recommended recommended translation parameter values for
CDMA look up the CTSO Fax Flashes and Bulletins on the CD-ROM.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

4 - 37
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Use of Switch Views
Switch views define the configuration of the switch that controls a

Minicell. Given the fact that they make it possible to change an entire
system configuration, access to views is highly controlled.
Switch views are rarely used for cell site maintenance. One instance of
access is as part of a cell update that requires re-configuration at the
switch, such as change in packet pipe size to accommodate new CCU.
Access to the switch views will normally be done under the control of a
switch technician.
Switch View RC/V Graphic
Reference
The graphic below is a sample of the Recent Change and Verify

Classes for the 5ESS switch.
For more information on the switch views see Lucent Technologies

401-610-036.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 38

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Example of Switch Views
Example of Switch Views
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Format
Switch views have a header that resembles SDP headers. The body of
the view lists and displays the value of the switch database fields that
are covered by that view.
The lower part of the view is a craftshell command line.
Switch Views Sample
The graphic below is a sample of a 5ESS switch view.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

4 - 39
RC/V Access Manager Forms
RC/V Access Manager Forms
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RC/V Forms layout
The graphic shows the common areas to the RC/V forms.
Form Name
User Prompt
Screen Number
Form Fields
Help Message
or System Status
Form Essentials
The Common Look
All RC/V forms share the same look and feel, and display three
essential elements:
1.
User Prompt - an AUTOPLEX system feature that points you to a

field in which you may enter information
2.
RC/V Form Fields - place holders that store and display RC/V
information
3.
Help Message or System Status - Context-sensitive text that

prompts you to enter a value in a field or provides system-level
information
Forms are arranged in screens, each of which contains a number of

fields.
Screen numbers are displayed on the top-right corner.
Fields are assigned field numbers. The field names are arranged in
columns on the left of the form while the assigned numbers
corresponding data is displayed on the right.
Position of a given field name, on a given screen or field number may
change from time to time to accommodate different software releases.
Reference
For more information on the access manager views see Lucent

Technologies 401-610-036.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 40

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Accessing the RC/V Form
Accessing the RC/V Form
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
RC/V Access Screen
Access to any RC/V form requires input of the form name at the
prompt of a data entry screen.
This screen accepts legitimate values for RC/V screen names. Entering
a question mark (?) will list all allowed values.
Procedure 4-3. Procedure to Access RC/V Forms
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To access an RC/V form:

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Type the form name at the prompt

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Press Enter
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

4 - 41
Inserting, Reviewing, or Updating an RC/V

Form
Inserting, Reviewing, or Updating an RC/V Form
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Non-Updatable Parameter
List
When accessing the RC/V Forms, the user must declare if they are
going to insert, review without changing, or update information in the
form.
All the translation parameters can be changed and 'updated' through
RC/V screens. The translations will then be downloaded to the cells.
However, some of the translations will not take effect immediately, due
to the need to reset the hardware or due to 'camp-on' for the live calls.
These parameters are classified as 'non-updatable' parameters.
The 'non-updatable' TR (Trunk reservation) parameters eventually will
take effect through TR and/or the MRA audit. It may take a long time,
depending on how soon the audits come up. In addition, the audits have
up to five minutes (camp-on time) to reset the maintenance objects
before killing the live calls for the service-affecting TR parameter to
take effect. It may be possible to unconditionally restore the associated
maintenance objects or stable clear the cell to speed up the update on
the TR parameters. The actions described in the non-updatable
parameter list apply to 'equipped' maintenance objects only. For
'unequipping', the unit should be removed from service. Audits will
change the status of the unit from OOS to unequipped and clear all the
necessary software status fields.
This list can be found on the CD-ROM in the section on CTSO Fax
Flashes and Bulletins.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 42

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Inserting, Reviewing, or Updating an RC/V

Form
Insert, Review, or Update
Screen Sample
The sample screen below shows the confirmation screen for the type of
access required on the RC/V screen requested.
Procedure 4-4. Accessing the RC/V Forms
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To insert, review, or update data in an RC/V form:

...........................................................................................................................................................................
First access that form by entering its name at the prompt of the form
access screen. The resulting screen gives the choice of action.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Selection is done by entering the proper letter (I for insert, R for Review,
and U for update) at the prompt.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
The requested form is displayed with the mode selected.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

4 - 43
Required Fields
Required Fields
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Identifying the Required

Fields
Some fields need to be populated with legal data before the form can
display the contents of the Minicell data base. These required fields are
indicated by an asterisk (*).
A field that can be changed by another form is indicated by a (+).
ECP Sample Screen
Reference
The sample screen below is the ecp screen 1 of 15. Only the first field is
required to identify the executive cellular processor accessed.
For more information on the switch views see 401-610-036.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 44

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Required Fields -- Results
Required Fields -- Results
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Completed Form
Once the required fields have been populated, the remaining fields are
automatically filled and displayed on the completed form.
ECP Sample Populated
The screen below shows the ecp screen 1 of 15 populated with the
setup information for Executive Cellular Processor Identification 1.
Getting Help
At any time, help is available from any RC/V form screen. The help
screens are accessed by entering a question mark (?) at the prompt.
Reference

401-610-036.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

4 - 45
Getting Help For RC/V Screens
Getting Help For RC/V Screens
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Sample RC/V Help Screens
Reference
The figure below shows representative help screens.

401-610-036.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 46

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
ceqccu Form
ceqccu Form
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose of the Form
The ceqccu form indicates the status of CCU equipment.
ceqccu Screen Sample
The screen sample below is ceqccu screen 1 of 2 populated with the

shelf equipage settings for cell 168.
Reference

401-610-036.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

4 - 47
cell2 Form
cell2 Form
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose of the Form
The cell2 form is a multi screen form used to make both hardware and
call processing assignments. Screen formats change with the field
displayed.
Failure to properly update the "cell2" RC/V form when transitioning a
system to a PERMANENT CDMA ON state may cause a loss of
CDMA traffic after a RTR initialization of the ECP.
cell 2 Sample Screen
Reference
The screen sample below shows cell2, screen 1 of 14 populated with

the information for cell site number 8. The fields marked with a plus
(fields 2, 3, and 4) are optional.

401-610-036.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 48

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
ceqcom2 Form
ceqcom2 Form
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose of the Form
The RC/V ceqcom2 form contains information concerning Minicell

site equipment configuration, status, and maintenance-related
parameters for an individual Minicell. The values on the ceqcom2 form
take precedence over the values on the ecp form.
ceqcom2 Screen Sample
The screen sample below shows ceqcom2, screen 1 of 13 populated

with settings for cell site number 8.
Reference

401-610-036.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

4 - 49
ceqface Form
ceqface Form
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose of the Form
The ceqface form contains call processing parameters for an individual

face.
ceqface Screen Sample
The sample screen below is ceqcom2, screen 1 of 10 shown populated

with settings for face 3 of cell site number 8.
Reference

401-610-036.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 50

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
ceqface Form
Getting Information
Overview
Purpose
Two sets of information tools will help you to perform your tasks.
These tools are as follows:
The AUTOPLEX documentation on CD-ROM (The interface

for reading information products on the CD-ROM)
The Schematic Drawings (SDs)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

4 - 51
Schematic Drawings
Schematic Drawings
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Schematic Drawings
Sample
Schematic diagrams (SDs) are multi-page (sheet) documents. They

support a particular application. Of direct interest to maintenance
personnel will be the SDs that relate to cabling and connections. These
SDs document the circuit paths used in troubleshooting.
The drawing below shows the drawing identification information
located in the lower right corner of all schematic drawings.
Drawing Size
Sheet Number
Proprietary Information
Issue Number
Product Identification
Schematic
Drawing Number
F
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE
Coordinates
PCS-CDMA
PRIMARY RADIO FRAME
CIRCUIT
LUCENT
Layout
DECEMBER 6, 1995
DWG SIZE
ISSUE
C2
W2
SD-2R-380-01
SHEET
B42
All SDs provide an SD number, a sheet number, and an issue number.

Coordinates to items in the SD are provided in the margin.
Additional information includes proprietary information and product
name.
SD Sheets
SDs are arranged by A to H sheets. These sheets are arranged as

follows:
SD
Sheets
Sheet Name
Sheet Contains
Index
Issue date(s), sheet indices to all SD pages
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 52

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Schematic Drawings
SD
Sheets
Sheet Name
Sheet Contains
FSs (Functional
Schematics)
Graphic information about the circuit(s)
Apparatus Figures
Component specific information, such as AT&T

comcodes and manufacturer numbers
Circuit Notes
Explanation of notes referenced within FSs
Circuit Description
Text description of the circuits appearing in SD2R349 (Note that most SDs do not contain a CD)
Not used in this SD
Not used in this SD
CADs (Cabling
Diagrams)
Specific interconnection cabling information
BDs (Block Diagrams )
High-level interconnections between major units
SD issue number is located on the top right corner of sheet A1.

Sheet A1 contains a count of the total number of sheets in the SD in the
lower right corner of sheet A1.
Page designations, such as A1 or B17, are located on the lower right of
each sheet.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

4 - 53
Schematic Drawings
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 - 54

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
PCS CDMA Minicell

Maintenance
Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
There are essentially two different levels of maintenance:
Preventive (or Routine) maintenance covers the activities

necessary to prevent cell malfunction
Corrective maintenance covers the activities that take place to

correct a cell malfunction.
Excluding housekeeping tasks (leaf and snow removal, cleaning of

filters, etc.), most of the preventive maintenance, such as routine
diagnostics, can be done from the PCSC.
Contents
Maintenance Overview
Operation vs. Maintenance - - - Reasons for Maintenance - - - - The Maintenance Process - - - - Maintenance Targets - - - - - - Required Maintenance Equipment
Domestic Storage - - - - - - - -
Preventive Maintenance
Preventive Maintenance Schedule - - - - - - - - - Radio/Control Equipment Routine Maintenance Tasks
Lucent Technologies Power and Battery Equipment Building and Environmental Equipment - - - - - - Servicing the Heat Exchangers - - - - - - - - - - -
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-13
- 5-14
- 5-17
- 5-20
- 5-21
- 5-23
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

5 - 1
Corrective Maintenance
Test Equipment Maintenance - - - - - - - - - - Precautionary Steps - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Automatic Diagnostic Tests - - - - - - - - - - - Manual Routine Diagnostics - - - - - - - - - - - Maintenance Records - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Corrective Maintenance Triggers - - - - - - - - - Maintenance Actions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Maintenance Units - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Maintenance Commands - - - - - - - - - - - - - Maintenance States - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Examples of Input Commands and Output Messages
Conditional Remove - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Unconditional Remove - - - - - - - - - - - - - Conditional Restore - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Unconditional Restore - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Diagnose Command - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Stop a Diagnostic - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Initialize a Site - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Switch to Redundant Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - Operational Status - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Out-Of-Service State Qualifier -- Purpose - - - - Out-Of-Service State Qualifiers -- Examples - - - -
5-25
5-26
5-27
5-28
5-30
5-32
5-33
5-36
5-37
5-39
5-40
5-41
5-42
5-44
5-45
5-46
5-47
5-48
5-49
5-50
5-51
5-52
5-53
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 2

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Maintenance Overview
Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This unit is designed to enable you to:
Name major maintenance commands
Define maintenance actions and maintenance states
List conditions that trigger a warning message during a restore

process
Identify the conditions under which the diagnose maintenance

action can be applied to a redundant unit in the active state
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

5 - 3
Operation vs. Maintenance
Operation vs. Maintenance
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Perspective
While maintenance and operation involve overlapping activities with a

common goal of maximizing Minicell availability, these functions
correspond to two different perspectives:
Operation relies on sets of procedures (e.g., Standard Operating

Procedures)
Maintenance requires following processes (e.g., diagnostics)
The distinction takes some importance in cases of conflicting

requirements, such as routine maintenance conflicting with operational
staff availability.
Management Issues
Operation involves essentially user issues, such as selection of

personnel or documentation.
Maintenance involves contractual issues, with risks of loss of coverage
if recommended practices are not followed.
A successful maintenance program will optimize the operational costs
of maintenance.
Logistical Issues
One way of keeping maintenance costs down will be to optimize

maintenance logistics. Examples where logistics can be optimized are:
Balancing maintenance workload between the PCSC and the

Minicell
Pooling of test equipment.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 4

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Reasons for Maintenance
Reasons for Maintenance
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Objectives
The purpose of maintenance is to minimize the possibility and effects

of a system failure. To support that purpose, the maintenance process
must be able, in the event of a system failure, to collect information as
to its cause, and to provide the tools necessary to correct the situation.
The objective of the maintenance process is to maximize system
availability at the lowest cost possible. Ways to reduce these costs
include the elimination of unnecessary initialization, diagnostics, and
cell site visits.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

5 - 5
The Maintenance Process
The Maintenance Process
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Maintenance Activities/
Maintenance Levels
Responsibilities
The maintenance process is carried out through different paths:
Preventive (or routine) maintenance is concerned with tasks that

will reduce the probability of failure. Examples of such tasks are
cleaning and monitoring of performance.
Corrective maintenance is concerned with the speedy elimination

of a cause or potential source of failure. An example of corrective
maintenance is the replacement of failing circuit boards.
On-demand maintenance concerns tasks that are performed on a

Minicell, even though the Minicell is still operating properly. An
example of on-demand maintenance is the addition of capacity.
Responsibilities for maintenance are shared between the cell site (that
reports and analyzes any Minicell malfunction to the ECP), the ECP
(that attempts to correct these malfunctions through software), and the
Minicell technician (who performs any required physical intervention).
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 6

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Maintenance Targets
Maintenance Targets
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Facility
PCS CDMA Minicell maintenance addresses specific targets:
Facility
Cabinets
Equipment
Performance and scheduling of facility maintenance (building, antenna,

access roads, fences, etc.) are determined according to local practices,
and may be contracted out.
For instance, maintenance and repairs to the Minicell antenna mast may
be provided by an outside vendor, but Minicell technicians would be
expected to visually inspect the antenna whenever they happen to be at
the cell site. Such inspection would include checking the guy wires,
tower lights, grounding connections, etc.
Cabinets
Equipment
Inspection and Testing
Maintenance of the cabinets (primary and growth radio cabinets, and

power cabinets) involves both physical and functional inspection,
either on schedule or as part of a diagnostic action to respond to an
equipment failure.
In addition to cell specific maintenance tasks, it is recommended that
periodic maintenance be performed on the test and other maintenance
equipment. Such maintenance should be conducted according to
manufacturers instructions. Of critical importance will be the
maintenance and calibration of reference standards, such as calibrated
attenuators used to calibrate performance measurement equipment.
Some of the inspections may involve actual measurements. For
instance, verification of the cell ground connection may require a
measure of its electrical resistance.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

5 - 7
Required Maintenance Equipment
Required Maintenance Equipment
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Radio and Control

Equipment
Power Measurement
Equipment
Building and Facility

Maintenance Equipment
Equipment required for maintenance:
Radio and Control Equipment
Power Measurement Equipment
Building and Facility Maintenance Equipment
Radio and control equipment includes frequency generators, analyzers

(Test Sets), and calibrated connectors and cables.
Test sets can be used to measure and analyze RF power. In addition,
equipment such as multimeters should be available to check the
operation of AC and DC components.
To maintain the Minicell site, it will usually be necessary to have tools
and equipment for general handyman work available at the site.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 8

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Domestic Storage
Domestic Storage
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Material Required
If there is a need to store a Minicell, there are two possible locations to

store the cabinets: sheltered or outdoor. This page describes the
procedures to prepare the primary and growth cabinets for storage.
The following items are required:
Emitters VCI-101, VCI-105, VCI-111
Film, Cor-Pak% EcoWeave (VCI Woven Polyethylene)

(Manufactured by Cortec Corp., 4119 White Bear Parkway, St.
Paul, MN. 55110 USA; Phone (612) 429-1100/Fax (612) 4291122 and may be obtained from a Cortec Distributor.)
(MIL-B-131, Class 1 Barrier Material may be used in place of
EcoWeave VCI Woven Polyethylene.)
Water Resistant Packaging Tape, 2" wide, PPP-T-60, Type 4

(Woven Cloth Backing, Color Class 1, may be obtained from a
local packaging supplier.)
Isopropyl Alcohol, clean white cloths (both may be obtained from

a local automotive store).
When EcoWeave (VCI Woven Polyethylene) is used, the use of VCI101 is unnecessary.
Storage Methods
There are two methods for storing the Primary and Growth Cabinets;
(sheltered is the preferred method):
Sheltered equipment storage buildings or environmentally

controlled storage facilities.
(This method is required and mandatory for ALL indoor cabinets.)
Outdoor unsheltered environment or environmentally

uncontrolled storage facilities.
(This method is NOT permitted for indoor cabinets.)
Regular opening and closing of the cabinet will require the VCI
Emitters to be replaced with new VCI Emitters. When cabinets are to
be stored over 1 year, this process must be repeated.
Before you beginStorage
Guidelines
The following guidelines must be followed for both methods:
Temperature of the cabinets must be between -40 to 65C (-40F

to 149F)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

5 - 9
Domestic Storage
Exposure to 95% relative humidity at 40C (104F) for no longer

than 96 hours.
Atmosphere must be clear of airborne contaminants such as, but

not limited to, oils and salts.
Adequate protective measures must be taken to prevent Physical

Damage to Cabinet.
If this operation is performed outdoors, it must be conducted on a

dry day and all steps in this procedure must be achieved.
If this operation is performed indoors, it must be conducted in a

well ventilated area.
Ensure appropriate environmental protection measures are taken

before opening the front, side, and rear door(s) of the cabinet.
Procedure 5-1.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cabinet Damage
There is a possibility of ESD damage.
Wear the ESD wrist strap stowed inside of the Minicell cabinet
before continuing with the steps in this procedure. Make sure
the ESD wrist strap is grounded to the Minicell cabinet. ESD
plugs are provided both in the front and back of the cabinet.
Cabinet Damage
The components in the cabinet could be damaged by adverse
weather.
If this procedure is performed outdoors it must be conducted on
a dry day and all steps in this procedure achieved.
.......................................................................................................................................
Remove protective wrapping, cushioning, and exterior corner bumpers.

Use Extreme Caution not to scratch, scuff, or scrape cabinet when using
sharp instruments to pierce and remove protective packaging. All
packaging removed must be handled in a manner that is in compliance
with all applicable local, state, and federal recycling regulations.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Install the VCI-105 and VCI-111 on the interior right-hand side as

viewed looking into the cabinet from the cabinet front door. Location
must be approximately 20 inches from the floor and 2 inches from the
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 10

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Domestic Storage
CRC for the VCI-105, and approximately 24 inches from the floor and
2 inches from the CRC for the VCI-111.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If cabinet is installed at cell site and ancillary hardware housing is in

place and rear of cabinet is sealed, skip to the final step.
............................................................................................................................................................................
WARNING
Hazardous Chemicals
Danger of exposure to potentially hazardous chemicals.
Personnel involved with cleaning the cabinet must use
necessary personal protective equipment (PPE), and be
trained in its proper use. The most common ways personnel
could potentially be exposed to the materials listed in these
guidelines are through the skin, inhalation, ingestion, and
through the eyes. The information about the required
personal protective equipment required may be obtained
from material safety data sheet (MSDS).
4
Prepare the cabinet for external protection.
Dampen (Do Not Soak) one entire clean cloth with isopropyl alcohol
(IPA). Wipe the area around the PDA and AIP. Repeat this process until
the final cleaning of the surface leaves no residue on the cloth. After the
area is clean of debris, wipe the cleaned area with a dry cloth and remove
any excess IPA.
All waste generated must be handled in a manner that is in compliance

with all applicable local, state, and federal regulations.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Place external protection.

(This step in unnecessary if cabinet is installed at cell site and ancillary
hardware housing is in place and rear of cabinet is sealed.)
Cut a piece of Film, Cor-Pak EcoWeave (VCI Woven Polyethylene)
or MIL-B-131, Class 1 Barrier Material large enough to cover the PDA
and AIP area.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

5 - 11
Domestic Storage
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Position the drab side of the film facing cabinet.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Fold bottom corners over.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
Place a continuous piece of tape along entire bottom edge (Packaging

Tape, 2" wide, PPP-T-60, Type 4, Woven Cloth Backing, Color Class
1).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
11
Fold top corners over.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
12
Tape right and left sides using a continuous piece of tape overlapping
the bottom tape (Packaging Tape, 2" wide, PPP-T-60, Type 4, Woven
Cloth Backing, Color Class 1).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
13
Insert VCI-101, between film and cabinet (for use only with MIL-B131, Class 1 Barrier Material).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
14
Place a continuous piece of tape along entire top edge overlapping sides
(Packaging Tape, 2" wide, PPP-T-60, Type 4, Woven Cloth Backing,
Color Class 1).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
15
Verify that all seams, corners, and edges are taped.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
16
Unlatch and close cabinet front door and replace side and rear door(s) if
removed.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
The cabinets are prepared for storage for up to one year.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 12

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Domestic Storage
Preventive Maintenance
OverviewOverview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Outside the Minicell
Preventive maintenance is done to prevent cell malfunction and may

identify potential sources of Minicell failures before they interfere with
service. For instance, preventive maintenance may locate a failing
board in a redundant unit, and thus allow its timely replacement.
Already mentioned earlier, some of the preventive maintenance tasks
outside a Minicell are often contracted out. They include:
Visual inspection of antenna mast, grounding, etc., to identify and

remedy potential sources of hazards
Maintenance of the site, such as removing snow or trimming

shrubberies
Drive Testing is a maintenance task performed on a periodic basis to

meet regulatory requirements and to identify progressive degradation
of performance. It involves measuring and comparing wireless signals
to original specifications.
Inside the Minicell
Preventive maintenance inside the Minicell covers:
Inspection of cabinet hardware to verify proper functioning of

fans, batteries, intrusions switches, and other hardware
Automatic software diagnostics to identify failing units, especially

for standby equipment (such diagnostics are scheduled to
minimize impact on service)
Inspection of ancillary equipment, such as air conditioning, or

lights to verify its proper functioning and/or to replace worn out
parts
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

5 - 13
Preventive Maintenance Schedule
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Sample Preventive Check
Preventive maintenance is done according to a schedule that reflects

local operating requirements.
The table below shows some suggestions for preventive maintenance
checks on PCS CDMA Minicells.
PREVENTIVE CHECK
INTERVAL
Radio/Control Equipment
Clean Fans
6 Mo.
FCC Measurements
Perform Setup Radio FCC Measurements
Perform Voice Radio FCC Measurements
Power and Battery Plant Equipment
Equipment Test List
Radio/Control Equipment
Task List
1 Mo.
1 Mo.
1 Mo.
Storage Battery
Check Float Voltage Alarm
Check Fuse Alarms
1 Mo.
12 Mo.
12 Mo.
Rectifier
Check High- and Low-Voltage and
Rectifier Failure Alarms
12 Mo.
The cell site ETL is divided into equipment areas: radio/control

equipment, power and battery equipment, and building and
environmental equipment. The Lucent Technologies Practice contains
a reference to the procedural information required to perform the
maintennce task.
The table below lists the tasks necessary to monitor the operations of
the Minicell.
TASK
MAINTENANCE TASK
FREQUENCY
REFERENCE
Perform and Review Functional Tests
Specified in cell
site translations
401-660-101
Perform and Review Software Audits
401-703-203
Controlled by RCC 401-660-101

401-703-203
Perform and Review Service Measurements Daily
401-610-135
CIB 117-8A
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 14

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
TASK
MAINTENANCE TASK
FREQUENCY
Perform and Review Plant Measurements
Controlled by RCC 254-341-116
Perform and Review Voice Channel

Selection Activity Measurements
Monthly
401-660-108
Perform and Review Power-Level

Measurements
Monthly
401-660-108
Lucent Technologies
Power & Battery Equipment
Task List
REFERENCE
The table below lists the tasks to monitor and maintain the physical
condition of the Minicell.
TASK
MAINTENANCE TASK
FREQUENCY
REFERENCE
Check Generator Fuel Level
Weekly
401-703-300
Operate Generator Under Load
Monthly
401-703-300
Check Battery Float Voltage
6 months
157-601-701
10
Replace Maintenance Control Unit

Alkaline Battery
Annually
401-703-300
Building & Environmental

Equipment Task List
The table below lists the tasks to maintain the the Minicells
environment.
TASK MAINTENANCE TASK
FREQUENCY
REFERENCE
11
Perform Visual Inspection
Weekly
N/A
12
Check Tower Light
Weekly
N/A
13
Check Heat Exchanger & Fans
Weekly
401-703-301
14
Clear Brush away from Cabinets
Weekly
N/A
15
Vacuum and wash fan screens
Monthly
401-703-301
15.1
Flush Heat Exchanger Core
6 Months
401-703-301
16
(Indoor Only) Change front and rear

Minicell air filters
Monthly
401-703-300
17
(Indoor Only) Check Emergency Lighting
Monthly
N/A
18
(Indoor Only) Check Exhaust Fan
Monthly
N/A
19
Check Fire & Safety Equipment
Monthly
N/A
20
(Indoor Only) Check Air Dryer
6 Months
N/A
21
Dust Cell Site Equipment
6 Months
N/A
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

5 - 15
22
Clean Fire Alarm Sensor
6 Months
N/A
23
Check Peripheral Alarms
6 Months
401-703-301
(Door, Fire, AC, Heat)

24
(Indoor Only) Check Smoke Alarm
6 Months
N/A
25
(Indoor Only) Check Heaters
6 Months
N/A
26
Perform Set Up Radio FCC Measurements Annually
401-660-100
27
Perform Voice Radio FCC Measurements
401-660-100
Annually
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 16

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Radio/Control Equipment Routine Maintenance

Tasks
Radio/Control Equipment Routine Maintenance Tasks
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task 1 - Perform and

Review Functional Tests
Functional tests can be performed on a manual or a scheduled basis.

For the latter case, functional tests are initiated and controlled from the
ECP; the cell site performs the requested functional test and returns the
results to the ECP.
Functional tests are run on equipment that is in-service but not active
for calls during testing. Running functional tests on a regularly
scheduled basis (routine functional tests) is a way of checking the
integrity of the cell site transmit and receive paths. The frequency of
routine functional tests is specified in the cell site translations (unlike
routine diagnostic testing, the exact time of day cannot be specified).
The test results, pass/fail, are reported to the ECP, when the tests are
run manually. Only the failed results are reported when the tests are run
automatically.
Functional tests temporarily take control of an in-service hardware unit,
test it, and then free it for normal call processing traffic. These tests
verify the operation of the following cell site equipment:

Review Software Audits
Transmit path
Receive path
Access channel
Paging channel
Sync channel
Pilot channel
Traffic channels
Antenna
Software audits can be performed on a manual or a scheduled basis.

For the latter case, the audits are initiated and controlled from the ECP;
the cell site performs the requested audit and returns the results to the
ECP.
Software audits detect faults on software that is in-service. Running
software audits on a regularly scheduled basis (routine audits) is a way
of detecting, confining, and correcting software data errors before the
errors adversely affect system performance. When audits detect errors,
they recover any lost resources and, if necessary, invoke appropriate
system initialization.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

5 - 17

Tasks
The frequency of routine audits is controlled exclusively by the Radio

Control Complex (RCC); there is no scheduling translation associated
with audits. Audit test errors are reported to the ECP.
Review Service
Measurements
Service measurements provide statistical information (cumulative

counts) on call traffic, various failure events, and the usage of system
resources. The data is used to troubleshoot the system, to evaluate how
well the system is operating, and to engineer its growth.
Service measurements can be collected on a scheduled basis (scheduled
hourly by the ECP) or a manual basis. On a scheduled basis, the RCC
continually gathers service measurements and reports the data hourly to
the ECP.
At the ECP, the collected data is saved in a series of 24 data files, one
file for every hour of the day. The files are overwritten with new data
beginning at the start of a new day.
The service measurements are stored temporarily at the ECP and then
copied to the OMP.

Review Plant
Measurements
Plant measurements provide information on the performance of cell

site equipment including failure occurrences, failure durations (out-ofservice time), audit failures, diagnostic failures, and initialization. The
data can be used to evaluate cell site hardware deficiencies and their
impact on subscriber service.
The number of failures is the number of times a hardware unit is taken
out-of-service automatically. That count does not include manual
removals.
Plant measurements can be collected on a scheduled basis or manual
basis. Scheduling of plant measurements is controlled exclusively by
the RCC, which automatically reports the data to the ECP every day at
the set time.

Review Voice Channel
Selection Activity
Measurements
Voice channel selection activity (VCSA) measurements provide

detailed information about traffic movement within a cellular system
by recording the occurrences of a set of predefined call-processing
events at specified cell sites. VCSA can also be run in a special mode to
collect data only for a single specified mobile. Each record indicates
what type of event occurred, the time it occurred, the telephone number
of the involved mobile station, and other data.
VCSA measurements can be collected only if a VCSA study is
requested (manual basis). For the time period specified by the user, the
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 18

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Tasks
RCC gathers VCSA measurements and reports the data to the ECP
during and after the measurements are made.
Review Power-level
Measurements
Power-level measurements (PLMs) provide detailed information about

the distribution of power levels detected at a specified cell site. This
study can also collect the distribution of noise detected by traffic
channels. The data is used to investigate system troubles, add or alter
radio frequencies, fine-tune a system, and plan growth.
Power-level measurements can be collected only if a PLM study is
RCC gathers the PLMs and reports the data to the ECP after the study
is completed.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

5 - 19
Lucent Technologies Power and Battery

Equipment
Lucent Technologies Power and Battery Equipment
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task 7 - Check Generator

Fuel Level
If a Standby Generator Cabinet is used, its fuel level must be checked

on a weekly basis. This can be done by removing the cap on the
generator fuel tank and observing the fuel level indicated on the cap dip
stick.
Task 8 - Operate Generator

Under Load
The Standby Generator vendor requires that the engine be operated

under load for 30 minutes once per month to satisfy the manufacturers
warranty. To provide this feature, a programmable maintenance
controller is provided to run the engine and apply load in a fail-safe
manner. If the engine fails to start and assume the load, the system
rectifiers continue to power the load.
The four procedures required to program the maintenance controller
involve programming the following:
1.
The current time, the day of week and the date
2.
The month and date of the 12 monthly 30-minute maintenance

intervals
3.
The on and off time for the 30-minute maintenance intervals
4.
The alarm relay
Detailed instructions for these procedures can be found in Chapter 13

of 401-703-300.
Task 9 - Check Battery
Float Voltage
To insure the operation of the batteries, check the battery float voltage
semi-annually per Lucent Technologies Practice 157-601-701.
Task 10 - Replace
Maintenance Control Unit
Alkaline Battery
The Generator Cabinet Maintenance Control Unit contains an alkaline

battery that should be replaced annually. A battery log is provided to
record battery replacement dates. (Do not use any type of cleaning
agent on the Maintenance Control Units liquid crystal display.)
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 20

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Building and Environmental Equipment
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task 11 - Perform Visual

Inspection
Task 12 - Check Tower

Light
Task 13 - Check Heat
Exchanger and Fans
Task 14 - Clear Brush away
from Cabinets
Visual inspections at the cell site should be made on a weekly basis.

Typical visual indicators to look for are listed below:
Alarm lamp indication
Smoke
Broken cables
Blown fuses
Clogged heat exchanger screens.
A visual check of the tower light should be made each week.
Verify that heat exchanger and cabinet fans are functioning. If there is
indication of a problem, replace the faulty unit.
Brush, grass, and tree limbs should be removed from the immediate
vicinity of the cabinets.
Task 15 - Vacuum and

Wash Fan Screens
Cabinet fan screens must be kept free of insects and other debris. This
can be done with a portable industrial vacuum. The screens should also
be washed with a medium cleaning solution or brushed to remove
debris.
Task 15.1 - Flush Heat

Exchanger Core
The external sides of the heat exchanger cores should be flushed every
6 months with a non-acid, self rinsing, core cleaner. See "Servicing the
Heat Exchangers" on page 5-23 for more information.
Task 16 - (Indoor Only)

Change Front & Rear
Minicell Air Filters
The Indoor Primary Minicell Cabinet has an air filter on its front door
and rear panel. These filters must be removed and replaced on a
monthly basis.

Check Emergency Lighting
Check Exhaust Fan
If the cabinet area is equipped with an emergency lighting system, it

should be checked on a monthly basis per local procedures.
If the cabinet area is equipped with an exhaust fan, it should be checked
on a monthly basis per local instructions.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

5 - 21
Task 19 - Check Fire and

Safety Equipment
Check the service due dates on all fire and safety equipment. Contact a
qualified fire & safety equipment vendor for maintenance as specified
by local instructions.

Check Air Dryer
If the cabinet area is equipped with an air dryer, its operation should be
checked on a semi-annual basis per local instructions.
Task 21 - Dust Cell Site

Equipment
This section is under review. ESD is a major consideration here.
Task 22 - Clean Fire Alarm

Sensor
The fire alarm sensor should be checked and any accumulation of dust
or other foreign debris should be removed.
Task 23 - Check Peripheral

Alarms
Verify that all peripheral alarms are functioning properly. This includes
door, fire, AC, and heat alarms. Detailed instructions can be found in
this manual.

Check Smoke Alarm
The smoke alarm should be tested and verified for its proper
functioning. If it is battery powered, the battery should be replaced
during this process.

Check Heaters
All heaters should be tested and verified that they are functional. The
thermostatic control should be tested to ensure that the heaters are
activated at the proper temperature level.
Task 26 - Perform Set Up

Radio FCC Measurements
The FCC requires that Set Up Radio test measurements be made on an

annual basis. Detailed instructions regarding these measurements can
be found in 401- 660-100.
Task 27 - Perform Voice

Radio FCC Measurements
The FCC requires that Voice Radio test measurements be made on an

annual basis. Detailed instructions regarding these measurements can
be found in 401-660-100.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 22

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Servicing the Heat Exchangers
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Components
Alarm Conditions
Cleaning the Screens
The heat exchangers on the Primary and Growth Frames are of the
air-to-air type that provides thermal environmental control for these
electronic equipment cabinets.
The heat exchangers consist of an Ambient Fan, Internal Fan,
Microcontroller, a heater cartridge, and a sheet metal housing. The
Microcontroller, which operates from a 26 V DC source, provides the
logic to perform the following:
Vary the speed of the Internal and Ambient Fans to maintain the
internal cabinet temperature between 0 and 65 C
Control of the Heater in maintaining the internal cabinet

temperature at or above 0 C during cold cabinet temperatures
Provide alarms for fan failures, heater failures, cabinet high and
low temperature conditions both on the heat exchangers and the
Alarm Facilities Interface
The heat exchangers report alarms under the following conditions:
Loss of 24 V DC power to the heat exchanger
Cabinet internal air temperature below 0 C
Cabinet internal air temperature above 65 C
The following tasks should be carried out on a weekly basis:
Inspect the screens on the exterior of the cabinet
Brush to remove anything blocking the air flow
If the material blocking the air flow resists brushing, wash off with an
appropriate cleaning solution.
Procedure 5-2. Flushing the Core
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WARNING
The heat exchanger can be damaged if the incorrect clening
solution is used.
Follow the cleaning solution manufacturers instructions
for handling the solution.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

5 - 23
Every six months clean the external side of the heat exchanger cores by
flushing with a non-acid, self rinsing, core cleaner, using the following
procedure:
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Turn off power to the heat exchanger

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Check to see all the internal components are protected (check that the
door is closed securely)
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Spray the cleaning solution back and forth across the upper screen of the
heat exchanger to sufficiently wet the heat exchanger surface
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Turn the heat exchanger power back on

END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Replacing the Blowers
If a blower needs to be replaced, do so according to the manufacturers

instructions included with the replacement blower.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 24

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Corrective maintenance is event driven. Except for repairs required by

physical damage to the cell, corrective maintenance will usually be
triggered by an alarm.
Description
Corrective maintenance addresses the detection of failing units while in

service.
By contrast, Preventive (or Routine) maintenance covers the activities
necessary to prevent cell malfunction, before an outage occurs.
Procedures to remedy a failing unit, whether it has been diagnosed as
part of preventive or corrective maintenance, are the same once the
cause of failure has been identified.
PCSC Level
These are maintenance actions that do not need intervention at the cell.
These actions are software initiated, such as through a restore
command to reset the cell after an outage.
Minicell Level
This type of maintenance corresponds to the need to replace a Minicell

component.
Advanced
This level of maintenance corresponds to situations where corrective

actions require expert assistance. Examples of such situations would be
the replacement of components destroyed by lightning.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

5 - 25
Test Equipment Maintenance
Test Equipment Maintenance
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Equipment Maintenance
Checks
Test equipment needs to be maintained to ensure that its outputs are

meaningful.
The components that need to be maintained are cables and probes, as
well as calibration devices such as attenuators.
Maintenance that should be performed according to manufacturers
specifications also includes ensuring that the software used is up-todate.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 26

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Precautionary Steps
Precautionary Steps
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ESD Procedures
ESD Reference
Following proper ESD practices is required whenever handling circuit

packs or working inside a Minicell cabinet.
Follow the electrostatic discharge (ESD) procedures listed in
401-660-125, chapters 1 and 4. If using the Lucent Technologies
Autoplex Documentation CD-ROM, search for esd.
When handling equipment or working in the backplane area, a
grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn to protect the equipment
from electrostatic discharge (ESD). The following guidelines should be
used when handling circuit packs.
Other Precautions
Turn off power before inserting or removing a circuit pack (unless

otherwise specified by the procedure)
Carry the circuit pack in its packing materials to the replacement

site before removing it from packaging (do not remove the circuit
pack from the box and walk with it).
Check the identification code before replacing a circuit pack to

ensure the proper board is being used.
Identify and count circuit packs before removing the pack from its
antistatic packaging material.
Whenever handling cables and connections:
Avoid sharp bends
Follow required procedures for the handling of connections,

especially those requiring the use of torque wrenches
Never disconnect a live RF cable or apply power to an RF unit that is in

a transmit mode.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

5 - 27
Automatic Diagnostic Tests
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Diagnostic Tests
Diagnostic tests are run:
Automatically on schedule as part of routine maintenance
Automatically by software control when a fault is detected
Under manual control
Before a diagnostic test is run, the unit to be tested will be

automatically (or must be manually) placed out of service.
Grouping
Tests that are performed automatically by the PCSC are run in groups,
and they address specific areas of a wireless system.
Test Name
Description
AL
Alarm Diagnostic
BBA
BCR-BIU-ACU Diagnostic
CAT
Clock and Tone Diagnostic
CCC
CDMA Cluster Controller Diagnostic
CCU
CDMA Channel Unit Diagnostic
CPI
Communications Processor Interface Diagnostic
CPU
Core Processing Unit Diagnostic
CRTU
CDMA Radio Test Unit Diagnostic
DCCH
Digital Control Channel Diagnostics
DL
Data Link Diagnostic
DS1
Digital Switch Interface Diagnostic
MEM
Memory Diagnostic
NCI
Network Control Interface Diagnostic
SCT
Synchronized Clock and Tone Diagnostic
Within each group, individual tests are broken into phases, which are
then broken down into segments.
When a test fails, the user interface displays the number of the phase
and segment that failed, enabling the identification of the failing unit.
Locating a Failing Unit
Each diagnostic test is supported by a Trouble Locating Procedure

(TLP) that identifies the suspect unit(s) at fault when the diagnostic
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 28

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
encounters a failure. The location of suspect units at fault is given in

hard-copy table format.
Out-of-Service Limits
Interpreting Failing
Messages
Some activities will be rejected if the OOS limit is exceeded. In order

to allow these activities a separate OOS maintenance limit exists.
Messages are described in Lucents AUTOPLEX Cellular
Telecommunications Systems System 1000 Series II Cell Site
Diagnostic Test Descriptions401-660-101
.
For a complete listing of manual call input messages, see the latest
issue of the Lucents Cell Site Input/Output (I/O) Manual, 401-660107.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

5 - 29
Manual Routine Diagnostics
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Diagnostic Sequence
Manual routine diagnostics are performed under operator control to

check on the health of the entire Minicell, circuit by circuit.
The list below shows the sequence of commands used to diagnose the
Minicell.
init:cell#:sc
Initiate Stable Clear
alw:cell#,scsm
exc:cell#,rtdiag
inh:cell#,scsm
Allow Selective Cell Site Messaging

Perform Diagnostics
Inhibit SCSM
CAUTION
Service Outage
A stable clear will cause service outage for approximately 8
minutes.
Perform the test without the stable clear or run in off hours.
Procedure 5-3. Diagnostic Description
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Prior to running the test, it is necessary to invoke the following:

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Stable clear command, to ensure that the Minicell is using the proper
operating parameters
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Selective cell site message (scsm) to display the ROP entries that relate
to the Minicell
(Routine diagnostics verify all circuits, and therefore may take over one
hour to complete, thus the value of the scsm for monitoring of Minicell
activities.)
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 30

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Selective cell site messages will need to be disabled once the routine
diagnostics have been run.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Systems Response
Upon receiving an input command, the system acknowledges the

command with one of the following messages:
OK = Good. The message was received; the appropriate process

was initiated; and work was completed.
IP = In Progress. Request received and initiated. Further output

will follow.
RL = Repeat later. Request cannot be executed now because of

unavailable system resources, such as system overload, excessive
queue lengths, or the requested process is busy.
NG = No Good. The message was received; the appropriate

process was initiated, but the request conflicts with the current
system or equipment status. For example, action was requested
for a unit that is being diagnosed.
PF = Printout Follows: The request was received and action will

be taken. A printout will follow sometime later to explain, in
detail, the results of the work initiated by the input message. The
printout will be a termination report that may include the result of
the work initiated by the input message.
Once the diagnostics have been completed, the test results (All Tests
Passed (ATP) or Some Test Failed (STF)) are displayed.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

5 - 31
Maintenance Records
Maintenance Records
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Need for Maintenance

Records
Maintenance Records keep a history of maintenance activities. They

are necessary to document Minicell operation, and facilitate the
performance of any required corrective action.
Types of Maintenance
Records
Typical records would include:
Guidelines for Maintenance

of Records
Dates of maintenance visits to the Minicell
Description of maintenance tasks performed
Repair and performance logs, such as performance measurements
Reference documents (such as Minicell installation and

engineering diagrams)
Up-to-date Minicell configuration data (e.g., software release)
Maintenance records should be kept at the Minicell site for

maintenance personnel use and for audit purposes.
Maintenance records should be neatly organized in folders, with
drawings and logs kept in a clean format, to ensure their long-term
availability.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 32

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Corrective Maintenance Triggers
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Preventive maintenance may identify potential sources of Minicell

failures before they interfere with service. For instance, preventive
maintenance may locate a failing board in a redundant unit, and thus
allow its timely replacement.
Corrective maintenance addresses the detection of failing units while in
service.
Procedures to remedy a failing unit, whether it has been diagnosed as
part of preventive or corrective maintenance, are the same once the
cause of failure has been identified.
Sources of Errors
Handling of Errors
Sources of errors that will require corrective actions are as follows:
Hardware errors due to, for instance, a faulty microprocessor, or a

synthesizer out of lock (these errors are detected by on-board self
tests)
Software errors due to, for instance, loss of program control (such
as synchronization signal)
Voice channel errors (such as access/failure rates)
Mobile errors due to, for instance, poor transmission conditions.
All errors are analyzed by the Hardware Error Handler (HEH). HEH
receives errors from hardware units, functional tests, and callprocessing software. It determines when a recovery action (restore or
remove) is needed and then issues a request to the Maintenance
Request Administrator (MRA) to carry out the action.
Depending upon the severity of the error, HEH either takes immediate
recovery action or waits until the error has occurred a predefined
number of times before taking action. For other errors, HEH prints only
an error report.
A throttling mechanism at the cell limits the number of alarms reported
on a per board basis to the ECP. Within each 15-minute period, HEH
reports no more than one alarm for any particular board.
HEH Error Analysis
HEH performs the following types of error analysis:
Immediate Action
All Tests Pass (ATP) Analysis
Single Time-period Analysis
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

5 - 33
Fail/Pass Analysis
Leaky Bucket Analysis
Depending on the severity of the error, the MRA will trigger a message
for corrective action, or the error will only be reported on the ROP.
Immediate Action
For severe errors that are service-affecting, such as loss of

communication between the MSC and the cell, HEH takes immediate
action. For most on-board hardware errors, HEH will request a
conditional restore of the suspect unit.
The conditional restore maintenance action schedules an event or
process to restore the suspect unit after the unit passes a diagnostic test.
If the unit fails the diagnostic test, the conditional restore aborts. The
failed unit remains in the out-of-service state.
All Tests Pass (ATP)

Analysis
For an HEH-initiated conditional restore request, if the unit passes all

diagnostic tests, the unit is restored to service and HEH adds a count to
an ATP counter for the unit. If that count exceeds an assigned threshold
within a predefined time period (typically three in 40 minutes or five in
24 hours), HEH will request a conditional remove of the unit.
(Possibly, the diagnostic tests for the unit are not robust enough to
detect the problem, or the problem is external to the unit.) This type of
error analysis prevents a recovery cycle that might otherwise continue
indefinitely.
Single Time-period
Analysis
Refers to the use of error counters assigned to each hardware unit (DS1,
DFI, CAT, and so on). If an error count for a unit remains below a
predefined threshold for a specific period of time, HEH clears the
counter. This type of error analysis is based on the theory that if a unit
has remained reliable for an extended period of time, its error history
should be forgotten completely. A timer value of 40 minutes is used.
Fail/Pass Analysis
HEH performs this type of error analysis on call-processing detected

errors such as voice channel confirmation failures. When the number of
failures exceeds some predefined value relative to the number of
successful attempts (such as 2400 failures in 4000 attempts), HEH
takes recovery action.
Leaky Bucket Analysis
Refers to the decrementing of non-zero error counters for the

configurable hardware units. The decrementing is done at set time
intervals. This technique is more flexible than a simple analysis based
on the number of errors in a single fixed period of time.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 34

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
That is, the count is incremented each time the error being tracked
occurs on the circuit involved. If a specified number of errors have
accumulated in a specific amount of time, the circuit is usually taken
out-of-service. If the error has not occurred in a given amount of time,
the count will be decremented. If the count reaches zero, the error block
is released.
Reference
For more information on HEH messages, see the 401-610-055, 401610-057 and 401-610-107 manuals.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

5 - 35
Maintenance Actions
Maintenance Actions
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Definition
Allowed Maintenance
Actions
Maintenance Actions Instructions that lead to a change in cell status.

Allowed maintenance actions depend on the hardware element.
Maintenance actions can be applied to maintenance units through
commands from the ECP or by cell site software processes. The
maintenance actions are listed in the Lucents System 1000 Cell Site
DCS I/O Manual, 401-610-107 .
Conditional or
Unconditional Requests
Some maintenance requests, such as remove and restore, can be

conditional or unconditional. In general, a conditional maintenance
request will not result in any action that causes calls to be dropped or
service to be denied to a user during the course of command execution;
if executing a conditional request would violate either condition, MRA
rejects the request. In contrast, an unconditional maintenance request
will result in the execution of the request immediately or within five
minutes of MRA accepting the request, with little concern that calls are
dropped or service is denied to a user during the course of command
execution.
Maintenance Action
Reporting and Control
All maintenance actions (remove, restore, diagnose, stop a diagnostic,

switch to redundant unit, and operational status) are reported to the
ECP.
Once a maintenance action has started on a maintenance unit, MRA
will reject any subsequent maintenance-action requests for that unit
until the current action has completed (except for stopping a diagnostic,
which it will honor immediately).
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 36

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Maintenance Units
Maintenance Units
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Definition
Description
Maintenance Units Hardware elements that report their status to the

ECP.
Maintenance actions can be applied to maintenance units through
commands from the ECP or by cell site software processes.
The RFTG-m is denoted as RG (for reference generator) in the status
display pages.
Maintenance Units and

Actions
Unit
RCC*
RCC
RCC
RCC
RCC
RCC
DS1
DFI
DL
SCT
CCC
CCU
CCU
BBA
The table below shows the maintenance unit, subunit (if any), and the
ability to perform a maintenance action.
Subunit Maintenance Action
NULL
CPU
MEM
NCI
CPI
AFI
NULL
NULL
NULL
NULL
NULL
NULL
CE
NULL
Remove Restore Diagnose Stop a

Switch to
Diagnostic Redundant
Unit
c,u
c,u
yes
yes
yes
no
no
yes
yes
no
no
no
yes
yes
no
no
no
yes
yes
no
no
no
yes
yes
no
no
no
yes
yes
no
c,u
c,u
yes
yes
no
c,u
c,u
yes
yes
no
c,u
c,u
yes
yes
no
c,u
c,u
yes
yes
yes
c,u
c,u
yes
yes
no
c,u
c,u
yes
yes
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
c,u
c,u
yes
yes
Obtain
Status
yes
no
no
no
no
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
* The RCC is denoted as CSC (for cell site controller) in the status display pages.
SCT is denoted as CAT (for clock and tone) in the status display pages.
Yes/No Entries
The yes and no entries under the maintenance actions in the table
indicate whether a maintenance action is permitted for a maintenance
unit. In the rows of the table that have NULL in the Subunit column,
the action is applied to the maintenance unit specified in the Unit
column; in the rows of the table that do not have NULL in the Subunit
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

5 - 37
Maintenance Units
column, the action is applied to the maintenance unit specified in the

Subunit column.
c/u Entries
The c and u entries under the maintenance actions in the table indicate
whether a remove or restore maintenance action is conditional or
unconditional. See Maintenance Actions (5-36) for further explanation
of c and u entries.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 38

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Maintenance Commands
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Definition
Recovering from Faults
Automatic Recovery
Maintenance commands Initiate maintenance actions on

maintenance units.
The Minicell software recovers from faults one of two ways:
Automatic recovery
Manual intervention
All maintenance actions (remove, restore, diagnose, stop a diagnostic,

switch to redundant unit, and obtain status) are reported to the ECP.
As stated previously, once a maintenance action has started on a
maintenance unit, MRA will reject any subsequent maintenance-action
request for that unit until the current action has completed (except for
stopping a diagnostic, which it will honor immediately).
Manual Intervention
In situations where no automatic recovery action is taken or automatic

recovery action fails, the technician must perform manual recovery
procedures from the ECP. When manual intervention is required, the
cell size status display pages provide an easy method of entering
maintenance commands. Maintenance commands entered using status
display pages consist of:
Removing (deactivating) units
Restoring (activating) units
Diagnosing (testing) units
Generating status output message reports on units
Inhibiting/Allowing
Audits
Audit/HEH output
Call processing
Forward setup channel control (normally inhibited)
Functional tests
Interrupts
Routine diagnostics
Diversity error imbalance output.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

5 - 39
Maintenance States
Maintenance States
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Definition
Maintenance State
Descriptions
Maintenance states Corresponds to the condition of a piece of

equipment. During installation, each unit is assigned an equipment
state of unequipped, growth, or equipped via translations (system
configuration parameter settings). Each equipped unit is further
assigned a state of active, out-of-service, or standby (redundant unit
only) via maintenance requests sent to the Maintenance Request
Administrator (MRA) subsystem.
The meanings of the maintenance states are as follows:
Active: Unit is available for its intended use.
Standby: Unit is available to be placed into the active state;

applies only to redundant CSCs and SCTs (for RFTG, RFTG1 is
on stand-by, and is switched only when RFTG0 fails).
Out-of-service: Unit is not available for its intended use (exact

opposite of active state), but is available to be diagnosed or
updated with NVM.
Growth state: Unit is not available to be placed in use, but is

available to be diagnosed or updated with NVM.
Unequipped: Unit exists in the translations database strictly as a

place holder. MRA will reject any maintenance request targeted
for an unequipped unit.
Throughout the maintenance process, MRA records locally the

maintenance status of the cell site equipment in the equipment status
table. The maintenance status of equipment is reported to the ECP
when the status changes or the ECP requests an update. The status of
cell site equipment appears in the SDPs.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 40

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Examples of Input Commands and Output

Messages
Examples of Input Commands and Output Messages
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Introduction
More Common
Craftshell commands are used to instruct the PCSC to perform specific

activities.
From a maintenance perspective, the op:cell and dgn:cell commands
are the most common.
The
op:cell
command, in particular, is used to obtain the status on a cell, or one of

its components (or cell site unit). The use of options enables specific
responses. For instance:
The use of the option EXTERN yields a list of outstanding

external and environmental alarms.
The dgn:cell command, already mentioned in Unit 4, is used to

diagnose a cell site unit. Its use will be discussed in more detail later in
this lesson.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

5 - 41
Conditional Remove
Conditional Remove
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Definition
Conditional remove Maintenance action that changes the state of a

maintenance unit from active or standby to out-of-service. It schedules
an event or process to place the specified maintenance unit to out-ofservice assuming that it is NOT busy (in active state and currently
performing its intended purpose), such as a CE supporting an active
call.
Busy CCC
If the unit is a busy CCC or CCU when the conditional remove action is
applied, the unit is blocked (not allowed to accept new calls), and the
remove is deferred for up to five minutes. As soon as the unit becomes
idle (free of all calls) during the five-minute interval, it is removed
from service. If the unit is still busy after five minutes, the conditional
remove aborts with no action taken.
Redundant Units
For redundant units, if the unit is in the standby state when the
conditional remove action is applied, the unit is removed from service
immediately. If the unit is in the active state and the redundant unit is in
the standby state when the conditional remove action is applied, MRA
automatically executes a switch before removing the unit from service.
If the unit is in the active state and the redundant unit is in the out-ofservice state when the conditional remove action is applied, the
conditional remove aborts with no action taken.
Out-of-Service
If the unit is already out-of-service when a remove action (conditional

or unconditional) is applied, the unit is taken out-of-service again and
tagged with the qualifier OOS-RMV. This tag indicates that the unit is
out-of-service due to a remove requestas opposed to being out-ofservice due to a diagnose request, for example.
Conditional remove action will abort with no action taken if:
The unit is in the growth state
Placing the unit out-of-service would result in exceeding the outof-service threshold limit for that type of unit, as set in translations
(form cell2)
The action is applied on the last data link to a cell site (to remove
the last data link from service, use unconditional remove action)
The action involves an SCT involved in diagnostics of another

unitthat is, SCT supplying a digital tone source (this restriction
avoids false error that may be generated upon premature
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 42

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Conditional Remove
termination of the diagnostic test involving the SCT).

A conditional remove action on a DFI is not permitted if that unit
controls the last data link to a cell site.
References
For more information on the remove maintenance action, refer to the

RMV CELL commands in the Cell Site/DCS Input Output Messages
manual (401-610-107).
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

5 - 43
Unconditional Remove
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Definition
Format
Service Effects
Unconditional remove Maintenance action that changes the state of a

maintenance unit from active or standby to out-of-service.
The format for unconditional remove is:
rmv:cellâ,b;ucl
a: cell number, b= unit to be removed
Unconditional remove requests may be service-affecting because of the

out-of-service limits that may be exceeded.
It promptly places the specified maintenance unit in the out-of-service
state unless any of the following conditions are in effect:
The unconditional remove action is targeted for a busy CCC or

CCU. The remove is deferred for up to 5 minutes. If the unit is still
busy after 5 minutes, MRA drops the calls and removes the unit
from service.
The unconditional remove action is targeted for a unit in the

growth state. The unconditional remove aborts with no action
taken.
The unconditional remove action is targeted for a redundant CSC

or SCT having an out-of-service mate. The unconditional remove
aborts with no action taken.
If an SCT is involved in diagnostics of another unit, an unconditional

remove request of the unit terminates the ongoing diagnostics, which
may result in the generation of false errors upon premature termination
of the diagnostic test.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 44

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Conditional Restore
Conditional Restore
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Definition
Format of Restore
Command
Conditional Restore: A maintenance action that brings a unit back to

service.
The format of the
p restore command is:
rst:cellâ,b
a: cell number, b= unit being restored
Use of the Command
The restore maintenance action can be applied to units that are in the
out-of-service, active, or standby state. Except for a unit that is already
out-of-service or in the growth state, the first step in a conditional
restore maintenance action is the automatic execution of a conditional
remove. Therefore, all the restrictions associated with a conditional
remove are also associated with a conditional restore.
Restoring Out-of-Service
Units
The conditional restore maintenance action changes the state of a

maintenance unit from out-of-service to active unless the command
specifies a standby state. It schedules an event or process to restore the
specified maintenance unit after the unit passes a diagnostic test. If the
unit fails the diagnostic test, the conditional restore aborts. The failed
unit remains in the out-of-service state.
Restoring Units in a
Growth State
A conditional restore request on a unit in the growth state will diagnose

and initialize the unit but will not change the state of the unit: the unit
remains in the growth state. An unconditional restore of a unit in the
growth state is not permitted.
Conditional versus
Unconditional Restore
The primary difference between a conditional and unconditional restore

is that the conditional restore runs a diagnostic first while the
unconditional does not.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

5 - 45
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Definition
Format
Unconditional Restore Similar to the conditional restore command,

except for a unit that is already out-of-service or in the growth state,
the first step in an unconditional restore maintenance action is the
automatic execution of an unconditional remove. Therefore, the lack of
restrictions associated with an unconditional removeunconditional
remove requests may be service-affectingapplies to an unconditional
restore as well.
The format of the unconditional restore is:
rst:cellâ,b;ucl
a: cell number, b= unit being restored
Conditions Keeping the

Unit OOS
The unconditional restore maintenance action changes the state of a

maintenance unit from out-of-service to active unless the command
specifies a standby state. It schedules an event or process to restore the
specified maintenance unit without first running a diagnostic test on the
unit.
Conditions Applying to
Restore Requests
The following are other conditions pertaining to conditional and

unconditional restore requests that you need to be aware of:
References
For data links (DLs): A conditional restore request reverts to

unconditional if there is no link currently in-service; no diagnostic
test is run.
No action is performed if an unconditional restore request is made

on the currently in-service link.
For redundant units: A CSC conditional restore request compares

the active and redundant unit memories of the controller sides
(CSC0 and CSC1) after the CSC being restored has elevated to the
standby state. A mismatch in memory drops the CSC back to the
out-of-service state and aborts the restore request.
An active CSC or SCT having an out-of-service redundant unit

cannot be restored conditionally or unconditionally.
For more information on the restore maintenance action, refer to the

RST CELL commands in the Cell Site/DCS Input Output Messages
manual (401-610-107).
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 46

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnose Command
Diagnose Command
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Definition
Format of Diagnose
Command
Use of the Command
Diagnosing a CCC or CCU
Diagnose (dgn) Maintenance action that can be applied to a unit in

the out-of-service or growth state, to a redundant unit in the standby
state, or to a redundant unit in the active state. In the latter case, MRA
initiates a switch before executing the diagnose request.
The dgn command format is:
dgn:cellâ,b[;ucl][:tlp]
a: cell number, b= unit being diagnosed
For redundant units, if the targeted unit is in the active state, but the
mate is out-of-service, the diagnose aborts with no action taken.
In addition, the diagnose maintenance action can be applied to a CCC
or CCU in the active state. The first step in a diagnose maintenance
action for an active CCC or CCU is the automatic execution of a
conditional remove.
Whether a unit passes or fails diagnostics, the unit is left in the
out-of-service state except for a unit in the growth state. A unit initially
in the growth state remains in the growth state. The diagnostic test
results (pass, fail) are reported to the ECP.
Diagnosing a CSC
A diagnostic test can be called for the whole CSC (in which all
controller circuit boards are tested), or a diagnostic test can be called
for an individual controller circuit board (for example, CPU).
For more information on the diagnose maintenance action, refer to the
DGN CELL commands in the Cell Site/DCS Input Output Messages
manual (401-610-107).
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

5 - 47
Stop a Diagnostic
Stop a Diagnostic
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Definition
Format of the Stop

Command
Stop This maintenance action stops a diagnostic test on a

maintenance unit. If the diagnostic test request is still in the job queue,
MRA removes the request from the queue. If the diagnostic test is
running, MRA aborts the test.
The format of the stop command is:
g
stop:dgn;cellâ,b
a: cell number, b= unit being diagnosed
Use of the Command
MRA leaves the unit in the out-of-service or growth state unless the
unit is a CCC, CCU, or BBA. Upon terminating a diagnostic test for
one of those units, MRA returns the unit to the state it was in just prior
to the diagnostic request (out-of-service, growth, or active).
For more information on the diagnostic maintenance action, refer to the

STOP DGN commands in the Cell Site/DCS Input Messages Manual
(401-610-107).
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 48

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Initialize a Site
Initialize a Site
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose of the Command
Command Format
The purpose of this command (init) is to reset a cell site operating

parameters to their specified values.
The table shows the command formats to initialize a cell site.
To request a
Enter...
system process purge at a specific INIT:CELL a:SPP b[ CLASS c]

cell site
specific cell site phase
INIT:CELL a:{TC|SC}[ CLASS c]
cell site memory boot
INIT:CELL a:BOOT[IE][ CLASS c]
cell site memory boot and

controller switch
INIT:CELL a:BOOT[IE];SW
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

5 - 49
Switch to Redundant Unit
Switch to Redundant Unit
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Definition
Format of the Switch

Command
Switch (sw) The switch to redundant unit maintenance action changes

the state of a maintenance unit from active to another state while at the
same time changing the state of a second unit (the associated
redundant unit) from standby to active. The purpose of the maintenance
action is to transfer the functions of the first unit to the second unit.
The format of the switch command is:
sw:cellâ,b
a: cell number, b= unit being switched
Redundant Units
If either of the redundant units is in the out-of-service state, the switch

request aborts with no action taken. For the SCT, the switch request
will fail if the SCT is involved in diagnostics of another unit.
This maintenance action applies only to CSCs and SCTs.
References
For more information on the switch to redundant unit maintenance

action, refer to the SW CELL command in the Input Messages manual
(401-610-107).
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 50

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Operational Status
Operational Status
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use of the Command
Format of the Operational

Status Command
Op The Operational Status maintenance action determines the status

(state) of a maintenance unit; that is, Maintenance Request
Administrator (MRA) reads the recorded status from the equipment
status table and forwards the status to the Access Manager.
The format of the operational status command is:
op:cell^x
op:cell^x,unit^ y
op:cell^ x,extern
op:cell, generic
Operational Status
Command SDP Reporting
In addition, MRA automatically reports the maintenance status of

equipment to the Access Manager whenever the status changes. A
status display page is refreshed with new maintenance status every 15
seconds.
For more information on the obtain status maintenance action, refer to
the OP CELL, OP CELL DL, OP CELL DLOPTS, OP CELL
EXTERN, OP CELL GENERIC, OP CELL OVLD, OP CELL SCSM,
OP CELL SG, and OP CELL VERSION commands in the Cell Site/
DCS Input Messages manual (401-610-107).
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

5 - 51
Out-Of-Service State Qualifier -- Purpose
Out-Of-Service State Qualifier -- Purpose
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Definition
State qualifier A message from the MRA to indicate the reason why a
particular unit is in an out-of-service state.
Need for an Out-Of-Service

Qualifier
A unit can be out-of-service for a variety of reasons. The out-of-service

qualifier in an output message identifies the source of that state.
Assigning of the Qualifier
When a maintenance unit is placed OOS, the MRA assigns a qualifier.

The qualifier helps define the OOS condition.
Both the qualifier and the final state of the unit are reported to the
Access Manager. Both appear in the ROP message.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 52

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Out-Of-Service State Qualifiers -- Examples
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Examples
Out-of-Service Qualifiers
A maintenance unit can be placed in the out-of-service state due to one

of several reasons. To identify the reason that a unit is in the
out-of-service state, MRA assigns the unit a qualifier in addition to its
final state of OOS.
The diagram below shows some of the out-of-service qualifiers:
Some examples of OOS qualifiers:
OOS-DGN = successful completion of diagnose request
OOS-FAULT = fault detected during diagnostics
OOS-INITF = unsuccessful initialization process
OOS-RMVD = unit went OOS due to successful completion
of the remove request
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

5 - 53
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 - 54

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostics
Overview
Purpose
Diagnostics are indications of system failures that need to be corrected.

Corrective maintenance procedures are based upon alarm indications
and diagnostic test results.
Alarm indications, in most instances, are generated by dedicated

monitoring circuits, which provide identification of troubles and
indications of faulty or suspect units.
Diagnostic test results are generated by software test routines run

on a functional circuit block and, in most instances, identify faults
to one or more suspected units within a functional area.
This unit provides an introduction to the principles and tools available

to diagnose a cell site.
Contents
Fault Detection and Recovery Mechanisms

Fault Detection - - - - - - - - - - - - - Diagnostic Tests - - - - - - - - - - - - - Functional Tests - - - - - - - - - - - - - Software Audits - - - - - - - - - - - - - Software Asserts - - - - - - - - - - - - Hardware Error Handler - - - - - - - - - -
Alarms and Diagnostics

Alarm Overview - - - Alarm Scanning - - - Alarm Types - - - - Alarm Functions - - - -
6-11
- 6-12
- 6-14
- 6-15
- 6-17
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

6 - 1
Diagnostics
Alarm Control Board (ACB) Interfaces - - Alarms, Physical Display - - - - - - - - Alarm Display Description - - - - - - - Detailed Alarm Description -- LAC Alarms Detailed Alarm Description -- Frame Alarm
User Alarms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Fault Detection and Recovery Tools

Performance Measurement
Automatic Recovery Tools - - - - - - - - - - Fault Detection Mechanisms For Manual Recovery
OMP Read-Only Printer (ROP) Monitor - - - - RF Call Trace - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Orthogonal-Channel Noise Simulator - - - - - -
6-20
6-21
6-22
6-26
6-27
6-29
6-30
6-31
- 6-32
- 6-33
- 6-34
- 6-35
- 6-36
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 2

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostics
Fault Detection and Recovery

Mechanisms
Overview
Purpose
Types of Fault Detection

and Recovery Mechanisms
This section describes the system fault indicators and the types of tools
used to identify the faults.
PCS CDMA Minicells support two complementary types of fault
detection and recovery mechanisms:
Fault detection is either automated or manual:
Automated mode constantly monitors and reports the results

of periodic self-tests
Manual mode enables maintenance technicians to identify

the source of equipment failure.
Fault recovery mechanisms are also either automated or manual:
Automated fault recovery is software driven. It is initiated

automatically by the Switch as soon as it has detected a fault
in the system under its control.
Manual fault recovery is executed under operator control as

part of physical intervention to correct equipment failure.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

6 - 3
Diagnostics
Fault Detection
Fault Detection
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Fault detection, whether automated or manual, is based on an

indication at the MCSC and recorded on the Read Only Printer (ROP),
which provides a running record of all Minicell activities.
Alarm Indications
The majority of alarm conditions reported to the MCSC can be visually

identified at the cell site by observing equipment alarm indicators.
Some alarm indications are latched that is, they remain until they are
reported. Other alarm indications (non-latched) may or may not remain
long enough to be read and reported.
Diagnostic Tests
Diagnostic tests are run either automatically or manually. Their results

provide the starting point for clearing diagnostic faults (non-alarm). It
should be noted that alarm conditions (such as power, fuse, etc.) can
cause diagnostic faults to appear. Therefore, alarm indications should
be cleared before attempting to clear diagnostic troubles. In some
instances, it may be difficult to relate an existing alarm condition to a
diagnostic fault condition.
Cell Site Housekeeping

Software
The cell site has excellent housekeeping software; faults such as

transmitter failure, power and entry alarms, and speech path conditions
are constantly monitored and are automatically reported to the
Executive Cellular Processor (ECP). In most cases, fault detection,
diagnosis, and recovery are automatic.
Type of Housekeeping
Software
The cell site detects faults by various means, including:
Diagnostic tests (see page 6-5)
Functional tests (see page 6-6)
Software audits (see page 6-7)
Software asserts (see page 6-8)
Board self-tests
Hardware integrity checks
Hardware alarm scanning
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 4

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostics
Diagnostic Tests
Diagnostic Tests
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Diagnostic tests can be performed on an automatic (error-driven),

scheduled, or manual basis. Diagnostic tests are initiated and controlled
from the ECP; the cell site performs the requested diagnostic test and
returns the test results to the ECP.
Running Diagnostic Tests
Running diagnostic tests on a regularly scheduled basis (routine

diagnostic tests) is a way of determining if the cell site hardware units
are operational. Routine diagnostic tests are run once a day; the time of
day at which these tests are run is specified in the cell site translations.
The test results are reported to the ECP.
For equipment that is down, manual diagnostics can be done.
Related Documents
Series II Cell Site Diagnostic Test Descriptions (401-660-101).
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

6 - 5
Diagnostics
Functional Tests
Functional Tests
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Type of Functional Tests
Functional tests can be performed on a scheduled or manual basis.

Functional tests are initiated and controlled from the ECP; the cell site
performs the requested functional test and returns the results to the
ECP.
Running Functional Tests
Functional tests are run on equipment that is in-service but not active.
Running functional tests on a regularly scheduled basis (routine
functional tests) is a way of checking the integrity of the cell site
transmit and receive paths. The frequency of routine functional tests is
specified in the cell site translations. (Unlike routine diagnostic testing,
the exact time of day cannot be specified.) The test results (pass, fail)
are reported to the ECP.
Functional Test Types
Functional tests temporarily take control of an in-service hardware unit,

test it, and then free it for normal call processing traffic. These tests
verify the operation of the following cell site equipment:
Transmit path
Receive path
Access channel
Paging channel
Sync Channel
Pilot Channel
Traffic Channel
Pilot Level
Antenna.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 6

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostics
Software Audits
Software Audits
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software Audits
Software audits can be performed on a scheduled or manual basis. the

audits are initiated and controlled from the ECP; the cell site performs
the requested audit and returns the results to the ECP.
Running Software Audits
Software audits detect faults on software that is in-service. Running

software audits on a regularly scheduled basis (routine audits) is a way
of detecting, confining, and correcting software data errors before the
errors adversely affect system performance. When audits detect errors,
they recover any lost resources and, if necessary, invoke appropriate
system initialization.
Software Audit Frequency
The frequency of routine audits is controlled exclusively by the RCC;

there is no scheduling translation associated with audits. Audit test
errors are reported to the ECP.
Related Documents
Series II Cell Site Audits Manual (401-610-078).
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

6 - 7
Diagnostics
Software Asserts
Software Asserts
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Handling Asserts
Asserts occur when software encounters an unusual or unexpected

condition. For example, a software program calls a routine and expects
three choices but is presented with four. Such errors are reported to
assert-handling software on the RCC, which is responsible for
formatting assert output messages and sending the messages to the
ECP.
The assert-handling software may be one of two software subsystems
on the RCC:
Assert Handler: Receives and handles asserts from units on the

TDM bus. Most asserts come from the radios or the
Communications Processor Interface (CPI) board. The assert
handler does not initiate any recovery.
SIassert: Receives and handles asserts from the application

software running on the RCC. SIassert can initiate different levels
of recovery depending upon the severity of the assert.
When an assert occurs, an assert macro provides the assert-handling

software with the information it needs to process the assert failure.
What output message prints at the ECP depends upon the macro that
called the assert-handling software.
Assert messages are often difficult to analyze and may require
escalation to the next level of technical support.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 8

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostics
Hardware Error Handler
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The automatic recovery actions at the cell site are done through the
Hardware Error Handler (HEH) software subsystem. The HEH
receives error reports from hardware units, functional tests, and callprocessing software. It determines when a recovery action (remove,
restore) is needed and then issues a request to carry out the action.
Depending upon the severity of the error, either the HEH takes
immediate recovery action or waits until the error has occurred a
predefined number of times before taking action. For other errors, the
HEH sends only an error report to the ECP.
Autonomous Error Types
Hardware Alarm Scanning
The cell site will autonomously report four types of errors to HEH to
allow appropriate diagnostics recovery to be scheduled. The error types
are hardware errors, program-control errors, radio-channel errors, and
mobile station errors.
Hardware errors include malfunctioning microprocessor errors,

memory read/write errors, trap errors, or synthesizer lock errors.
These errors come from on-board self tests.
Program control errors include stack pointer errors, divide by zero

errors, or overflow and underflow errors.
Radio-channel errors include frame errors and access-attempt

success and failure errors. These errors are bursty in nature and
will be reported to the ECP after a predefined threshold has been
passed. In some cases, the threshold is an engineering parameter,
that is, it is hardcoded into the software. In other cases, the
threshold is tunable via translations.
Mobile station errors include improper or illogical message

content in the received message from a mobile transceiver or the
absence of a response message. An error message will be returned
to the RCC.
Some faults, referred to as scanned alarms, are gathered by dedicated

monitoring circuits at the cell site and then reported to the ECP.
Scanned alarms include power converter and fan alarm conditions.
There is no automatic recovery for scanned alarms. In time, the
operational parameter that caused the alarm may return to its normal
operating range, thereby clearing the alarm. Otherwise, a technician
must visit the site and manually clear the alarm.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

6 - 9
Diagnostics
Related Documents
Output Messages manual (401-610-057); see RPT CELL HEH
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 10

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostics
Alarms and Diagnostics

Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Diagnostics are indications of system failures that need to be corrected.

Corrective maintenance procedures are based upon alarm indications
and diagnostic test results.
Alarm indications, in most instances, are generated by dedicated

monitoring circuits, which provide identification of troubles and
indications of faulty or suspect units.
Diagnostic test results are generated by software test routines run

on a functional circuit block and, in most instances, identify faults
to one or more suspected units within a functional area.
This unit provides an introduction to the principles and tools available

to diagnose a cell site.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

6 - 11
Diagnostics
Alarm Overview
Alarm Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Latched Alarms
Severity
Alarm Reporting
Alarms are the first indication of cell site trouble, indicating one of the
following conditions:
Software failure
Hardware failure
User-defined condition
Alarms are either latched (remain until removed by operator action)

or unlatched (are retired without operator intervention as soon as the
defect has been cleared).
Alarms are also classified by level of severity/priority of required
action.
PCS CDMA Minicell alarms are reported to the Switch by the Alarm/
FITS Interface (AFI) circuit pack in the Radio Control Complex (RCC)
shelf. In addition, some alarms activate an LED display on the
appropriate circuit pack.
User alarms are numbered, as indicated in the following table.
User
Minicell Suite
Alarm #
Equipment
Alarm State
External Alarm 6
Minicell Primary
Switchable
External Alarm 5
Minicell Primary
Switchable
External Alarm 4
Minicell Primary
Switchable
External Alarm 3
Minicell Primary
Switchable
External Alarm 2
Minicell Primary
Switchable
External Alarm 1
Minicell Primary
Switchable
External Alarm 0
Minicell Primary
Switchable
Generator Alarm
Generator Cabinet Normally Open
Power Major Alarm Power Cabinet
Normally Open
CSU Alarm
Normally Open
Minicell Primary
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 12

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostics
Alarm Overview
10
Door / Intrusion
Alarm
All
11
Heat Exchanger Hi/ Minicell Primary

Lo Temp Alarm
& Growth
Normally Open
12
Battery Discharge
Alarm
Battery Cabinet
Normally Open
13
Growth 0 Alarm
Minicell Growth
Normally Open
14
Sage Alarm
Minicell Primary
Normally Open
15
External Alarm 7
Minicell Primary
Normally Open
16
Power Minor Alarm Power Cabinet
Normally Open
17
AC Fail Alarm
Normally Open
Power Cabinet
Normally Open
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

6 - 13
Diagnostics
Alarm Scanning
Alarm Scanning
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Alarms Scanned into the

AFI
The Alarm Control Board
The Switch continuously monitors the Minicell operation, through a

process called Alarm Scanning. All the Minicell alarms eventually are
reported by the alarm and FITS Interface (AFI) circuit pack in the RCC
Shelf. The alarms are connected to the AFI at the RCC shelf backplane
via an AYD5 connector.
The alarms scanned into the AFI can be classified as follows:
Amplifier alarms (displayed as LAC alarms)
Frame alarms (fan and power converter alarms)
User alarms (18 maximum)
Miscellaneous alarms (RFTGm side 0 or side 1)
The alarm control board (ACB) monitors the alarms from the
Minicells frame PCS components and reports the alarm status to the
AFI board located within the radio control complex (RCC).
the AFI. LAC alarms are used for reporting any CDMA transmit unit
(CTU) and/or receive unit (RU) failures; a frame alarm reports power
converter unit (PCU) failures in the CTU shelf.
AFI Polling Rate
For More Information on

Alarms
The AFI can send out up to 32 unique polling requests in

approximately a two-second period of time.
For more information look at the alarm section in Chapter 7 of Lucent
Technologies PCS System Acceptance Guidelines and Procedures 401703-203,
.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 14

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostics
Alarm Types
Alarm Types
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Amplifier Alarms
Alarms of direct interest to Maintenance Personnel are those that are

related to hardware malfunctions. Some of these alarms may be retired
remotely, others will require a physical intervention at the Minicell site.
These are commonly called LAC alarms, LACALTX and
LACALRX.
These alarms are static signals sent from each CTU and RU (in primary
cabinet only) to the Alarm Control Board (ACB) to indicate the
failures. The ACB, via a primary cabinet CTU shelf backplane
connector, communicates to the AFI (in the RCC shelf) via an RS-422
interface. The primary cabinet CTUs send their alarms to the ACB via
internal CTU backplane connections, while the growth cabinet CTUs
send their alarms to the ACB (in the primary cabinet) via a cable
harness between the CTU backplanes in the growth and primary
cabinets. The RU alarms (all contained in the primary cabinet) are
collected by the ACB via cable harness connections to the primary
cabinets CTU shelf backplane.
Frame Alarms
User Alarms
Frame alarms can be broken into 2 classes:

1.
Fan alarms (xxFALxL): TTL signal, pulled low to indicate fan

failure. Six possible connections per cabinet.
2.
Power converter alarms (xxSHALxL): TTL signal, pulled low to

indicate power converter failure. Usually connected to ALM1
contact on back of power converter (pin 113) while ALM2 is
connected to ground (pin 114). On alarm, a relay closure connects
ALM1 to ALM2 (ground). Six possible connections per cabinet.
There are a maximum of 18 user alarms.

These are opto-isolator type alarms. Current to drive the opto-isolator is
placed on the USERALxx+pin and is expected to be returned to the
AFI on the USERALxx-pin. As long as the circuit is complete, then the
opto-isolator LED is lit and no alarm is registered. An alarm can be
triggered by the customer by cutting off this current in one of two
ways:
1.
Breaking the circuit with the opening of a relay contact (open on

alarm)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

6 - 15
Diagnostics
Alarm Types
2.
Spare alarms
Shunting the current from the USERALxx+ leads to an AFI

ground pin with the closure of a relay contact (close on alarm)
There are 4 spare TTL alarms (ALSPx), 2 spare alarms (SPAUSEL_1

and SPARE4_1).
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 16

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostics
Alarm Functions
Alarm Functions
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The alarm inputs to the AFI are accessed at AFI1 slot (P20) via an
AYD5 connector paddle board. The alarm signal names originate from
the Series II Macrocell project, and may be used for different purposes
in the Minicell.
CTU and RU Alarm Bus

LACALTX
LACALRX
CTU and RU (LAC) alarm bus from primary cabinet ACB

via CTU backplane connector.
Alarms from RFTG

RFGEN0
RFTG Side 0 Alarm.
RFGEN1
RFTG Side 1 Alarm.
RFGENSEL Not used
Primary Cabinet Fan/

Blower Alarms (TTL Low
Indicates Failure)
PRFAL5L
Rear Heat Exchanger (Optional)
PRFAL4L
Rear Heat Exchanger (Optional)
PRFAL3L
Cabinet Blower
PRFAL2L
CTU Shelf Fan
PRFAL1L
Heat Exchanger Blower 1
PRFAL0L
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

6 - 17
Diagnostics
Alarm Functions
Primary Cabinet PCU

Alarms (TTL Low Indicates
Failure) PRSHAL5L
Growth Cabinet Fan/Blower

Failure)
Growth Cabinet PCU

Failure)
CTU Shelf PCU2 Alarm from ACB via CTU Backplane

Connector.
PRSHAL4L
CTU Shelf PCU1 Alarm from ACB via CTU Backplane

Connector.
PRSHAL3L
CRC Shelf2 415AC Alarm.
PRSHAL2L
PRSHAL1L
PROCPWRL
Internal Backplane Wired-or Alarm for the two RCC Shelf

415ACs
G0FAL5L
Not used
G0FAL4L
Reserved for Possible Cabinet Blower 2
G0FAL3L
Reserved for Cabinet Blower 1 (only active when door is open)
G0FAL2L
CTU Shelf Fan
G0FAL1L
G0FAL0L
G0SHAL5L PCU2
G0SHAL4L PCU1
G0SHAL3L CRC2
G0SHAL2L CRC1
G0SHAL1L CRC0
G0SHAL0L Not used
18 User Alarms Available (2

wires each)
USRAL(0-17)
User alarm inputs to AFI are wired permanently to AIM0 for

cross-connect capability. AIM1 connects directly to primary cabinet
user alarms, or to lightning protection block for power cabinet alarms
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 18

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostics
Alarm Functions
and external user alarms. The 18 alarms are as follows (with quantity in
parenthesis):
External User Alarm 7
Locating Rack-Mounted
Growth Alarms
CSU alarm (1)
Heat Exchanger alarms (1) - high temp and low temp
Intrusion alarms (1) - all door intrusion switches in both primary

and growth cabinets are connected in series (if one fails, the
current loop is broken indicating an alarm)
Power Cabinet Alarms (6) - major, minor, AC fail, batteries on

discharge, generator running, and generator failure. Each of these
must be wire-ORed (or connected in series) with like signals from
backup battery cabinet if used. These must be lightning protected
when received into the primary cabinet
Reserved for Growth Frame (1)
CRTU (1)
Extra External User Alarms (7) - these must also be lightning

protected if coming from outside the primary or growth cabinets
External User Alarm 7 is used for Generator Fail when equipped with a
generator. This alarm is not programmable and is Close ON Alarm.
External User Alarm 7 may be used for other purposes if the
installation does not include a generator cabinet.
Alarm locations for rack-mount growth cabinets correspond to the
carrier for the equivalent growth cabinet. For example, alarms for a
minicell with a primary cabinet, Growth 1, and RG2 (rack growth 2):
Growth 1 (carrier 2) alarms are for the growth 1 cabinet.
Growth 2 (carrier 3) CRC alarms are for the right side of RG2.
Growth 3 (carrier 4) CRC alarms are for the left side of RG2.
Growth 2 (carrier 3) CTU alarms are for the lower CTU.
Growth 3 (carrier 4) CTU alarms are for the upper CTU.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

6 - 19
Diagnostics
Alarm Control Board (ACB) Interfaces
Alarm Control Board (ACB) Interfaces
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Alarm Inputs to the ACB
The ACB (located in the Primary Cabinet CTU Shelf) formats alarms
collected from the CTU, RUs and PCUs before sending them to the
Alarm FITS Interface (AFI) board (located in the RCC shelf).
The alarm signals reported to the AFI are shown in the following table,.
Subassembly
Alarms
Alarm Type
Qty Alarm Condition
Leads
ACB Signal Name
RU Alarms
Synthesizer out-of-lock, LNA

failure
RX_ALmn (n = 1 to
6)
Primary Cabinet 3
CTU Alarms
Synthesizer out-of-lock, DC
Over Current, Over
Temperature, and Malfunction
Alarm
TX_ALMn (n = 1 to
3)
Growth I
Cabinet CTU
Alarms
Same as Primary Frame CTU

Alarms
TX_ALMn (n = 4 to
6)
CTU Shelf PCU 2

Alarms
AFI Interface
Output Voltage Variation (3%) 2
DCI_ALMn (n =
1.2)
Two types of alarm status information are sent to the AFI Interface:
LAC alarms
Frame (cabinet) alarms.
The following two paragraphs describe the interface for LAC alarm
and cabinet alarm message reporting.
LAC Alarm Interface
LAC alarms cover any CTU and/or RU failure(s).

The RS-422 Interface carrying the ACB LAC alarm status signals to
the AFI board uses 4 wires: 2 for the transmit function and 2 for the
receive function.
Frame Alarm Interface
Frame alarms cover the two PCUs located in the same CTU shelf in the
primary cabinet. These alarms are reported to the AFI circuit pack
located in the RCC via a cable assembly connected to the CTU shelf
backplane.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 20

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostics
Alarms, Physical Display
Alarms, Physical Display
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ACB Alarm LEDs
Unit
ACB
ACB
ACB
RU 1
RU 2
RU 3
RU 4
RU 5
RU 6
CTU
ON means the LED is illuminated; OFF means LED is not

illuminated.
LED
Color
RED
YELLOW
GREEN
RED
RED
RED
RED
RED
RED
RED
Description
LED
State
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Faceplate
Text
ALM
STBY
ACT
ALM1
ALM2
ALM3
ALM4
ALM5
ALM6
ALM/AMP
Alarm Condition
Description
Power-up/self-test failure
Busy mode/Stand-by mode
Passed all tests and/or is active
RU 1 Failure/Alarm
RU 2 Failure/Alarm
RU 3 Failure/Alarm
RU 4 Failure/Alarm
RU 5 Failure/Alarm
RU 6 Failure/Alarm
CTU Failure/Alarm
ALM
STBY
ACT
ALM 1
ALM 2
ALM 3
ALM 4
ALM 5
ALM 6
ALM
RU
AMP
RST
The LEDs are used to depict a units functional condition (status)

within the PCS CDMA Minicell. The alarm control board (ACB) of the
Minicell has 10 faceplate LEDs, grouped as follows:
A group of three LEDs (ALM, STBY, ACT) that depict the status
of the ACB
A group of six (ALM 1 to ALM 6) that depict the status of

diversity receive RU1 through RU6
A lone LED (ALM AMP) that reports on the status of the CTUs.
The ACBs three LEDs are red, yellow, and green. ACB LEDs are
displayed at power-up or when there is an RU receiver failure. A red
LED indicates an alarm state, a yellow LED a standby state, and a
green LED an active state. All RU and ALM AMP LEDs are red.
Faceplate text is used to distinguish the ACB and RU LEDs from one
another. An illuminated RU LED indicates that the RU is bad. If there
is a CTU failure, the ALM AMP LED is displayed and latched.
System Alarms
System alarms are always sent to the Read-Only Printer (ROP) and
some are displayed on the SDPs.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

6 - 21
Diagnostics
Alarm Display Description
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
State/Setting
Description
S1
Push-button
(momentary)
Unit Reset
Pressed
In
Pressing
actuator resets
unit
Not
Applicable
S2
Rotary
Select PCS CDMA

Access Mode
3 Sector
Omni
DS 3,
(ACT)
4 to F
Unassigned
Select customers
licensed frequency
band for
synthesizer
programming
0 to 9
Unassigned
A to F
Band A to Band
F
Select AFI polling

LAC address
assignments
Minicell
4 to F
Unassigned
DS 5,
(ALM1)
Select ACB test

modes; in-circuit
test (ICT) and
diagnostic tests
0
1
None (Normal
Operation)
DS 2,
(STBY)
Diagnostic
3 to F
ICT mode
S3
S4
S5
Type
Rotary
Rotary
Rotary
Failure LED
State/Setting
NA
Function
Reference
Designation
The LEDs can also indicate an error when there is a mismatch between
the cell operating parameters set in translation and the physical settings
of the switches on the ACB. The right column of the table below shows
LED failure display for invalid switch settings.
Provision #
Switch Settings and Failure

LED Display
Alarms are displayed by various means and at different locations.
DS 4,
(ALM0)
Unassigned
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 22

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostics
LED for TX_UP
There are two alarm conditions for the TX_UP. The description of
these conditions are listed in the table below.
Condition
LED
Causes
State
Alarm
Red
Synthesizer in out-of-lock
condition or Alarm from the
Amplifier
Pin number D20 of the P1

connector will be HIGH (or close
to 5 volts)
No-Alarm
Green
None. Synthesizer not in out-oflock condition
Pin number D20 of the P1

connector will be LOW (or close
to 0 volt)
System alarms
System alarms are always sent to the read-only printer (ROP) and some
are sent to the SDPs, as discussed in Unit 3. The following table
summarizes this:
ALARM
SDP NUMBER
User Defined Alarms
NO
Amplifier Shelf Power Converter 1
2136
Primary Frame Amplifier Shelf Fan Alarm
2136
Primary Frame Main Fan Alarm
NO
Reference Frequency Generator 1 Alarm
2131
Controller Shelf Power Converter Alarm
2131,2138, 2139
2136
Primary Frame Heat Exchanger Blower 1 Alarm
NO
NO
2131, 2138
Primary Frame Radio Shelf 1 Power Converter
2131, 2138, 2139
CTU Alarms
2131, 2136
CCU
2131, 2138, 2139
CCC
2131, 2138, 2139
SCT
2131 AS CAT
RECEIVE UNITS
2131, 2136
BCR
2138, 2139
ACU
2138, 2139
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

6 - 23
Diagnostics
ALARM
SDP NUMBER
BIU
2138, 2139
ACB
CB
AIM 1
TERM. NO.
PUNCH
DOWN
(OSP)
External User Alarm 6 (ROP text is user definable) Min 0
17
22
16
21
15
20
14
19
13
18
12
17
11
16
Power Cabinet Generator On
Maj 7
10
15
Power Cabinet Major Alarm
Maj 8
14
CSU Alarm
Maj 9
CB8
Intrusion Alarm (all frames)
Maj 10
13 Grw-Frm
Heat Exchanger HI/LO Temperature
Min 11
CB10
Battery Discharge Alarm
Maj 12
Growth 0 Alarm (Growth 0 Heat Exchanger)
Min 13
CRTU
Min 14
CB12
External User Alarm 7
Min 15
Power Cabinet Minor Alarm
Min 16
12
Power Cabinet AC Failure Alarm
Maj 17
11
Min -
CB1
LEVEL
ROP TEXT MESSAGE
S2 USER
ALARM
BIT
Alarms are assigned a level of importance, ranging from MIN (Minor)

to CRITICAL reflecting the potential of the detected failure on the
ability of the Minicell to provide service. The ROP enables the Cell
Technician to identify which alarm has been triggered through the
display of offset codes. The following table indicates these codes.
OFFSET
Alarm Importance Levels
2131,2138, 2139
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 24

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostics
BIT
CB
AIM 1
TERM. NO.
PUNCH
DOWN
(OSP)
Primary Frame Amplifier Shelf Fan Alarm
Min -
CB2
Primary Frame Main Fan Alarm
Min -
CB3
Maj -
CB4
Controller Shelf Power Converter Alarm
Min -
CB5
CB13
Min -
CB9
Min -
CB10
Min -
CB10
Maj -
CB14
Min -
CB18
Min -
CB20
LEVEL
ROP TEXT MESSAGE
S2 USER
ALARM
OFFSET
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

6 - 25
Detailed Alarm Description -- LAC Alarms
Diagnostics
Detailed Alarm Description -- LAC Alarms
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Function
Amplifier alarms report on CTU power loss and Receive Unit failure.
Receiver Unit Alarms
Each RU has two alarm conditions: LNA failure and RU down

converter Synthesizer Out-of-Lock. If either of these alarm conditions
occur, a red LED on the faceplate is turned on and a logical 1" is sent
to the ACB.
CDMA Transmitter Unit

Alarms
The Transmitter Unit has two functional components: a TX Amplifier

and a TX Upconverter. Each component checks for different alarm
conditions. In order to minimize alarm reporting to the ACB, all the
alarm conditions for both components are ORed together before
reporting. If the CTU is not powered up, an alarm will be reported.
Synthesizer Out-of-Lock
The TX Upconverters frequency synthesizer in each CTU indicates an

Out-of-Lock Alarm by turning on a red LED on the CTU faceplate and
sending a logical 1 to the ACB via a backplane connection from each
CTU alarm output to the appropriate ACB input.
TX Amplifier Alarms
Each TX Amplifier will have three alarm conditions: synthesizer

out-of-lock, amplifier over-temperature, and over-current. If any or all
of these alarm conditions occur, a red LED on the TU faceplate is
turned on and a logical 1 is sent to ACB.
Low Noise Amplifier
Alarms
Failure in a Low Noise Amplifier will result in an alarm, with an LED

display on the ACB.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 26

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Detailed Alarm Description -- Frame Alarm
Diagnostics
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Function
415AC Power Converter

Unit Alarms
Frame alarms report on CTU failures. Frame alarms are composed of

Shelf Power Converter Alarms and Fan Alarms.
The 415AC PCUs have the following alarm types.
Low output voltage alarm if the output voltage falls below 97% of
nominal (RED LED turns on, relay contacts close).
High voltage alarm if the output voltage is greater than 103% of

nominal (output turns OFF, unit latches OFF, ~RED LED turns
ON, relay contacts close). The input voltage must be disconnected
before the latch will clear.
Red alarm LED on faceplate.
Green LED on faceplate (indicates presence of input voltage).
Single isolated contact closure upon LV alarm or HV shutdown.
The relay contacts of the 415AC are connected to the backplane

(ALM1, pin 113 and ALM2, pin 114). The ALM2 pin is connected to
ground. A relay closure connects ALM1 to ALM2 which indicates an
alarm (Logic 0).
The RCC Side 0 and 1 415AC PCU ALM1 pins are connected together
on the RCC backplane and run to the AFI on the backplane (pin 442
PROCPWRL).
The alarms for each 415AC in a CRC shelf are separately returned to
the AFI board (UN166) in the RCC for processing via interface
cabling.
CTU Backplane Power
Converter Alarms
The PCU used in the CTU shelf has the following alarms:
1.
Low output voltage alarm: If the output voltage falls below 3% of

nominal, one of two green LEDs on the Power Converter goes out
and a logical 1 is sent to the ACB.
2.
High voltage alarm: If the output voltage is greater than 3% of

nominal, one of two green LEDs on the Power Converter goes out
and a logical 1 is sent to the ACB.
The CTU shelf PCU alarms are connected to the ACB via internal
backplane traces. The ACB will then invert this signal to logic low for
alarm condition and outputs to the AFI via a CTU shelf backplane
connector.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

6 - 27
Fan Alarms
Diagnostics
A fan or heat exchanger blower failure (loss of +24 volt power or

reduction in fan/blower speed) triggers a failure alarm for each fan,
which is reported back to the AFI via separate interface cabling.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 28

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostics
User Alarms
User Alarms
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The PCS CDMA Minicell supports a total of 18 user alarms, ten of

them being predefined, and the other eight being customer-assigned
alarms.
User alarm inputs to the AFI are wired for cross-connect capability.
AIM1 connects directly to primary frame user alarms, or to lightningprotection blocks or power cabinet alarms and external user alarms.
User Alarm
Name
Number of Function
Alarms
CSU
1
Heat Exchanger 3
Intrusion
Power Cabinet
CSU alarm indicates a loss of signal.

These alarms are meant for high temperature, low temperature, and
heater failure.
This alarm is triggered whenever a door or side panel is opened.
These alarms cover intrusion, rectifier/circuit failure, AC power
failure, common fan failure, and generator failure. If applicable,
these alarms are also wired into the backup battery frame. Outdoor
cabinets have lightning-protected alarms.
These alarms are user defined, and report on failures such as
Antenna lights failure. These alarms should also be lightningprotected whenever they protect components that are outside the
Minicell housing.
1
5
External --User 8
defined
Miscellaneous Alarms
Other alarms are reported to the Switch, and provide visible indication
on an associated LED display:
RFTG-m Alarm: It has the various LED indicators on the unit

front panel, which indicate either operational or alarm conditions.
The RFTG-m, when in trouble, transmits a major alarm.
CDMA Radio Shelf Circuit Pack LED Indicators: The CDMA

radio shelf circuit packs have various LED indicators on their
faceplates. These LEDs indicate either operational or alarm
conditions.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

6 - 29
Diagnostics
User Alarms
Fault Detection and Recovery Tools

Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Introduction
In some cases, such as in the case of a temporary loss of power, the

Switch can automatically correct a system failure. This section contains
descriptions of the detection and automatic recovery tools that are
provided by the Switch to restore the system when faults occur.
Diagnostics cover the processes involved in identifying the cause of a
Minicell failure, whether indicated by an alarm or not.
Diagnostics can be run automatically or on demand.
Routine and Demand

Diagnostics
Routine diagnostics are run automatically by the MSC, according to a

specified schedule. Demand diagnostics are run by the Switch or Cell
Site Technician. Actual input commands and resulting output messages
have been discussed in Lessons 3 and 4.
In some cases, such as equipment upgrade, you will need to perform
complete diagnostics before running functional tests. In that case, you
should run your diagnostics in the order shown in the following list.
When the diagnostics are complete, functional tests must be run.
Diagnostics should be run in the following order:
1.
Radio Control Complex (RCC) Diagnostics
2.
Synchronized Clock and Tone (SCT) Diagnostics
3.
CDMA Cluster Controller (CCC) Diagnostics
4.
CDMA Channel Unit (CCU) Diagnostics.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 30

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostics
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Types of Performance
Testing
Performance measurement corresponds to the verification that the cell

is performing as specified.
Examples of performance testing include Rho and power
measurements, functional tests, and drive testing.
Performance testing is also sometimes used as a diagnostic tool to
identify failures that are not sufficiently severe to trigger an alarm, such
as a slow degradation of output level.
Performance Testing as a
Diagnostic Tool
Definitions of Tests
Performance Measurement can be used as a diagnostic tool to identify

potential sources of problems. This is especially true when measured
data differ from cell specifications, but when these differences are too
small to trigger an alarm.
Performance Measurement and the FCC Used as a tool to verify
that the Minicell functions within the parameters of its FCC license.
Rho Measurement, Power Measurement Measures the quality and
strength of the signal as generated by the Minicell.
Functional Tests Uses the CRTU to verify that signals are correctly
processed by the Minicell.
Drive Testing Conducted to check on the Minicell health from the
user perspective.
Configure
For more Information on

Drive Testing
Configure (CFR) Command requesting cell site equipment

configurations for FCC testing.
A detailed description of drive testing can be found in Lucent
Technologies PCS System Acceptance Guidelines and Procedures 401703-203.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

6 - 31
Diagnostics
Automatic Recovery Tools
Automatic Recovery Tools
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
The PCS CDMA Minicell has fault-recovery software that allows it to

recover automatically from internally and externally detected faults. No
single failure causes the complete loss of frame functionality. This is
achieved, in part, by building redundancy into the system for critical
system components. The strategy is to switch the standby or spare
component into service when there is a fault in the active component.
Once the faulty component is out-of-service, it can be diagnosed,
repaired, and placed back into service when needed. In general,
requests for removing a faulty unit from service come from the
automatic fault-recovery software or from the ECP.
Automatic Recovery
The cell site automatic fault recovery software consists of two main
software subsystems: the HEH and the maintenance request
administrator (MRA). The MRA subsystem not only responds to
external requests from the MSC, but also responds to internal requests
submitted by other software subsystems such as HEH. MRA handles
requests to return information about the cell site, to remove (deactivate)
cell site equipment, to restore (activate) cell site equipment, to perform
diagnostic tests on cell site equipment, and so on.
Throughout the maintenance process, the maintenance status of
equipment (hardware) is recorded, and the maintenance status of
equipment is reported to the ECP when the status changes or the ECP
requests an update. The status of cell site equipment is displayed at the
ECP.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 32

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostics
Fault Detection Mechanisms For Manual

Recovery
Fault Detection Mechanisms For Manual Recovery
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble Indicators
Cell Site Housekeeping

Software
There are various sources from which the technician can learn about
the health of the PCS cellular system. Those sources include:
Alarms
Cell site housekeeping software
System performance measurements
Subscriber complaints
Drive testing
The cell site has excellent housekeeping software; faults such as

are constantly monitored and are automatically reported to the
Executive Cellular Processor (ECP). In most cases, fault detection,
diagnosis, and recovery are automatic.
The cell site detects faults by various means including diagnostic tests,
functional tests, software audits, software asserts, board self-tests,
hardware integrity checks, and hardware alarm scanning.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

6 - 33
OMP Read-Only Printer (ROP) Monitor
Diagnostics
OMP Read-Only Printer (ROP) Monitor
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
The OMP ROP monitor contains a copy of all system communications,

thereby forming a history of system operations. All entered input
commands and generated system responses (including faults reported
automatically by a network element such as the cell site) are stored at
the OMP for up to 30 days. This same information is printed at the
ROP.
The ECP technician can use the information to track and analyze cell
site actions, hardware errors, and audit reports. Each entry has an
associated time stamp.
Report Types
There are two types of output reports: solicited and spontaneous.

Solicited reports are generated in response to the commands entered by
the technician. Spontaneous reports are generated without any input
from the technician; they are initiated automatically by system events
or conditions. An example of a spontaneous report is the reporting of a
cell site hardware error and corresponding automatic recovery action.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 34

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostics
RF Call Trace
RF Call Trace
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Call Trace Uses
RF call trace (RF CALL) allows a technician to study the strength of

the signal received from a selected mobile station as it travels through
the cellular system. Signal strength measurements can be collected
from as many as eight cell sites. A log of the measurements can be
displayed showing both measurements from the serving cell site and
the strongest measurements for the strongest non-service cell site. RF
call trace is available for AMPS, TDMA, and CDMA mobile stations.
RF call trace is useful for:
Handoff studies
Optimizing neighbor lists
Identifying poor coverage areas
Studying uplink-downlink balance
Verifying subscriber complaints
Technicians can use this tool to analyze the mobile RF environment

and fine tune translations (system parameters) relating to handoffs and
interference.
Related Documents
These documents provide additional information on RF call trace:
RF Call Trace Optional Feature (401-612-052)
CDMA RF Call Trace (401-601-055)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

6 - 35
Orthogonal-Channel Noise Simulator
Diagnostics
Orthogonal-Channel Noise Simulator
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Orthogonal-channel noise simulator (OCNS) is a CDMA-specific

feature in which a special software personality is loaded into one or
more CDMA channel elements (CEs) at the cell site. OCNS-configured
CEs are used to generate radio signals that simulate the effect of
multiple users, so that CDMA system capacity can be estimated in the
presence of actual electrical noise from the environment.
A CE contains the necessary circuitry to support one CDMA channel. It
can be configured as an overhead channel, a traffic channel, or - for
testing purposes - an OCNS channel.
OCNS Uses
Requirements
The OCNS feature is a convenient way to perform load testing on the

forward link of the CDMA system. It eliminates the need for mobile
stations and reduces the number of cell site resources needed for the
tests.
The OCNS feature requires the use of a mobile diagnostic monitor
(MDM) at the cell site. The MDM is used to collect data for off-line
analysis.
An OCNS session is on a per sector and carrier basis and is
independent of any other OCNS session. The OCNS design can support
multiple sessions at the same cell site. No existing or in-progress calls
are dropped by starting an OCNS session. Any CE configured as an
overhead or traffic channel is not directly affected by OCNS activity.
See Lucents System 1000 Cell Site DCS I/O Manual401-610-107 .
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 - 36

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
Overview
Purpose
In many instances, diagnostic results indicate that more than one unit
may be at fault. This is often true in circuits involving both digital and
RF functions. Some corrective action situations involve replacing one
or more circuit cards within a group of two or three suspect cards. For
this situation, the most effective corrective action is to replace each
card and rerun the diagnostic test until the trouble is cleared.
There are other cases in which corrective action is not so
straightforward, because diagnostic definition is lacking and/or suspect
units are not easy to replace. To support this type of trouble-locating
situation, where possible, trouble isolation procedures must be used.
Contents
CRTU Measurement Fundamentals

CRTU Function - - - - - - - - - - - Functional Tests using the CRTU - - - Testing using MOST - - - - - - - - - Testing Overhead Channels - - - - - Testing Overhead Paths - - - - - - - Testing Traffic Paths - - - - - - - - - Pilot Level Functional Test (PLFT) - - CRTU Transmit Antenna Test - - - - Single Channel Selective Functional Test
7-3
- 7-4
- 7-6
- 7-9
- 7-11
- 7-13
- 7-16
- 7-18
- 7-21
- 7-22
Performance Measurements
7-24
Service Measurements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-25
Plant Measurements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-26
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 1
Troubleshooting
Voice Channel Selection Activity Measurements Frame Error Rate and Power-Level Measurements
Subscriber Complaints - - - - - - - - - - - - CRTUm Traffic Path Functional Test - - - - - Call Setup Tests - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Alarm Test Procedure - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Minicell Alarm Testing Procedures

PCS CDMA Minicell Alarm Test Procedures - - - - Enabling Selective Cell Site Messaging Feature - - - Reference Frequency and Timing Generator (RFTG) 0
CSC Shelf Power Converters Alarms - - - - - - - - Power-Level Measurements - - - - - - - - - - - - CRC Shelf Power Converters Alarm - - - - - - - - CTU Shelf Converters Alarm - - - - - - - - - - - Fan and Heat Exchanger Blower Alarm Test - - - - External Alarms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Power Cabinet Alarms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Reference Frequency and Timing Generator (RFTG)1 Restoring Out-Of-Service Equipment - - - - - - - PCS CDMA Minicell Alarm Map - - - - - - - - - Minicell Alarm Definition File - - - - - - - - - - - Troubleshooting Procedures
Communicating with the PCS CDMA Cell
Optioning the CSU - - - - - - - - - - Setting up the PCS CDMA HP Test Set CDMA Clock Verification Test - - - - Analyzing the CDMA RF Spectrum - - Power Measurement Transmit Levels - Rho Measurement - - - - - - - - - - - -
7-27
7-28
7-29
7-30
7-31
7-33
7-36
- 7-37
- 7-38
- 7-40
- 7-41
- 7-44
- 7-45
- 7-49
- 7-56
- 7-59
- 7-61
- 7-65
- 7-67
- 7-68
- 7-71
7-72
- 7-73
- 7-76
- 7-79
- 7-82
- 7-86
- 7-88
- 7-93
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 2

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
CRTU Measurement Fundamentals

Overview
Purpose
Preparation for Working at
the Cell Site
It is assumed that the technician is familiar with the following or that

such conditions are otherwise met:
Wrist grounding straps must always be attached before working

on any component or handling the circuit packs (CPs). This is to
prevent or reduce electrostatic discharge that may damage or
destroy circuit packs containing integrated circuits.
Handling CPs by the edges and the faceplates to avoid damaging

contacts and deforming components.
Powering down the failing unit (when required), re-seating CPs,

powering up the unit, and repeating diagnostics when an initial
STF message is received to verify the corrective action.
Replacing one CP at a time when several are suspected, then

replacing the next questionable CP, and repeating the diagnostics.
Understanding operations of the terminal to include mode

changing, page manipulation, and message conventions.
Tagging faulty CPs with office location, mounting location,

diagnostic phase and test that failed, and date removed.
All test equipment is known to be calibrated and functioning

properly.
A replacement unit or CP is known to be good.
Burned out lamps or LEDs are replaced without instruction.
Audible alarms are retired without instruction.
The technician knows how to operate the test equipment to

perform the recommended tests.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 3
Troubleshooting
CRTU Function
CRTU Function
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
What the CRTU Does
The CRTU makes it possible to test the functionality of the RF train

subsystem of a working Minicell by emulating a mobile unit. To
accomplish this, the CRTU permits you to test:
1.
Overhead (Pilot/Sync/Access (P/S/A), Paging) channel elements:

Verification that the P/S/A channel elements (CEs) and page CEs
are working
2.
Traffic channel elements:

Verification that the Minicell traffic CEs are working.
3.
Pilot Level functional test:

Checking the power level of the pilot channel and by inference the
power of the Minicell.
Test Sequence
How the CRTU works
As the CRTU tests the Minicell, the following events take place,
roughly in this order:
1.
The CRTU tests parts of the Minicell, including the RF train,

using a battery of test sequences. A MOST facility in the 5ESS2000 Switch DCS (the figure on 7-9) supports the CRTU as it tests
active, idle CEs in sequence.
2.
While testing, the CRTU evaluates the operational aspects of inservice channel elements and antenna sectors (if not an
omni-configured Minicell) or face (if an omni configuration).
3.
The status of the tests (e.g., pass/fail) may be reported by:
the Read Only Printer (ROP)
Status Display Page (SDP) 2131
There are two ways to invoke a CRTU functional test: automatically

(scheduled) or manually.
Whether under automatic or manual control, when a CRTU test
sequence is invoked, the RCC instructs the CRTU to dial the CRTUdesignated MOST number. If the ECP receives the call for the
particular test, the ECP at the DCS identifies it as a MOST call and
terminates the test call to a source (MOST NUMBER) as a MOST call
from the CRTU.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 4

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
CRTU Function
The RCC can trigger any one of several MOST test functions including
forced handoff. (The term forced handoff means to change to another
Channel Element.)
During the traffic path functional test, the RCC uses the MOST forced
handoff function to transfer the call to idle (active and non-busy) traffic
CEs within the same physical antenna face, or sector, until the call has
been handled by each idle traffic CE available to the antenna face.
After a face is tested the other faces are tested.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 5
Troubleshooting
Functional Tests using the CRTU
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Enable the CRTU
This procedure is designed to enable you to use the CRTU to perform

functional tests.
To enable the CRTU, the CRTU does the following:
.......................................................................................................................................
Verify that the pilot/sync/access (P/S/A) Channel Elements (CEs) and

Page CEs are operational.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Verify that the CDMA Traffic CEs are operational.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Initiate Overhead Channel

(OC) Functional Test (FT)
Test your cell with different operating parameters.
To verify that the Overhead Channel is operating properly, perform the

following command and wait for system response to proceed to the
next step. This example will run across all sectors.
exc:cell a,ft oc<cr>, (a is the cell number, between 1 and 222)
Response
M 21 EXC,CELL x FT OC, STARTED

DEVICE - ttyc
(A time/date/id #)
M 22 EXC:CELL x FT OC, COMPLETED
OC 1
COMPLETED
ALL TEST PASSED
OC 2
COMPLETED
ALL TEST PASSED
OC 3
COMPLETED
ALL TEST PASSED
DEVICE - ttyc
(A time/date/id #)
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 6

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
Procedure 7-1. Initiate Traffic Path(TP) Functional Test(FT)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To verify that the Traffic Path is operating properly, perform the

following command and wait for system response to proceed to the
next step. This example will run across all sectors.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
exc:cell x,ft tp<cr>,
x = Minicell # 1-222
Response
Output may be different depending on the configuration of the

Minicell.
M 22 EXC,CELL x FT TP, STARTED
DEVICE - ttyc
(a time/date/id#)
M 22 EXC:CELL x FT TP, COMPLETED
TP 1 COMPLETED
ALL TESTS PASSED
CCC 2, CCU 3, CE 1
COMPLETED
ALL TEST PASSED
CCC 2, CCU 2, CE 1
COMPLETED
ALL TEST PASSED
CCC 2, CCU 3, CE 0
COMPLETED
ALL TEST PASSED
CCC 2, CCU 1, CE 1
COMPLETED
ALL TEST PASSED
CCC 2, CCU 4, CE 1
COMPLETED
ALL TEST PASSED
CCC 2, CCU 4, CE 0
COMPLETED
ALL TEST PASSED
DEVICE - ttyc
(This is just an example. The sequence of CEs will vary)
(a time/date/id#)
TP 2 COMPLETED
ALL TESTS PASSED
CCC 2, CCU 2, CE 1
COMPLETED
ALL TEST PASSED
CCC 2, CCU 3, CE 1
COMPLETED
ALL TEST PASSED
CCC 2, CCU 3, CE 0
COMPLETED
ALL TEST PASSED
CCC 2, CCU 4, CE 1
COMPLETED
ALL TEST PASSED
CCC 2, CCU 1, CE 1
COMPLETED
ALL TEST PASSED
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 7
Troubleshooting
CCC 2, CCU 4, CE 0
COMPLETED
ALL TEST PASSED
DEVICE - ttyc
(a time/date/id#)
TP 3 COMPLETED
ALL TESTS PASSED
CCC 2, CCU 3, CE 1
COMPLETED
ALL TEST PASSED
CCC 2, CCU 2, CE 1
COMPLETED
ALL TEST PASSED
CCC 2, CCU 3, CE 0
COMPLETED
ALL TEST PASSED
CCC 2, CCU 1, CE 1
COMPLETED
ALL TEST PASSED
CCC 2, CCU 4, CE 1
COMPLETED
ALL TEST PASSED
CCC 2, CCU 4, CE 0
COMPLETED
ALL TEST PASSED
DEVICE - ttyc
(a time/date/id#)
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 8

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
Testing using MOST
Testing using MOST
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The CDMA functional tests require that the CRTU set up test calls
using the mobile station test (MOST) feature.
The type of CDMA MOST call described in this unit is originated by
the CRTU.
Both the Executive Call Processor (ECP) and the Radio Control
Complex (RCC) in the PCS CDMA Minicell can distinguish a MOST
call type because each has a unique Mobile Directory Number Type
value designated via the RC/V subform.
Relationship of 5ESS-2000
to PCS CDMA Minicell with
CRTU
The figure below illustrates the relationship between the 5ESS-2000

Switch and the PCS CDMA Minicell base station with a CRTU
subsystem. The CRTU in the figure is represented as CRTUi and
CRTUm, respectively.
TO/FROM
PSTN
CRTU Components
MSC
PCS CDMA Minicell
T1 LINES
5ESS-2000 SWITCH DCS

RCC
TDM
BUS
CRTUi
TDM
BUS
T1/E1
DIGITAL
FACILITIES
INTERFACE
MOST
NUMBER
TIME SLOT
INTERCHANGE
UNIT
DIGITAL
FACILITIES
INTERFACE
CRTUm
RF
TX
ANT
RX ANTs
DIV0 DIV1
DFI
SPAN
CTU
PCM
PACKET PIPE
PROTOCOL
HANDLER
FOR VOICE
FRAME RELAY
PROTOCOL
HANDLER
BCR
RSP
CDMA PATH
DEFINITIONS:
CRTUi
CDMA RADIO TEST UNIT INTERFACE
CRTUm CDMA RADIO TEST UNIT MODULE
MOST
MOBILE STATION TEST (FEATURE)
RSP
RADIO SWITCH PANEL
MOST Test Process

.......................................................................................................................................
Software at the RCC determines how the CE forced handoff will

function.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 9
Troubleshooting
Testing using MOST
...........................................................................................................................................................................
After FT triggers a MOST forced handoff, the CE selection algorithm

starts at the CE currently handling the call and searches forward through
the ordered list of CEs until it finds an idle traffic CE to hand the call.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The RCC then hands off to the selected CE.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
After executing the handoff, the RCC can either trigger another forced
handoff to continue the test session or release the MOST call if all idle
traffic CEs have been tested.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 10

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
Testing Overhead Channels
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The overhead channel functional test verifies the following for each
antenna face (or sector) of the cell:
pilot
sync
paging
access.
The testing of one antenna face (non-sectored) takes approximately 30

seconds to complete, if successful.
Test Phases
The overhead channel functional test consists of two phases, in this

order:
.......................................................................................................................................
Pilot, sync, and paging channel acquisition test.

Results: Verifies that the overhead-channel forward path (base-tomobile path) is functioning.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Access-paging channel test.

Results: Verifies that the overhead-channel reverse path (mobile-tobase path) is functioning.
Test Process
The following process takes place during overhead channel functional

testing:
The CRTU acquires the pilot, sync, and paging channels, known as the
CDMA forward control channels, by locking on a particular CDMA
center frequency (carrier) and pilot pseudo-noise (PN) offset.
.......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................
During the final portion of the testing, the CRTU calls the CRTUdesignated MOST directory number to verify access and paging
operation.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 11
Troubleshooting
Initiating a Test
The overhead channel functional test may be initiated in one of three

ways:
1.
Manually requested
2.
Timer-scheduled
3.
RCC-initiated.
RCC Initiated Actions
If the RCC senses a failure in an overhead channel or a failure in the

CCU carrying the overhead channel, the RCC will automatically
migrate the overhead channel to another CE. The RCC does this by
selecting and configuring another CE as the overhead channel. In
single-carrier operation, the overhead CEs for a sector or omni cell
must be on the same CDMA cluster; that is, the overhead CEs must be
controlled by the same CDMA cluster controller (CCC).
Tests in Multiple-Sector
Cell
For a multiple-sector cell, the RCC performs both parts of the overhead
channel functional test on sector 1 (alpha), then performs both parts of
the overhead channel functional test on sector 2 (beta), and so on, until
the RCC has tested all sectors of the cell.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 12

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
Testing Overhead Paths
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Testing the PSA Channel
The overhead channels are tested with the execution of the FT OC test.
The various aspects of the overhead channels are tested as shown.
To do a pilot, sync, and paging channel acquisition test, the following
actions occur:
.......................................................................................................................................
The RCC instructs the CRTU to connect to a certain antenna face

through the Radio Switch Panel (RSP).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The mobile acquires the pilot, sync, and paging channels for the face.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The mobile transitions to the system idle state.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
The CRTUi queries the status of the CRTUm.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
5
Testing Access Paging
Channel
To pass, the CRTUm must return the system idle state.

To do an access paging channel test, the following actions occur:
.......................................................................................................................................
The RCC instructs the CRTU to initiate a CRTU-designated MOST call

...........................................................................................................................................................................
2
Testing a Forward Path
(Phase 1)
To pass, the network must be able to set up the call.

To do an overhead channel functional test (forward path), the following
actions occur:
.......................................................................................................................................
The RCC selects an antenna face to test.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
The RCC instructs the CRTU to connect the RSP to that face
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 13
Troubleshooting
.
The CRTU connects the RSP to the transmit path and the diversity 0
receive path.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The RCC queries the status of the CRTU.

The CRTU can only go to the system idle state if it acquires all three
(pilot, sync and paging) forward control channels. If the CRTU never
responds to the status query or returns a status other than system idle,
the overhead channel functional test reports that it is a failure and then
aborts.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The CRTU returns the mobile idle state to the RCC, indicating that the
CRTU has acquired the pilot, sync, and paging channels.
Testing a Reverse Path

(Phase 2)
Once it confirms that the overhead-channel forward path is functioning,

the RCC tests the overhead-channel reverse path (performs the access
paging channel test). The following sequence of events occurs:
.......................................................................................................................................
The RCC instructs the CRTU to dial the CRTU-designated MOST

directory number.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The CRTUm dials the MOST directory number.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
The P/S/A CE for the selected antenna face receives an over the air
origination message from the CRTU and passes the message to its
controlling CCC.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The controlling CCC:
instructs its page CE to acknowledge the CRTU origination. The

page CE sends an over the air acknowledgment message to the
CRTU.
informs the RCC that the CRTUm has originated a call.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The RCC instructs the CRTU to release the MOST call.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 14

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
6
Invoking an Overhead
Channel Test
The CRTU releases the call and then releases control of the RSP.
If the cell being tested has more than one antenna face, and if the test
was initiated manually for more than one antenna face, the RCC will
immediately select and begin testing the next antenna face. If the test
was initiated by a timer (a scheduled functional test), the RCC will wait
a certain amount of time before testing the next antenna face.
The following table shows how test results are reported depending on
how the test was intiiatd:
If initiated...
...the RCC will...
manually
report the test results (pass, fail) to the ECP
automatically
report the test results if the test fails
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 15
Troubleshooting
Testing Traffic Paths
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The traffic path functional test verifies that a CDMA traffic path can be
established and maintained through every active and idle traffic CE on
every antenna face, or sector, of the cell. A CE configured as a traffic
channel contains the necessary circuitry to process one CDMA traffic
channel. The RCC repeats the MOST call origination and handoff for
each antenna face of the cell.
The testing time of one antenna face varies from less than one minute
to more than three or four minutes, depending upon how many idle
traffic CEs are available to the antenna face.
Testing a Traffic Path
To do traffic path functional testing, the RCC does the following:

.......................................................................................................................................
Selects an antenna face and then performs an overhead channel

functional test on that face.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Instructs the CRTU to dial the CRTU-designated MOST directory

number to test the access-paging portion of the overhead channel test.
The RCC continues to Step 3 only if the overhead channel test passes.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Requests message and subscriber validation to the ECP.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
The ECP:
1.
identifies the call as a CRTU-designated MOST call during digit

analysis
2.
terminates the test call to the MOST source at the DCS
3.
sends a traffic-channel assignment message to the RCC
4.
sets up the proper speech handler connections at the DCS
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Instructs a CCC to select a specific traffic CE available to the antenna

face being tested to handle the CRTU origination, and also sends a
channel confirmation message to the ECP, which completes the call path
through the DCS (the MOST low tone is received by the CRTU).
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 16

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Queries the status of the CRTU. The CRTU returns the traffic channel
state to the RCC, verifying that the CRTU is in the talk state.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Instructs the CRTU to send a certain 3-digit feature code to trigger the
MOST forced handoff function. The CRTU sends the feature code,
which is received by the RCC as an over the air flash-withinformation message.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Sends the message to the ECP, which sends a MOST forced handoff
command to the RCC.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Selects the next CE to which the call should be handed off.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
Writes data pertaining to the selected CE (CE, CCU, CCC, and sector)
into a global data area and then attempts to hand off the MOST call to
the selected CE.
Proceeds to Step 10 if handoff succeeded, or to Step 11 if handoff
failed
...........................................................................................................................................................................
11
If handoff succeeded, the RCC reports the results to the ECP and sends
an over the air flash-with-information message to the CRTU. It
updates the global data area for the selected CE with the successful test
result.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
12
If handoff failed, the RCC reports the results to the ECP and does not
send an over the air flash-with-information message to the CRTU.
The RCC updates the global data area for the selected CE with the failed
test result.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 17
Troubleshooting
Pilot Level Functional Test (PLFT)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
The purpose of the PLFT is to test the power level of the pilot signal to
facilitate performance measurement.
Preparations
The customer is required to populate several database fields via Recent

Change and Verify (RC/V). Without these necessary database updates,
the PLFT feature will occasionally print PLFT failures on the ROP and
the pilots will turn yellow (pilot degraded) on the Status Display Pages
(SDPs). The interval can be set via the RC/V forms.
Procedure 7-2. PLFT
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The procedure to initialize the data needed for the PLFT feature is as
follows:
...........................................................................................................................................................................
[OPTIONAL] Adjust Pilot Power Verify that the pilot channel signal
strengths are within tolerance at the J4, transmit antenna test point, test
point for each carrier/sector pair.
Lab support may choose to skip this step; however, customers (service
providers) should not. If the cell is not properly adjusted, the calibration
value may be used to compensate for the condition, but the values
reported by the PLFT feature will not be correct.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Inhibit the PLFT INH:CELL x, FT PL at the craft shell.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Initialize Calibration Value Set the CDMA Pilot Level Calibration

value for the sector/carrier pair(s) of interest (those that are equipped) to
0 dB using RC/V. The translation can be found on the CEQFACE form,
screen 14.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Execute the PLFT for the Sector EXC:CELL x, FT PL y at the craft

shell. (It will most likely fail i.e., the pilot will be out-of-tolerance.
However, it is the ROP output that is of interest.)
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 18

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Calculate the Calibration Value Subtract the reported (actual) pilot

level from the expected pilot level for the carrier (the values are taken
from the ROP output resulting from step 4 and enter the difference into
the CDMA Pilot Level Calibration Value field on the RC/V screen
(CEQFACE form). The difference will usually be a positive value, in
dB. (e.g., EXP=30.8 dB, ACTL=-80.5 dB, therefore the calibration
value is 111.3 dB) It is recommended that an average, using 5 to 10 runs,
be calculated and the average entered.
In lieu of averaging, the Pilot Tolerance Value can be increased by
approximately 1.0 dB.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Verify Calibration Value Rerun the PLFT for the sector to verify that
the difference calculated in step 5 is now 0 dB. (The difference may vary
slightly between runs.) If the difference is not 0 +/- 1.0 dB, repeat steps
Initialize Calibration Value through Verify Calibration Value.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Do for All Repeat steps 3 through 6 for each equipped carrier/sector

pair. Note that all of the carriers for a given sector can be calibrated in
parallel since the ROP report will contain data for all of the carriers in
the requested sector. In fact, all of the sectors can be calibrated in
parallel as well, by omitting the y argument in the EXC:CELL
command in step 4.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
[OPTIONAL] Set Tolerance Value Set the CDMA Pilot Level

Tolerance Value to the desired value using RC/V. The translation can
be found on the ECP form, screen 15 (or CEQCOM2, screen 2). The
default value of 1.5 dB should be suitable for most installations. If
averaging was not done in step 5 it is recommended (but not necessary)
that a value larger than 1.5 dB be used.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Allow the PLFT ALW:CELL x, FT PL at the craft shell.

END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 19
Troubleshooting
Result
The above procedure should be performed on every cell with a CRTU

equipped in the system. Also, it should be noted that this procedure
should be carried out again, after:
changing the BCR attenuation factor by n or more (CEQCOM2)
changing the pilot channels digital gain by m or more

(CEQFACE)
HW modifications to the RF test path
growing in new carriers or sectors on the cell.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 20

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
CRTU Transmit Antenna Test
CRTU Transmit Antenna Test
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Reason for the Test
This test informs the operator when a CDMA transmit antenna is not
operating correctly.
A CDMA antenna can become inoperable for several reasons. The
most common reason is damage to the antenna from adverse weather.
Without this test, the operator might be unaware that there is no
transmission from a sector of a cell which appears to be operating
correctly.
Procedure 7-3. When to Execute
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The test is a functional test and can be performed manually or

automatically.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Initiate the FT via the EXC command.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Allow or inhibit the automatic (scheduled) test via the ALW and INH
commands, respectively.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
In addition, the technician can specify the interval at which the

scheduled ANT FT executes in a manner identical to what is currently
performed for the OC (Overhead Channel), TP (Traffic Path) and PL
(Pilot Level) FTs.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
When executed as automatically, only test failures are reported. When

executed manually, a report will be made of the result of the test
whether the test was successful or not.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 21
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This Single Channel selective Functional Test (SC FT) provides the
technician with the ability to evaluate the quality of a call on a specific
Traffic CE (TCE). This feature uses a markov service option which
provides pseudo-random data for testing the traffic channel between
the mobile and the basestation and RF Call Trace capability to collect
Markov data. The SC FT will provide a ROP report with the Markov
statistics collected for both forward and reverse links.
CE States on the SDP
The Status Display Pages (SDP) subsystem currently supports and

displays different CE statuses. The three states that SC FT is interested
in are camp-on, idle, and busy.
CE state
Status
Display
Color (foreground on
background)
camp-on
camp
red on green
idle
idle
white on black
traffic busy busy
black on green
When executing SC FT, the technician can look at the SDP 2139 to find
out if the CE requested is busy and being camped on. When the CE is
being camped on for SC FT, the SDP will display the CE status as
camp (red/green).
When the CE is in reserve state for SC FT and waiting for a call to
come up, the CE is idle. However, it is not available for normal call
processing to make calls on it. Its status will be displayed as idle
(white/black).
When a call is up on the reserved CE, the CE is considered traffic busy
and its status will be displayed as busy (black/green).
Procedure 7-4.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This test is executed on manual mode only (via a TI command). It is not

supported for automatic mode (via a timer scheduled at the specified
interval).
.......................................................................................................................................
At the command prompt, execute the functional test.

EXC: CELL a, FT SC c, CCC d, CCU e, CE f [,VORATE g]!
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 22

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
where
a = A single cell site number (1 - 222)
c = The sector number (0 - 6)
d = The CDMA Cluster Controller number (1 - 30)
e = The CDMA Channel Unit number (1 - 7)
f = The CDMA Channel Element (0 - 9)
g = Optional Vocoder rate (8, 13)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 23
Troubleshooting
Performance Measurements
System Performance Measurements
Purpose
Periodically, the ECP collects various measurements from the cell site
and stores them in files at the ECP. The measurements contain
information about system performance including traffic data,
subscriber (mobile) data, and cell site equipment data.
Need for Performance

Measurements
Measurements are unique in that they can be used to identify cell-siterelated faults that cannot be detected by the RCC, such as callprocessing coverage problems and hardware units having partial
performance degradation. As explanation, catastrophic and severe
failures will be detected by the RCC, but less severe failures may
escape detection by the RCC.
Examples of Performance
Degradation
Measurement Types
The following problems can cause reduction of radiated power (and

therefore reduced coverage) without detection:
Damaged antenna
Partial lightning damage to antenna/cable
Damaged feeder
Damaged, faulty, or waterlogged connectors
New (since the Minicell installation) buildings, foliage growth,

and other obstructions
There are four types of measurements collected by the RCC and

reported to the ECP:
Service measurements
Plant measurements
Voice channel selection activity (VCSA) measurements
Power-level measurements.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 24

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
Service Measurements
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview

Collecting Service
Measurements
Service measurements can be collected on a scheduled basis (scheduled

hourly by the ECP) or on a manual basis. On the scheduled basis, the
RCC continually gathers service measurements and reports the data
hourly to the ECP.
At the ECP, the collected data is saved in a series of 24 data files, one
file for every hour of the day. The files are overwritten with new data
beginning at the start of a new day.
copied to the OMP.
Per-Carrier Service
Measurements
Starting ECP 13 Service Measurements are collected on a per-carrier

basis. This assists isolating system faults.
copied to the OMP.
Related Documents
These documents provide more detailed information for service

measurements.
Service Measurements (401-610-135)
Special Studies Measurements (CIB 117-8A).
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 25
Troubleshooting
Plant Measurements
Plant Measurements
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview

site equipment including failure occurrences, failure durations (out-ofservice time), audit failures, diagnostic failures, and initialization. The
removals.
Collecting Plant
Measurements
Related Documents
Plant measurements can be collected on a scheduled basis or manual

basis. Scheduling of plant measurements is controlled exclusively by
the RCC, which automatically reports the data to the ECP every day at
the set time.
ECP Plant Measurements System (254-341-116).
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 26

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Voice Channel Selection Activity Measurements
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview

of the involved mobile station, and other data. Off-line processing of
this data by the AutoPACE system provides information about voice
channel selection and handoffs during call processing.
Collecting VCSA
Measurements

Related Documents
Performance Analysis and Cellular Engineering Users Guide (401660-108).
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 27
Troubleshooting
Frame Error Rate and Power-Level

Measurements
Frame Error Rate and Power-Level Measurements
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview

channels. The data is used by the AutoPACE system to investigate
system troubles, add or alter radio frequencies, fine-tune a system, and
plan growth.
Collecting Power-Level
Measurements

is completed.
Related Documents

CDMA Frame Error Rate (FER) and Power Level Measurement
(PLM) Optional Feature Document (401-612-203)
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 28

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
Subscriber Complaints
Subscriber Complaints
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Drive Testing
Subscriber (customer) complaints can be used to help identify

problems of poor or reduced coverage, assuming that the problems are
repeatable and not due to operator error. There can be a number of
reasons why a customer reports less than satisfactory service,
including:
The mobile station or installation is faulty.
The customer has incorrectly operated the mobile equipment.
The customer is outside the normal coverage area.
A cell site fault is evident.
The customer attempted calls during the down time of the system/
cell.
Drive testing, which equates to driving a motor vehicle (complete with

mobile transceiver) in a specific area of coverage while attempting to
complete or monitor mobile calls, is a performance analysis activity
that may be used to find service-affecting problems. Drive testing an
entire cellular system to find problems is very effective at directly
assessing system performance; however, it is very time consuming and
expensive. Therefore, system-level drive testing is not normally
performed except after a re-tune or major configuration change.
Drive testing may be performed using a normal mobile or a test mobile.
The test mobile is virtually identical to a normal mobile but has
incorporated an automatic answer and the ability to loop back the line
to the cell site. It can also check RF propagation, because the test
receiver measures the cell site RF off-air.
Trouble Isolation
For a system fault involving the cell site, it is important to diagnose

whether the fault is from the DCS, the transmission link, the site
controller, or the RF. The test mobile is an important tool to
differentiate between these categories.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 29
Troubleshooting
CRTUm Traffic Path Functional Test
CRTUm Traffic Path Functional Test
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
If a CRTU is not equipped, skip the procedures in this subsection.
Procedure 7-5. Running the CRTUm Traffic Path Functional Test
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Verify the CRTU is in service.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Run the CRTUm traffic path functional test. The test should pass on
each channel element (two channel elements per TCU or 10 channels
per ECU.) for all antenna faces; on all CRC shelves. The command
(from the switch) is listed below.
exc:cell x, ft tp
The Traffic Path Functional test is run only on diversity 0. Other

procedures will test diversity.
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 30

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
Call Setup Tests
Call Setup Tests
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This section describes the various Call Setup Tests.
Procedure 7-6. Diversity 1/Transmit Face Tests
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Remove power from diversity 0 RUs by turning OFF CB1.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Make a call (to the switch) using each CCU on ALPHA face (remove
from service the BBA for BETA and GAMMA) of the growth cabinet.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Repeat the above step for the BETA face. Then repeat the above step for
the GAMMA face.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Restore power to diversity 0 RUs by turning ON CB1.

END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 7-7. Diversity 0 Tests
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
These tests are not required if the CRTUm Traffic Path Functional Test
test was completed. Diversity 0 was tested in that section.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove power from diversity 1 RU by turning OFF CB9.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Place a call (to the switch) using any CCU (only one is necessary) on
ALPHA face of the growth cabinet.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Repeat the above step for the BETA face. Then repeat the above step for
the GAMMA face.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 31
Troubleshooting
Call Setup Tests
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Restore power to diversity 0 RU by turning ON CB2.

END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 32

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
Alarm Test Procedure
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Alarm testing will be done via the switch. The procedure will be to
perform an action (e.g., turn off a CB) on the growth cabinet, and verify
the result (i.e., an alarm going active) at the switch on the ROP.
Enter the following command at a craftshell or UNIX [Tipdunix login]
terminal to show the alarms to the terminal as they change state:
alw:cell x,scsm <cr>
x = Minicell #
Preliminary
To override the Intrusion Alarms (door open, User Alarm 10), gently
pull the front door alarm switch until it comes to a full stop. Do the
same for the Power and Backup Cabinet door alarm switches, if
equipped.
At the Power Cabinet, ensure that both the MAJOR and MINOR LEDs
on the CPS ACU (cabinet power system alarm control unit) are
extinguished.
If External User Alarms have been wired and equipped in the
Translations set, place the switch or sensor in a non-alarming or
Normal state.
Verify if the gray protector caps have been installed in the Power
Cabinet.
Alarm Scans
Call the cell to see which alarms are active.

The cell under test should indicate no alarms.
If the Radio Cabinet door is left open on a cold day (outside
temperature below freezing), then User 11, High/Low Temp, may be
reported.
Growth Cabinet Alarm

Tests
The table below shows the alarms associated with the given circuit
breaker.
Circuit
Breaker
Alarm Scan Reported
20
Growth Frame 1 Radio Shelf 0 Power Converter (CRC 0)
18
Growth Frame 1 Radio Shelf 1 Power Converter (CRC1)
16
Growth Frame 1 Radio Shelf 2 Power Converter (CRC2)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 33
Troubleshooting
Growth Frame 1 Radio Amplifier Power Converter 4 (PCU1

on CTU Shelf)
Growth Frame 1 Radio Amplifier Power Converter 5

(PCU2 on CTU Shelf)
Growth Frame 1 Amplifier Fan Alarm (CTU Fan)
Growth Frame 1 CRC Fan Alarm (Pedestal Fan)
19
CTU 3 CTU Critical Alarm (CTU 0)
17
15

Testing of Growth Cabinet 1 is complete.
Procedure 7-8. Power Cabinet Alarms
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This subsection tests the top rectifier shelf in the Power Cabinet (where
rectifiers were added for Growth Cabinet power).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Place the first two rectifiers in the top rectifier shelf to STBY Mode.
Result: The cell under test should indicate User Alarms 8 and 16.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Return the second rectifier to ON.

Result: User Alarm 8 should clear, but User Alarm 16 should
remain active.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Turn the remaining STBY rectifier to ON.

Result: This should clear the Power Minor Alarm (User Alarm
16).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
(There is no need to perform this step on the two rectifiers tested for
Major Alarm.) Verify if each remaining rectifier generates a Minor
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 34

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
Alarm by placing it in STBY until it scans as User Alarm 16. Turn the
rectifier back ON before testing the next rectifier.
Result: All equipped rectifiers should individually generate User
Alarm 16.
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Result
The power cabinet alarms have all been tested.

Procedure 7-9. Growth Cabinet Alarms
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
To create a Door Intrusion Alarm (User Alarm 10), push on the door
alarm switch in the front of the Growth Cabinet.
Result: The cell under test should indicate User Alarm 10.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Return the door switch to the alarm bypass position.

Result: The User Alarm will clear.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Repeat steps using the side door switch and then the rear door switch on
the Growth Cabinet.
Result: These also appear in the scans as User Alarm 10.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Test all the alarms in the table on page 7-33 by turning OFF the listed
breaker and verifying that the associated alarm comes up at the switch.
After the alarm is indicated, turn the breaker back ON and verify that the
alarm has cleared before proceeding to the next listed alarm.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
The growth cabinet door alarms have been tested.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 35
Troubleshooting
Minicell Alarm Testing Procedures

General Description
Purpose
This section provides the procedures for performing equipment and

user alarm tests on the CDMA Personal Communication Services
(PCS) Minicell. This procedure should be performed on any new
CDMA cell site equipment as part of an initial acceptance test or
whenever problems are suspected at the cell.
Sequence of Tests
The alarm testing procedures contained in this section can be

performed any time after the Minicell has been successfully booted.
Records
The results of these procedures should be recorded by obtaining the

Read Only Printer (ROP) output.
References
The following documents may be useful as references during the

performance of the procedures described in this section.
APX-1000 Input Message Manual401-610-055
APX-1000 Output Message Manual401-610-057
PCS Minicell Desc. Operation & Maintenance401-703-301
User Definable Alarms Feature 401-612-057
Selectable Cell Site Messaging Feature401-601-003
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 36

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
PCS CDMA Minicell Alarm Test Procedures
Troubleshooting
PCS CDMA Minicell Alarm Test Procedures
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Input Commands/Output
Messages
Even though alarm testing was performed during the factory test and
installation phases of the Minicell growth, it should be repeated again
during integration. The tests will verify alarm continuity of the alarm
paths from the various electrical components to the Alarm and Fits
Interface (AFI) board of the CSC, but they do not test the ability of the
cell software to autonomously detect the fault and report it with the
correct text message string on the ROP.
Each input message required to perform a step during alarm testing
should be entered from an Input Message (craftshell or UNIX
[TIpdunix login]) terminal. In this document, the input and output
messages are shown in table form. Each table will provide the
following information:
1.
Purpose of the action as the Action Purpose
2.
Required action or input message as the Stimulus
3.
Expected output message as Response
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 37
Enabling Selective Cell Site Messaging Feature
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Alarm scanning is the subsystem in the cell which detects and reports
alarm messages to the ECP.
Message Routing
These messages are not routed to the craftshell maintenance terminals

but will be printed on the ROP. An optional feature, Selectable Cell
Site Messaging (SCSM), makes it possible to route all messages for a
single cell or group of cells to the terminal on which you are working.
The SCSM feature should be used whenever it is active in a system.
Procedure 7-10. Enabling Selective Cell Site Messaging Feature
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure for enabling the SCSM feature:

...........................................................................................................................................................................
See if SCSM is available. The SCSM feature will be active after this
command is entered.
alw:cell x,scsm <CR>
Result: OK (Feature is available and activated for the specified
Minicell)
or
FEATURE NOT ACTIVE (SCSM not activated in feature
activation file)
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Clear registers and report alarms that are currently invoked. An alarm
will report only when its state (OFF NORMAL or NORMAL) changes.
init:cell x:spp as <CR>
Result: OK (When no alarms are present)
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Produce list of cells in which the SCSM feature is routing messages to a

specific terminal. If ROP messages are not being routed to the terminal
on which they were allowed, reenter the alw:cell x, scsm command.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 38

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
op:cell,scsm
<CR>
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Result
A list of cells is displayed and SCSM is enabled.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 39

(RFTG) 0
Troubleshooting
Reference Frequency and Timing Generator (RFTG) 0
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Note
This test covers the RFTG0 Alarm. Procedure for RFTG1 alarm
testing, done at the end of the testing sequence, is provided later on in
this Section.
Proceed with alarm testing BEFORE the RFTG 0 alarm has cleared.
The response will appear in about 15 minutes, when the alarm has
cleared.
Procedure 7-11. Testing the Reference Frequency and timing Generator
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The RFTG0 alarm testing procedure is outlined below.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Test RFTG 0 Alarm Reporting

Turn OFF CB14
Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 2, BIT 5
ALARM:REFERENCE FREQUENCY GENERATOR 0 ALARM

STATE:OFF NORMAL
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Test RFTG 0 Alarm Reporting

Turn ON CB14

STATE:NORMAL
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 40

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
CSC Shelf Power Converters Alarms
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This section is for CSC Shelf Power Converters Alarms.
Procedure 7-12. CSC Shelf Power Convertors Alarm Tests
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following procedure tests CSC Shelf Power Convertor Alarms.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Verify CSCs states.**This could also be determined by looking at the

Cell c Status Screen on the MCRT: 2131,c.<CR>
op:cell x,csc 0
<CR>
op:cell x,csc 1
Result: OP:CELL x CSC 0,[ ][ ] = STBY or ACTIVEOP:CELL x
CSC 1,[ ][ ] = STBY or ACTIVE

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Make CSC 0 STBY and CSC 1 ACTIVE (if necessary)

sw:cell x,csc 0;ucl <CR>
Result: SW:CELL x CSC 0, COMPLETEDOP:CELL x CSC 0,
STBYOP:CELL x CSC 1, ACTIVE

............................................................................................................................................................................
CAUTION
The cell could be rendered out-ot-service.
CSC 0 should be STBY and CSC 1 should be ACTIVE
before proceeding.
3
Remove CSC 0 from service

rmv:cell x,csc 0;ucl <CR>
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 41
Troubleshooting
Result: RMV:CELL x CSC 0,COMPLETED
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Test CSC 0 Alarm Reporting

Turn OFF CB13
Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 3, BIT
0ALARM:CONTROLLER SHELF POWER CONVERTER

ALARMSTATE:OFF NORMAL
...........................................................................................................................................................................

Turn ON CB13

ALARMSTATE:NORMAL
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Restore CSC 0 to STBY

rst:cell x,csc 0;ucl:stby <CR>
Result: RST:CELL x CSC 0, COMPLETEDOP:CELL x CSC 0,
STBY
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Make CSC 0 ACTIVE and CSC 1 STBY

sw:cell x,csc 0;ucl <CR>
Result: SW:CELL x CSC 0, COMPLETEDOP:CELL x CSC 0,
ACTIVEOP:CELL x CSC 1, STBY

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove CSC 1 from service

rmv:cell x,csc 1;ucl <CR>
Result: RMV:CELL x CSC 1,COMPLETED
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 42

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................

Turn OFF CB5

ALARMSTATE:OFF NORMAL
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10

Turn ON CB5

ALARMSTATE:NORMAL
...........................................................................................................................................................................
11
Restore CSC 1 to STBY

rst:cell x, csc 1;ucl:stby <CR>
Result: RST:CELL x CSC 1, COMPLETEDOP:CELL x CSC 1,
STBY
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 43
Troubleshooting
Power-Level Measurements
Power-Level Measurements
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview

channels. The data is used by the AutoPACE system to investigate
plan growth.
Collecting Power-Level
Measurements

is completed.
Related Documents
Performance Analysis and Cellular Engineering Users Guide(401660-108).
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 44

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
CRC Shelf Power Converters Alarm
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This section is for the CRC Shelf Power Converters Alarm.
Procedure 7-13. Testing CRC Shelf Power Converter Alarm
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Switching OFF CB16 will cause the Minicell data links to
drop OOS.
Do not attempt to test CB16 that supplies DC power to the
TN3500B DFI board on CRC 2.
.......................................................................................................................................
Verify SCTs states. This could also be determined by looking at the

Cell c Status Screen on the MCRT: 2131,c.
op:cell x,cat 0 <CR>
op:cell x,cat 1 <CR>
Result: OP:CELL x CAT(SCT) 0,[ ]
[ ] = STBY or ACTIVE
OP:CELL x CAT(SCT) 1,[ ]
[ ] = STBY or ACTIVE
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Make SCT 0 STBY and SCT 1 ACTIVE (if necessary)

rst:cell x,cat 1;ucl <CR>
Result: RST:CELL x CAT(SCT) 1, COMPLETED
OP:CELL x CAT(SCT) 1, ACTIVE

OP:CELL x CAT(SCT) 0, STBY
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 45
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................
CAUTION
The Minicell needs at least one active SCT.
SCT 0 should be STBY and SCT 1 should be ACTIVE
before proceeding.
3
Remove SCT 0
rmv:cell x,cat 0;ucl <CR>
Result: RMV:CELL x CAT(SCT) 0,COMPLETED
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Test CRC 0 Alarm Reporting

Turn OFF CB20
ALARM:PRIMARY FRAME RADIO SHELF 0 POWER

CONVERTER
STATE:OFF NORMAL
...........................................................................................................................................................................

Turn ON CB20

CONVERTER
STATE:NORMAL
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Restore SCT 0 to STBY

rst:cell x, cat 0;ucl:stby <CR>
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 46

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Make SCT 0 ACTIVE and SCT 1 STBY

sw:cell x,cat 0;ucl <CR>
Result: SW:CELL x CAT(SCT) 0, COMPLETED

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove SCT 1
rmv:cell x,cat 1;ucl <CR>
Result: RMV:CELL x CAT(SCT) 1,COMPLETED
...........................................................................................................................................................................

Turn OFF CB18

CONVERTER
STATE:OFF NORMAL
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10

Turn ON CB18

CONVERTER
STATE:NORMAL
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 47
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
11
Restore SCT 1 to STBY

rst:cell x, cat 1;ucl:stby <CR>

...........................................................................................................................................................................
12
Make SCT 1 ACTIVE and SCT 0 STBY

sw:cell x,cat 1;ucl <CR>
Result: SW:CELL x CAT(SCT) 1, COMPLETED

ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Result
SCT 1 MUST be ACTIVE and SCT 0 MUST be STBY when this

section of alarm testing is completed.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 48

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
CTU Shelf Converters Alarm
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
The CTU shelf is equipped with two +15 VDC Power Conversion
Units (PCUs). Each PCU has a single alarm which is used to report the
presence of any of the following alarm conditions:
Low Output Voltage Alarm
High Output Voltage Alarm
Over Current Alarm
Over Temperature Alarm.
Procedure 7-14. Testing the CTU Shelf Converters Alarm
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedures for testing the CRTU (for ecp release 10.0 and earlier)
converters are outlined in the following.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Test PCU 1 Alarm Reporting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 49
Troubleshooting
Turn OFF CB1

ALARM: AMPLIFIER SHELF POWER CONVERTER 1

ALARM
STATE: OFF NORMAL
SCAN POINT:OFFSET 18, BIT 2

ALARM: CTU 0 CTU ALARM CLEARED
STATE: NORMAL
SCAN POINT:OFFSET 30 BIT 5

ALARM: CTU 0 SINGLE Rx AMPLIFIER ALARM
STATE: OFF NORMAL

STATE: NORMAL

STATE: OFF NORMAL

STATE: NORMAL

STATE: OFF NORMAL
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 50

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 51
Troubleshooting
Turn ON CB1

ALARM
STATE: NORMAL

STATE: NORMAL

ALARM: CTU 0 SINGLE Rx AMPLIFIER ALARM CLEARED
STATE: NORMAL

STATE: NORMAL

STATE: NORMAL

STATE: NORMAL

STATE: NORMAL
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 52

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 53
Troubleshooting
Turn OFF CB9


ALARM
STATE: OFF NORMAL

STATE: NORMAL

STATE: OFF NORMAL

STATE: NORMAL

STATE: OFF NORMAL

STATE: NORMAL

STATE: OFF NORMAL
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 54

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................

Turn ON CB9

ALARM
STATE: NORMAL
STATE: NORMAL
STATE: NORMAL
STATE: NORMAL
STATE: NORMAL
STATE: NORMAL
STATE: NORMAL
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 55
Fan and Heat Exchanger Blower Alarm Test
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This section is for the Fan and Heat Blower Alarm Test.
Procedure 7-15. Testing the Fan and Heat Exchanger Blower Alarm
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedures for testing proper functioning of a PCS CDMA Minicell

Heat Exchanger Fan alarm are outlined in the following procedural list.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Test CTU Shelf Fan Alarm Reporting

Turn OFF CB2
ALARM: PRIMARY FRAME AMPLIFIER SHELF FAN

ALARM
STATE: OFF NORMAL
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Test CTU Shelf Fan Alarm Reporting

Turn ON CB2
ALARM: PRIMARY FRAME AMPLIFIER SHELF FAN

ALARM
STATE: NORMAL
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Test Frame Fan Alarm Reporting

Turn OFF CB3
ALARM: PRIMARY FRAME MAIN FAN ALARM

STATE: OFF NORMAL
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Test Frame Fan Alarm Reporting
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 56

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
Turn ON CB3
ALARM: PRIMARY FRAME MAIN FAN ALARM

STATE: NORMAL
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Test Heat Exchanger Alarm Reporting

**The Heat Exchanger HI/LO Temp alarm will not report when testing
alarms on an Indoor Primary Cabinet.
Turn OFF CB10
ALARM: HEAT EXCHANGER HI/LO TEMP

STATE: OFF NORMAL

ALARM: PRIMARY FRAME FRONT HEAT EXCHANGER
BLOWER 0
STATE: OFF NORMAL

BLOWER 1
STATE: OFF NORMAL
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Test Heat Exchanger Alarm Reporting

**The Heat Exchanger HI/LO Temp alarm will not report when testing
alarms on an Indoor Primary Cabinet.
Turn ON CB10
ALARM: HEAT EXCHANGER HI/LO TEMP

STATE: NORMAL
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 57
Troubleshooting

BLOWER 0
STATE: NORMAL
BLOWER 1
STATE: NORMAL
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 58

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
External Alarms
External Alarms
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
External alarms are pre-wired mechanical alarms, and are composed of

user defined alarms, and of cell-site intrusion alarms.
Advance Preparations
To test User Alarms, verify that all of the External Alarm Switches on
the Standard User Alarm Cross Connect Panel are in the closed (leftmost) position. If external user alarms have been wired into the OSP
side of the Lightning Protection Block, it will be necessary to remove
the cable at the AIM1 connection on the Standard User Alarm Cross
Connect Panel.
Procedure 7-16. Testing External Alarms
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Testing procedures for these alarms are outlined below.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Move the External Alarm Switch 0 to the open position (right-most).

ALARM: EXTERNAL USER ALARM 0

STATE: OFF NORMAL
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Repeat steps 1 and 2 for External Alarms 1 - 6.

Result: Same as above
**OFFSET 0, BIT (5-0)

Reconnect the cable at the AIM1 connection on the Standard User
Alarm Cross Connect Panel if it was removed earlier.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Move the External Alarm Switch 0 to the closed position (left-most).

ALARM: EXTERNAL USER ALARM 0

STATE: NORMAL
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 59
Troubleshooting
External Alarms
Procedure 7-17. Testing the Cell Site Intrusion Alarms
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Testing the Cell Site intrusion alarms is done by activating door

sensors.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Pull out the peg on the Primary Radio Cabinet front door sensor and
push it back in. (Simulates opening the door.)
ALARM: INTRUSION ALARM

STATE: OFF NORMAL
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Push in the Primary Radio Cabinet front door sensor. (Simulates closing
the door.)
ALARM: INTRUSION ALARM

STATE: NORMAL
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the Primary Power Cabinet.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the Growth Radio Cabinet, if one has been
installed.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the Backup Power Cabinet , if one has been
installed.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
All intrusion alarms at the Minicell have been tested.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 60

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
Power Cabinet Alarms
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This section is for the Power Cabineet Alarms.
Procedure 7-18. Testing the Power Cabinets
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The tests outlined in below are for the Primary Power Cabinet.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Switch OFF one of the power rectifiers located in the Primary Power
Cabinet.
ALARM: POWER CABINET MINOR ALARM

STATE: OFF NORMAL
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Switch OFF a second power rectifier.

ALARM: POWER CABINET MAJOR ALARM

STATE: OFF NORMAL
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Switch one of the rectifiers back ON (only one rectifier should now be
switched OFF).

STATE: NORMAL
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Switch ON the single rectifier that was left OFF in the previous step.

STATE: NORMAL
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 61
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Verify that there are batteries in the Primary Power Cabinet before
proceeding.
............................................................................................................................................................................
CAUTION
Battery Damage
A Major Battery Discharge Alarm may appear OFF
NORMAL if batteries are almost discharged.
If this happens, turn ON CB1 in the Power Cabinet
IMMEDIATELY!
6
Switch OFF CB1 (double breaker) in the Primary Power Cabinet to Test
AC Failure Alarm.
There is NOT a CB1 in the Indoor Power Cabinet. The Main AC
breaker should be turned OFF to test this alarm.

STATE: OFF NORMAL

STATE: OFF NORMAL

ALARM: POWER CABINET AC FAILURE
STATE: OFF NORMAL
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 62

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Switch ON CB1 (double breaker) in the Primary Power Cabinet to test

AC Failure Alarm.

STATE: NORMAL

STATE: NORMAL

ALARM: POWER CABINET AC FAILURE
STATE: NORMAL
............................................................................................................................................................................
CAUTION
CB22 may be used as an auxiliary power supply for the
facilities equipment (i.e. fiber drivers).
Turn OFF CB22 to Test Power Cabinet Fan Alarm.

The Indoor Power Cabinet does NOT have a fan.

STATE: OFF NORMAL
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 63
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Turn ON CB22 to test Power Cabinet Fan Alarm.


STATE: NORMAL
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Result
The power cabinet alarms have been tested.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 64

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

(RFTG)1
Troubleshooting
Reference Frequency and Timing Generator (RFTG)1
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
RFTG Errors
This section is for the RFTG1 alarm testing.

The RFTG errors are reported to the ROP and are displayed on two
icons on the 2138 SDP. There is one icon for each RFTG unit.
The RFTG units must be able to be reset via a TI command. The
command must specify the cell site and the RFTG unit (0/1). A warning
message must be displayed on the ECP console prior to the execution
of this command. The warning message says:
You are about to reset a critical unit in the cell
site; execution of this command will disrupt CDMA
service on this cell site. Press "RETURN" to
continue or "ESC" to abort.
A message is provided to indicate that the command went through. A

second message is provided to indicate that the RFTG unit returned to
NORMAL status. If the RFTG unit does not return to NORMAL status,
the second message will indicate: Unit did not responded or
command failed.
Procedure 7-19. RFTG1 Alarm Testing
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This test concludes the recommended alarm testing sequence.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Verify that the RFTG 0 alarm has cleared BEFORE testing the RFTG1
alarm reporting.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Test RFTG 1 Alarm Reporting.

Turn OFF CB4.
STATE:OFF NORMAL
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Ensure GPS timing.

**Do NOT do this until the previous steps response has been reported.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 65

(RFTG)1
Troubleshooting
Turn OFF CB14, CB20, and CB18.

Result: A large number of alarms will report at this point. It is not
necessary to check for specific alarms.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Ensure GPS timing and test RFTG 1 Alarm Reporting.

Turn ON CB14, CB 4, CB20, and CB18.
Result: A large number of alarms will report at this point. The
alarm that should be checked is as follows:SCAN POINT:OFFSET
2, BIT 6
STATE:NORMAL**This will take approximately 16 minutes to
report.
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Result
Test of RFTG1 is complete.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 66

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
Restoring Out-Of-Service Equipment
Restoring Out-Of-Service Equipment
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Alarm testing was done with the SCSM feature enabled, to facilitate
monitoring of the cell behavior. Because this feature generates a large
number of messages, it should be disabled in normal operation.
Procedure 7-20. Restoring Out-Of-Service Equipment
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The procedure for restoring equipment to service is outlined below.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Inhibit the SCSM feature on the terminal for the Minicell being tested.
**This must be done before restoring any equipment back into service.
inh:cell x,scsm <CR>
Result: OK
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Ensure that the SCSM feature was inhibited on the terminal for the
Minicell under test
op:cell,scsm <CR>
Result: OP:CELL,SCSM
CELL SITE
###
**The cell under test should NOT be listed.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Clean up and restore all OOS units

init:cell x:sc <CR>
Result: OK
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Result
The equipment is back in service.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 67
Troubleshooting
PCS CDMA Minicell Alarm Map
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The Alarm Map
Thius section details the PCS CDMA Minicell Alarm Map.

The following table gives the connections (AIM Terminal and Punch
Down) for user alarms, as well as the offset that is used to interpret
alarm messages.
ROP Text Message
Level S2 User Offset Bit CB

Alarm #
AIM 1 Punch
Term. Down
No.
(OSP)
EXTERNAL USER ALARM 6
Min
17
22
Min
16
21
Min
15
20
Min
14
19
Min
13
18
Min
12
17
Min
11
16
POWER CABINET GENERATOR Maj

ON
10
15
POWER
ALARM
MAJOR Maj
14
CSU ALARM
Maj
CB8 8
INTRUSION ALARM
(All Frames)
Maj
10
13
Grw-Frm
HI/LO Min
11
CB1 6
0
BATTERY DISCHARGE ALARM Maj
12
GROWTH 0 ALARM
(Growth 0 Heat Exchanger)
Min
13
CRTUm
Min
14
CB1 3
2
HEAT
TEMP
CABINET
EXCHANGER
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 68

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
ROP Text Message

Alarm #
AIM 1 Punch
Term. Down
No.
(OSP)
Min
15
MINOR Min
16
12
POWER CABINET AC FAILURE Maj

ALARM
17
11
AMPLIFIER SHELF
CONVERTER 1
POWER Min
CB1 -
PRIMARY FRAME AMPLIFIER Min

SHELF FAN ALARM
CB2 -
PRIMARY FRAME MAIN FAN Min

ALARM
CB3 -
REFERENCE
FREQUENCY Maj
GENERATOR 1 ALARM
CB4 -
CONTROLLER SHELF POWER Min

CONVERTER ALARM
CB5 CB1
3
AMPLIFIER SHELF
CONVERTER 2
POWER Min
CB9 -
PRIMARY
FRAME
HEAT Min
EXCHANGER
BLOWER
1
ALARM
CB1 0
PRIMARY
FRAME
HEAT Min
EXCHANGER
BLOWER
0
ALARM
CB1 0
PRIMARY FRAME POWER Min

CONVERTER ALARM 0
CB1 3
REFERENCE
FREQUENCY Maj
GENERATOR 0 ALARM
CB1 4
POWER
ALARM
CABINET
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 69
Troubleshooting
ROP Text Message

Alarm #
AIM 1 Punch
Term. Down
No.
(OSP)
PRIMARY
FRAME
RADIO Min
SHELF 1 POWER CONVERTER
CB1 8
PRIMARY
FRAME
RADIO Min
SHELF 0 POWER CONVERTER
CB2 0
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 70

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
Minicell Alarm Definition File
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Use of the Definition File
This sections details the Minicell Alarm Definiation File.

One of the uses of the Alarm Definition File is in troubleshooting. In
particular, it allows to trace an alarm signal in Schematic Diagrams.
The table below gives the Alarm Reference Numbers in Schematic
Diagrams.
Alarm Ref
Number
Alarm Level
Usage
ALL 0 0
MIN
ALL 0 1
MIN
ALL 0 2
MIN
ALL 0 3
MIN
ALL 0 4
MIN
ALL 0 5
MIN
ALL 0 6
MIN
ALL 0 7
MAJ
POWER CABINET GENERATOR ON
ALL 1 0
MAJ
POWER CABINET MAJOR ALARM
ALL 1 1
MAJ
CSU ALARM
ALL 1 2
MAJ
INTRUSION ALARM
ALL 1 3
MIN
HEAT EXCHANGER HI/LO TEMP
ALL 1 4
MAJ
BATTERY DISCHARGE ALARM
ALL 1 5
MIN
GROWTH 0 ALARM
ALL 1 6
MIN
CRTUm
ALL 1 7
MIN
ALL 2 0
MIN
POWER CABINET MINOR ALARM
ALL 2 1
MAJ
POWER CABINET AC FAILURE
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 71
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Procedures
Overview
Purpose
Documentation
This chapter contains procedures that you perform as PCS CDMA

Minicell-related maintenance tasks.
The following documents are used as reference material in this Section:
AUTOPLEX System 1000 Input Message Manual(401-610-055)

for ECP R7.0
AUTOPLEX System 1000 Output Message (401-610-057)

Manual for ECP R7.0
Series II Cell Site Hardware Description, Operation, and

Maintenance (401-660-100).
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 72

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Prerequisites
This procedure is designed to enable you to:
Access and exit the craftshell
Access Status Display Pages
Must have a log-in to the cell.
Procedure 7-21. Accessing the ECP Craftshell
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Perform the following:

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select AUTOPLEX OMP menu.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select ECP and DCS OA&M from the AUTOPLEX OMP menu.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select AUTOPLEX System 1000 ECP Access from the ECP and
DCS OA&M menu.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select ECP Craft Shell from the AUTOPLEX System 1000 ECP
Access menu.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 7-22. Exiting the ECP Craftshell
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................
With the 3 AUTOPLEX System 1000 ECP Access menu active, press
the Control - f - 6 keys, in the order shown.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 73
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Close the 2 ECP and DCS OA&M menu using the keystrokes you used
in Step 1. Do this to reach the 1 AUTOPLEX OMP menu.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
At the 1 AUTOPLEX OMP menu, highlight Exit using the cursor-up

or cursor-down key. With Exit highlighted, press the Return key.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The system queries whether you want to exit the Craftshell. To provide
an affirmative response, press the Control-f-3 keys, in the order shown.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 7-23. Access Status Display Pages from the OMP
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select AT&T OMP Software Applications from the Workspace menu.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select AUTOPLEX System 1000 ECP Access from the OMP

Applications menu.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select ECP Control & Display from the AUTOPLEX System 1000
ECP Access Menu
The cursor is positioned at the CMD< line.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The CMD function is used for poke commands (either as page number
or maintenance commands.). To open the display, enter the unique
status display page number (command) and press RETURN.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 74

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
To back out of the menus, simultaneously press the Control-f and 6

keys.
To exit, simultaneously press the Control-f and 3 keys.
Status display page numbers (commands) are identified (listed) under

the CMD heading on the System 1000 index pages (100 - Page Index
page and/or 2100 - APX Index page).
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 75
Troubleshooting
Optioning the CSU
Optioning the CSU
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Reference
This procedure is designed to enable you to determine the correct

settings of a Kentrox CSU.
ADC Kentrox Operator Manual
Procedure 7-24. Accessing the Terminal Cell Interface Options
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Connect the terminal to the 25-pin port on the lower front of the PCS
CDMA Minicell cabinet.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Option your terminal as follows:
Line rate = 9600 baud
8-bit / 1 stop bit / parity = none
Direct connect (if applicable)
Local echo = N (full duplex)
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Enter ^D xx:00 Ê, where xx is the CSU number. This exercise uses
CSU 02. This sets up the link to the CSU. The ^D means to press the
CTRL key and the D key at the same time. This input displays the Main
Menu from the CSU.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Enter TC and press the Enter key. This displays the terminal (cell)
interface options.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 7-25. Specify CSU Options
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Specify CSU options by typing the code corresponding to your

configuration parameters and pressing the Enter key. The options are
listed at the beginning of each line. For example, to change the terminal
interface to extended super frame, type TESF to specify the extended
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 76

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
Optioning the CSU
super frame option. After setting an option, press the Enter key again
and the CSU redisplays the terminal configuration for verification.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Type X after completing all desired terminal interface option changes.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Type NC and press the Enter key at the Main Menu to change the
network interface options (toward the T1 provider). This brings up the
network interface configuration submenu.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Make option changes in the same manner as you did the terminal
interface changes.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Return to the Main Menu by typing an X.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Enter ^D. This severs the control link with the CSU. Repeat these steps
if you have more CSUs equipped. Remember to establish each CSU
control link with the input ^D xx:00 Ê.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Type LD to enter the local diagnostics submenu.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Type DST to perform the self test.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Observe the CSU under test. Observe the sequence of LED flashes
followed by the relighting of the green PWR/FAIL LED.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 7-26. Exiting the CSU
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Type X to leave the submenu.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Enter ^D to break the connection to the CSU under test.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 77
Troubleshooting
Optioning the CSU
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the serial data cable from the jack on the lower front of the PCS
CDMA Minicell cabinet.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
Ensure that when you are done, all settings for the TC and NC are back
to their original values.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 78

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
Setting up the PCS CDMA HP Test Set
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Reference
Connections for the
HP8521A and CDMA/PCS
Adapters
This procedure enables you to set up a PCS CDMA HP test set,

composed of an HP-8521A Spectrum analyzer, a HP-83205A CDMA
adapter, and a HP-83236A PCS adapter.
HP Documentation
Set up HP Test Set as shown in the diagram below:
Procedure 7-27. Procedure
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Connect the HP-8521A Spectrum analyzer, the HP-83205A CDMA

adapter, and the HP-83236A PCS adapter as shown in the figure.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Power up both the 8521 and the 83236A for at least 15 minutes.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 79
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Press the "TESTS" button, middile of upper row. The test (main menu)
screen will appear.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If either/or both the "Select Procedure Location or Select Procedure

Filename are blank, proceed with this step.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the "Select Procedure Location and the Select Procedure Filename

have Card and Manual respectively, skip to the next step.
1.
Press the "PRESET" button, upper right of main test set.
2.
Insert the software card into right slot.
3.
If you are in the "IBASIC TEST" screen, depress "PRESET";

otherwise; press the "TESTS" button, middle of upper row.
4.
Rotate knob to position the cursor at "SELECT PROCEDURE

LOCATION", press knob to highlight. A block appears with
"Choices" at the top.
5.
With the knob, position the cursor to "Card" and press knob to
select. A block appears with "Choices" at the top.
6.
Rotate knob to "SELECT PROCEDURE FILE NAME", then

press the knob.
7.
With the knob, select "MANUAL"
...........................................................................................................................................................................
At top right block on the screen, either depress k1 button or use the knob
to position the cursor and select "RUN TEST". The load sequence will
take approximately 1.5 minutes.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
When load and run are done, screen shows Manual Control Main
Menu.
Equipment Functions:
Turning the knob will move the cursor to the desired selection.
Pressing the knob will highlight a selection or provide you with

other selections.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 80

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
To enter numerical functions, use the keypad and then press the
knob.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 81
Troubleshooting
CDMA Clock Verification Test
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Test equipment
Background
This procedure enables you to verify the clock source used for CDMA
BCRs by performing the following:
Preparing the cell site for CDMA clock verification
Seting up the HP 8521A for CDMA clock verification
Performing the CDMA clock verification test
The following test equipment is required to complete this exercise:
An HP8521A Test Set with PCS CDMA adapter
Miscellaneous cables, connectors, and adapters
CDMA in the AUTOPLEX System 1000 uses a clock signal to

synchronize the CDMA BCRs. The clock signal is derived from the
global positioning system (GPS) signal timing component.
A GPS antenna connected to the reference frequency and timing
generator (RFTG-m) provides the timing source. The clock signal is
then distributed to CDMA growth frames through cables connected to
the RFTG-m.
The derived clock signal is distributed by the active TN1703
synchronized clock and tone (SCT) circuit pack. You will perform the
clock verification test on each SCT circuit pack in the CDMA cell.
This section of the procedure ensures that the CDMA SCT circuit pack
equipment is healthy and that it is in the proper state for test operations
to begin.
CDMA BCRs do not operate accurately without the timing source
provided by the SCT circuit pack. Take care to ensure that you do not
disable all SCT circuit packs at the same time.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 82

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
RFTG Display
The diagram shows the rftg.
RFTG-m-RB
J1
J2
REF OUT
P1
+24V
J3
J5
ALARM
J6
J4
NO GPS
FAULT
STBY
ON
INTERFACE RS-485/1 PPS 15 MHz
RFTG-m-XO
J7
GPS ANT
J2
REF IN
P1
+24V
J3
ALARM
J5
J6
J4
NO GPS
FAULT
STBY
ON
INTERFACE RS-485/1 PPS 15 MHz
Procedure 7-28. CDMA Clock Verification Testing
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Perform the following steps to prepare for CDMA clock verification

testing:
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Ensure that there are no SCT circuit packs in the OOS (out of service)
state by observing the 2131, x Status Display Page for the cell site being
tested, or using the OP:CELL x input message.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Observe the LEDs on the RFTG-m. If the LEDs do not indicate the
presence of an adequate GPS signal, you cannot perform the CDMA
clock verification test on this cell.
If the LEDs do not indicate a proper GPS signal, STOP; you cannot
continue this procedure.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Turn on the HP test set by pressing the POWER button and allow the set
to warm up for 30 minutes if you have turned the test set off after
exercise 3.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 83
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Use a standby SCT board. You can determine which SCT is in the
standby state by observing whether the ACT LED is lit. If lit, use the
other SCT circuit pack.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 7-29. Set up the HP Test Set
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The procedure outlined below covers seting up the HP test set.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Connect a BNC(M)-SMA(M) cable from the EVEN SECOND SYNC

IN connector of the HP test set to the 2PPS (J3) connector on the SCT
circuit pack to be tested.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Connect a BNC(M)-SMA(M) cable from the CDMA TIMEBASE IN

connector of the HP test set to the CLK (J2) connector on the SCT circuit
pack to be tested.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Make sure that the SCT circuit pack is connected to the HP Test Set for
the duration of all remaining procedures.
Select Pause for Manual HP392NX Measurements (disregard the
information on the next screen).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
In the To Screen menu area of the HP test set, select More.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select CDMA ANL under Choices to go to the CDMA Analyzer screen.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
On the CDMA Analyzer screen, select the field labeled SYNTH REF .
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select 19.6608 under Choices.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
At the SCT board being tested, switch the TST CLK switch to OFF.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 84

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
At the HP 85203A, verify that the CSTS REF UNLOCK LED is lit,
indicating that there is no 19.6608-MHz signal coming from the SCT
board.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
At the SCT board being tested, switch the TST CLK switch to ON.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
11
At the HP test set, verify that the CSTS REF UNLOCK LED is dark,
indicating that there is an accurate 19.6608-MHz signal coming from the
SCT board.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
12
Press the PREV key (top middle key of the test set).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
13
Select continue (K2 key).

Result: Manual Main Menu should return to the screen.
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Result
You have completed this procedure.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 85
Troubleshooting
Analyzing the CDMA RF Spectrum
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This procedure is designed to enable you to monitor and measure the

center frequency and bandwidth of the CDMA RF signal.
Procedure 7-30. Analyzing the CDMA RF Spectrum
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The cable connection for this test is from the RF IN/OUT on the
HP83236A to SECTOR ONE(S1D0/P) connector in the Hatch-plate
and to include a 30db attenuator.
.......................................................................................................................................
On the Manual Control Main Menu, select:
Change System Settings
Transmitter Test Cable Loss
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Enter 34.4db using keypad(for attenuator/cable loss).

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Return to previous menu.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select Channel Number. Channel Number can be found by accessing

the Status Display Page 2138 for the appropriate cell. Enter channel
number using the keypad.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select Pause for Manual HP392NX Measurements (disregard the

information on the next screen).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select SPEC ANL from choices.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select Ref Lvl at bottom of screen - Enter 45 using keypad (adjust as

necessary/desired).
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 86

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select Span at bottom of screen - Enter 5 using keypad(adjust as

necessary/desired).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Record center frequency reading ___________ (right side of screen)

...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
Depress PREV key (top middle of test set).

...........................................................................................................................................................................
11
Select continue (k2 key).

...........................................................................................................................................................................
12
Manual Main Menu should return to screen.

END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
You have completed the procedure.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 87
Troubleshooting
Power Measurement Transmit Levels
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This procedure is designed to enable you to monitor CDMA transmit

power levels at the CTU output.
Procedure 7-31. Setup the Power Meter
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Some selections may already be in effect from previous procedures.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select: Change System Settings

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select as necessary:
Equipment Type Base Station
Frequency Band 1850-1990 Mhz
Channel Type CDMA
RF Generator Out RF OUT ONLY
Transmitter Test Cable Loss ___ (use keypad)

The test cable and attenuator must be checked for loss and the
value placed here.
Receiver Test Cable Loss - 0.0 Db
Store system information to card
Load system information from card
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Return to previous menu.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Make the following entries:

Channel Number (Channel Number can be found by accessing the
Status Display Page 2138 for the appropriate cell. Enter channel
number usng the keypad.)
RF Generator Level:-130.0db
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select: Analyzer Attenuation
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 88

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select Auto Set (Reminder: HP must be connected to the Hatch-plate)

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Return to previous menu

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select: HP 83236A TX Power Measurement

Select: Change Power Measurement Settings
Select: Samples to Collect
Enter 4800 with Keypad
Select: update
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Return to previous menu

...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
Select - Make Power Measurements

END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 7-32. Modify the ceqface Power Settings
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The procedure below are the steps to modify the ceqface power
settings.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
At the terminal access the Recent Change/Verify via apxrcv and access
the ceqface form.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
On the ceqface form, edit the following fields:
Enter cell number (Field 1)
Enter face (1 = alpha) (Field 2)
Pilot Channel Gain (dgu) - change to 111
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 89
Troubleshooting
Paging Channel Gain (dgu) - change to 00
Synch Channel Gain (dgu) - change to 00
BCR Attenuation Factor (db) - change to 00
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Update the form

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Disconnect from the ceqface form and apxrcv.

END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 7-33. Move the Paging Channel to Another CCU
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The procedure below is to move the paging channel to another CCU

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Access the Status Display Pages.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Access 2139,a,b (a=cell b=ccc number).

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the paging channel CCU .

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Observe paging channel move to another CCU.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Restore the ccu that the paging channel was on.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
At the HP test set record the dbm reading on the screen, ________.
(Should be approximately 39db for 8 watts and 42 db for 16 watts) This
is the nominal power for the transmitter.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Using a adjustment tool, adjust the power in the BCR for maximum
power and record it ___________.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Adjust for the lowest power and record it ________.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 90

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Adjust back to the nominal power.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
At the terminal, disconnect from the Status Display Pages.

END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 7-34. Restore the ceqface Power Settings
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The procedure below is to restore the ceqface Power Settings.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Access Recent Change/verify via the apxrcv and access the ceqface
form.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select: update.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Edit the following fields

Enter cell number (Field 1)
Enter face (1=alpha) (Field 2)
Pilot Channel Gain (dgu) - change to 108
Paging Channel Gain (dgu) - change to 64
Sync Channel Gain (dgu) - change to 34
BCR Attenuation Factor (db) - change to 8
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Update the form.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Disconnect from ceqface form and apxrcv.

END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 7-35. Restore the Paging Channel to its Original CCU
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The procedue below restores the Paging Channel to its original CCU
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 91
Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Access the Status Display Pages.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Access 2139,a,b (a=cell number b=ccc number).

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the ccu that the paging channel is on.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Observe the paging channel shift back to where it was previously.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Restore the ccu that you have just removed.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Disconnect from Status Display Pages.

END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 7-36. End the Procedure
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
At the HP-8521A, select:
Prev Menu (k1 key)
Prev menu
You have completed the procedure.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 92

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
Rho Measurement
Rho Measurement
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Description
This procedure is designed to enable you to perform the CDMA

transmitter waveform quality measurement, better known as Rho.
Rho is a measurement of the transmitter modulation accuracy and gives
the percentage of transmitted power that correlates to the ideal code,
where a measurement of 1 indicates perfect correlation. Uncorrelated
power appears as white noise and is a source of interference for other
users.
In order to perform Rho measurements on a Minicell, the clusters must
be placed in a manual configuration (CFR) mode where the CDMA
transmitter is activated with just the Pilot channel being modulated.
The CDMA Base Station Standard for passing is a Rho measurement of
0.95 or greater. Anything lower suggests a problem with the BDR or
ACU.
System Requirements
The test procedures can be performed on any CDMA PCS Minicell that
is controlled via data links from a PCS Switching Center PCSC and
that is loaded with the minimum software release of PXB07.10.
Procedure 7-37. Start Rho Measurement
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
From the HP83236A Manual Control Main Menu, do the following:

(The HP83236A Manual Control Main Menu should be on the screen)
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select: Pause for Manual HP 892NX Measurements.

Result: A new screen will appear with a lot of information on it. It
is not necessary to read it.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select: More (from the bottom of the screen)

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select: CDMA Anl

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select: Chan Pwr
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 93
Troubleshooting
Rho Measurement
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select: Rho
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Tune Freq
Result: Will appear as an 850Mhz channel frequency range.
DO NOT CHANGE !! (The up-bander uses a different mixing

frequency than the CTU. The frequency was already inserted when
you selected the channel number in previous procedures.)
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Result
The HP meter is setup to do CDMA analysis in the proper frequency

range.
Procedure 7-38. Set-Up Procedure
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This procedure is to enter the values

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Input the following:
Atten
20Db
Port
Ant( this selection must appear underlined)
Anl Special
Synth Ref
19.6608
CDMA TB
Internal
PN Offset
Use Data keys to enter the PN Offset assigned to this sector

in translations. (can be found on the ceqface form field 61)
Even Sec In
Enable (this selection must appear underlined)
Meas Intvl
0.50ms
Gain
Auto
Anl Dir
Fwd (this selection must appear underlined)
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 94

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
Rho Measurement
Analyzer
Cont (this selection must appear underlined)
Qual Event
80ms
Trig Event Delay
100us
Result: A Rho measurement will appear in the top left screen, but
this is not correct because all overhead channels are still active.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select: More (from the bottom of the screen)

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select: CODE DOM

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Select:
Main
Trigger (under choices)
Trigger event
Delay
Result: At this time the CDMA domain will appear on the screen
with P/S/A and paging.

ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Result
The meter is setup for Rho measurement.

Procedure 7-39. Configure the Session
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
At the Terminal access the Craft Shell and make the following entries.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
cfr:cell x,multi;start <cr>
x = Minicell number 1 - 222

Result: M 02 CFR:CELL x MULTI, ALL WENT WELL
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 95
Troubleshooting
Rho Measurement
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Add the BBA for the first sector to be tested to the configure session.
This also turns the transmitter off. (Observe that the CDMA DOM will
disappear from screen when you receive the response.)
cfr:cell x,multi bba b;config 150<cr>
x = Minicell # 1-222, b = bba number 2 - 6 (2 = alpha 4 = beta 6 =

gamma)
Result: M 02 CFR:CELL x MULTI, ALL WENT WELL BBA
RANGE (1-30)
BBA No. 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16
Status
....s...................................
Config.
000000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
BBA No. 17-18 19-20 21-22 23-24 25-26 27-28 29-30
Status
..........................................
Config. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Turn on the CDMA transmitter with next entry. Turns on transmitter

with just pilot channel. (Observe that CDMA DOM is back on screen
with just pilot after the response.)
cfr:cell x,multi bba b;xmitc 301<cr>
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 96

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
Rho Measurement
RANGE (1-30)
BBA No. 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16
Status
....s...................................
Config. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
BBA No. 17-18 19-20 21-22 23-24 25-26 27-28 29-30

Status
...........................................
Config. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Once the transmitter has been turned off, the CFR session can be
terminated with the next entry. This puts the transmitter back on the air
with all channels. (Observe that the CDMA DOM screen has all
channels up after the response.)
...........................................................................................................................................................................
cfr:cell x,multi;mstop<cr>
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 97
Troubleshooting
Rho Measurement
Result: M 11 CFR;CELL 95 MULTI, ALL WENT WELL OICE
RADION RANGE (0-191)

BBA RANGE (1-30)
BBA No. 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16
Status
........................................
Config. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
BBA No. 17-18 19-20 21-22 23-24 25-26 27-28 29-30
Status
...........................................
Config. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
M 11 CFR;CELL x MULTI, COMPLETED, ALL TESTS
PASSED
BBA No. 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16
Status
....s...................................
Config. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
BBA No. 17-18 19-20 21-22 23-24 25-26 27-28 29-30
Status
...........................................
Config. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Result
The meter is ready to measure the Rho value.

Procedure 7-40. Record Rho Value
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Push prev button to return to CDMA analyzer screen.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 98

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
Rho Measurement
The measured Rho value should now be visible on the CDMA Base
Station test set.
The acceptable measured Rho values must be between 0.95 and 1.0 as
defined in the CDMA Base Station Standards.
Record Rho__________ Standard: 0.95 or greater
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Record two other standards from this screen:

Freq Error ___________Hz (Standard: +/- 44Hz)
Carrier Feedthru_____db (Standard: less than 25db)
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Push prev button to return to the CDMA DOM screen.

END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 7-41. Restore Cell to Service
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
After the Rho measurement has been completed, turn off the CDMA
transmitter with the next entry. Observe the CDMA. DOM is gone from
the screen after the response.
Enter the command:
cfr:cell x,multi bba b;xmitc 301<cr>
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 99
Troubleshooting
Rho Measurement
RANGE (1-30)
BBA No. 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16
Status
....s...................................
Config.
0000000000000000
BBA No. 17-18 19-20 21-22 23-24 25-26 27-28 29-30
Status
...........................................
Config. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Put the transmitter back on the air with all channels. (Observe that the
CDMA DOM screen has all channels up after the response)
Enter the command:
cfr:cell x,multi;mstop<cr>
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 100

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting
Rho Measurement
Result: M 11 CFR;CELL 95 MULTI, ALL WENT WELL VOICE
RADION RANGE (0-191)

....... ......... .......... ......... .......... .......... .........
BBA RANGE (1-30)
14 15-16 Status
BBA No. 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-
........................................
Config. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
BBA No. 17-18 19-20 21-22 23-24 25-26 27-28 29-30
Status
...........................................
Config. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
M 11 CFR;CELL x MULTI, COMPLETED, ALL TEST PASSED
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

7 - 101
Troubleshooting
Rho Measurement
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 - 102

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
Overview
Purpose
Contents
Changing Filters
Convert Simplex Filters to Duplex Filters (Diversity 0)
Convert Simplex Filters to Duplex Filters (Diversity 1).
Replace Duplex Filters (Primary Transmit/Diversity 0) Replace Simplex Filters (Diversity 1) - - - - - - - - Call Processing Tests - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Minicell Cleanup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
8-3
- 8-4
- 8-7
- 8-11
- 8-15
- 8-19
- 8-21
Power Calibration Description

8-22
Preliminary Notes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-23
Test Equipment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-25
CTU/HPCTU Calibration Issues
8-26
Amplifier Type and Power Level - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-27
Translations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-28
Power Calibration Test Procedure
8-29
HP 437B Power Meter Calibration - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-31
Enter the Offset, If Known - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-33
Connect the Power Meter to the Minicell - - - - - - - - - - 8-34
Begin the Recent Change/Verify Session - - - - - - - - - - 8-37
Set Up Attenuator Measurement Signal - - - - - - - - - - - 8-39
Calibrate the Attenuator Offset - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-42
Set Up Shelf Calibration Signals - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-45
Calibrate the CTU and HPCTU (8 Watt Setup) Transmit Power 8-48
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 1
Repairs
Calibrate HPCTU (16 Watt Setup) Transmit Power - - Remove Meter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Calibrate Additional Shelves - - - - - - - - - - - - - Restore the Original CDMA Power Control Translations
RF Transmit Power Calibration Data Sheet - - - - - - -
8-50
8-51
8-53
8-54
8-56
Heat Exchanger Repairs

8-57
Heat Exchanger Maintenance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-58
Heat Exchanger ROP Alarm Corrective Actions - - - - - - 8-59
Heat Exchanger Hi/Low Temp Alarm - - - - - - - - - - - 8-61
Weekly and Monthly Heat Exchanger Maintenance - - - - - 8-62
Yearly Heat Exchanger Maintenance - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-63
Replace the Control Card for Growth Frame Heat Exchanger 8-66
Replace the Heater Cartridge for Growth Frame Heat Exchanger 8-69
Replace the Ambient Fan for Growth Frame Heat Exchanger 8-71
Island Cell
8-73
Island Mode CDMA Cell Script - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-74
NVM Procedures
8-75
CDMA Cell Downloading Procedures - - - - - - - - - - - 8-76
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 2

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
Changing Filters
Introduction
Purpose
This section covers the converting and replacing of simplex and duplex
filters in the Minicell, as well as running Call Processing Tests and
performing Minicell cleanup.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 3
Repairs
Convert Simplex Filters to Duplex Filters

(Diversity 0)
Convert Simplex Filters to Duplex Filters (Diversity 0)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This subsection describes the procedure to convert the Primary Cabinet

simplex transmit and simplex diversity 0 receive filters to one duplex
filter, for diversity 0.
RF Cables to be
Disconnected on Simplex
Filter (Inside Cabinet)
The table below lists the RF Cables to be disconnected on simplex filter

for each face.
CABLE TYPE ALPHA
BETA
GAMMA
DIVERSITY 0 DIVERSITY 0 DIVERSITY 0
SMA
P10
P12
P14
SMA
P11
P13
P15
SMA
P1
P1
P1
N-TYPE
P2 W101 a
P2 W102 a
P2 W103 a
N-TYPE
P2 W104 a
P2 W105 a
P2 W106 a
P8
P9
DSUB (9-PIN) P7
a
This label is referenced to the schematics (SD-2R374-01) only. It is

not on the cable.
CRTU Cables to be
The table below lists the CRTU Cables to be disconnected on simplex

filter for each face.
CABLE TYPE ALPHA
BETA
GAMMA
DIVERSITY 0 DIVERSITY 0 DIVERSITY 0
SMA
P28
P30
P33
SMA
P27
P29
P34
SMA
P25
P32
P35
SMA
P26
P31
P36
Procedure 8-1. Remove the Simplex Filters (Diversity 0)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Change only one filter panel at a time. Only disconnect the cables to the
filter panel being removed.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 4

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs

(Diversity 0)
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the Minicell is in service, call the PCSC to remove the Minicell from
service.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Turn OFF the following circuit breakers: CB1, CB2, CB9, CB15, CB16,
CB17, CB18, CB19, CB20.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the cables listed in the table for the filter panel being replaced.
For a simplex filter configuration, the RX filter is below the TX filter.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the two screws on the top of the simplex filter.

Before removing the simplex filter, carefully push up the TX cable P1
from the CTU shelf. DO NOT BEND this cable. If the simplex filter
does not have enough room to slide out, then the CTU fan must be
removed.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the simplex filter.

END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 8-2. Install Duplex Filter (Diversity 0)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CAUTION
Damage can occur to the cables.
Before installing the duplex filter, carefully push up the TX
cable P1 from the CTU shelf. DO NOT BEND this cable. If
the duplex filter does not have enough room to slide in, then
the CTU fan must be removed.
Install the new duplex filter.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 5

(Diversity 0)
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Insert the two screws on the top of the duplex filter to secure it to the
Minicell frame.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Reconnect all cables to the newly installed duplex filter.

When reconnecting the SMA cables use the 5/16 torque wrench R4399 (14 in-lbs). For the N-type cable connections, use the 13/16
torque wrench R-5851 (40 in-lbs).
The P2 W101, W102 and W103 cables are NOT connected to the
newly installed duplex filter panels.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Turn ON the following circuit breakers: CB1, CB2, CB9, CB15, CB16,
CB17, CB18, CB19, CB20.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the frequency band of the new duplex filter has changed, remove the
Alarm Control Board ACB and change rotary switch 1 to the correct
frequency band (A-F). The ACB is located to the right of the CTU fan
assembly.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Press the reset RST button on the faceplate of the ACB. This must be
done before you start testing the new filter panels.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Diagnostics
Call Processing Test
Run diagnostics to test the working condition of the cell.

If the Minicell is in service, the following call processing tests must be
performed. If the Minicell is not in service, this section can be skipped.
Perform the Call Processing Tests on diversity 0 as described in Call
Processing Tests.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 6

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs

(Diversity 1).
Convert Simplex Filters to Duplex Filters (Diversity 1).
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This subsection describes the procedure to change the Growth Cabinet

simplex diversity 1 receive filter (on side of cabinet) to a duplex filter,
for diversity 1.
Filter Removal Sequence
When replacing Simplex diversity 1 filter panels with duplex panels, it

is recommended to remove the gamma panel first, then the beta panel,
and then alpha. When facing the front of the Minicell, these diversity 1
receive filter panels are located on the outside of the left side of the
Minicell. Alpha is the top filter panel; beta is the middle panel; and
gamma is the bottom panel.
The Minicell does not have to be removed from service during the
physical installation of these filters.
RF Cables to be
Filter (On Side of Cabinet)
CRTU Cables to be
The table below lists the RF cables to be disconnected on simplex filter

on side of cabinet.
Cable Type
Alpha
Beta
Gamma
SMA
P41
P42
P43
SMB
P38
P39
P40
DSUB (9 Pin)
P5
P6
P4
N-TYPE
W110 P2
W111 P2
W112 P2
The table below lists the CRTU cables to be disconnected on simplex

filter on side of cabinet.
Cable Type
Alpha
Beta
Gamma
SMA
P46
P41
P37
SMA
P45
P42
P38
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 7
Repairs

(Diversity 1).
RF Cables to be
Reconnected on Duplex
Filter (Side of Cabinet)
CTRU Cables to be
Reconnected on Duplex
Filter (Side of Cabinet)
The table below lists the RF cables to be reconnected on duplex filter

side of cabinet.
Cable Type
Alpha
Beta
Gamma
Reconnect To
Duplex Filter
SMA
P41
P42
P43
J2
SMB
P38
P39
P40
J4
9 Pin DSUB
P5
P6
P4
J3
N-TYPE
W110 P2
W111 P2
W112 P2 J1
The table below lists the CTRU cables to be reconnected on duplex

filter on the side of cabinet.
Cable Type
Alpha
Beta
Gamma
SMA
SMA
SMA
SMA
P46
P45
P47
P48
P41
P42
P44
P43
P37
P38
P39
P40
Reconnect To
Duplex Filter
J6 (-50 RX)
J5 (-40 RX)
J4 (-40 TX)
J3 (-50 TX)
Procedure 8-3. Disconnect the Simplex Filters
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This procedure outlines the steps to replace simplex filters with duplex
filters.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the left side panel and the back panel of the Minicell cabinet
using the 216C can wrench.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Disconnect the cables to the simplex filter panel (alpha, beta or gamma)
that is being removed. Refer to 8-7.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the CRTU is installed in the Minicell, disconnect the cables listed in

8-7 from the RU filter coupler assembly:
If the CRTU is NOT installed in the Minicell, there are no cables
connected to the J3 and J4 coupler connectors.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 8

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

(Diversity 1).
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the three (3) screws holding the filter panel to the frame of the
Minicell. One is located above the RU; the second is located below the
RU; and the third is located on the upper-right corner of the side panel.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
On the alpha face, check the screw holding the power splitter for receive
diversity 0 to see if it is obstructing the installation of the new duplex
panel. This power splitter is mounted on the top, left-side of the front
inside of the Minicell, right below the 15 MHz, 6 to 1, power splitter.
The screw on the right side of the power splitter is the one that could
possibly cause a problem. A shorter screw, (comcode 847743895),
should be provided with the new duplex side panels. If the power splitter
is mounted on a L-bracket, this modification is not necessary.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
Procedure 8-4. Install Duplex Filter
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Install the new duplex side panel onto the Minicell frame. The three (3)
mounting screws should all be right justified for the alpha and beta
filter side panels. For the gamma filter side panel, the three (3)
mounting screws are left justified.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Reconnect all cables to the newly installed duplex filter. Use the table
on page 8-8 as a reference.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
When reconnecting the SMA cables, use the 5/16 torque wrench R-4399
(14 in-lbs). For the N-type cable connections, use the 13/16 torque
wrench R-5851 (40 in-lbs).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the CRTU is equipped in the Minicell, use the table on page 8-8 as a
reference for the cables to be reconnected. The 50 ohm terminations
have to be removed from coupler connectors J3, J4, J5 and J6 on the
duplex filter before the cables from the RSP can be reconnected.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 9

(Diversity 1).
Repairs
If the CRTU is NOT installed in the Minicell, leave the J3, J4, J5 and J6
coupler connectors terminated.
If the CRTU is installed, but the Growth frame is not being installed,
leave the J5 and J6 coupler connectors terminated.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
assembly.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
The duplex filters are installed.
Diagnostics
Run diagnostics, including the Rho test, to test the working condition
of the cell.
Perform the Call Processing Tests on diversity 1 as described on 8-19.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 10

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
Replace Duplex Filters (Primary Transmit/

Diversity 0)
Replace Duplex Filters (Primary Transmit/Diversity 0)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
RF Cables to be
Disconnected on Duplex
This subsection describes the procedure to replace the Primary Cabinet

Transmit /Diversity 0 duplex filter. This may be needed if changing
frequency bands or replacing defective filters.
The table below shows the RF cables to be disconnected on duplex
filter inside the cabinet.
Cable
Type
Alpha
Diversity 0
Beta
Diversity 0
Gamma
Diversity 0
SMA
P10
P12
P14
SMA
P11
P13
P15
SMA
P1
P1
P1
N-TYPE
P2 W104 *
P2 W105 *
P2 W106 *
DSUB
(9-PIN)
P7
P8
P9
* This label is referenced to the schematics (SD-2R374-01) only. It is

not on the cable.
CRTU Cables to be
Disconnected on Duplex
The table below shows the CRTU cables to be disconnected on duplex

filter inside the cabinet.
Cable
Type
Alpha
Diversity 0
Beta
Diversity 0
Gamma
Diversity 0
SMA
P28
P30
P33
SMA
P27
P29
P34
SMA
P25
P32
P35
SMA
P26
P31
P36
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 11
Repairs

Diversity 0)
RF Cables to be Installed
on Duplex Filter (Inside
Cabinet)
The table below shows the RF cables to be installed on duplex filter

inside the cabinet.
Cable
Type
Alpha
Diversity 0
Beta
Diversity 0
Gamma
Diversity 0
Reconnect To
Duplex Filter
SMA
P10
P12
P14
J9
SMA
P11
P13
P15
J10
SMA
P1
P1
P1
J7
NTYPE
P2 104 *
P2 W105 *
P2 W106 *
J1
(ON BOTTOM
OF FILTER)
P8
P9
J8
DSUB P7
(9-PIN)
* This label is referenced to the schematics (SD-2R374-01) only. It is

not on the cable.
CTRU Cables to be
Installed on Duplex Filter
(Inside Cabinet)
The table below shows the CTRU cables to be installed on duplex filter
inside thw cabinet.
Cable
Type
Alpha
Diversity 0
Beta
Diversity 0
Gamma
Diversity 0
Reconnect To
Duplex Filter
SMA
P28
P30
P33
J6 (-50 TX)
SMA
P27
P29
P34
J5 (-40 TX)
SMA
P25
P32
P35
J4 (-50 RX)
SMA
P26
P31
P36
J3 (-40 RX)
Procedure 8-5. Replacement Procedures
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Change only one filter panel at a time. Only disconnect the cables to the
filter panel being removed. Use 8-11 as a reference for the cables to be
disconnected.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the Minicell is in service, call the PCSC to remove the Minicell from
service.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 12

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs

Diversity 0)
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Turn OFF the following circuit breakers: CB1, CB2, CB9, CB15, CB16,
CB17, CB18, CB19, CB20.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the cables listed in 8-11 for the filter panel being replaced.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the CRTU is equipped in the Minicell, use 8-11 as a reference for the
cables to be disconnected.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the two screws on the top of the duplex filter.

Before removing the duplex filter, carefully push up the TX cable P1
from the CTU shelf. DO NOT BEND this cable. If the duplex filter
does not have enough room to slide out, then the CTU fan must be
removed.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the duplex filter.

END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 8-6. Install Duplex Filter
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Insert the two screws on the top of the duplex filter to secure it to the
Minicell frame.
Before installing the duplex filter, carefully push up the TX cable P1
from the CTU shelf. DO NOT BEND this cable. If the duplex filter
does not have enough room to slide in, then the CTU fan must be
removed.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Reconnect all cables to the newly installed duplex filter. Use 8-12 as a
reference.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 13

Diversity 0)
Repairs
When reconnecting the SMA cables, use the 5/16 torque wrench R4399 (14 in-lbs). For the N-type cable connections, use the 13/16
torque wrench R-5851 (40 in-lbs).
The P2 W101, W102, and W103 cables are NOT connected to the
newly installed duplex filter panels.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the CRTU is equipped in the Minicell, use 8-12 as a reference for the
cables to be reconnected.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Turn ON the following circuit breakers: CB1, CB2, CB9, CB15, CB16,
CB17, CB18, CB19, CB20.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
assembly.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Diagnostics
Run diagnostics to test the working condition of the cell.

Perform the Call Processing Tests on diversity 0 as described in Call
Processing Tests.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 14

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
Replace Simplex Filters (Diversity 1)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Sequence of Filter Removal
This subsection describes the procedure to replace the Growth Cabinet

Diversity 1 simplex filter (on side of cabinet). This may be needed if
changing frequency bands or replacing defective filters.
When removing the simplex filter panels, it is recommended you
remove the panels in the following order:
Panel
Location
gamma panel
bottom
beta panel
middle
alpha panel
top
When facing the front of the Minicell, these diversity 1 receive filter
panels are located on the outside of the left side of the Minicell.
The Minicell does not have to be removed from service during the
physical installation of these filters.
RF Cables to be
CRTU Cables to be
The table below shows the RF cables to be disconnected on simplex

filter on the side of the cabinet.
CABLE TYPE
ALPHA
BETA
GAMMA
SMA
P41
P42
P43
SMB
P38
P39
P40
DSUB (9 Pin)
P5
P6
P4
N-TYPE
W110 P2
W111 P2
W112 P2
The table below shows the CRTU cables to be disconnected on simplex

filter on the side of the cabinet.
CABLE TYPE
ALPHA
BETA
GAMMA
SMA
P46
P41
P37
SMA
P45
P42
P38
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 15
Repairs
RF Cables to be
Reconnected on Simplex
The table below shows the RF cables to be reconnected on simplex

filter the on side of the cabinet.
CABLE ALPHA
TYPE
BETA
GAMMA RECONNECT TO
SIMPLEX FILTER
SMA
P41
P42
P43
J2
SMB
P38
P39
P40
J4
DSUB
(9 Pin)
P5
P6
P4
J3
N-TYPE W110 P2 W111 P2 W112 P2 J1

CRTU Cables to be
Reconnected on Simplex
The table below shows the CRTU cables to be reconnected on simplex

filter the on side of the cabinet.
CABLE ALPHA BETA GAMMA
TYPE
RECONNECT TO
SIMPLEX FILTER
SMA
P46
P41
P37
J6 (-50 RX)
SMA
P45
P42
P38
J5 (-40 RX)
Procedure 8-7. Replacement Procedure
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Remove the left side panel and the back panel of the Minicell cabinet
using the 216C can wrench.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Disconnect the cables to the simplex filter panel (alpha, beta or gamma)
that is being removed. Refer to page 8-15.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the CRTU is installed in the Minicell, disconnect the cables listed on

page 8-15 from the RU filter coupler assembly.
If the CRTU is NOT installed in the Minicell, there are no cables
connected to the J3 and J4 coupler connectors.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 16

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the three (3) screws holding the filter panel to the frame of the
Minicell. One is located above the RU; the second is located below the
RU; and the third is located on the upper-right corner of the side panel.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 8-8. Simplex Filter Panel Installation
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Install the new simplex side panel onto the Minicell frame. The three
(3) mounting screws should all be right justified for the alpha and beta
filter side panels. For the gamma filter side panel, the three (3)
mounting screws are left justified.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Reconnect all cables to the newly installed simplex filter. Use the table
page 8-16 as a reference. When reconnecting the SMA cables, use the
5/16 torque wrench R-4399 (14 in-lbs). For the N-type cable
connections, use the 13/16 torque wrench R-5851 (40 in-lbs).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the CRTU is equipped in the Minicell, use the table on page 8-16 as a
reference for the cables to be reconnected. The 50 ohm terminations
have to be removed from coupler connectors J3 and J4 on the simplex
filter before the cables from the RSP can be reconnected.
If the CRTU is NOT installed in the Minicell, leave the J3 and J4
coupler connectors terminated.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
assembly.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 17
Repairs
Run the FER (RX path test) for each antenna face filter that has been
replaced (alpha, beta, gamma).
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................

Perform the Call Processing Tests on diversity 1 as described on page
8-19.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 18

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
Call Processing Tests
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Disabling Diversity

The table below shows the circuit breakers to turn off to disable
diversity.
Diversity
Circuit Breaker
Result
diversity 0 turn OFF CB9 in the

removes diversity 0
Primary Radio Cabinet from service
diversity 1 turn OFF CB1 in the
removes diversity 1
Primary Radio Cabinet from service
Call Processing Test ECP
Commands
The table below shows the Call Processing Test ECP Commands
Call Process On Alpha

Face (BBA 2)
Call Process On Beta

Face (BBA 4)
Call Process On Gamma

Face (BBA 6)
rst:cell #, bba
2;ucl
rst:cell #, bba
4;ucl
rst:cell #, bba
6;ucl
rmv:cell #, bba
4;ucl
rmv:cell #, bba
2;ucl
rmv:cell #, bba
2;ucl
rmv:cell #, bba
6;ucl
rmv:cell #, bba
6;ucl
rmv:cell #, bba
4;ucl
Procedure 8-9. Procedure
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Contact the cell tech, engineer, or maintenance personnel at the PCSC

to perform the commands listed in the table above on the ECP before a
call is made on each antenna face.
One CDMA Mobile-to-land call must be made for each antenna face
(alpha, beta, gamma) equipped.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Restore all BBAs equipped.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 19
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Turn ON CB1 and CB9.

END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 20

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
Minicell Cleanup
Minicell Cleanup
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Remove all test equipment from the Minicell.

Verify all cell cabling is properly reconnected and the connectors are
properly torqued, (Torque Wrenches (p/o ITE-6267) SMA type: R4399, N type: R-5851).
Verify that the special tools that ship with the cabinets remain with
their respective cabinets.
Procedure 8-10. Secure Minicell
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Replace the side and rear panels.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Secure the doors to all cabinets in the Minicell. Check that all side and
rear panel locking bolts are tight.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Put the Antenna Cable Cover in place and secure, if equipped

END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 21
Repairs
Minicell Cleanup
Power Calibration Description

Introduction
Purpose
This section describes the procedures for performing PCS CDMA

transmitter measurements and calibrations with the Minicell controlled
from the ECP.
When to Run These

Procedures
These procedures are not routinely required during optimization. There

is NO need to perform these on every cell. They are included in the
handbook for troubleshooting problems such as:
no detectable Pilot channel
unaccountably low level Pilot channel
LAC alarms
When troubleshooting these problems, RF transmit power

measurements are an adjunct to antenna checks.
Minicell Equipment
The procedures include steps for the standard 8 Watt CDMA

Transmitter Unit (CTU) and the 16 Watt, High Power CTU (HPCTU);
also, the procedures support both Primary and 1st Growth Cabinets.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 22

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
Preliminary Notes
Preliminary Notes
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
These notes should be read and understood before proceeding with the
calibration.
Coordination Calls
End any coordination call while actually measuring/adjusting the RF

power output of a face. A call up on the cell under test might affect the
output power of the face under test.
When Calibration is
Required
The installation crew performs a transmit path calibration as part of

their normal testing. The RF transmit power calibration must be
performed after the replacement of any component in the Transmit RF
path (cabling, BCR, CTU, HPCTU, or Filter). Additionally, the RF
transmit path will require calibration if the center frequency of the
carrier (channel number) is changed. Additionally, Rho and receive
Frame Error Rate tests may be required.
Units Taken Out-of-Service
CTU and HPCTU
ECP and Cell Generic

Required
To perform average RF power measurement or calibration on a PCS

CDMA Minicell, the CCCs and BBAs must be taken out-of-service.
The standard CTU is always calibrated for an 8 Watt (39.0 dBm)
output. The High Power CTU can be adjusted to either mimic the 8
Watt CTU or set to its full 16 Watt output (42.1 dBm). See the
discussion under the heading CTU/HPCTU Calibration Issues.
These test procedures can be performed on any PCS CDMA Minicell
that is controlled via data links from a PCS Switching Center (PCSC)
and is loaded with the minimum Cell Generic software release
APXB08.00. The HPCTU and growth cabinets require ECP 9.0 and
Cell generic load h40Y08.00 (APXD08.01), or later.
Station for Running the

Procedures
The procedure is best run from the OMP where simultaneous craftshell
(TIpdunix) and APX/RCV sessions can be run. (Alternately, personnel
at the switch center may use two terminals: one running a UNIX
session, craftshell or RC/V, and the other on MCRT pages.)
BCR Attenuation Factor
For the standard (8 Watt) CTU, never adjust the BCR Attenuation
Factor in ceqface to less than 8 dB except while running this procedure.
BCR attenuation values less than 8 will result in overdriving the CTU.
Double check that the ceqface fields modified during this procedure are
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 23
Repairs
Preliminary Notes
returned to their normal operation values after the RF transmit power

has been measured or calibrated.
Similarly, the High Power CTU should never have its BCR Attenuation
value set to less than 6 dB, except when running the procedures in this
section.
Check the cell site configuration parameters for the range of allowed
BCR Attenuation Factor values.
Stable Clear
A stable clear should be performed after translations modification to

ensure that the changes take effect.
References
The documents listed in the table below are useful references for the
procedures described in this section.
Hewlett Packard 437B Power Meter Operation Manual0043790036
AUTOPLEX 1000 Cell Site Input Message Manual401-610-055
AUTOPLEX1000 Cell Site / DCS Input / Output Message

Manual401-610-107
CDMA Translation Note #1A Translation Application Note for

CDMA Forward Link Transmit Path (Version 4.0, 3/5/98)
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 24

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Required Test Equipment
The following equipment is required to perform these test procedures.
QTY
1
1
Description
VT-100 Terminal Emulator and ECP dialup access (UNIX login)
or a second person at the PCSC to enter terminal commands
Hewlett Packard 437B Power Meter
1
1
1
Any calibrated Average Power meter and attenuator combination

capable of reading approximately 43 dBm (about 20 watts) may be
used.
HP 8481H, 3.5 Watt Power Sensor
30 dB, 50 Ohm attenuator
90 Degree N type adapter (male to female).
(Optional)
Power Meter Warm up
This is needed on installations with the Compact Size Antenna Cable Cover. This assembly does not permit enough room for the attenuator and power sensor head.
It is recommended that the HP-437B or HP-441A Power Meters used

to set power in wireless system be allowed to warm up 30 minutes prior
to calibration to allow it to stabilize for proper readings.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 25
Repairs
Test Equipment
CTU/HPCTU Calibration Issues

Amplifier Type and Power Level
Purpose
The standard CTU can only be calibrated for 8 Watts (Linear Amplifier
Circuit type, or lactype, p and Maximum Power, or maxpwr, 8).
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 26

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Before you begin
Prior to calibrating a High Power CTU, the desired RF output level

must be known. The High Power CTU can be adjusted for either:
CTU
lactype
maxpwr
8 Watts
16 watts
16
Determine if CTU or HPCTU

is Present
CAUTION
Permanent damage to the CTUs will result.
If the CTU shelf fan is removed to check for HPCTU
equipage, it must be reinstalled and operating within 15
minutes.
To determine if the Minicell is equipped with the HPCTU:
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the CTU fan to read the faceplate apparatus code (BMT1).
Additional Heat Exchanger
Minicell Primary cabinets equipped with HPCTUs have an additional,

tell-tale Heat Exchanger mounted on the rear panel in the Primary
cabinet (although this extra Heat Exchanger is also used with the High
Temperature Kit).
Growth Cabinet
If a growth cabinet is equipped, the HPCTU apparatus code (BMT1) on

the faceplate can easily be read (the CTU fan is mounted in the rear).
Never attempt to adjust a standard CTU for more than 8 Watts (39.0
dBm).
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 27
Repairs
Translations
Translations
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
CTU/HPCTU RF Power
Levels
The differences in translations must be understood prior to performing

the procedures in this section.
The table below sums up the CTU/HPCTU configurations.
Power
Translations ceqcom2
Amp
Type
Desired
Max Pwr (field
Configuration 162)
lactype (field
75)
CTU
8 Watts
HPCTU 8 Watts
HPCTU 16 Watts
16
HPCTU can be calibrated for 8 Watts or 16 Watts on a face by face

basis.
Important! To change between 8 watt and 16 watts on the
HPCTU, the translations must be changed and the RF path recalibrated to the new power level.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 28

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
Translations
Power Calibration Test Procedure

Outline
Purpose
The following is an outline of the procedure in this section. See

subsequent paragraphs for detailed steps.
1.
Calibrate the Power Meter.
2.
Remove the CCC and BBA from service for all shelves to be
measured or calibrated.
3.
Remove the foam jumper and connect the power meter and
attenuator to the cabinets antenna interface panel for the first
shelf to be tested.
4.
Make Translations changes for the attenuator measurement, then

restore the CCC and BBA for the first shelf and make the
attenuator measurement.
5.
Enter actual attenuator loss as an offset in the power meter.
6.
Remove the BBA again and add attenuator back into the
measurement circuit.
7.
Start an apxrc/v session and note the Forward Link power

translations values: Pilot, Paging, and Sync Channel Digital
Gains; BCR attenuation; Linear Amplifier Type (lactype), and
Max Power.
8.
Temporarily Change the Pilot, Paging Sync, and BCR Attenuator

translations parameters for Each Face of the cell which will be
calibrated or measured.
9.
Stable Clear the cell and verify that the CCCs and BBAs are
restored to service.
10. Measure the CDMA transmitter power and/or perform the

calibration procedure.
11. Remove from Service the BBA for the face just measured or
calibrated.
12. Remove the Power Meter and re-connect the Foam Jumper.
13. Remove the BBA for the next face to be measured/calibrated, then
remove the faces foam jumper and connect the power meter.
14. Restore the BBA for the shelf under test.
15. Repeat steps 10 through 12 for all equipped shelves to be
measured.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 29
Repairs
Translations
16. Remove the tested BBA tested from service, disconnect the meter,
and re-connect the foam jumper.
17. Change the translations back to the normal operating parameters
for each face where translations were modified.
18. Stable Clear the cell and verify that the CCCs and BBAs are
19. Place one test call on all transmit paths measured or calibrated.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 30

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
HP 437B Power Meter Calibration
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This section details the Power Meter Calibration.
Power Meter Diagram
ITE6891
FUNCTION
DATA ENTRY
(HP437B)
POWER REF
Reference Calibration
Factor
SENSOR
REF CF 99%
GHz CF% Rho

.1 99.0 .002
2.0
97.0 .006
"
"
"
Calibration Factor
"
"
"
ITE6889
(HP8481H)
Procedure 8-11. Power Meter Calibration
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Connect the sensor cable between the HP 8481H Power Sensor (ITE
6889) and the sensor jack on the HP 437B Power Meter (ITE 6891).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Turn ON the Power Meter. Verify that there are no error messages on
the display.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Press the [PRESET] button. Then press [ENTER] to execute the preset.
The unit will display PRESETTING.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
After presetting disappears, press the [ZERO] button. The power meter
will display ZEROING***.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 31
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................
When the ZEROING*** is finished, select CAL (press [SHIFT] then

[ZERO]). The display will show the current calibration factor stored in
the meter.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Connect the Power head to the POWER REF jack on the meter. See
Figure 1.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Locate the Reference Calibration Factor on the power head. This is

located above the table on the head. It is labeled REF CF (or REF CAL
FAC) and the value is typically 99%, but varies between units. Using the
up and down arrows ([] or []), modify the blinking digit to match the
Reference Cal. Factor. If necessary, use the left and right arrows ([] or
[]) to choose the digit.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Press [ENTER] on the meter. The meter will display CAL***.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
When the CAL*** display disappears, disconnect the head from the
POWER REF jack on the meter.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
Select CAL FAC (press [SHIFT], then [FREQ]). The meter displays the
current value of the Calibration Factor.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
11
Obtain the Calibration Factor for 2.0 GHz from the table on the sensor
head (see Figure 1). Alter the value using the arrow keys as done
previously. Press [ENTER].
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
The calibration steps in the above paragraphs should be repeated every

time the meter is turned on. This will guarantee accurate
measurements.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 32

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
Enter the Offset, If Known
Enter the Offset, If Known
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Power readings will be taken with a 30 dB attenuator (ITE 7037)

between the sensor head and the measurement point. Do Not enter an
offset at this time unless the true loss of the attenuator was determined
previously. The actual insertion loss of the attenuator will be
determined in a later step.
Procedure 8-12. Entering the Offset
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Equipment Damage
Sensor head may be permanently damaged.
Place the 30 dB attenuator in series with the head while reading
full transmit power.
.......................................................................................................................................
If the true offset is known, press [OFFSET] on the Power meter.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Use the arrow keys once again to obtain the true loss of the attenuator.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Press [ENTER]. The power meter is now ready for use.

END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 33
Repairs
Connect the Power Meter to the Minicell
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This section describes connecting the power meter to the Minicell.
Hewlett Packard Power

Meter Connections
Line
RF Interface Plate
Primary Radio
Cabinet
RF Connections
30 dB atten.
Function
Data Entry
Power Ref
Sensor
HP 8481 H
The table below lists the 2 or 3-Sector Primary Radio Cabinet, RF

interface plate connections.
Filter Type
Connection
Description
Simplex
TX - S1P
1st Carrier Alpha Transmit Filter
TX - S2P
1st Carrier Beta Transmit Filter
TX - S3P
1st Carrier Gamma Transmit Filter
TX - S1G
Growth, 2nd Carrier Alpha Transmit Filter
TX - S2G
Growth, 2nd Carrier Beta Transmit Filter
TX - S3G
Growth, 2nd Carrier Gamma Transmit Filter
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 34

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
Duplex
RX/DX S1D0/S1P
Primary Alpha Transmit / Diversity 0 Receive - CTU 0 / RU 1
RX/DX S2D0/S2P
Primary Beta Transmit / Diversity 0 Receive - CTU 1 / RU 3
RX/DX S3D0/S3P
Primary Gamma Transmit / Diversity 0 Receive - CTU 2 / RU 5
RX/DX S1D1/S1G
Growth Alpha Transmit / Diversity 1 Receive - CTU 0/RU 2
RX/DX S2D1/S2G
Growth Beta Transmit / Diversity 1 Receive - CTU 1/RU 4
RX/DX S3D1/S3G
Growth Gamma Transmit / Diversity 1 Receive - CTU 2/RU 6
OMNI Primary Radio

Cabinet, RF Interface Plate
Connections
The table below lists the OMNI Primary Radio Cabinet, RF Interface
plate connections.
Filter Type
Connection
Description
Duplex
D0 (C1P)
First Carrier Transmit / Diversity 0 Receive - CTU 0 / RU 1
D1 (C2P)
Second Carrier Transmit / Diversity 1 Receive - CTU 1 / RU 2
C3P
Third Carrier Transmit Filter - CTU 2
C4G
Fourth Carrier Transmit Filter - Growth CTU 0
C5G
Fifth Carrier Transmit Filter - Growth CTU 1
C6G
Sixth Carrier Transmit Filter - Growth CTU 2
Simplex
Procedure 8-13. Connect the Power Meter
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CAUTION
Personal Injury or damage to cell equipment
Donot disconnect any RF cable while any BCR is in the
TRANSMIT state (ACT LED ON).
.......................................................................................................................................
At the ECP, or using a VT100 terminal emulator with dialup access to

the ECP, enter the following command at the UNIX prompt to begin a
Craftshell session. Enter:
TIpdunix <cr>
Result: A
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 35
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Enter the following command to remove the first BBA from service.
rmv:cell a, bba b;ucl <cr>
Result: RMV:CELL a, BBA b, COMPLETED
a = Minicell number 1 - 222

b = BBA number 2 or 4
(b = 2 for all cells except Beta/Gamma two-sector cells)
2 = Alpha or Omni -Carrier 1, 4 = Beta, 6 = Gamma
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Turn OFF the BCR AUTO/OFF Switch.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the Foam jumper from the RF Interface Panel for the shelf
(CRC) to be measured/calibrated.
Remove only one foam jumper at a time to avoid mistakes upon reconnection.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Connect the attenuator and the sensor head/meter to the proper port of
the RF Interface Panel. The figure illustrates the connections for the HP
437B power meter equipped with the HP8481H Sensor and its
associated 30 dB attenuator. The 2 or 3-Sector and Omni tables list the
transmit RF connection markings of the RF Interface Plate on the
Primary Radio Cabinet.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
After connecting the attenuator and power meter to the transmit port at
the RF Interface Panel, return the BCR AUTO/OFF switch to AUTO.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 36

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
Begin the Recent Change/Verify Session
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Recent Change/Verify will be used to control the CDMA Channel

Elements to provide a calculated maximum power to the CTU/HPCTU
input. The BCR faceplate adjustment will be used to trim the BCR
output.
Personnel performing recent changes must be familiar with the recent
change process and data entry commands.
Procedure 8-14. Begin the Recent Change/Verify Session
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
At the UNIX terminal, enter the following command to begin a recent

change session:
apxrcv
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The RC/V process will respond with a request for a form name:
Enter Form Name (or ?):
Enter ? to display all the available form names.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Enter:
ceqcom2 <CR>
...........................................................................................................................................................................
After form name is entered, type:

u for update, if a change to the HPCTU configuration will be made
or
r to review if no changes will be made
If r was used to enter the form in review mode, changes cannot be made
unless you exit Review Mode. Enter
the left arrow key, < <CR> to exit
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 37
Repairs
form screens to enter the update

modes.
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Navigation Commands
The following commands are useful during recent change sessions:

!
Abort form operation, changes

ignored
< Go back to previous 'Tab stop'

> Go forward to next 'Tab stop'
^ Backup to previous data field
~ Go to end of form
* Go to end of form and execute
;
Default entry
'
NULL entry
? List form names or control

characters
Form fields preceded by * are required fields, data must be entered in
the field.
The ceqface form contains antenna face information CDMA Forward
Link Power Control parameters. The ceqcom2 form contains the
Amplifier parameters.
1.
Enter the cell number in field 1 (CELL SITE - Number) of the

ceqcom2 form.
2.
Type 6 for screen 6 and verify that the lactype (field 75) is as
expected for the CTU/HPCTU on each face.
No changes will be required on this form during this procedure
unless the cell has high Powered CTUs being altered from the 8
watt to the 16 watt configuration or vice versa.
3.
Type 13 for screen 13 and verify that the maxpwr (field 162) is as
expected, for each transmit path.
4.
Exit the form, type: ! <CR>
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 38

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
Set Up Attenuator Measurement Signal
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Sample ceqface Screen
The diagram below shows the ceqface screen with the forward link
parameters.
Procedure 8-15. Set Up Attenuator Measurement Signal on the ceqface Screen
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
If attenuator loss is known and has been entered into the power meter as
an offset, skip to Set Up Shelf Calibration Signals.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
At the apxrc/v form query prompt, enter:

ceqface
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Enter the cell number in field 1 (CELL SITE - Number) of the ceqface
form.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Enter the physical antenna sector or face number in field 2 (Physical

Antenna Face) where the meter/attenuator is connected.
1 = Alpha or Omni 1st Carrier
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 39
Repairs
2 = Beta or Omni 2nd Carrier

3 = Gamma or Omni 3rd
4 = Alpha Growth or Omni 4th
5 = Beta Growth or Omni 5th
6 = Gamma Growth or Omni 6th
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Find the CDMA Power Control Parameters - Forward Link. The screen
number will vary depending on the ECP release; Forward Link
parameters will be on or around screen 8.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Verify that the Pilot Channel Digital Gain value is 108. If it is not, check
the cluster notebook to ascertain that an optimization change has been
made to the pilots gain. The figure on page 8-39 shows typical ceqface
CDMA power control values.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Also record on a note the current values for the Paging Channel Gain
(dgu), the Sync Channel Gain (dgu), and BCR Attenuation Factor (dB);
they must be restored later.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Type C for Change, then enter the field number of the Paging Channel
Gain (dgu), Enter 0 (zero) <cr> into the field.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Type C for Change, then enter the field number of the Sync Channel
Gain (dgu). Enter 0 (zero) <cr> into the field.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
Only for the HPCTU in 16 Watt configuration, type C, then enter the
field number of the Pilot Channel Digital Gain. Enter 90 into the field.
(For the CTU and HPCTU in the 8 Watt setup, leave Pilot at dgu = 108.)
...........................................................................................................................................................................
11
After these changes, press Enter, once again.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
12
Type U to update the ceqface form. Form Updated will appear if the
form is properly updated.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 40

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
This setup will only be performed for this face to measure the test
attenuator. Do not repeat these changes to any other face.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
13
Return to the craftshell session and perform a Stable Clear by entering

the following command:
init:cell a:sc <cr>
A removal and restoral of the shelf is not adequate to ensure that the
apxrcv changes will take effect on the
paging channel.
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 41
Repairs
Calibrate the Attenuator Offset
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Requirements
Record the Attenuator Loss
This procedure is for determining the true insertion loss of a 30 dB

attenuator using the specified HP 437B and HP 8481H power sensor.
DO NOT USE THIS procedure if the attenuator is anything other than
30 dB.
This procedure requires the following:
The power meter should have been calibrated.
A 30 dB attenuator is connected between the antenna port and the

power sensor.
No offset has been entered into the meter.
The translations must have been setup for this procedure per Set
Up Attenuator Measurement Signal.
Once the true loss of the attenuator has been measured, tag the
attenuator with the value for future use. There is no need to repeat the
procedure unless the attenuator is dropped or appears damaged.
If you have to turn down the BCR faceplate potentiometer while
performing this procedure, the RF path must be re-calibrated
afterwards.
Procedure 8-16. Calibrate the Attenuator Offset
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Restore the CCC and BBA. At this point, the only signal should be:
8 Watt
Pilot only at dgu = 108,

BCR att = 8 dB
16 Watt
Pilot only at dgu = 90;

BCR att= 6 dB
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Read the meter. The value should be approximately 1 to 4 dBm. If the

value is above 4.5 dBm, the power level is too high; turn the fine
adjustment pot on the BCR under test down (counterclockwise) until the
meter reads 2 dBm.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 42

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Record the meter reading.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
At the Minicell, turn OFF the AUTO/OFF switch on BCR on the shelf
under test.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the sensor head/attenuator from the antenna port. Unscrew the
attenuator from the head and place the sensor head directly onto the
same antenna port, i.e., without the attenuator.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Return the BCR switch to the AUTO position and then restore the BBA:
rst:cell a, bba y;ucl
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Take the meter reading, it should be approximately 30 dB higher than

the previous reading.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Subtract the reading just taken from the initial; for example, if the initial
reading were 3.1 dBm and the reading without the attenuator was 32.6
dBm, then:
32.6dB -
3.1 dB = 29.5 dB
The difference is the actual loss of the attenuator. Record this value on
a tag and attach it to the attenuator.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Press [OFFSET] on the power meter. Use the arrow keys once again to
obtain the value calculated in the last step. Press [ENTER]. The power
meter is now ready for use.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
Once again, at the Minicell, turn OFF the BCR on the shelf under test.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
11
Remove the sensor head from the antenna port and re-connect the 30 dB
attenuator with the head to the antenna port. The RF power
measurements can now proceed.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 43
Repairs
The Sensor Head will be permanently damaged if the 30 dB attenuator

is not in series with the head while
measuring full transmit power.
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 44

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
Set Up Shelf Calibration Signals
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This procedure outlines the steps to set up shelf calibration signals.
Procedure 8-17. Shelf Calibration Signals
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Follow the steps below to set up the shelf calibration signals.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
At the apxrc/v form query prompt, enter:

ceqface
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Enter the cell number in field 1 (CELL SITE - Number) of the ceqface
form.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Enter the first physical antenna sector or face number in field 2 (Physical
Antenna Face).
Alpha or Omni 1st Carrier
Beta or Omni 2nd Carrier
Gamma or Omni 3rd
Alpha Growth or Omni 4th
Beta Growth or Omni 5th
Gamma Growth or Omni 6th
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Find the CDMA Power Control Parameters - Forward Link (type 9, for
screen 9).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Verify that the Pilot Channel Digital Gain is 108. If it is not, check the
optimization notebook to ascertain that an optimization change has been
made to the pilots gain. Figure 3 shows typical ceqface CDMA power
control values.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 45
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Note the current values for the Paging Channel Gain (dgu), the Sync
Channel Gain (dgu), and BCR Attenuation Factor (dB), they must be
restored later.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Type C for Change, then enter the field number of the Sync Channel
Gain (dgu). Enter 0 (zero) <cr> into the field.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Type C for Change, then enter the field number of the BCR attenuation
Factor.
Enter 0 (zero) <cr> into the field for CTU. Enter a value of 2-18 for
HPCTU, depending on the option that was set when configuring the
HPCTU.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The table below shows the steps to change the Paging Channel Gain
If
Then
CTU & 8 Watt

HPCTU
To change the channel gain for 8 watt:
16 Watt HPCTU
To change the channel gain for 16 watt:
1. Type C for Change, then enter the field number of the Paging
Channel Gain (dgu), Enter 0 (zero) into the field.
2. After Sync, BCR attenuation, and paging gains are changed,
press Enter, once again.
1. Type C for Change, then enter the field number of the Pilot
Channel Digital Gain (dgu), Enter 127 into the field.
2. Type C for Change, then enter the field number of the Paging
Channel Gain (dgu), Enter 59 into the field.
3. After Sync, BCR attenuation, Pilot, and Paging gains are
changed, press Enter, once again.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
Type U to update the ceqface form. Form Updated will appear on the
screen.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
11
Repeat the modifications to the ceqface form for all shelves in the cell
which are to be measured and/or calibrated (Set Up Shelf Calibration
Signals, steps 1 through 10).
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 46

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................
12
Return to the craftshell session and perform a Stable Clear; enter the
following command:
init:cell a:sc <cr>
apxrcv changes will take effect on the
paging channel.
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 47
Calibrate the CTU and HPCTU (8 Watt Setup)

Transmit Power
Repairs
Calibrate the CTU and HPCTU (8 Watt Setup) Transmit Power
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 8-18. Calibrate the 8 Watt Transmit Power
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use the procedure on 8-50 for RF Transmit paths equipped with the
HPCTU set up for 16 Watts.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
At the Minicell, the RF power should be present at the hatchplate (RF

Interface Panel). Measure average power with the power meter. A
reading of 38.8 1.5 dBm is the expected value.
This power value (38.8 dBm) reflects a Pilot Channel Digital Gain of
108, the default setting. A Pilot Digital Gain of 111 would boost the
output two-tenths of a dB (0.2 dB) to full power (39.0 dBm). The output
power is so close to the full power with a Pilot Digital Gain of 108 that
changing the setting for this procedure is not warranted.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If calibration is required, continue on to step 3, otherwise proceed to

Remove Meter.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
On the shelf under test, find the BCRs adjustment potentiometer on the
BCRs faceplate.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
With a Trimpot adjustment tool, carefully turn the BCR adjustment pot,
6 full turns Counter Clockwise.
This step is necessary to prevent the BCR from overdriving the CTU.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Using the adjustment tool, slowly turn the BCR pot Clockwise to obtain
38.80 dBm (range 38.75 to 38.85 dBm) on the power meter.
Be careful not to turn too quickly; if you overshoot 38.80 more than 0.5
dBm, turn the potentiometer back (CCW) six full turns and then slowly
increase (CW) to the set point. These steps are necessary to prevent
overdriving the CTU.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 48

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Calibrate the CTU and HPCTU (8 Watt Setup)

Transmit Power
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Wait 15 minutes to ensure stability of the adjustment (only the last digit
on the meter may vary).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Record the power level measured on the RF Transmit Power Calibration

Data Sheet (see Attachment).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Proceed to the procedure on 8-51 to ceremove the meter.

END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 49
Repairs
Calibrate HPCTU (16 Watt Setup) Transmit

Power
Calibrate HPCTU (16 Watt Setup) Transmit Power
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 8-19. Calibrate 16 Watt Transmit Power for HPCTU
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
At the Minicell, the RF power should be present at the hatchplate (RF

Interface Panel). Measure average power with the power meter. A
reading of 42.1 1.5 dBm is the expected value.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If calibration is required, continue on to step 3, otherwise proceed to

Remove Meter.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
On the shelf under test, find the BCRs adjustment potentiometer (pot)
on the BCRs faceplate.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
With a Trimpot adjustment tool, carefully turn the BCR adjustment pot,
6 full turns Counter Clockwise. This step is necessary to prevent the
BCR from overdriving the CTU.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Using the adjustment tool, slowly turn the BCR pot Clockwise to obtain
42.1 dBm (range 42.05 to 42.15 dBm) on the power meter.
Be careful not to turn too quickly; if you overshoot 42.1 more than 0.5
dBm, turn the potentiometer back (CCW) six full turns and then slowly
increase (CW) to the set point. These steps are necessary to prevent
overdriving the CTU.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Wait 15 minutes to ensure stability of the adjustment (only the last digit
on the meter may vary).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Record the power level measured on the RF Transmit Power Calibration

Data Sheet (see RF Transmit Power Calibration Data Sheet).
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 50

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
Remove Meter
Remove Meter
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This procedure lists the steps to safely detach the power meter from the
Minicell.
Procedure 8-20.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
After average power measurements have been completed, turn off the
CDMA transmitter by taking the BBA Out-of-Service. Enter:
Where:
a
Minicell number 1 - 222
bba number
2-Alpha or Omni -Carrier 1
4-Beta or Omni - 2
6-Gamma or Omni - 3
8-Alpha 1st Growth or Omni - 4
10-Beta 1st Growth or Omni - 5
12-Gamma 1st Growth or Omni - 6
20-Alpha 2nd Growth or Omni - 7
22-Beta 2nd Growth or Omni - 8
24-Gamma 2nd Growth or Omni - 9

...........................................................................................................................................................................
At the cell, turn the BCR AUTO/OFF switch to OFF.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the power meter and attenuator.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Re-connect the Antenna Foam Jumper Cable to the RF Interface Panel.

To prevent personal injury and/or damage to cell equipment, never
disconnect any RF cable while any BCR is in the TRANSMIT state
(ACT LED ON).
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 51
Repairs
Remove Meter
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Return BCR AUTO/OFF switch to AUTO.

END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 52

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
Calibrate Additional Shelves
Calibrate Additional Shelves
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 8-21. Calibrate Additional Shelves
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
If additional shelves are to be tested, or calibrated, remove the BBA of

the next shelf from service; enter:
Minicell number 1 - 222
bba number
4-Beta or Omni - 2
6-Gamma or Omni - 3
8-Alpha 1st Growth or Omni - 4
10-Beta 1st Growth or Omni - 5
12-Gamma 1st Growth or Omni - 6
20-Alpha 2nd Growth or Omni - 7
22-Beta 2nd Growth or Omni - 8
24-Gamma 2nd Growth or Omni - 9

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Repeat all the steps in 8-48 8 watt setup or 8-50 for 16 watt setup,
whichever is applicable, for the next shelf (face or carrier) to be
calibrated or measured.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 53
Repairs
Restore the Original CDMA Power Control

Translations
Restore the Original CDMA Power Control Translations
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This section details restoring the original CDMA power control

translations.
Procedure 8-22. Restore the Original CDMA Power Control Translations
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Return to the APX/RCV session and update the ceqface form again, this
time updating the form with the original values for the:
Sync Channel Gain (dgu)
Paging Channel Gain (dgu)
BCR Attenuation Factor
Also Pilot Channel Gain (dgu), if changed for the
HPCTU (16 Watt setup).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Update the ceqface form saving the parameters listed above. Keep the
apxrcv session active until all shelves have been restored to the original
ceqface settings.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Return to the craftshell session and perform a Stable Clear by entering

init:cell a:sc <cr>
apxrcv changes will take effect on the paging channel.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Confirm the operation of the cell by placing one call on each transmit
path of the Minicell.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Before the technician leaves the Minicell site, verify that there are no
alarms for the cell. In particular, verify that CB 22 in the primary radio
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 54

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Restore the Original CDMA Power Control

Translations
Repairs
cabinet is ON and check the CTU Shelf fan alarm (SCAN POINT:
OFFSET 7, BIT 2).
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 55
Repairs
RF Transmit Power Calibration Data Sheet
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cell Identification
The table below contains the information necessary to uniquely

identify the cell site.
Cell Name:
Date:
Cell Number:
Technician:
Cell Serial
Numbers,
Primary Cabinet:
Growth Cabinet:
Power Calibration Table
The table below contains fields to store the power calibration data.
CABINET
BB
A
PRIMARY
SECTOR/
CARRIER
CTU/
HPCTU
CHANNEL POWER
#
(dBm)
4
6
GROWTH I 8
10
12
GROWTH
II
20
22
24
GROWTH
III
26
28
30
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 56

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
Heat Exchanger Repairs

Overview
Objectives
Heat exchanger maintenance is covered in this section along with

documentation from the original equipment manufacturer.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 57
Repairs
Heat Exchanger Maintenance
Heat Exchanger Maintenance
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
The heat exchangers on the Primary and Growth Frames are of the airto-air type that provide thermal environmental control for these
electronic equipment cabinets. These heat exchangers limit and
monitor cabinet internal temperatures from 0 to 65 C.
The heat exchangers consist of an ambient fan, internal fan, microcontroller, a heater element, and a sheet metal housing.
Alarm Conditions
Microcontroller Functions
Normal Heat Exchanger

Operation
These heat exchangers will report an alarm condition under the

following conditions:
Loss of 24 VDC power to heat exchanger
Cabinet internal air temperature below 0 C.
Cabinet internal air temperature above 65 C.
The microcontroller, which operates from a 26 VDC source, provides

the logic to perform the following:
Vary the speed of the internal and ambient fans to maintain the
internal cabinet temperature between 0 to 65 C.
Control of the heater element in maintaining the internal cabinet

temperature above 0 C. during cold ambient temperatures.
Provide alarms for fan failures, heater failures, cabinet high and
low temperatures conditions both on the heat exchangers and to
the Alarm Facilities Interface.
At ambient temperature of 50 F. or less the ambient fan may not need

to run.
It is normal for the ambient fan to cycle on and off above 50 F.
ambient.
The internal fan will run continuously a low speed and will ramp up in
speed as cooling demand increases.
It is normal for the cabinet surfaces to feel very warm when touched in
high ambient temperatures.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 58

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
Heat Exchanger ROP Alarm Corrective Actions
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This procedure lists the steps to perform the heat exchanger rop alarm
corrective actions
Procedure 8-23. Heat Exchanger Blower Alarm 1: (Ambient Fan)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Check heat exchanger ambient intake and exhaust vents for

obstructions.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Perform heat exchanger test run.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Check fan fuse s2 on controller card inside heat exchanger (primary

only).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Check 26 V DC to fan at connector block on control card (see wiring

diagram on heat exchanger).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Replace with new ambient fan.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Change control card if new fan does not correct problem.

END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
The ambient fan is replaced.

Procedure 8-24. Heat Exchanger Blower Alarm 0: (Internal Fan)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Check fan fuse s1 on controller card inside heat exchanger.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 59
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Check 26 V DC to fan at connector block on control card (see wiring

diagram on heat exchanger)
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Replace with new internal fan.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Change control card if new fan does not correct problem.

END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 60

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
Heat Exchanger Hi/Low Temp Alarm
Heat Exchanger Hi/Low Temp Alarm
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Heater Power Loss
There are no alarms sent to the Alarm Facilities Interface for heater
element failure or loss of 220 VAC. However, a Temperature alarm
will be indicated if the cabinets internal air temperature falls below 0
C. This will indicate a possible heater element failure or loss of 220
VAC, power. In addition, a heater element failure or loss of 220 VAC,
power will be indicated by a LED alarm located on the heat exchanger
panel.
Procedure 8-25. Heat Exchanger Hi/Low Temp Alarm
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This procedure lists the steps to correct Minicell cabinet troubles when
internal temperature is below 0 or above 65 c.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Check heat exchanger ambient intake and exhaust vents for bug, dust or
obstructions if high temp is suspected.
Remove obstruction and clean vent screen.
...........................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Check for heater alarm on heat exchanger panel (for low temp alarm).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Check 220 AC breaker for heater power (for low temp alarm).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Check 220 AC power connector is plugged into heat exchanger (for low
temp alarm).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Replace heater element (for low temp alarm).

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Change controller card if new heater element does not correct problem.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 61
Repairs
Weekly and Monthly Heat Exchanger

Maintenance
Weekly and Monthly Heat Exchanger Maintenance
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This procedure lists the weekly and monthly maintenance procedures

for the heat exchanger.
Procedure 8-26. Weekly Heat Exchanger Maintenance
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Check heat exchanger ambient intake and exhaust vents for

Obstructions, heavy insect or dust accumulations.
The intake screens may be cleaned with a brush and detergent cleaner.
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 8-27. Monthly Heat Exchanger Maintenance
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Perform heat exchanger test run
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 62

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
Yearly Heat Exchanger Maintenance
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Control Panel Diagram
The diagram below shows the control buttons and indicator lights of
the heat exchanger control panel.
888
INTERNAL FAN
GREEN STATUS LIGHT
HIGH TEMP
AMBIENT FAN
HEATER
LOW TEMP
UP ARROW
DOWN ARROW
Procedure 8-28. Flush the Heat Exchanger Core
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Heat Exchanger Damage

Cell components will short out if the liquid used in the
cleaning come in contact with live electrical components.
The heat exchanger should be powered down when performing
this cleaning procedure.
Heat Exchanger Damage
The heat exchanger becomes blocked causing temperature
control problems.
This core cleaning process should be more frequent in dusty or
areas with high air pollution levels.
The heat exchanger core should be flushed clean with a non acid based
air conditioning coil cleaner.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The cleaner should be sprayed with a low pressure sprayer into the top
exhaust vent following the manufacturers instructions.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 63
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Thoroughly flush out with clean water.

END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 8-29. How to Perform Test Run of Primary Heat Exchanger:
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Push both arrow buttons on display panel at the same time and hold until
a 2, appears on display then let go.
Result: A 000 will display, then push-up arrow button. This will
set the time duration (in minutes, set to 5) of a full speed blower test
run.
When the test run starts, the alarm lights will all cycle on and off
and the temp alarm indicator will remain illuminated during the test
run.
In addition, the green OK status light will not illuminate during the
test run. However, it will illuminate after the 5 minute test run if the
Heat Exchanger is functioning properly.
If the internal and ambient fans are functioning properly, no fan
alarm lights will remain illuminated during the test run.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
It is also recommended to check for air flow on ambient side top vent
to verify the bottom ambient fan is running during the test run.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 8-30. Test Run of Growth Frame Heat Exchanger
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This procedure outlines how to perform a test run of Growth Frame

heat exchanger:
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Power-down growth heat exchanger by turning off circuit breaker

number 12 and 13.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Wait 1 minute for fans to stop.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 64

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Power-up Growth heat exchanger by turning on circuit breaker number

12 and 13.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Heat exchanger will perform a self test of fans and control card and run
both internal and ambient fans for 60 seconds.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Check for air flow on ambient side top vent to verify the bottom ambient
fan is running during this 60 second full speed test run.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Monitor the alarm panel status lights for 2 minutes.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
If no Alarm Panel status lights illuminate, the heat exchanger is

functioning properly.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 65
Repairs
Replace the Control Card for Growth Frame

Heat Exchanger
Replace the Control Card for Growth Frame Heat Exchanger
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This procedure covers the replacement and testing of the heat

exchanger control card.
Procedure 8-31. Control Card Replacement
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WARNING
High voltage
Danger of electrical shock and/or damage to the
components.
Turn off the 220 VAC heater circuit breaker on PDA and
turn off the 26 VDC breaker for the heat exchanger.
.......................................................................................................................................
Remove the top fan cover on the heat exchanger by removing all 14 pan
head screws securing the cover.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Unfasten the three captive screws and remove the fan shroud from the
heat exchanger.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Locate the control circuit card on the top right side of the heat
exchanger.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the card in this order:

1.
Disconnect both the fan connectors J5 internal and J6 ambient

fans from the control card.
2.
Disconnect the 26 VDC power connector J2 from the control card.
3.
Disconnect the J7 alarm connector.
4.
Disconnect the J4 temperature sensor connector.
5.
Unfasten the four captive screws securing the control card to the
heat exchanger.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 66

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs

Heat Exchanger
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Disconnect the 220 VAC power spade leads one at a time transferring
them to the corresponding lug of the new control card heater relays.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Install the new control card in the heat exchanger with captive screws.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Connect the cables:

1.
Connect 26 VDC power connector J3 on the control card.
2.
Connect the J7 alarm connector.
3.
Connect the J4 temperature sensor connector.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Re-install the fan shroud assembly and secure the three captive screws.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Put the top fan cover on the heat exchanger and install the two front
cover screws connecting the cover to the fan shroud first.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
Install the remaining 12 pan head screws.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
11
Connect the 220 VAC power connector on the heat exchanger.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
12
Connect the 26 VDC power connector on the heat exchanger.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
13
Turn on the 220 VAC heater circuit breaker on the breaker panel.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
14
Turn on the 26 VDC heater circuit breaker on the breaker panel.

END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
If the installation is correct, the following will occur:

1.
The heat exchanger should start-up with both fans at full speed.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 67

Heat Exchanger
Repairs
2.
The ambient fan will turn off and the internal fan will reduce and
adjust to half speed.
3.
Wait 5 minutes and there should be no alarm LEDs illuminated.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 68

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
Replace the Heater Cartridge for Growth Frame

Heat Exchanger
Replace the Heater Cartridge for Growth Frame Heat Exchanger
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose

Procedure 8-32. Heater Cartridge Replacement
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WARNING
High voltage
components.
.......................................................................................................................................
Remove the air grill on the heat exchanger by removing all 6 pan head
screws securing the air grill.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Unplug the heater cartridge from the cable harness.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the cable clamp securing the cable to the air grill.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the four screws attaching the heater cartridge to the air grill.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the heater cartridge from the air grill.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Install the new heater cartridge in the air grill securing it with the four
screws. Tighten the screws securely.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Re-install the cable clamp securing the cable to the air grill.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 69
Repairs
Replace the Heater Cartridge for Growth Frame

Heat Exchanger
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Re-connect the heater cartridge cable to the mating harness connector.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Re-install the air grill and secure with the pan head screws.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
Connect the 220 VAC power connector to the heat exchanger.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
11

...........................................................................................................................................................................
12
...........................................................................................................................................................................
13
Turn on the 26 VDC heater circuit breaker on the breaker panel

END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
If the installation is correct, the following will occur:

1.
2.
3.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 70

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
Replace the Ambient Fan for Growth Frame

Heat Exchanger
Replace the Ambient Fan for Growth Frame Heat Exchanger
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose

Procedure 8-33. Ambient Fan Replacement
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WARNING
High voltage
components.
.......................................................................................................................................
Remove the bottom fan cover on the heat exchanger by removing all 19
pan head screws securing the cover plate.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Unfasten the four pan head screws connecting the fan bracket to the heat
exchanger. Remove the fan/bracket assembly from the heat exchanger.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Unplug the weather tight fan connector from the heat exchanger.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the cable clamp on the back of the fan/bracket assembly.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the four screws attaching the fan to the fan bracket.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the fan from the fan bracket assembly.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Attach the new fan to the fan bracket assembly securing it with the four
pan head screws. Tighten the screws securely.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 71
Repairs

Heat Exchanger
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Re-install the cable clamp on the back of the fan bracket assembly.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Connect the fan cable connector back to the mating weather tight
connector inside the fan box of the heat exchanger.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
Carefully re-install the new fan and bracket assembly.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
11
Spin the fan slowly by hand checking for interference and adjusting the
fan bracket if necessary.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
12
Install the bottom fan cover and secure it with all 19 pan head screws.
Fully and evenly tighten all the pan head screws.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
13

...........................................................................................................................................................................
14

...........................................................................................................................................................................
15
...........................................................................................................................................................................
16
Turn on the 26 VDC heater circuit breaker on the breaker panel.

END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
If the installation, is correct the following will occur:

1.
2.
3.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 72

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Heat Exchanger
Repairs
Island Cell
Overview
Objectives
Correcting Island Mode

Cells
Some cell sites have experienced island mode situations, evident

when the cells cannot accept hand-offs from other cells, nor can the
island cell hand-off to its neighbors.
Refer to the fax flashes and information bulletins to learn the latest
information on this problem and procedures to correct it..
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 73
Repairs
Island Mode CDMA Cell Script
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Description
A new Service Measurement Report Generator (SMRG) script has

been developed to help identify island cells.
The script compares secondary cell traffic channel usage to total traffic
channel element usage to identify cells which may be in an island cell
condition. Once a potential island cell has been identified, a test drive
of the cell is still necessary to confirm the problem.
This script will work with both PCS-CDMA and CDMA-850 systems,
and has been tested on both ECP 9.0 and 10.0.
Questions
Please refer questions to the CTSO Methods and Procedures

Organization.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 74

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
NVM Procedures
Overview
Purpose
NVM Procedures
These procedures are designed to minimize the amount of time that

CDMA service is unavailable. The total time it takes to NVM the
entire cell is unchanged by these procedures.
These procedures differ from previously recommended procedures in
three primary ways:
1.
NVMing the BBAs before the CCCs. By having the BBAs

NVM'd and in service prior to NVMing the CCCs, CDMA service
is restored on a partial basis as soon as the first CCC is fully
NVM'd (assuming the interconnection of shelves). As each
additional CCC is NVM'd, additional CDMA radios become
available for service. With this change the CDMA downtime is
reduced by (N-1) * (CCUOFC download time per CCC) where N
is the number of CCCs. For a 3 sector/1 carrier Series II cell with 6
CCCs this amounts to at least 25 minutes.
2.
Call Processing is allowed during the download of CDMA

hardware. Previous procedures only allowed CP during download
on AMPS/CDMA systems.
3.
A Stable Clear of the cell at the end of the NVM procedure is not
needed.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 75
Repairs
CDMA Cell Downloading Procedures
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
These procedures are designed to minimize the amount of time that

CDMA service is unavailable. The total time it takes to Non-Volitale
Memory (NVM) the entire cell is unchanged by these procedures.
Procedure 8-34. Change Generic:
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Use the Cell2 Form to change the generic.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Verify generic:
OP:CELL,GENERIC
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 8-35. Inhibit Audits, RTDIAG, FT:
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Inhibit NVM version audit:

INH:CELL #,AUD NVMVER
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Inhibit routine diagnostics:

INH:CELL #,RTDIAG
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Inhibit functional tests:

INH:CELL #,FT {ANT|OC|TP|PL}
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 8-36. Download CSCs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Remove CSC 0:
RMV:CELL #,CSC 0;UCL
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 76

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Download CSC 0 CPU:

DNLD:CELL #,CSC 0,CPU
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Download CSC 0 CPI:

DNLD:CELL #,CSC 0,CPI
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Inhibit call processing

INH:CELL #,CP
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Boot the cell:

INIT:CELL #:BOOT;SW
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Verify CSC 0 version:

OP:CELL #,CSC 0;UCL:VERSION
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Download CSC 1 CPU:

DNLD:CELL #,CSC 1,CPU
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Download CSC 1 CPI:

DNLD:CELL #,CSC 1,CPI
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Restore CSC 1 to standby:

RST:CELL #,CSC 1:STBY
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 8-37. Remove CDMA Hardware
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Remove all the BBAs:

RMV:CELL #,BBA #;UCL(skip this step if BBAs do not need to be
NVM'd)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 77
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove all the CCCs:

RMV:CELL #,CCC #;UCL
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the CRTU:

RMV:CELL #,CRTU;UCL
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 8-38. Download SCTs
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Skip this procedure entirely if SCTs do not need to be NVM'd.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the standby SCTs:

RMV:CELL #,CAT #;UCL
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Download the SCTs removed:

DNLD:CELL #,CAT # (Downloaded SCTs should restore to standby)
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the active SCTs:

RMV:CELL #,CAT #;UCL (A SCT board switch will occur)
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Download the SCTs removed:

DNLD:CELL #,CAT # (Downloaded SCTs should restore to standby)
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 8-39. Allow Call Processing
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Allow Call Processing:

ALW:CELL #,CP
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 78

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Repairs
Procedure 8-40. Download CDMA Hardware
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Download all BBAs:

DNLD:CELL #,BBA ALLCDMA(skip this step if BBAs do not need to be
NVM'd)
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Download all CCCs - Part 1:

DNLD:CELL #,CCC ALLCDMA;CCCOFC
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Download all CCCs - Part 2:

DNLD:CELL #,CCC ALLCDMA;CCUOFC
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Download CRTU:
DNLD:CELL #,CRTU
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 8-41. Allow Audits, RTDIAG, FT
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
The NVM version audits:

ALW:CELL #,AUD NVMVER
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Routine diagnostics:
ALW:CELL #,RTDIAG
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Functional tests:
ALW:CELL #,FT {ANT|OC|TP|PL}
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Verify Cell status:

OP:CELL #
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

8 - 79
Repairs
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 - 80

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Upgrading a PCS CDMA

Minicell
Overview
Purpose
Contents
This unit is designed to enable you to review the general principles of

PCS CDMA Minicell upgrades, and to apply these principles to the
specific examples of ECU and HPCTU upgrades.
Outline of Upgrade Procedures - Preliminary Preparation Procedures
Example of Configuration Change
Baselining a Minicell - - - - - - -
9-3
9-4
9-5
9-6
9-7
Programming the CRTU

9-8
Items Needed to Program the CRTU - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-9
Upgrade TCU to ECU
Example of Upgrade: TCU to ECU -- Installation Procedure
Enabling Channel Pooling - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ECU Upgrade -- Removing a CCC from Service - - - - - ECU Upgrade -- Updating the Minicell Translations - - - NVMing the CCC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
9-10
- 9-11
- 9-13
- 9-14
- 9-15
- 9-16
Example of Upgrade: CTU To HPCTU

Preliminary Procedures - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Installing the HPCTU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Testing the Minicell - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
9-19
- 9-20
- 9-22
- 9-25
Range Extension Offer

9-26
Range Extension Offer (REO) Overview - - - - - - - - - - 9-27
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

9 - 1
Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Required Material and Information - - - - - - - - Preliminary Procedures - - - - - - - - - - - - - TTLNA Physical Installation - - - - - - - - - - Transmit Power Calibration Procedure - - - - - - Rho and FER Testing the TTLNA - - - - - - - - Minicell Cleanup and Reboot - - - - - - - - - - TTLNA Alarm and Call Processing Tests - - - - - Close Up the Minicell - - - - - - - - - - - - - - MAU Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - PDU Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Cable Routing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - PDU Alarm Cable Routing Into Primary Cabinet - Alarm Cable Connections Inside the Primary Cabinet
Bias T Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Identifying Faults in the MAU - - - - - - - - - - Component Replacement and Repair Preparations Cable/MAU Connector Re-sealing - - - - - - - - Preparing an MAU for Mounting - - - - - - - - - Replacing a Failed MAU - - - - - - - - - - - - Replacing a Failed PDU - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
9-28
9-30
9-31
9-32
9-33
9-34
9-35
9-37
9-41
9-42
9-43
9-45
9-46
9-47
9-49
9-50
9-51
9-52
9-54
9-56
9-60
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 2

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

OverviewIntroduction to PCS CDMA Minicell Upgrades
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
How to Upgrade?
PCS CDMA System

Components are Involved
in an Upgrade
Upgrades are required to implement new software releases (e.g., cell

generic release 10), or new services/features made possible by new
hardware design (e.g., ECU or HPCTU).
Upgrades are made according to specified procedures which are
designed to keep impact on service to a minimum. Procedures that
cannot be carried out without taking a Minicell out-of-service will
usually be done at night.
Upgrades may involve only the Minicell (e.g., filter upgrades), but
most often will require changes at both the PCSC (translations) and at
the Minicell site.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

9 - 3
Outline of Upgrade Procedures
Outline of Upgrade Procedures
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Upgrade Procedure
Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell can be an involved undertaking.

Even though its highly procedural, it requires a thorough understanding
of the internal workings of the Minicell and of the purpose of each
procedure to keep the upgrading time to a minimum.
Upgrade procedures should always involve the following sequence of
tasks:
.......................................................................................................................................
Preliminary preparation
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Baselining the cell (i.e., recording the state of the cell and its operating
parameters) before the upgrade
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Performing the upgrade

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Testing that the upgrade is effective and that the cell is operating
properly
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Baselining the Minicell after the upgrade, to record the new operating
parameters
The Upgrading Team
Some of the tasks performed during upgrades may have system-wide

implications. Consequently, upgrades should be undertaken and
performed as a team effort. A typical team will be made up of PCSC
and Minicell technicians, but it may need to include other specialties,
such as RF Engineering. For instance, upgrading from TCU to ECU
may require Packet Pipe re-engineering, the results of which would
require translation changes at the PCSC, in addition to the physical
hardware change at the Minicell site.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 4

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Preliminary Preparation Procedures
Preliminary Preparation Procedures
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Software
Preliminary procedures will involve verifying that the proper software

version for the upgrade has been installed at the PCSC and the
Minicell. For instance, an ECU will not work on ECP release 9.0. In
addition, whenever possible, time has to be allowed to check that the
cell is operating under the new release prior to the upgrade (a process
known as soaking the cell).
Hardware
Preliminary procedures also involve ensuring that all hardware

configurations have been worked out for the upgrade, and that all
upgrade components (circuit packs) and required tools and equipment
are available.
Soaking a Minicell
The term describes the process of running frequent diagnostics on a

Minicell that has been downloaded with a new release to ensure that all
its components have been properly updated to that release. Soaking
period is usually set for one week.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

9 - 5
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Physical Change
Configuration changes that are reflected in translation may involve

physical or logical changes to the Minicell configuration.
Example of physical change may be output power, such as when
upgrading from a CTU to an HPCTU.
Logical Changes
Logical changes involve changes such as the reassignment of

communication channels. An example of a logical change is the
reassignment of packet pipes.
Upgrade procedures will specify the order in which these changes have
to be performed.
RC/V Fields Diagram
DSO
DSO
11
22
33
44
55
66
77
88
99
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
The diagram below depicts the relationship between the RC/V screens,
the packet pipe, and the antenna faces. Each antenna face (alpha, beta,
and gamma) must be associated with a series of DS0 channels on the
pptm RC/V screen to define a packet pipe.
AUTOPLEX
Cellular
Screen 1 of 1
System
ALPHA
BETA
DL1
BETA
GAMMA
PACKET PIPE TRUNK GROUP MEMBER INFORMATION (pptm)
Alpha Face
Associated DSO Channels
Beta Face
CDMA Switch Identification.............. *1) 1

Trunk Group Number...................... *2) 590
CCC Board Number (Trunk Member Number)*3) 2
Trunk Status............................ . 4) e
Packet Pipe Data Rate (Kbps).......... 5) 56
DS1 Board Number....................... 6) 0
Gamma Face
7)DS0 Channels: AUTOPLEX

Cellular
GROUP MEMBER INFORMATION
FIELDS 1, 2, 5,PACKET
6, 7 and PIPE
12 areTRUNK
site specific
[1] 1 [5] 5
Screen 1 of 1
(pptm)
[2] 2 [6] 6
System
[3] 3 [7] 7
[4] 4 [8] 8
Trunk Group Number......................
*2) 590
DCS-E Switching Module..................
12) 2
Trunk Status............................ . 4) e
AUTOPLEX
Cellular
PACKET PIPE TRUNK GROUP MEMBER
DS1 Board Number....................... 6) 0
Screen 1 of 1
INFORMATION (pptm)
System
7)DS0 Channels:
FIELDS 1, 2, 5, 6, 7 and 12 are site specific
[1] 9 [5] 14
[2] 10[6] 15
Trunk Group Number...................... *2) 590
[3] 11[7] 16
[4] 12[8] 17
Trunk Status............................ . 4) e
DCS-E Switching Module.................. 12) 2
DS1 Board Number....................... 6) 0
7)DS0 Channels:
FIELDS 1, 2, 5, 6, 7 and 12 are site specific
[1] 18[5]
[2] 19[6]
[3] 20[7]
[4] 21[8]
DL0
* In ECP 13 the number

of DS0 Channels is
increased to 16
DCS-E Switching Module.................. 12) 2
CL3805 L9V7 0
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 6

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Baselining a Minicell
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Components Involved
The process of baselining is designed to certify that the Minicell is

operating as intended, especially when the update involves changes to
the cell generic.
Baselining involves:
Routine diagnostics
Manual diagnostics on DLs, CSCs, Packet Pipe Trunks, SCTs,

CCCs, BBAs, and CRTUm
Functional Tests on overhead channels and traffic paths
Once these tests are completed, it may be of value to verify the integrity
of the cell, by looking at the SDPs that reflect the configuration of the
cell, as shown in the table below.
SDP Page Number
Title
SDP 2121
System Equipage Summary
SDP 2131
Minicell Equipment Status
SDP 2132
Minicell Software Status
SDP 2134
Minicell DS-1 Status
SDP 2138
Minicell Site CDMA Equipage Status
SDP 2139
Minicell Site CCC CCU Status
Routine Diagnostics and

Manual Diagnostics
Routine diagnostics, which are scheduled to be automatically

performed after midnight, may detect defective hardware. If diagnostic
failures are reported, replace the defective hardware and perform
manually requested diagnostics on the unit.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

9 - 7
Programming the CRTU

Overview
Purpose
The ability to change CRTUm phone numbers is available with the

Qualcomm (QC) phones. This information pertains to all cellular and
PCS Autoplex customers with CDMA Growth Frames or Minicells
with CRTU (CDMA Radio Test Unit) equipment.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 8

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Items Needed to Program the CRTU
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Required Equipment
How to Order
Qualcomm Ordering
Information
The Programming Adaptor allows service providers to perform

NAMing (Number Assignement Module) of the Qualcomm (QC)
mobile which resides within the CRTUm, without Lucent installation
personnel. An example of NAMing might be to make area code
updates. The Programming Adaptor provides the interface between the
QC PST software and the CRTUm.
The following equipment is required to run the software.
PC or laptop, minimum configuration 386, 33MHz, 8MB RAM,

DOS5.0, RS-232 serial port (customer provided)
PST software (v5.0 or later, PST software must be purchased by

the customer directly from Qualcomm)
Commercial cable (DB9-RS-232 shielded type, customer

provided)
Programming Adaptor (order via Lucent)
The information on availability and ordering is in the following list:
Availability is by early November, RTO target is November 20,

1997
Series II CDMA GF: Comcode 407805423
PCS or Cellular CDMA Minicells: ZCCMC-Adaptor

(108167610)
List price is $200
Qualcomm ordering information is in the following list:
Call 1-800-349-4474 and identify your account
Specify appropriate version
PST-I supports service programming
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

9 - 9
Upgrade TCU to ECU

Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
The upgrade from TCU to ECU is a complex operation that may

require significant service-affecting reconfigurations.
Because the ECU can support ten CEs instead of the two CEs available
with a TCU, there may be a need to reconfigure the packet pipes that
backhaul traffic back to the PCSC.
Discussion of the PCSC side of the upgrade, especially the
discussion about packet pipe re-engineering, is an RF Engineering
topic, and therefore outside the scope of this document.
In the following, we will assume that all the necessary preliminary and
PCSC related work has been performed, and limit the example to
Minicell-related processes.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 10

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Example of Upgrade: TCU to ECU -- Installation

Procedure
Example of Upgrade: TCU to ECU -- Installation Procedure
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
The preliminary procedures (packet pipe re-engineering, software

updates, 5ESS views and Access Manager forms updated, Minicell
NVM, baselining) must be performed in advance of the actual upgrade.
The upgrade from TCU to ECU can be performed without loss of
service if the channel pooling feature is enabled.
Procedure 9-1. Upgrade TCU to ECU
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The sequence of tasks is as follows:

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Enable channel pooling. See page 9-13 for more information.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Inhibit Minicell diagnostics and tests, to avoid unnecessary automatic

trigger of alarms at the PCSC. See page 9-14 for more information.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove from service the CCC controlling the TCUs to be replaced.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Physically remove the TCUs from the shelf and take them out of the
Minicell. See page 9-14 for more information.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Update, or ask someone at the switch to update, the appropriate RC/V

forms for the TCUs to be replaced, one sector at a time. See page 9-15
for more information.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Re-NVM the CCCs, and verify that the download is valid. See page 916 for more information.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Insert the replacement ECUs.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Restore and diagnose each ECU.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

9 - 11
Example of Upgrade: TCU to ECU -- Installation

Procedure
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Perform Functional Tests (overhead channels and traffic path).

...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
Allow diagnostics and tests.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
11
Re-baseline the Minicell.

END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
Upon completion of these broad steps, the cell will be operational with
ECUs. The cross references note the steps with more information.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 12

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Enabling Channel Pooling
Enabling Channel Pooling
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Channel Pooling Numbers
Enabling of channel pooling is done by entering non-zero values in RC/

V Form ceqcom2, field SubMem.
These values are given in the following table.
Cabinet
BBA Numbers
Value to be
entered
Primary Cabinet
2,4,6
1,1,1
Primary Growth I
8,10,12
2,2,2
ceqcom2 Screen
The diagram below shows the ceqcom2 screen with emphasis shown
on the SubMem field where channel pooling is enables.
AUTOPLEX
Cellular SERIES 2 CELL EQUIPAGE COMMON (ceqcom2)
System
Cell 90
Screen 13
Primary Cabinet
BBA:
2,4,6
SubMem: 1,1,1
BBA
BBA BBA CDMA
Stat
Stat
Type
Carr
153) BBA 154) BBA 155)
156)
157)
[1] 1
u
2
e
FULLSET 1
[2] 3
u
4
e
FULLSET 1
[3] 5
u
6
e
FULLSET 1
Max LMT/CATV
Pwr Max Pwr
163) 164)
[1] 008.0 ___
[2] 008.0 ___ Channel
[3] 008.0 ___
CDMA Base
Chanl Class
158) 159)
450
JTC
450
JTC
450
JTC
Screen 13 of 17
LAC Phy
ID
Ant
160) 161)
29
1
30
2
31
3
Sub
Mem
170)
1
1
1
Screen 14
Growth Cabinet
BBA:
8,10,12
SubMem: 2, 2, 2
Pooling NOT enabled if Sub Mem fields are set to 0
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

9 - 13
ECU Upgrade -- Removing a CCC from Service
ECU Upgrade -- Removing a CCC from Service
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Upgrading Sequence
Before you begin
The PCSC periodically initiates routine diagnostics and alarm

scanning. Inhibiting these tests will prevent the triggering of alarms
when removing equipment from service.
Upgrading is done one sector at a time, after having removed the
corresponding CCC from service.
Even though the CCC is out-of-service, it may try to communicate with
the CE, using its stored NVM. It is therefore necessary to remove the
TCU before changing the translation.
For the same reason, the ECU should not be inserted in the CRC shelf
before the translations have been updated.
Procedure 9-2. Remove the CCC from Service
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Inhibit diagnostics and tests:

inh:cell #, rtdiag<cr>
inh:cell #, ft, tp<cr>
inh:cell #,ft, oc<cr>
inh:cell #,ft pl<cr>
inh:cell #,ft ant<cr>
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the corresponding CCC from service:

rmv:cell #,ccc x;ucl<cr>
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Physically remove the required TCUs.

END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
The cell is ready for upgrading of the forms.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 14

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
ECU Upgrade -- Updating the Minicell

Translations
ECU Upgrade -- Updating the Minicell Translations
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
This page describes the process of updating the Minicell translations

for a TCU to ECU upgrade.
Updating the Translations
Note: someone with access to the switch needs to perform the RC/V
updates.
.......................................................................................................................................
Translations are updated from the apxrcv, by changing the ceqcom2

database form, CCC Type field (field 150 in ECP 10.0) from 2 to 10.
This change has to be done one sector at a time, by entering and saving
the change for each CCC involved in the upgrade.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Upgrade Process Diagram
Once the ceqcom2 form has been updated, it is necessary to verify that
the proper CEs will be recognized, This is done by verifying and, if
necessary, updating the ceqccu form, placing an e in each entry
corresponding to an equipped CCU and entering a u where the TCUs
were taken out of the cell.
The Minicell upgrade requires changes to the Minicell translations as
shown in the diagram:
From the apxrcv, update the ceqcom2 form by

changing the Type field from 2 to 10, one face at a time.
Verify and update (if required) the ceqccu form, to reflect the
correct number of ECUs/ TCUs, updating one upgraded CCC
at a time.
AUTOPLEX
Cellular SERIES 2 CELL EQUIPAGE COMMON (ceqcom2) Screen 12 of 17
System
Cell 90
146) CDMA Cluster Controller (CCC) List:
Status Type
Status Type
CCC 147) 148) CCC 149)
150)
[1]
1
u
2
2
e
10
WARNING: CHANGING CCC TYPE
[2]
3
u
2
4
e
10
WITHOUT
FOLLOWING THE PROPER
[3]
5
u
2
PROCEDURES WILL
CORRUPT
THE
6
e
10
[4]
7
u
2
8
u
2
CELL OPERATION.
REFER TO THE
[5]
9
u
2
10
u
2
DATA BASE UPDATE (401-610-036)
[6]
11
u
2
12
u
2
FOR MORE DETAILS.
[7]
13
u
2
14
u
2
[8]
15
u
2
16
u
2
[9]
17
u
2
18
u
2
[10]
19
u
2
20
u
2
[11]
21
u
2
22
u
2
[12]
23
u
2
24
u
2
Fields 149 and 150 are site specific.
Populate
[13]
25
u
2
26
u
2
CCCs 8, 10 and 12 for a growth frame.
[14]
27
u
2
28
u
2
[15]
29
u
2
30
u
2
AUTOPLEX
Cellular SERIES 2 CELL CDMA CCU EQUIPAGE (ceqccu) Screen 1 of 2
System
Cell Site Number *1) 90
2) CDMA Channel Unit Equipment Status List:
CCC CCU 1 CCU 2 CCU 3 CCU 4 CCU 5 CCU 6 CCU 7
ID# 4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
[1]
1
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
2
e
e
e
u
[2]
[3]
3
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
4
e
e
u
u
[4]
[5]
5
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
6
e
u
u
u
[6]
[7]
7
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
[8]
8
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
[9]
9
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
[10] 10
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
[11] 11
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
[12] 12
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
Equipage for CCC ID# 2,
4, 6,
[13] 13
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
8, 10 and 12 are site
specific.
[14] 14
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
[15] 15
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
CL3805 - L9V7.0
tT h
l i
i t
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

9 - 15
NVMing the CCC
NVMing the CCC
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This page describes the procedure to download the correct software

version to the NVM (Non-Volatile Memory).
Procedure 9-3. To NVM the CCC
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To NVM CCCs, invoke a download command. This may require a

prior initialization for new CCCs.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
NVM the CCC for the ECUs, with all CEs removed.
dnld:cell #,ccc x<cr>
...........................................................................................................................................................................
From the craftshell, verify correct NVM.

op:cell #,ccc x;ucl:version<cr>
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Verify the following output message response is seen on the terminal for
a CCC NVMed for ECUs:
CCC NVM
052397-10
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Result
The date reported back (052397) may change on later releases of the
cell generic, but the -10 extension must be there for an ECU. For a
TCU, the extension will be -02.
Procedure 9-4. Restoring the Cell to Service
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Remove and restore the CCC NVMed to diagnose it with the following
commands:
rmv:cell #,ccc x;ucl<cr>
rst:cell #,ccc x <cr>
where x is the CCC number updated (2, 4, 6, 8, 10, or 12).

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 16

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
NVMing the CCC
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Insert the new ECUs then restore and test the cell with:
rst:cell #,ccc x,ccu y<cr>
where x is the CCC number updated (2, 4, 6, 8, 10, or 12) and y is the
ECU (1 - 4).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Execute the CRTU traffic path functional test and ensure each CE test
passes for each physical antenna face (traffic path) in the subcell with
exc:cell #,ft tp<cr>
Result: For several equipped traffic CEs, traffic path functional
tests could take several minutes to complete and give a response

back as an output message on the terminal screen. Monitor the
MCRT 2139 page during the traffic path test. The overhead
channels and any traffic channel elements that are busy will not be
tested during this functional test.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Allow routine diagnostics with the following command:

alw:cell #,rtdiag<cr>
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Allow CRTU functional tests with the following commands:

alw:cell #,ft tp<cr>
alw:cell #,ft oc<cr>
alw:cell #,ft pl<cr>
alw:cell #,ft ant<cr>
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Result
The cell equipped with ECUs is operational.
Verifying the NVM

Install ECUs
Verifying download is done by invoking an op:cell command.

Install ECUs to the appropriate slots. Perform functional tests. Restore
cell to normal operation.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

9 - 17
NVMing the CCC
As of APXD 12.00, a new script was written for individual CCCs. It

compressed both loads and now takes less than half the time, making
the wait time only ten minutes per card.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 18

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
NVMing the CCC
Example of Upgrade: CTU To

HPCTU
Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
In contrast with the TCU to ECU upgrades, the upgrade from a CDMA
Transmit Unit (CTU) to a High Power CDMA Transmit Unit (HPCTU)
is characteristic of upgrades that can be performed entirely from the
Minicell site.
However, while ECU upgrades could benefit from channel pooling,
this is not the case for the CTUs. In fact, all CTUs within the same
cabinet (i.e., same carrier) must be upgraded at the same time.
Therefore, a CTU upgrade will require that the Minicell be put out-ofservice during the upgrade.
Another difference in the type of upgrade is that TCU and ECU are
plug compatible, making their replacement an easy mechanical task. In
contrast, the HPCTU is thicker than the standard CTU, requiring
significant physical intervention within the affected Minicell cabinet.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

9 - 19
Preliminary Procedures
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Taking the Minicell Out-ofService
Before you begin
This procedure prepares the Minicell to upgrade from a CTU to an

HPCTU.
Because the CTU is on the signal path, the Minicell must be taken
out-of-service before proceeding. This is done by removing the data
links. To avoid unnecessary alarms at the PCSC, call processing and
alarm reporting should also be inhibited.
Because the CTUs need to be tuned to the Minicell operating channels,
it is necessary that the cell operating parameters (e.g., channel
numbers, PN offsets) be known before hand. Without that information,
it will be impossible to reconfigure the Minicell with the new HPCTU.
Procedure 9-5. Removing a Cell from Service
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The procedure lists the actions at a high level.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Record the cell operating parameters (e.g., channel numbers, PN offsets,

etc.)
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Inhibit call processing and alarm reporting.

Because the CTU is on the signal path, the Minicell must be taken
out-of-service before proceeding. This is done by removing the Data
Links. To avoid unnecessary alarms at the PCSC, call processing and
alarm reporting should also be inhibited.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Take the Minicell out-of-service by removing the datalinks.

END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
The Minicell is off-line.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 20

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Changing Translations
Translation changes will relate to the change in the transmit power that
is required by the HPCTU.
Leaving a CTU power setting for an HPCTU will result in an increase
in power drain on the Minicell.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

9 - 21
Installing the HPCTU
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
Before you begin
Once translations have been changed, the installation of an HPCTU is

essentially an electrical/mechanical operation.
This procedure is used to upgrade the Minicell from a CTU to an
HPCTU.
Cooling for HPCTUs is provided by fans in the back of the radio
cabinet. In Minicell version 2, a separate heat exchanger needs to be
mounted on the radio cabinet back panel. That heat exchanger is not
required in the Version 4 Minicell.
The Primary cabinet is pre-wired for HPCTU upgrades. However, it
will be necessary to verify that there is power. This verification will not
be necessary for the Growth cabinets, as the HPCTU will use the same
power source as the one feeding the existing CTUs.
Each piece of hardware comes with its own installation instructions.
Follow them for the Heat Exchanger and the HPCTUs.
Powering-down
The sequence of tasks to perform is:

............................................................................................................................................................................
DANGER
There is a serious risk of burns and other damages.
The BCRs must be turned off before attempting to install the
HPCTU.
1
Power down the BCRs before begining the physical installation of the
HPCTUs.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
For installation in the Primary Cabinet, verify that there is power for the
Rear Door Heat Exchanger (cable P2 in the back should yield between
25 VDC and 28 VDC). If there is no power, the installation cannot
proceed.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 22

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Turn off all the remaining circuit breakers except for CB4 and CB 14,
which are the breakers feeding the RFTGs.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
The cabinet is powered down and ready for the upgrade.

Procedure 9-6. Installing the HPCTU
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Physical Strain
The heat exchangers are heavy units.
Secure assistance before attempting physical installation.
A CTU shelf can accommodate up to 3 HPCTUs. However, the
HPCTUs are wider than the CTUs. Each piece of hardware comes with
its own installation instructions. Follow them for detailed instructions
to install HPCTUs in a radio cabinet. It will be necessary to do the
following:
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the cooling fan (if applicable) and the CTU card cage.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Use the HPCTU mounting bracket to install the unit directly in the
cabinet, using prescribed tools and torque to avoid warping the HPCTU
circuit pack.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
The HPCTU is installed in the cabinet.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

9 - 23
Procedure 9-7. Powering the Minicell Back
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Power the Minicell back up by turning all the circuit breakers to ON,
except for CB8 (CSU) to prevent communication with the PCSC. The
fans should be running.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
The primary Minicell is ready for tests.
Rear Door Fan
The Rear Door Exchanger fan may not start immediately as it is

controlled by a thermostat.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 24

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Testing the Minicell
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Functional tests are run to ensure that the HPCTUs are functioning.
Procedure 9-8. Rho tests and Resetting the Minicell
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Conduct CDMA Functional Tests

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Set RF Power to 40.79+/-0.05dB.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Run Rho tests. See Chapter 7 for more information.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Turn the CB8 ON to activate the CSU.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Reset the ACB and verify that there are no alarms.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Check with the Switch that the Minicell can be restored to service, and,
if so, invoke the restore command. The Minicell should boot.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
The Minicell is ready to transmit.
Power setting
The RF power is set for CTU with Pilot Channel.

The 40.79 db corresponds to a 12 W output.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

9 - 25
Range Extension Offer

Section Overview
Purpose
This section covers the description and maintenance of the Range

Extension Option. This feature includes several new components to
enable a low noise amplifier at the antenna head to improve the radio
reception and the HPCTU to improve transmission.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 26

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Range Extension Offer (REO) Overview
Range Extension Offer (REO) Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The REO System is an optional feature that improves the Minicell

noise figure, improves performance in noise-limited environments, and
increases the radius and coverage area of the cell.
Power Distribution Unit

(PDU)
The Power Distribution Unit receives 24 VDC from the Power Cabinet
(or non- Lucent power) and distributes 12-15 VDC to the Masthead
Amplifier Units (2 per sector) via the individual antenna coaxial cables.
It also provides individual PDU and MAU alarm signals to the Primary
Cabinet.
Masthead Amplifier Unit

(MAU)
Required Primary Cabinet
Configuration

External Parts
The MAUs (2 per sector) are powered by 12-15 VDC from the PDU.
They amplify the receive antenna signals to the Primary Cabinet.
The required Primary Cabinet configuration for the REO, must include
the following items, which are shipped (if not factory installed) with
installation instructions included in the kits:
High Power CTU(s)
Rear Mounted Heat Exchanger
The required external REO installation parts are supplied in four

separate kits:
Installation Kit (1 per site)
Power Distribution Unit Kit (1 per site)
Bias T Kit (2 per Sector, up to 3 sectors)
Masthead Amplifier Unit (2 per Sector, up to 3 sectors)
Refer to the parts list, included in each kit, for individual parts.
Internal Parts
The required internal REO installation parts are shipped with

installation instructions included in the kits. These parts are:
MAU MAS-RUs (Masthead Amplifier System - Receive Units, 2

per sector)
The existing Filter Assemblies must be replaced with new ones (having
the new Receive Units) but not until certain FOA tests have been
performed. Refer to the current FOA Test Plan for this product.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

9 - 27
Description
Description
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Diagram
Components of the Range

Extension Offer System
Each receive (RX) diversity path has its own REO System (i.e. each
face has two REO Systems) which consists of seven principle
components.
The diagram below shows the REO System components.
The table below lists the seven components of the tower top low noise
amplifier.
Item
Description
Remarks
Masthead Amplifier Unit (MAU) Mounted on the antenna tower near the RX Antenna
- Lucent
element
MAU Mounting Bracket - Lucent Attaches the MAU to the antenna tower structure
PDU - Lucent
Located at the rear of the Minicell radio cabinet
PDU Alarm Cable - Lucent
Connects the alarm control shelf and the RCC
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 28

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Description
Item
Description
Remarks
Antenna Jumper Cable Customer
Coaxial Radio Frequency (RF) jumper between the RX

Antenna element and the MAU connector
Tower Jumper Cable - Customer Coaxial RF jumper between the MAU connector and the
Tower Cable that runs down to the Minicell
MAU Grounding Wire Customer
A # 6 solid copper ground strap connects the MAU

grounding stud to the antenna grounding point
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

9 - 29
Required Material and Information
Required Material and Information
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Various documents and equipment are needed to perform the

installation and testing of the TTLNA (which includes the MAU).
Required Equipment
Equipment required for High Power CTU Upgrade along with the
RHO, FER, and Transmit Power Level Adjustment Procedures are
required for the TTLNA installation test.
An ITE 5632 / 6379 / 6928 multimeter is recommended for TTLNA
installation testing.
Required Information
Obtain cell site specific information. This information should include

radio carrier channel assignments, PN Offsets, and two user alarm
assignments required for the TTLNA installation. These External User
Alarms will require text message definitions in the /lapx10/alarms/cell/
alarms file on the ECP (refer to User Definable Alarms Feature 401612-057).
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 30

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Remove Cell From Service
These activities prepare the Minicell for the TTLNA upgrade.

Call the switching center (PCSC) to have the cell removed from
service. Generally this means disabling call processing, disabling alarm
reporting, and disabling the data links.
Ask the cell tech or engineer to make the cell site translation changes
required for the HPCTU upgrade.
To prevent the CDMA equipment in the Radio Cabinet(s) from

transmitting upon power-up, ensure all BCR faceplate AUTO/OFF
switches are set to OFF.
Injury from wind gusts.

When opening a cabinet, set the locking bar in place. Place the
locking bar, located at the bottom of the front door, into its slot
in the bottom, front of the cabinet.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

9 - 31
TTLNA Physical Installation
TTLNA Physical Installation
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
TTLNA Installation
High Power CTU Upgrade
This procedure is to install the TTLNA and reset the ACB.

Install the TTLNA option according to the installation instructions
included with the installation kit. Complete all of the installation
instructions.
Note: skip this section if the High Power CTU option is already
installed.
Perform the High Power CTU Upgrade.
Procedure 9-9. Reset the ACB
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
On the CTU shelf of the cabinet that was upgraded, locate the Alarm
Control Board (ACB, the packs code is either BLB1 or BLB2).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Using a pen, press the reset (RST) switch on the ACB. This will reset
the LAC alarms reported by the ACB to the RCC.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
After a couple of seconds, all the ACB LEDs should illuminate then
extinguish, except for the Active (ACT) LED.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 32

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Transmit Power Calibration Procedure
Transmit Power Calibration Procedure
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
The following procedure calibrates the TTLNA/HPCTU equipped

Minicell for operation at 16 watts.
Procedure 9-10.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The HPCTU power level must be set to 16 watts to ensure
link balance.
If the customer desires a power level other than 16 watts, contact
the Columbus CTSO Methods and procedures group at 1-800356-8574 or, for international locations, (614) 860-3760.
Damage the lightning protectors
Use of excessive force can damage the lightening
protectors..
Take care not to place any additional stress on the DC Bias Ts.
when attaching / removing the 30dB Attenuator.
.......................................................................................................................................
The power calibration will be performed at the output of the DC Bias T.

Set the HPCTU power level to 16 watts using the procedure for 16 watts,
on page 8-50 for each sector/carrier
upgraded to a HPCTU.
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Result
The power is calibrated.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

9 - 33
Rho and FER Testing the TTLNA
Rho and FER Testing the TTLNA
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Each sector/carrier must be tested to insure cell operation.
Procedure 9-11. Rho and FER Testing
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Run the RHO Test for each sector / carrier that was upgraded to an
HPCTU. Verify the RHO measurement is 0.95 or greater for each
transmit path upgraded to HPCTU.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Perform the FER test on each sector / carrier and diversity that was
changed for the TTLNA.
FER must be 0% and the path loss must be less than 56.0 dB for a
Primary Cabinet or less than 62.0 dB for a Growth Cabinet for each CE
under test.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the path loss exceeds the allowed value, recheck the test cable
connections and repeat the test.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Only test a single channel element for each antenna sector and each
diversity.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 34

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Minicell Cleanup and Reboot
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Once the installation is complete the Minicell must be cleaned up and

Procedure 9-12. Minicell Cleanup
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Verify all test equipment is removed from the Minicell, and any
equipment removed for testing is replaced.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Verify all circuit packs are properly seated.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Verify all CBs are ON in the cabinet being modified.

END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 9-13. Reboot the Cell
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Call the switching center and see if the cell tech or engineer is ready to
boot the cell site to the switch. Do not proceed until ready.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Prior to performing integration with antenna connected, confirm that the

RF spectrum is cleared.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Ask the cell tech to restore the datalinks and alarm reporting. Once the
facilities connections are restored at the PCSC, the Minicell should boot
automatically.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
When the cell tech or engineer reports the site has started to boot, watch
the primary cabinet for indications that it is booting. After about 20
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

9 - 35
minutes the cell should be booted. Contact the switch and verify the
Minicell has completed the boot.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 36

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
TTLNA Alarm and Call Processing Tests
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
PDU Diagram
Alarm testing assures that all alarms are connected and working
properly.
The TTLNA PDU control panel is shown below:
POWER ALARM STATUS
ON
MAIN
DC/DC
ON
0.5
TTA
OFF
STATUS
OFF
OFF
POWER ALARM
ON
0.5
TTA
0.5
OFF
ON
STATUS
ON
0.5
TTA
OFF
OFF
STATUS
ON
TTA
OFF
POWER ALARM
ON
POWER ALARM
ON
OFF
ON
POWER ALARM
OFF
2.0
ON
POWER ALARM
ON
0.5
TTA
OFF
Before you begin
STATUS
ON
OFF
STATUS
ON
0.5
TTA
OFF
OFF
Before beginning the TTLNA alarm testing procedures, verify that all
appropriate circuit breakers are on and the BCRs (AUTO/OFF)
switches are in the OFF position.
Procedure 9-14. Alarm Testing
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Damage to the PDU

There is a potential for damage and/or blowing fuses to the
Power distribution unit (PDU)
Turn off the power to the appropriate MAU prior to connecting
or disconnecting any RF cables.
Alarm testing will be performed at the PDU Panel and via the switch.
The procedure will be to perform an action (e.g., turn off a switch), and
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

9 - 37
verify the result (i.e., check alarm LED or user alarm going active at the
switch).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Verify that all of the External Alarm Switches on the Standard User
Alarm Cross Connect Panel are in the appropriate position: closed on
alarm.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Ensure the Main power switch for the PDU is ON, (the green MAIN
LED should be on). The power switches on the PDU for all the MAUs
(TTA1 - 6) are in the OFF position and all the alarm switches are in the
OFF position.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Disconnect the antenna jumper from the ANT connector of the bias tee
on the alpha face diversity 1 connector. Turn the power and alarm switch
for MAU1 to the ON position.
Result: The Red LED for MAU1 should be lit, indicating an
under-current condition.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Turn the power switch for MAU1 to the OFF position and connect a 30
dB 25W attenuator to the antenna end of the bias tee. Turn the power
switch for MAU 1 to the ON position.
Result: The Red LED for MAU1 should remain lit, indicating an
over-current condition.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Turn the power switch for MAU1 to the OFF position and connect the
antenna jumper to the antenna connector of the bias tee on the alpha face
diversity 1. Turn the power switch for MAU1 to the ON position.
Result: The green LED for MAU1 should be lit, indicating normal
operating condition.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Repeat this sequence for each MAU verifying the PDU alarm LEDs.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 38

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
...........................................................................................................................................................................
After verifying all the MAU alarms, ensure all the foam jumpers are
securely attached to the antenna port of the Bias Ts and all the power and
alarm switches for the MAUs are in the ON position. All the green LEDs
for the MAUs should be illuminated, indicating normal operating
condition.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Call the switch and ask the technician to enter the following command
at the craftshell or UNIX [Tipdunix login] terminal. This will show the
alarms to the terminal as they change state:
alw:cell a,scsm <cr>
Where a = Minicell #.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
To override the Intrusion alarms (door open, User Alarm 10), gently pull
the front door alarm switch until it comes to a full stop. Do the same for
all open doors. Request the switch to verify which alarms are active.
If the ...
Then...
Cell under test shall indicates any

Alarms.
Identify and correct the source of

the alarm.
Radio Cabinet door is left open on a

cold day (outside temperature below
freezing), and the User Alarm 11,
High/Low Temp, is reported.
Ignore this alarm.
Scan reported does not match the table. Verify the Offset/Bit. If the
Offset/Bit matches, the alarm
test passes. Alarm scan reported
may change with different
generic loads.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
Disable both power supplies by turning off the main power switch on the
PDU.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
11
Verify from the ECP that both the PDU and MAU alarms are Active.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

9 - 39
...........................................................................................................................................................................
12
Enable both power supplies by turning ON the main power switch.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
13
Verify from the ECP that both the PDU and MAU alarms are Normal.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
14
Turn any one of the MAU power switches to the OFF position. The red
LED should illuminate for that MAU indicating an alarm.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
15
Verify from the ECP that only the PDU alarm is Active.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
16
Return the MAU power switch to the ON position. The green LED
should illuminate indicating Normal operation.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
17
Verify from the ECP that the PDU alarm is Normal.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
18
After the alarm tests are complete, ask the technician at the switch to
enter the following command at a craftshell or UNIX [Tipdunix login]
terminal. This will inhibit the command allowed earlier.
inh:cell a,scsm <cr>
Where a = Minicell #.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
19
If the Minicell is in service, perform the Call Processing Tests on each

antenna face upgraded with the TTLNA option.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
Installation testing of the TTLNA option is complete.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 40

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Close Up the Minicell
Close Up the Minicell
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Complete this procedure to close the cabinet and secure it against the
outside weather conditions.
Procedure 9-15. Secure Minicell
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................
Verify no manuals or paperwork are blocking the cooling duct above the
circuit breakers in the radio cabinet.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Secure the doors to all cabinets in the Minicell. Check that all side and
rear panel locking bolts are tight.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Verify all CBs are ON in the cabinet being modified. Turn on the Main
power switch in the PDU and all equipped MAU power and alarm
switches.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Verify all cell cabling is properly reconnected, particularly the antenna

cables, and that the connectors are properly torqued (Torque Wrenches
(p/o ITE-6267) SMA type: R-4399, N type: R-5851).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Put the Antenna Cable Cover in place and secure it, if equipped.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
The Minicell is ready for operation.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

9 - 41
MAU Description
MAU Description
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Masthead Amplifier Unit

(MAU)
MAU Diagram
Power
The MAU is mounted on the antenna tower near the receive antenna
and is a rectangular enclosure which houses all of the following:
Low noise amplifier (LNA)
Band specific bandpass filter
Lightning protectors
The diagram below shows the coax connectors and the ground
connections on the side of the unit.
The MAU operates on D.C. power (+12 VDC) supplied by the PDU via
the coaxial cable.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 42

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
PDU Description
PDU Description
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
The PDU (Power Distribution Unit) provides power to the MAU.
Prepare Antenna Cable

Cover
The diagram below shows the housing, openings, and location of the
PDU.
COVER
LOCKW ASHER
DRILLED SPANNER
SCREW
PO
WE
RC
AB
IN E
GASKET
INSULATING
BUSHING
4 PLACE S
CHASE NIPPLES
(INSIDE OF
POW ER CABINET)
SEALING RING
(OUTSID E OF
POW ER CABINET)
LOCKNUTS
G1/G2
MI
PULL BOX
GASKET
P
N IC C S
EL CDM
LC A
AB
IN E
COVER
LOCK WASHE R
DRILLED SPANNER
SCREW
G-2
PLUG
ANTENNA CABLE
COVER
Route DC Cable From

Power Cabinet To PDU
The diagram below shows the DC cable routing from primary cabinet
to PDU
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

9 - 43
PDU Description
/LTXLG 7LJKW )HHG

7KURXJK RI
3RZHU &DELQHW
3XOO %R[
&RQGXLW WR
3ULPDU\ &DELQHW
RI
3ULPDU\ &DELQHW
$QWHQQD &DEOH
&RYHU %R[
7HUPLQDO %ORFN
+RXVLQJ
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 44

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Cable Routing
Cable Routing
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cable Routing Through

PDU Wall
The diagram below shows the routing cable through clamp and
removal/installation of tape gasket.
CABLE CLAMP
TAPE GASKET
CABLES
(TOP VIEW)
SECURE SCREWS AFTER TAPING
NOTE: SEAL ANY GAPS WITH
RTV.
TAPE GASKET
(PUSH INTO CLAMP
AND SEAL)
CABLE CLAMP
(SIDE VIEW)
CABINET FLOOR SHELF

CABLE BUNDLE
Circuit Breaker
The diagram below shows the DC circuit breaker distribution panel

PDU
Primary
Radio Cab.
Growth
Cab. # 1
Growth
Cab. # 2
1-5
6 - 10
11 - 15
2 3 4 5
6 7
8 9 10 11
Power Cab.
Fan Unit
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

9 - 45
PDU Alarm Cable Routing Into Primary Cabinet
PDU Alarm Cable Routing Into Primary Cabinet
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Route Alarm Cable To The

Primary Cabinet PunchDown Block
The diagram below shows the primary cabinet alarm cable entry at
antenna interface plate.
Ante nna C onnec tions
GN D
6
L1
L2
5
240 AC
3
DC FE E D
1
PW R
CAB
AL A R M S
Se e Note
T 1/ E1
P owe r C a bine t Alar m s Ac cess

T1/E1 Twisted P air F ac ilitie s Ac ce ss
E XT ERN AL USER A LA RM A CCES S

Lightning Protection Block
E XT
USE R
AL A R M S
6 Gro un d
Co nn ect ion s
The diagram below shows the location of the lightning protection block
in the primary cabinet.
TO A IM
GROWTH #2
W H EN R E Q D
P R IM A RY
GROWTH #1
W H EN R E Q D
T1 C A BLE O R
IN C O M IN G A L AR M C A BL E
FR O M P O W ER C AB IN E T
P O W E R C A B IN E T A L AR M S
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 46

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Alarm Cable Connections Inside the Primary

Cabinet
Alarm Cable Connections Inside the Primary Cabinet
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
User Alarm Connections
The table below shows the cable connections for the alarms in the
primary cabinet.
Alarm Functions *
Close/Open on Alarm
or Switchable
110 ANA Block Lightning

Protection Pair (OPS Side)
External User Alarm

0
External User Alarm
1
External User Alarm
2
External User Alarm
3
External User Alarm
4
External User Alarm
5
External User Alarm
6
External User Alarm
7
Switchable
16
Switchable
17
Switchable
18
Switchable
19
Switchable
20
Switchable
21
Switchable
22
Close on Alarm
Generator Fail
Connect Alarms to PunchDown Block
The diagram below shows the lightning protection punch-down block

(external user alarm application.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

9 - 47
Alarm Cable Connections Inside the Primary

Cabinet
GND
LIGHTNING
PROTECTION
BLOCK
01
06
11
ALARM
PROTECTION
16
21
1
2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
6 7 8 9 10 6 7 8 9 10
OSP
CPE
11 12 13 14 15 11 1213 1415
OSP SIDE
EXTERNAL
USER ALARM
CONNECTIONS
16 17 18 19 20 16 1718 19 20
OSP
CPE
21 22 23 24 25 21 2223 2425
NOTE: ALL PUNCH DOWN

CONTACTS WILL ACCEPT 22 OR
24 AWG SOLID INSULATED WIRES.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 48

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Bias T Description
Bias T Description
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Disconnect Applicable
Antenna Jumper Cables
The diagram below shows the weatherproofing connectors their

removal.
C O N N EC TO R
W E AT H E R P R O O F IN G K IT
1 /2 R F A N T E N N A
JU MP E R C A BLE S
C O M PA C T A N T E N N A
C ABLE C OV E R
C O N N EC TO R
W E AT H E R P R O O F IN G K IT
G PS AN TEN N A C A B LE
A NTE N N A C AB LES
Important! Do not bend the Antenna Jumper Cables more than

the specified bend radius.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

9 - 49
Identifying Faults in the MAU
Identifying Faults in the MAU
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Failure Monitoring
Circuitry within the MAU monitors for active RF device failure. If a

failure occurs, the bias current increases beyond a predefined limit and
will be detected by the PDU as an MAU failure, causing an alarm state.
Also, if the MAU does not draw any current, this will be detected by
the PDU and reported as an MAU failure.
MAU Maintenance
The MAU is a sealed unit with no internal user serviceable

components. When an MAU fails, LEDs will be lighted on the front
panels of the PDU. If an MAU alarm is reported, then the unit must be
replaced. MAU alarms are also reported to the cell controller via the
user defined alarm.
Lightning Damage
The MAU has lightning arrestors but these are not field serviceable. If
the MAU has been subjected to multiple lightning strikes, then its
protection may be compromised and the unit must be replaced.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 50

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Component Replacement and Repair

Preparations
Component Replacement and Repair Preparations
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MAU/PDU Handling and

Storage
Routine Cable/Connector
Weatherproof Check
The MAU or PDU is shipped from the factory in protective packaging.

Lucent Technologies recommends that none of the protective
packaging be removed until the unit is at the job site. The MAU or
PDU package should be stored in a clean dry area until deployed.
All weatherproof seals at connector/cable interfaces should be
inspected during each tower top visit. If the seal is not weatherproof
then it must be resealed according to local practice.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

9 - 51
Cable/MAU Connector Re-sealing
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Please note that the procedure described below is used for both the
Antenna Jumper/MAU connector as well as the Tower Jumper/MAU
connector junctions.
Procedure 9-16.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Weather Damage
It is critical that both junctions remain waterproof ot avoid
damage to the connectors.
Check the seals and re-seal as needed.
To re-seal the cable/MAU connector weather seals:
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove any previous weather sealing materials.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Disconnect the jumper cable.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Slip Andrew 3M Cold Shrink Weatherproofing Kit (# 241475-9)

over cable end.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Place the Cold Shrink spacer approximately 4-6 inches from the DIN
connector.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Reconnect the jumper cable to the MAU connector.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Push the Cold Shrink wrap flush against the MAU connector faceplate.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Activate the Cold Shrink by pulling out the nylon coil.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 52

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Apply silicone sealer at the Cold Shrink and MAU faceplate junction.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
The MAU and associated cables are weather tight.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

9 - 53
Preparing an MAU for Mounting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Prepare a replacement MAU for mounting, according to the procedure

outlined below.
Diagram
The MAU mounting is designed to accept different styles of brackets.

Amplifier Leg
Hex Head Machine Screw
Flat Washers
Hex Jam
Lock Nut
MAU Mounting
Bracket Plate
Flange Nut
Procedure 9-17. Preparing an MAU for Mounting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Preparing an MAU for Mounting Procedure

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Assemble the hex machine screws, flat washers, and jam nuts finger
tight on the 4 MAU mounting legs.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Place the MAU Mounting Bracket Plate on the hex head machine
screws.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Align the screws with the holes in the plate and tighten the jam lock nuts.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the MAU Mounting Bracket and set it aside as a spare. You will
not use this new bracket unless the existing bracket at the tower top is
damaged.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 54

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Thread the flange nuts on the machine screw even with the ends of the
machine screws.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
The MAU brackets are in place and ready for mounting on the tower.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

9 - 55
Replacing a Failed MAU
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
MAU Replacement
Hardware
Replace a failed MAU by following the procedure outlined in the table

below and as described in the figure below.
Before ascending the antenna tower it is essential that the hardware
described in the table below has been assembled for transport.
Quantity
Description
Supplied By:
MAU Mounting Bracket with Hardware
Lucent
MAU (tested and prepared as above)
Lucent
Andrew 3M Cold Shrink Weatherproofing Customer

Kits (#241475-9) for Coaxial cable
(recommended)
Lot
Silicone sealer
Customer
RX Antenna Jumper Cable spare
Customer
Tower Jumper Cable spare
Customer
Lot
UV-resistant tie wraps
Customer
MAU Jumper Cable

Diagram
The loop in the Tower Jumper Cable provides critically important

strain relief for the MAU connector. When forming the Tower Jumper
Cable loop, do not exceed the recommended minimum bend radius for
the type of cable you are using. The recommended minimum bend radii
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 56

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
for two commonly used RF cables are: 1 1/4 for 1/2 Superflex Foam
Jumper, FSJ; 5 for 1/2 Foam Jumper, LDF.
RX
Antenna
MAU
Antenna
Jumper
Tower
Jumper
Loop
J1
J2
Tower
Cable
MAU Mounting Position
Since cable loss between the receive antenna and the MAU directly
impacts the system noise figure, the MAU must be mounted within 10
of its receive antenna.
Procedure 9-18. Replacing a Failed MAU
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Damage to the MAU, Personal Injury

This procedure assumes that you have turned OFF power to
the appropriate PDU.
Switch off Circuit Breaker depending on the RX diversity
involved.
The following procedure outlines replacing a failed MAU.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Switch OFF circuit breaker #5 or #6 depending on the RX diversity

involved. Both the RFG and the PDU are supplied by this circuit
breaker.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

9 - 57
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the old weatherproofing from the two MAU connectors.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Disconnect both the RX Antenna Jumper and Tower Jumper Cables

from the failed MAU.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Disconnect the ground wire from the failed MAU grounding stud.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the failed MAU from its mounting bracket.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Mount the replacement MAU to the existing mounting bracket.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Reconnect the ground wire to the grounding stud of the replacement

MAU.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Reconnect and weatherproof (see Table 5-2) the RX Antenna Jumper

cable to the RF IN connector on the replacement MAU.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Reconnect and weatherproof the Tower Jumper cable to the RF OUT

connector on the replacement MAU.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
Resecure all cables to the tower top using UV-resistant tie wraps.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
11
Switch ON the same Circuit Breaker as above.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
12
Check for a green MAU LED on the PDU faceplate.

END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
A green MAU LED indicates a successful replacement.

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 58

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Lucent Responsibility
Proper MAU operation is not guaranteed by Lucent Technologies

unless the MAU is mounted vertically with the connector end down.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

9 - 59
Replacing a Failed PDU
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
Replace a failed PDU by following the procedure outlined below.
Procedure 9-19. Replacing a Failed PDU
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Damage to the PDU and Personal Injury

This procedure assumes that you have turned OFF power to
the appropriate PDU.
Switching off circuit breaker.
Replacing a Failed PDU Procedure
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Turn OFF power to the appropriate diversity PDU by switching off the
circuit breaker.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the cable connections and terminations from the failed PDU
noting each cable connection designation (J1, J2, J3, etc.).
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Remove the failed PDU from the Primary Cabinet.

...........................................................................................................................................................................
Install the replacement PDU in place of the failed PDU. If necessary,

guide the housing tabs on the rear of the unit into the slots in the cabinet
rear bracket.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Reconnect all cables and terminations to their termination points as

noted in Step 1 above.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Turn ON power to the diversity PDU selected above.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 60

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Check the faceplate of the PDU for a green PDU LED indicating that the
new PDU is operational.
END OF STEPS
............................................................................................................................................................................
Result
A green PDU LED indicates the PDU is operational.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

9 - 61
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 - 62

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
10
Fault Isolation and

Troubleshooting Techniques
Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
This is the first issue of a document that is intended to provide some

general guidelines for maintenance procedures useful for fault isolation
and troubleshooting of PCS CDMA Minicells.
Purpose
The primary emphasis in this first document issue is placed on fault

isolation and troubleshooting procedures for PCS Minicells. However,
much of the material also is relevant for AUTOPLEX System 1000
Series II CDMA Cell Sites and for Cellular CDMA Minicells.
Additional material that is more explicitly focused on fault isolation
and troubleshooting procedures for AUTOPLEX System 1000 Series II
CDMA Cell Sites and Cellular CDMA Minicells is planned to be
included in future issues of this document.
Contents

Operational Fault Detection - - - - - - - - - - - - - Other System Performance Measurements - - - - - - - Service Measurements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Plant Measurements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Voice Channel Selection Activity Measurements - - - CDMA Frame Error Rate & Power-Level Measurements Troubleshooting with OFD-Access - - - - - - - - - - -
10-3
- 10-5
- 10-6
- 10-7
- 10-8
- 10-9
10-10
10-11
Other Cell Site Housekeeping Software

10-13
Functional Tests - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-14
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 1
Functional Testing Software Sub-Systems - - Diagnostic Tests - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Software Audits - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Software Asserts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Hardware Integrity Checks and Board Self-Tests
Hardware Alarm Scanning - - - - - - - - - - -
Use of CRTU Functional Tests for Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting with OCFT and TPFT - - - - - - - Demand-Mode Use of OCFT for Troubleshooting - Demand-Mode Use of TPFT for Troubleshooting - Troubleshooting with PLFT - - - - - - - - - - - - Examples of Troubleshooting with OCFT and TPFT
Example 1: Failed CTU in PCS CDMA Minicell - - Example 2: Failed ECU Board - - - - - - - - - - - Example 3: Failed CCC Board - - - - - - - - - - - Example 4: Failed ACU Board - - - - - - - - - - - Example 5: Failed BCR Board - - - - - - - - - - - Example 6: Failed BIU Board - - - - - - - - - - - -
10-15
10-17
10-18
10-21
10-22
10-24
10-26
10-27
10-29
10-33
10-35
10-38
10-39
10-45
10-47
10-50
10-52
10-53
Use of Cell Site Housekeeping Software for Troubleshoot10-54

Troubleshooting with Functional Tests - - - - - - - - - - 10-55
RC/V Problems - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-56
CRTU Problems - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-57
RSP Problems - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-59
Problems Due to No Traffic CE Available - - - - - - - - 10-60
List of CDMA Functional Test Faults & Likely Causes - - 10-61
Troubleshooting with Diagnostic Tests - - - - - - - - - - 10-66
Troubleshooting with Software Audits - - - - - - - - - - 10-71
Issue
Scope
It should be noted that this document is limited to descriptions of

maintenance procedures that are available with CDMA Release 6.0.
A wealth of information regarding maintenance, fault isolation and
troubleshooting procedures is already available in existing
documentation. For clarity and convenience, some of that material is
replicated here. In addition, extensive references are made to other
relevant material available in existing documentation. This document is
intended to supplement the existing maintenance-related
documentation by providing a single, compact framework for the
exposition of various tips, techniques, and procedures that are effective
in conducting fault isolation and troubleshooting analyses of CDMA
Cell Sites.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 2

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
A broad range of maintenance capabilities has been provided since the

initial Release 1.0 deployment of CDMA. Full Non-Volatile Memory
(NVM) downloading, alarm collection, Status Display Pages (SDPs),
and Service Measurements (SMs) capabilities were included in CDMA
Release 1.0. In CDMA Release 3.0, the CDMA Radio Test Unit
(CRTU) was introduced to provide the capability to perform end-to-end
testing of CDMA traffic paths. The CRTU is fully integrated into the
CDMA system, just as test radios were integrated into previous
AUTOPLEX System 1000 equipment using analog and TDMA
technologies.
CDMA Release 3
The CDMA Release 3.0 software enabled the CRTU to conduct

Functional Tests (FTs) of both Overhead Channels (OCs) and end-toend Traffic Paths (TPs). The Overhead Channel Functional Test
(OCFT) verifies the pilot, sync, access, and paging special-purpose
channels for each sector of the cell. The Traffic Path Functional Test
(TPFT) verifies the capability to conduct an end-to-end CDMA call.
The TPFT begins with the CRTU placing a call to a special Mobile
Station Test (MOST) directory number, and then completing the call by
using one of the traffic Channel Elements (CEs) available to the sector
under test. The call is then handed off from CE to CE in order to test
every traffic channel path (including growth carriers) available to the
physical antenna face. The CRTU then repeats the MOST call
origination and handoff process for every sector in the cell in order to
complete the TPFT.
CDMA Release 6
In CDMA Release 6.0, an additional type of Functional Test capability

was added to the CRTU, namely, a Pilot Level Functional Test (PLFT).
The PLFT verifies the suitability of the pilot signal strength of each
carrier on each sector of a CDMA cell.
CDMA Release 7
Future CDMA software releases (namely, CDMA Release 7.0 and

beyond) are planned to enhance farther the utility of the CRTU, to
allow additional testing and more refined troubleshooting capabilities.
These future CRTU test enhancements include: (1) Single Channel
Selective Functional Test; and, (2) CDMA Transmit Antenna Test.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 3
References
All of the CDMA Release 6.0 CRTU Functional Tests will be described
in more detail elsewhere in this document (Functional Tests: page
10-14, Troubleshooting with OCFT and TPFT: page 10-27, and
Troubleshooting with Functional Tests: page 10-55). Additional
information about CRTU Functional Tests may be found in the
AUTOPLEX Cellular Telecommunications Systems, System 1000,
Operations, Administration, and Maintenance Guide 401-610-160
Issue 8, January 1999.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 4

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Operational Fault Detection
Operational Fault Detection
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
OFD Release
Reference
Another addition to CDMA Release 6.0 is a feature called Operational

Fault Detection (OFD) for Access Channels (OFD-A). Designed to
complement the CRTU and CDMA functional testing, the OFD-A
feature consists of a set of specific statistical tests, run on measured
cell-site operational performance data, that can be used to identify
deviations from normal operating conditions. The OFD-A feature can
detect the absence of call traffic on a particular sector and carrier, based
on that sectors and carriers usage histories. In this way, OFD-A can
identify overhead channel failures on multiple-carrier sectors having
paging-access channel pairs. The output resulting from the OFD-A
analyses is summarized in the form of output messages which are
directed to the ECP ROP.
Additional OFD capabilities are planned to be added in future CDMA
software releases (namely, CDMA Release 7.0 and beyond). These
future OFD enhancements include:
1.
OFD for Multi-Sector Calls and Accesses (OFD-MS);
2.
OFD for Sector/Cell Capacity (OFD-CAP);
3.
OFD for Holding Time (OFD-HT); and OFD for Paging (OFD-P).
The OFD-A feature in CDMA Release 6.0 will be described in more

detail later in this document. Additional information regarding OFD-A
may be found on pages 32-93 through 32-97 of the AUTOPLEX
Cellular Telecommunications Systems, System 1000, Operations,
Administration, and Maintenance Guide 401-610-160 Issue 8, January
1999.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 5
Other System Performance Measurements
Other System Performance Measurements
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
RCC Measurements
Reference
In addition to OFD measurements, the ECP also collects other various

measured data from cell sites and stores them in files at the ECP. The
measurements, which include traffic data, subscriber (mobile) data,
cell-site equipment data, etc., contain information about system
performance that can be used to identify cell-site-related faults that
cannot be detected readily by the RCC. [Catastrophic and severe
failures will be detected by the RCC, but more subtle service-affecting
problems, such as call-processing coverage problems or partial
operational performance degradations experienced by hardware units,
may escape detection by the RCC.]
The following four types of specific measurements collected by the
RCC and reported to the ECP will be described briefly below:
1.
Service Measurements (SMs);
2.
Plant Measurements (PMs);
3.
Voice Channel Selection Activity (VCSA) Measurements; and,
4.
CDMA Frame Error Rate (FER) and Power-Level Measurements

(PLMs).
More detailed descriptions of these measurements may be found on

pages 26-39 and 26-40 of the AUTOPLEX Cellular
Telecommunications Systems, System 1000, Operations,
Administration, and Maintenance Guide 401-610-160 Issue 8, January
1999.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 6

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description

Scheduling Service
Measurements
Service measurements can be collected on a scheduled or manual basis.

On the scheduled basis, the RCC continually gathers service
measurements and reports the data hourly to the OMP. At the OMP, the
collected data is saved in a series of 24 data files, one file for every
hour of the day. The files are overwritten with new data beginning at
the start of a new day.
Important!Note that prior to ECP Release 8.0, the service
measurements were scheduled hourly by the ECP, stored
temporarily at the ECP, and then copied to the OMP. As of Release
8.0, the OMP took over all service-measurement responsibilities
from the ECP, thereby freeing up ECP resources. The OMP is now
the primary user interface for all service measurements.
Related Documents:
Service Measurements (401-610-135)

Special Studies Measurements (117-8A CIB).
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 7
Plant Measurements
Plant Measurements
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description

site equipment including failure occurrences, failure durations (out-ofservice time), audit failures, diagnostic failures, and initializations. The
removals.
Scheduling Plant
Measurements
Related Documents:
Although service measurements can be collected on a scheduled basis

or manual basis, scheduling of plant measurements is controlled
exclusively by the RCC. The RCC automatically reports the plant
measurement data to the ECP every day at 2:30 AM.
ECP Plant Measurements System 254-341-116
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 8

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description

of the involved mobile station, and other data. Off-line processing of
this data by the AutoPACE system provides information about voice
channel selection and handoffs during call processing.
Collecting VCSA

Related Documents:
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 9
CDMA Frame Error Rate & Power-Level

Measurements
CDMA Frame Error Rate & Power-Level Measurements
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Collecting Measurements
The CDMA Frame Error Rate (FER) and Power Level Measurements
(PLM) feature (CDMA FER/PLM) is currently under development and
committed for CDMA Release 8.0 availability. It will be similar to the
PLM capability that is already provided for analog systems. (The
analog PLM provides detailed information about the distribution of
power levels detected by setup, locate, and voice radios at a specified
cell site. The data are used by the AutoPACE system to investigate
plan growth.)
The CDMA FER/PLM feature will be built upon the Autoplex 1000
system capability to collect useful statistical data on systems. The
collected data will include the following:
1.
Reverse Link Frame Error Rate on every Traffic Channel
2.
Forward Link Frame Error Rate on every Traffic Channel
3.
Total output power on Forward Link
4.
Noise Rises
5.
Pilot strength of the primary cell before and after handoff
6.
Signal-to-Noise ratio (Eb/No) set point before and after handoff
7.
Pilot strength of the primary cell just prior to when the call is lost
8.
Signal-to-Noise ratio (Eb/No) set point just prior to when the call
is lost
9.
Soft handoff period
Based on the data, service providers will then be able to fine tune the
power control parameters and handoff parameters for the CDMA
operation.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 10

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting with OFD-Access
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
The Operational Fault Detection - Access (OFD - A) feature can detect

two types of access-channel faults, hard faults and soft faults.
Hard faults
OFD -A declares a hard fault when there are no accesses on one carrier
and there are enough total access counts for the sector to make it highly
probable that the no-access carrier is faulty.
Soft faults
OFD -A declares a soft fault when there are some accesses on a carrier
but there are so many more accesses on the other carriers that it is
highly probable that the some-access carrier is faulty.
OFD Sample
OFD -A reports the worst access-channel fault for a sector and shows
the access-channel counts for all carriers having access channels on the
sector. An example OFD -A Output Message sent to the ROP file is
shown below.
Sample Output
REPT:CELL 132 CDMA ACCESS CHANNEL STATUS

SECTOR 1 CHANNEL FAULT - INITIAL
ACCESSES ON CARRIER 1 CCC 2, CCU 2, CE 0 COUNT=0 FAULT
ACCESSES ON CARRIER 2 CCC 4, CCU 3, CE 0 COUNT = 104
FAULT START TIME: 10:57:01
11/12/97 14:57:26 #270516
OFD Output Fields
OFD Sample
The OFD output report includes the following information:
Cell number (1-222)
Sector (0-6) where the fault occurred
Sector fault state (initial, continuing, or cleared)
Access channel counts for the faulty and good carriers on the
sector; identifies the P/S/A CE for each carrier by CCC number,
CCU number, and CE number
Time stamp when the initial fault occurred on the carrier.
Time stamp when the report printed at the ECP ROP.
After the initial OFD -A report has been issued, OFD -A will send a
report to the ECP every five minutes until the fault clears, as shown in
the example message below:
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 11
Sample Output

SECTOR 1 CHANNEL FAULT - CONTINUING
ACCESSES ON CARRIER 1 CCC 2, CCU 2, CE 0 COUNT=0 FAULT
11/12/97 15:02:53 #270665
OFD Sample
Typically, a carrier access-channel fault will continue for periods that

can range in duration from just a few minutes up to several hours or,
possibly, days. OFD -A will send a continuing fault report to the ECP
every five minutes until the fault clears. The example message below
shows a hard fault that cleared within 10 minutes.
Sample Output

SECTOR 1 CHANNEL FAULT - CLEARED
ACCESSES ON CARRIER 1 CCC 2, CCU 2, CE 0 COUNT=187
FAULT
11/12/97 15:08:26 #270831
OFD -A Recovery
Currently, there is no automatic recovery for OFD-detected faults. You,

as the technician, must take manual actions to correct the problem.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 12

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Other Cell Site Housekeeping

Software
Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
The cell site has excellent housekeeping software: faults such as

are constantly monitored and are automatically reported to the ECP. In
most cases, fault detection, diagnosis, and recovery are automatic. The
cell site detects faults by various means including functional tests ,
diagnostic tests, software audits, software asserts, hardware integrity
checks, board self-tests, and hardware alarm scanning.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 13
Functional Tests
Functional Tests
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Functional tests run on cell site equipment that is in-service. (This is in

contrast to diagnostic tests, discussed in the following Diagnostic Tests:
page 10-17, which run on equipment that is out-of-service.) Functional
tests temporarily take control of an in-service hardware unit, test it, and
then free it for normal call processing traffic.
CDMA functional tests run at the Series II Cell Site, Cellular CDMA
Minicell, and Personal Communications Services (PCS) CDMA
Minicell. They verify that the network is able to originate mobile calls
over the CDMA channels and that the CDMA radio equipment is
operational. Every idle (in-service and non-busy) CDMA traffic
channel element (CE) at the cell site can be tested without human
intervention.
Scheduling Functional
Tests
Functional tests can be performed on a scheduled or manual (ondemand) basis. For the latter case, in order to test new installations or
troubleshoot suspected problems, functional tests are initiated and
controlled from the ECP. The cell site performs the requested
functional test and returns the results to the ECP. Running functional
tests on a regularly scheduled basis ( routine functional tests) is a way
of checking the integrity of the cell site transmit and receive paths. The
frequency of routine functional tests is specified in the cell site
translations. (Unlike routine diagnostic testing, the exact time of day
cannot be specified.) The test results (pass, fail) are reported to the
ECP.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 14

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Functional Testing Software Sub-Systems
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Technician Interface (TI)
The following specific software sub-systems are involved in the

execution of functional testing.
TI provides a system operator with the ability to control the
AUTOPLEX System 1000 and respond to system problems requiring
manual intervention. TI also provides a means for the system to send
information such as alarms, error messages, status information, and
measurement data to the system operator.
Routine Maintenance
Scheduler (RMS)
RMS performs functional tests by sending a functional test request to

the maintenance request administrator (MRA) software subsystem,
which in turn sends a request to the functional test (FT) software
subsystem. RMS handles the result messages that are sent back from
FT. RMS can start a functional test initiated by a technician (manual
request, on demand) or by a timer (automatic request, scheduled). RMS
accesses the start time of scheduled functional tests from the
translations (TR) software subsystem. For a manual request, RMS will
send a report to the ECP read-only printer (ROP) upon completion of
the functional test. For an automatic request, RMS will not send a
report to the ECP ROP upon completion of the functional test even if
the test fails.
Maintenance Request
Administrator (MRA)
MRA administers cell site maintenance requests and manages cell site
equipment status. The administration of maintenance requests includes
accepting, rejecting, sequencing, queuing, and reporting to the
technician interface.
Functional Test (FT)
FT contains the code to run functional tests. At the completion of a

functional test, FT always sends the results to RMS, and will send the
results to the hardware error handler (HEH) software subsystem if any
errors occurred.

(HEH)
HEH receives autonomous errors from hardware units, functional test

errors from FT, and call processing errors from the call processing (CP)
software subsystem. It determines if a recovery action (remove or
restore) is needed and issues a request to MRA. Depending upon the
severity of the error, either HEH takes immediate recovery action or
waits until the error has occurred a predefined number of times before
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 15
taking action. In all cases, either when an error occurs or when HEH
takes a recovery action, HEH sends a report to the ECP ROP.
Call Processing (CP)
Translations (TR)
Additional Information
CP is responsible for CDMA call setup, handoff, and teardown.

TR stores all site-dependent data required for initialization.
Additional information regarding CDMA functional tests is included in
Functional Tests, Troubleshooting with OCFT and TPFT: page 10-27,
and Troubleshooting with Functional Tests: page 10-55 of this
document.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 16

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Diagnostic Tests
Diagnostic Tests
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Diagnostic tests can be performed on an automatic (error-driven),

scheduled, or manual basis. For the latter case, diagnostic tests are
initiated and controlled from the ECP via TI commands; the cell site
performs the requested diagnostic test and returns the test results to the
ECP.
Scheduling Diagnostics
Diagnostic tests run on equipment that is out-of-service or in the

growth state. Running diagnostic tests on a regularly scheduled basis (
routine diagnostic tests) is a way of determining if the cell site
hardware units are operational. Routine diagnostic tests run once a day;
the time of day at which these tests run is specified in the cell site
translations. The test results are reported to the ECP.
[Note that cell site translations, or system-configuration parameters,
can be set or changed using the recent change/verify (RC/V)
subsystem; initially, they are maintained in the ECPs application data
bases and then downloaded from the ECP to the cell site controller
(radio control complexRCC). For more information, refer to the
Data Base Update Manual 401-610-036)
Related Documents:
Series II Cell Site Diagnostic Test Descriptions 401-660-101
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 17
Software Audits
Software Audits
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
AUTOPLEX System 1000 audits are major software programs that

detect, confine, and correct software data errors before the errors
adversely impact the system. Audits correct broken linkages, restore
lost data resources, and help identify the location of problems in source
code. They provide the following functions:
Maintain system performance by checking for inconsistencies and

lost resources.
Provide system initialization during emergencies.
Protect and recover temporary memory (for example, call stores)

from error.
Report errors to indicate trouble to maintenance and field

personnel.
Facilitate office growth by automatically updating certain system

software.
Error Reporting
Software audits detect faults on software that is in-service. Audit test

errors are reported to the ECP. When audits detect errors, they recover
any lost resources and, if necessary, invoke appropriate system
initializations.
Scheduling Software
Audits
Software audits normally run automatically, but they also can be

performed on a manual basis via input commands entered through the
TI. All of the AUTOPLEX System 1000 audits are run under the
control of the Operating System for Distributed Switching (OSDS).
The audits are initiated and controlled from the ECP by the OSDS
Audit Control (OSDSAC) program. Upon receipt of an audit request
from the OSDAC, the cell site performs the requested audit and returns
the results to the ECP. Audits are also run in the ECP, independently of
the audits in the cell sites. ECP audits check the integrity of the data in
the OSDS only; audits in the cell site check the integrity of the data in
the cell sites only. In addition, interprocessor audits are run periodically
from the ECP to ensure consistency of the data that are common
between the ECP and the cell sites and between the ECP and the DCS.
(There is one dummy audit named INTRPROC that exists in the cell.
Its sole purpose is to request the ECP to run interprocessor audits on the
requesting cell site.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 18

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Software Audits
Audit Types
Examples of Audits
The AUTOPLEX System 1000 has approximately 50 different cell-site

audits. Each audit has a distinct name that conveys meaningful
information about the data structures being audited. The audits are
designed to run a wide variety of checks on the entire cell site. In
addition to checking the consistency of software data structures, the
cell site audits also check the status of different firmware and hardware
units in the cell.
Examples of some of the CDMA-specific cell-site audits include:
ARCCC - Initiates internal audits for CDMA cluster controllers

(CCC).
CCPCCC - Verifies the data integrity between the CCC and the
cell.
CCPECP - Ensures that for every CDMA call which occupies a

primary CDMA Radio Control Register (CRCR), a matching call
appearance exists at the ECPC.
CCPINT - Performs an internal audit of the CDMA Call

Processing (CP) translations. [ CCPINT audits the Traffic Channel
Administration (TCA) and the CRCR data structure.]
CCPOAM - Ensures consistency of data between the TCA and the

translations structures from which they derived.
CCPSEC - Checks consistency of call-related data between the

RCC CDMA Call Processing at the primary and secondary cells.
TUCDMA - Checks the CDMA maintenance units parameters,

by performing an audit of translations parameters at the CCCs,
CEs, and BBAs.
Complete List of Cell Site

Audits
For a complete list of currently available AUTOPLEX System 1000

cell-site software audits, the AUTOPLEX Cellular Telecommunications
Systems, System 1000, Cell Site Audits Manual 401-610-078, should be
consulted.
Scheduling Cell Site Audits
Running software audits on a regularly scheduled basis ( routine

audits) is a way of detecting, confining, and correcting software data
errors before the errors adversely affect system performance. The
frequency of routine audits is controlled exclusively by the RCC; there
is no scheduling translation associated with audits.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 19
Software Audits
Related Documents:
Series II Cell Site Audits Manual (401-610-078).
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 20

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Software Asserts
Software Asserts
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Asserts Description
Asserts occur when software encounters an unusual or unexpected

condition.
Example
For example, a software program calls a routine and expects three

choices but is presented with four. Such errors are reported to asserthandling software on the RCC, which is responsible for formatting
assert output messages and sending the messages to the ECP.
Assert handling Software
Subsystems
The assert-handling software may be one of two software subsystems

on the RCC:
Assert Handler
Receives and handles asserts from boards on the TDM bus.

Most asserts come from the radios or the communications
processor interface (CPI) board. The assert handler does
not initiate any recovery.
SIassert
Receives and handles asserts from the application software

running on the RCC. SIassert can initiate different levels of
recovery depending upon the severity of the assert.
When an assert occurs, an assert macro provides the assert-handling

software with the information it needs to process the assert failure.
What output message prints at the ECP depends upon the macro that
called the assert-handling software.
Escalation
Note that assert messages are often difficult to analyze and may require
escalation to the next level of technical support.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 21
Hardware Integrity Checks and Board Self-Tests
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
HEH Description
The automatic recovery actions at the cell site are done through the
Hardware Error Handler (HEH) software subsystem. HEH receives
error reports from hardware boards, functional tests, and callprocessing software. It determines when a recovery action (restore,
remove) is needed and then issues a request to carry out the action.
Depending upon the severity of the error, either HEH takes immediate
recovery action or waits until the error has occurred a predefined
number of times before taking action. For other errors, HEH sends only
an error report to the ECP.
Board Level Reporting
Specifically, the HEH plays a role in the following two different types
of board-level error reporting:
(1) Solicited Error Reporting
Every 30 minutes, HEH queries each active DS1, DFI, clock and tone
(CAT), and synchronized clock and tone (SCT) board for errors. (SCT
boards are installed only at cell sites that support CDMA operation.)
Each board responds with status messages containing a count of certain
timing or facility errors. There is an error threshold count for each type
of error; if the threshold is exceeded, HEH reports the error to the ECP
and takes recovery action.
(2) Autonomous Error Reporting
Autonomous error reporting is the spontaneous reporting of errors to

HEH by certain cell site hardware plug-in circuit boards, that is, HEH
does not solicit the error reporting. The hardware boards report an error
as soon as it occurs. Some boards will also report when an error ceases
(clears).
CDMA Hardware HEH
Reporting
The following CDMA hardware boards are capable of autonomous

error reporting:
DS1 - digital signal 1
DFI - digital facilities interface
CCC - CDMA cluster controller; also reports errors for associated

CDMA channel units (CCUs) [A CCC and its associated CCUs
form a CDMA cluster.]
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 22

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Error Types Reported
Hardware Errors
Program Control Errors
BIU - bus interface unit; also reports errors for its associated
baseband combiner and radio (BCR) and analog conversion unit
(ACU) [The associated BIU, BCR, and ACU form a CDMA radio
setthe BBA, for BCR-BIU-ACU.]
SCT - synchronized clock & tone; also reports errors for the
reference frequency & timing generator (RFTG)
CRTU - CDMA radio test unit (specifically, the CRTUi).
All of the cell site plug-in circuit boards listed above will report
autonomously four types of errors to HEH, to allow appropriate
diagnostics recovery to be scheduled. The error types are:
1.
hardware errors,
2.
program-control errors,
3.
radio-channel errors, and
4.
mobile station errors.
Hardware errors include malfunctioning microprocessor errors,

memory read/write errors, trap errors, or synthesizer lock errors. These
errors come from on-board self tests.
Program control errors include stack pointer errors, divide by zero
errors, or overflow and underflow errors.
Radio Channel Errors
Radio-channel errors include frame errors and access-attempt success

and failure errors. These errors are bursty in nature and will be
reported to the ECP after a predefined threshold has been passed. In
some cases, the threshold is an engineering parameter, that is, it is
hardcoded into the software. In other cases, the threshold is tunable via
translations.
Mobile Station Errors
Mobile station errors include improper or illogical message content in

the received message from a mobile transceiver or the absence of a
response message. An error message will be returned to the RCC.
Related Documents:
Output Messages 401-610-057 [See RPT CELL HEH]
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 23
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Alarms are the first indication of cell-site trouble, indicating either: (1)
a software failure; (2) a hardware failure; or (3) a user-defined
condition. Alarms are classified according to the level of severity/
priority of required actions: Critical; Major; Power Failure; Minor;
Spurt Minor; Manual.
Scanned alarms are faults that are gathered by dedicated monitoring
circuits at the cell site and then reported to the ECP. Unlike other faults,
scanned alarms are gathered from cell site equipment having no
associated software diagnostic tests. There is no automatic recovery for
scanned alarms.
AFI Boards
AFI Scanned Alarms
Alarm Reporting
The Alarm and Factory Installation and Test System (FITS) Interface
(AFI) boards, which are part of the RCC in the primary frame, monitor
both user-defined and equipment-scanned alarms. User-defined alarms
are gathered from alarm sensors external to the cell site equipment,
while equipment-scanned alarms are gathered from alarm sensors
within the various hardware frames of the cell site. All of the alarms are
reported to the ECP by the AFI circuit pack. In addition, some alarms
activate an LED display on the appropriate circuit pack.
In a PCS CDMA Minicell, the alarms scanned into the AFI can be
classified as follows:
1.
Amplifier alarms (displayed as LAC alarms)
2.
Frame alarms (fan and power converter alarms)
3.
User alarms
4.
Miscellaneous alarms (RFTGm side 0 or side 1).
The alarm control board (ACB) monitors the alarms from the
Minicells frame PCS components and reports the alarm status to the
AFI board located within the radio control complex (RCC).
the AFI. The AFI can send out up to 32 unique polling requests in
approximately a 2-second period of time.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 24

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
A LAC alarm is used for reporting any CDMA transmit unit (CTU)
and/or receive unit (RU) failures; a frame alarm reports power
converter unit (PCU) failures in the CTU shelf.
User Defined Alarms
User-defined alarms include miscellaneous alarm conditions, such as

fire, forced entry, high temperature, and alarms from ancillary colocated equipment. The alarm level (critical, major, or minor) and
alarm text associated with each alarm are defined by the ECP
technician using the Cell-Site User-Defined Alarms (UDA) optional
feature.
The RCC reports an alarm condition only once to the ECP, at the time
the RCC initially detects the alarm. The RCC will also send an all
clear message to the ECP when the alarm condition either clears itself
or is cleared by cell site maintenance personnel.
Additional Information
Related Documents:
Additional detailed information on hardware alarm scanning may be

found in the AUTOPLEX Cellular Telecommunications Systems,
System 1000, Operations, Administration, and Maintenance Guide
401-610-160 Issue 8, January 1999.
User-Defined Cell Site Alarms (UDA) Optional Feature 401-612-057
Input Messages 401-610-055 [See OP CELL EXTERN]
Output Messages 401-610-057 [See REPT CELL ALARM SCAN]
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 25
Use of CRTU Functional Tests for

Troubleshooting
Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This section presents information on the use of CRTU functional tests

for troubleshooting. Additional information regarding CDMA
functional tests is included in Functional Tests, Troubleshooting with
OCFT and TPFT: page 10-27, and Troubleshooting with Functional
Tests: page 10-55 of this document.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 26

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting with OCFT and TPFT
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Utilizing OCFT and TPFT
CRTU Failure Report
The first step in utilizing CRTU Overhead Channel Functional Tests

(OCFTs) and Traffic Path Functional Test (TPFTs) for troubleshooting
errors is to review the ROP file for functional test error messages. The
CRTUMON processing tool should be used to perform this function, to
supplement direct inspection of the ROP file. (See pages 32-87
through 32-92 of the AUTOPLEX Cellular Telecommunications
Systems, System 1000, Operations, Administration, and Maintenance
Guide 401-610-160 Issue 6, January 1998, for a complete description of
the CRTUMON ROP-file analysis tool and its use.) Note that the
amount of data that will be available in the ROP for analysis depends
not only on the number of errors that occur for each FT but also on the
interval value for conducting scheduled FTs that has been set in RC/V
translations. An example of a CRTUMON Output Summary Report is
shown below:
CRTU Failure Report Generated : Fri Jan 10 16:34:07 CST 1997
Report Span : 08:00 01/10/97 - 11:00 01/10/97
CRTU Overhead Channel Failure Report
CellNum
PhyAntFace Carrier BBA
CCC
CCU CE #Fail
184
184
CRTU Traffic Path Failure Report

CellNum
PhyAntFace
Carrier BBA
CCC CCU
CE #Fail
184
184
As can be seen in the example output, the summary report was

generated on Friday, January 10, 1997, at 16:34:07. The failing cells
are ordered from lowest to highest cell number. The hardware units for
a specific cell are ordered from the most number of failures to the least
number of failures.
Extract Information About
the Carrier and BBA Fields
Note that the CRTUMON Output Summary Report actually contains

more information of great value for troubleshooting than what was
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 27
contained in the original ROP-file output messages. In particular, the

carrier and BBA fields are not contained in the original HEH messages
involving OCFT and TPFT failures. CRTUMON extracts those fields
from the ECP database whenever it is able to do so. To guarantee that
CRTUMON will be able to extract information about the carrier and
BBA fields from the ECP database, it is necessary to ensure that the
following two conditions are met:
1.
the dual serial channel computer interconnect (DCI) link to the

ECP must be active when CRTUMON generates the report; and,
2.
the user (login) running the report must have permission to access
the ECP database.
If both conditions are not satisfied, CRTUMON will populate the

Carrier and BBA fields with question marks (?).
Examine the ROP File and
the CRTUMON Output Files
For Patterns
Both the ROP file itself and the CRTUMON output files should be
examined carefully to find patterns of failing Channel Elements (CEs),
CDMA Channel Units (CCUs), CDMA Cluster Controllers (CCCs), or
entire Test Paths (TPs). Instead of analyzing in detail which parts of
which FTs resulted in particular types of failures, it is often useful to
focus instead on identifying consistent failures and patterns of failures.
Re-execute Functional
Tests
Whenever feasible, Functional Tests that resulted in failures should be

re-executed manually to verify the errors. (Currently, intermittent FT
errors are normal, even when the operational performance of all system
components is within acceptable limits.)
Review SDPs
The Status Display Pages (SDPs) should be reviewed to determine if

any cell site hardware is Out of Service (OOS), or in alarm. On cells
that show no alarms on the SDPs, but consistently fail FTs, call-through
testing should be performed to identify points of failure.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 28

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Demand-Mode Use of OCFT for

Troubleshooting
Demand-Mode Use of OCFT for Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
OCFT Flow
OCFT Process
Manually initiated (demand-mode) OCFTs can be a very useful tool for

isolating faults indicated by failures of overhead channels during
automatically scheduled (or manually requested) OCFTs and/or TPFTs.
A flow diagram for utilizing demand-mode OCFTs for fault isolation is
shown below.
The following steps in fault isolation procedures are to be followed

with the aid of the flow diagram.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The sequence starts when an automatically scheduled (or manually

requested) OCFT or TPFT indicates a fault involving overhead channels.
The system sends a message to the ROP. The message shows the sector
on which the fault was detected and the CE that was carrying the
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 29

Troubleshooting
overhead channel. [1]

...........................................................................................................................................................................
The system will automatically attempt to restore the overhead channels

(OCs) by migrating the failed overhead channels. The system places the
CCU (either a TCU or ECU) that carried the overhead channels out of
service (OOS). After migration of the overhead channels, the system
automatically runs the OCFT to determine whether the new overhead
channels are operating properly. [2]
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the post-migration OCFT is successful, the sector in question will now

be operating properly. As a technician, you should confirm that the
migration was successful by looking at SDP 2139 and verifying that
there are active CEs assigned to the P/S/A and paging channels on the
PAF in question. You should further verify proper functioning of the
overhead channels by executing the OCFT in the demand mode. Finally,
you should monitor the next hours CDMA Service Measurements on
that sector. [3,4]
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the migration of the overhead channels has been successful, you

should identify any failed maintenance unit (e.g., a failed CCU board)
that may have been responsible for the original FT failure involving
overhead channels. Identification of the faulty unit usually can be
accomplished by carefully examining the outputs of a variety of
troubleshooting tools: ROP files; CRTUMON Output Summary
Reports; SDP 2139; etc. [5]
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Once identified, you can attempt to conditionally restore the faulty unit
to see if it can be placed back into service. If the conditional restore
succeeds, scheduling of field maintenance on the unit can be deferred; if
the conditional restore does not succeed, field maintenance on the unit
needs to be scheduled more quickly. [6,7,8]
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the migration of the overhead channels has not been successful, try
manual recovery, provided other CCUs that could carry the overhead
channels are available. [You can determine whether another CCU is
available for overhead channel migration by inspecting SDP 2139.] If
other CCUs are not available, schedule immediate field maintenance to
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 30

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Troubleshooting
provide the needed CCUs. If other CCUs are available, attempt a manual
migration of the overhead channels to one of them. If this manual
recovery action does not succeed, proceed to the next step. [9,10,11]
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the reason why the attempt to migrate the overhead channels failed
was not due to a lack of available CCUs, look at SDP 2139 to see if any
amplifier failures may have occurred. Look for LAC failures if the cell
site is a Series II cell or for CTU failures if the cell site is a PCS or
cellular Minicell. If any amplifier failure is found, take recovery action
to correct the non-CDMA problem. [12,13]
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Inspect SDP 2138 to determine the row (sector and shelf) that
corresponds to the failed channels. This page will indicate whether the
sector BBA is working (active) or OOS. If the BBA is OOS, issue the
command OP:CELL:BBA to find the status of the BBA and to
conditionally restore it to the active state. If this action fails to restore
the BBA, attempt to place the redundant BBA, if present, into service.
Important!Note that redundant BBAs are never present in
Minicells.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If neither BBA can be placed into service, schedule field maintenance of

the BBA. If the BBA is successfully restored to service, run the OCFT
in demand mode to see whether the overhead channels have been
restored. [14,15]
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
If the overhead channels are still OOS, examine SDP 2138 to check the
CCC of the overhead channels. If the CCC is OOS, try to place the CCC
in service with a conditional restore command. When the conditional
restore command is applied to the CCC, the overhead channels will
automatically migrate to different CEs on another CCC. Run the OCFT
in the demand mode again to see if the overhead channels have been
restored. If the overhead channels now have been restored, schedule the
failed CCC for field maintenance. [16,17]
...........................................................................................................................................................................
11
If the OCFT still finds a fault on the sector, restore the CEs that are
carrying the overhead channels. [Use SDP 2139 to identify the CEs of
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 31

Troubleshooting
the overhead channels (P/S/A and Paging). Conditionally restore the

CCU on which these CEs are located.] If the overhead channels cannot
be restored, schedule field mantenance to restore the overhead channels.
[18]
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 32

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Demand-Mode Use of TPFT for

Troubleshooting
Demand-Mode Use of TPFT for Troubleshooting
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
TPFT Flow Diagram
Manually initiated (demand-mode) TPFTs can be a very useful tool for

isolating faults indicated by failures of traffic paths during
automatically scheduled (or manually requested) TPFTs. A flow
diagram for utilizing demand-mode TPFTs for fault isolation is shown
below.
TP FT
FA U LT
S TA RT
11
2
ROP
M ESSAGE
4
3
SCHEDULE
F IE L D
M A IN T E N A N C E
ID E N T IF Y
FA U LT ?
YES
SCHEDULE
F IE L D
10
ID E N T IF Y
M O S T L IK E LY
U N IT
MAINTENANCE
NO
RUN TP FT
A G A IN
D U P L IC AT E
FA U LT ?
R E V IE W
ALL ROP
MESSAGES
YES
RUN TP FT
ON ALL
S E C TO R S
NO
CONTINUE
SYSTEM
OPERATION
TPFT Flow
The following steps in fault isolation procedures are to be followed

with the aid of the flow diagram.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The sequence starts when an automatically scheduled (or manually

requested) TPFT indicates a fault involving traffic paths. [1]
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 33
Demand-Mode Use of TPFT for

Troubleshooting
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The system then sends a message to the ROP. The message shows the
CCC, CCU (either a TCU or ECU), and CE on which the fault was
found. There is no automatic recovery triggered by the TPFT. Any fault
detected by the CRTU might also result in faults detected on calls placed
by customers mobiles, which also would be reported to HEH. If the
reports of the fault meet certain HEH criteria, HEH might take recovery
action. [2]
...........................................................................................................................................................................
As the technician, you should examine the ROP to determine if the fault
has generated messages that have not yet triggered recovery by HEH. If
there are such messages, examine them for any pattern present to
identify which maintenance unit might be faulty. If the location of the
fault can be determined, schedule field maintenance of the faulty unit.
[3,4]
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If a faulty unit cannot be identified, run TPFT again in the demand mode
to see if the fault can be reproduced. If the fault is not reproduced, the
fault is most likely a transient fault; take no action at the present time.
[5,6,7]
...........................................................................................................................................................................
If the fault can be reproduced, run the TPFT again in the demand mode
from all sectors in an attempt to gain additional information about the
location of the fault. In addition, review the ROP file again to determine
the best estimate of the maintenance unit that should be replaced. [See
Examples of Troubleshooting with OCFT and TPFT: page 10-38 for
examples of TPFT pass/fail patterns caused by different types of board
failures.] Schedule field maintenance to replace the unit. [8,9,10,11]
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 34

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting with PLFT
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PLFT Display
The Pilot Level Functional Test (PLFT) failures (resulting from out-oftolerance Pilot levels) generate both ROP output and alarms on the
Status Display Pages (SDPs). [For a PLFT to pass, the absolute value of
the expected pilot level measurement value minus the actual
measurement value must be less than or equal to the pilot level
tolerance value (a translations parameter). Otherwise, the pilot level
test fails.]
PLFT ROP Messages
The ROP messages indicate both the actual measured pilot level value
and the expected pilot level value (calculated by the software, based on
amplifier type, pilot dgu, and the BCR attenuation values in
translations). As with OCFTs and TPFTs, a manually initiated PLFT
will always generate ROP output, whereas automatically initiated
(scheduled) PLFTs run silently unless an error occurs. The frequency of
scheduled PLFTs is set in translations.
PLFT ROP Sample
The following excerpt from a ROP file shows the ROP message
resulting from a failed PLFT performed on a 2-carrier sector. The PLFT
ROP output report contains the actual (ACTL) and expected (EXP)
pilot level measurement values in dBm for each pilot channel on each
sector tested ( PL 0 = omni, PL 1 = sector 1, PL 2 = sector 2, ...). [For a
multiple-sector cell, PLFT first tests all pilot channels (carriers) on
sector 1 (alpha), then tests all pilot channels on sector 2 (beta), and so
on until PLFT has tested all pilot channels on all sectors of the cell.] For
any pilot channel having an out-of-tolerance ACTL measurement
value, the report includes an error reason of OUT OF RANGE.
Output Sample
EXC:CELL 132 FT PL, COMPLETED

PL 1 COMPLETED SOME TESTS FAILED
PL 1 CARRIER 1 COMPLETED OUT OF RANGE
PILOT LEVEL: ACTL = 37.98 dBm EXP = 36.99 dBm
PL 1 CARRIER 2 COMPLETED ALL TESTS PASSED
PILOT LEVEL: ACTL = 36.98 dBm EXP = 36.99 dBm
The SDP alarms caused by failure of a PLFT include:

1.
a major alarm (red) of the cell status on the 2121 SDP;
2.
CDMA equipment in trouble (red) on the 2131 SDP; and
3.
the affected CCC and PAF as degraded (yellow) on the 2138 SDP.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 35
Clearing of the SDP alarms caused by a PLFT failure requires either:
Translations Affecting
PLFT
1.
subsequent execution of another PLFT with All Tests Passed

(ATP) results, or
2.
a stable clear of the cell.
The following translations affect the PLFT:
PLFT Field
Screen
CDMA Pilot Level Calibration
ceqface form
CDMA Pilot Level Interval
ecp form
ceqcom2 form, screen 2
CDMA Pilot Level Tolerance Value
ecp form
ceqcom2 form, screen 2
PLFT Calibration Criteria
Alternate Screen
To ensure that PLFT test will perform correctly, it is necessary to

calibrate (or re-calibrate) PLFT-related parameters in translations
whenever any of the following conditions occurs:
1.
installation of a new cell;
2.
initial loading of a cell generic;
3.
changing of any components in the RF test path (CRTUm, RSP,

cabling, filters);
4.
changing of any parameters in translations that impact PLFT

(amplifier type, pilot dgu, or BCR attenuation).
Important!Note that the PLFT calibration does not replace power
calibration. If the status of a cells power calibration is in question,
it should be verified before proceeding with PLFT calibration.
PLFT Calibration Process

Summary
A summary of the PLFT calibration process follows. (See the

Issue 8, January 1999, pages 32-33 through 32-36 for a more extensive
description of the calibration process.)
1.
Inhibit the PLFT. ( Issue the command INH:CELL #, FT PL).
2.
Initialize the CDMA Pilot Level Calibration value to 0 (ceqface

form).
3.
Execute the PLFT five times.
4.
Average the actual results reported on the ROP.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 36

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
5.
Calculate the difference between the average and the expected

results.
6.
Enter the difference into the Pilot Level Calibration field.
7.
Execute the PLFT again.
8.
Verify that the actual result is within 1dB of the expected results.
If not, repeat the calibration process.
9.
Perform the calibration for each equipped sector of the cell.
10. Allow PLFT. ( Issue the command ALW:CELL #, FT PL).
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 37
Examples of Troubleshooting with

OCFT and TPFT
Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
This section provides examples of troubleshooting using the Overhead

Channel Functional Test (OCFT) and the Traffic Path Functional Test
(TPFT)).
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 38

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Example 1: Failed CTU in PCS CDMA Minicell
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OverviewMore Information
The following example of the use of CRTU OCFTs and TPFTs for
troubleshooting a PCS CDMA Minicell is taken from a Fax Flash
document: AUTOPLEX CTSO Fax Flash 97-236, Detecting Failed
CTUs in PCS CDMA Minicells using the CRTU, dated 12/4/97. This
Fax Flash contains more detailed information than what is included
here as well as additional examples. It should be consulted by
interested readers.
Identify a Failed CTU
The example illustrates how to identify a CDMA Transmitter Unit

(CTU) which has failed without generating an alarm. (The particular
type of failure involved in this example - a blown regulator on the
Transmitter Up-converter Board, Tx-up - does not generate an alarm.)
One way of detecting this type of failure (loss of RF output) is by
monitoring service measurements, and noting a drop in the typical call
processing rates for a particular cell. Once at a suspect cell, the TXcoupled port in the Minicell could be used to determine if there is
adequate output power from any given sector if a problem is suspected.
Detecting a Failed CTU
Cells equipped with a CDMA Radio Test Unit (CRTU) can use it to
detect a failed CTU, remotely from the MSC. The CRTU cannot
currently isolate a specific component as a failure, but it can detect a
problem in the overall traffic path (MSC to the Output port of the
Minicell). Following are excerpts from the Read Only Printer (ROP)
showing the series of messages received from a cell with a failed CTU
in the Alpha sector. Once understood, one can determine, even from a
location remote from the cell site (such as the location of the ECP),
that the CTU is a likely suspect for failure despite the lack of an alarm.
ROP Output for a Cell with

a Failed CTU in the Alpha
Sector
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Overhead Channel Functional Tests Started

01 EXC:CELL 131 FT OC, STARTED
09/19/97 14:01:24 #456727
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 39
M 01 EXC:CELL 131 FT OC, COMPLETED

OC 0 SKIPPED
UNIT OUT OF SERVICE
09/19/97 14:01:24 #456728
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Alpha Sector reports no Overhead from CCC2 (Alpha), CCU 1

03 REPT:CELL 131 HEH, CCC 2, CCU 1, CE 1
PID: OS = FTSUPV, N/A, 0
FT OC 1 FAILURE: NO_OVERHEAD
09/19/97 14:03:44 #456857
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Alpha sector can not complete because no Overhead is detected.

[Continues with Beta sector testing.]
M 03 EXC:CELL 131
OC 1
OC 1 CARRIER
OC 1 CARRIER
09/19/97 14:03:45
FT OC, COMPLETED
PARTIALLY COMPLETED LOST PILOT
1 NOT STARTED
2 NOT STARTED
#456859
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Beta Sector Overhead Detected, and all tests Completed

M 04 EXC:CELL 131
OC 2
OC 2 CARRIER
OC 2 CARRIER
09/19/97 14:04:08
FT OC, COMPLETED
COMPLETED
ALL TESTS PASSED
1 COMPLETED
ALL TESTS PASSED
2 SKIPPED
#456864
...........................................................................................................................................................................
CCC 2 (Alpha) migrates Overhead Channels from CCU 1 to CCU 2 so

cell can run Diagnostics on CCU 1
* 04 OP:CELL 131 CCC 2, CCU 2 ACTIVE
CE 0, PSA, PAF 1
CE 1, PAGE, PAF 1
09/19/97 14:04:12 #456865
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 40

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
...........................................................................................................................................................................
CRTU tries again to detect Overhead on CCC 2 (Alpha), CCU 2, but no

Overhead Channels are detected.
09/19/97 14:06:29 #456913
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Gamma Sector Overhead Detected, and all tests Completed

M 06 EXC:CELL 131 FT OC, COMPLETED
OC 3
COMPLETED
ALL TESTS PASSED
OC 3 CARRIER 1 COMPLETED
ALL TESTS PASSED
OC 3 CARRIER 2 SKIPPED
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Alpha sector CCU 1 is returned to service, since no problems are found

with the board.
07 RST:CELL 131 CCC 2, CCU 1, ATP
09/19/97 14:07:08 #456937
M 11 OP:CELL 131 COMPLETED
09/19/97 14:11:25 #457039
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Since CRTU did not detect Overhead Channels on Two consecutive

CCUs it assumes (erroneously) it is the failing unit and reports that
Functional Test for Overhead channels failed for the Alpha sector.
12 REPT:CELL 131 HEH, CRTU
...........................................................................................................................................................................
10
CRTU is removed from service and a RED Alarm appears on the 2131
Page of the MCRT, and the overall cell status changes from Green to
Red on the 2121 page.
* 12 OP:CELL 131 CRTU, OOS, FRCELL, TBLANL
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 41
...........................................................................................................................................................................
11
Cell was restored and the Functional Test for the Traffic Path was
started.
M 20 EXC:CELL 131 FT TP, STARTED
09/19/97 14:20:47 #457266
M 20 EXC:CELL 131 FT TP, COMPLETED
TP 0
SKIPPED
UNIT OUT OF SERVICE
09/19/97 14:20:47 #457267
...........................................................................................................................................................................
12
Alpha Sector detected no pilot, and again moves the Overhead Channels
to the next CCU (CCU 2)
TP 1
PARTIALLY COMPLETED LOST PILOT
09/19/97 14:23:08 #457334
...........................................................................................................................................................................
13
CCU 2 is active with Overhead Channels

* 23 OP:CELL 131 CCC 2, CCU 2 ACTIVE
CE 0, PSA, PAF 1
CE 1, PAGE, PAF 1
09/19/97 14:23:34 #457339
...........................................................................................................................................................................
14
Beta Sector completed FT TP

TP 2
COMPLETED
ALL TESTS PASSED
CCC 4, CCU 2, CE 0 COMPLETED ALL TESTS
09/19/97 14:23:56 #457345
PASSED
PASSED
PASSED
PASSED
PASSED
PASSED
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 42

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
...........................................................................................................................................................................
15
Again, no Overhead is detected on the Alpha sector CCU 2.

09/19/97 14:26:16 #457415
...........................................................................................................................................................................
16
Alpha sector CCU 1 is returned to service, since all tests pass.

26 RST:CELL 131 CCC 2, CCU 1, ATP
09/19/97 14:26:32 #457418
...........................................................................................................................................................................
17
Gamma Sector FT TP is completed successfully

TP 3
COMPLETED
ALL TESTS PASSED
PASSED
PASSED
PASSED
PASSED
PASSED
PASSED
...........................................................................................................................................................................
18
CRTU is removed from service and is flagged as a failure causing a Red

alarm on the MCRT 2131 status page, as well as a overall cell status of
Red on the 2121 page.
30 OP:CELL 131 CRTU, OOS, FRCELL, TBLANL
...........................................................................................................................................................................
19
Since the CRTU is flagged as a failure, it is removed from service and

the cell indicates trouble, i.e., Red on the 2121, and Red CRTU on the
2131 pages respectively. The next step is to run diagnostics on the
CRTU which will complete with all tests passing, since the real failure
is in the CTU.
Analysis
If this scenario is completed, it would indicate that since the CCUs all
passed diagnostics, and the CRTU passed diagnostics, the problem
would have to be somewhere after the CCUs, (i.e., something in the RF
path, either the BCR, CTU, or some RF portion of the RF test network).
At this point, other data, such as service measurements, or looking at
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 43
the power at the coupled port, could be used to further troubleshoot the
problem, and a technician could be dispatched to the cell for additional
testing.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 44

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Example 2: Failed ECU Board
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
In this example, we consider a case in which a single Enhanced

Channel Unit (ECU) board fails, but all other hardware remains fully
operational. In this case, only a few functional tests would fail
(namely, those that directly involve the failed ECU board). The FT
failures would be reported to the ECP and would appear as FT failure
output messages on the ROP file. Note that ROP messages refer to
either a TCU or an ECU as being a CCU (CDMA Channel Unit). [The
TCU and ECU are in fact 2-channel and 10-channel versions,
respectively, of a CCU.]
Error Process
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Initially, if the bad ECU was supporting any overhead channels, an

OCFT involving the bad ECU would fail, resulting in a ROP message
like the following example:
REPT:CELL 150 HEH,
CCC 2,
CCU
PID: OS = FTSUPV,
N/A,
0
FT OC
1
CARRIER
1 FAILURE:
4,
CE
NO_OVERHEAD
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Once an overhead channel error occurs, however, HEH automatically

migrates the overhead channels, Pilot/Sync/Access (P/S/A) and Page,
for the carrier under test to idle traffic Channel Elements (CEs) on
another CCU. Subsequently, there will be no additional OCFT failures
involving the bad ECU (CCU # 4 in the current example). Nevertheless,
the bad ECU will continue to cause TPFT failures, as illustrated in the
following ROP message.
REPT:CELL 150 HEH,
CRTU
PID:OS = FTSUPV, N/A
FT TRAFFIC PATH 1 RESULTS:
CCC
CCU
CE
REASON
2
2
2
2
2
4
2
2
5
2
3
1
2
3
2
2
3
4
PART 1 OF 1
COMPLETED
RESULT
PASS
PASS
PASS
PASS
PASS
PASS
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 45
2
2
2
Analysis
4
4
4
1
3
4
TRFFICFL
TRFFICFL
TRFFICFL
FAILED
FAILED
FAILED
Note that all of the idle CEs in the bad ECU (CCC # 4) result in TPFT
failures, while in this example, none of the CEs in other ECUs result in
failures.
The pattern is clear: When an ECU board is bad, all of the CEs that
comprise the bad ECU will fail in TPFTs. Whenever this pattern of
TPFT failures occurs in ROP messages, a bad ECU board may quickly
be identified and replaced.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 46

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Example 3: Failed CCC Board
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OverviewProblem
Description
In this example, we consider a case in which a single CDMA Cluster

Controller (CCC) board fails, but all other hardware remains fully
operational.
Error Process
...........................................................................................................................................................................
It is quite likely that, initially, an OCFT involving the bad CCC would
fail, resulting in a ROP message like the following example:
REPT:CELL 150 HEH,
CCC 2,
CCU 4,
CE 1
PID: OS = FTSUPV,
N/A,
0
FT OC
1
CARRIER
1 FAILURE:
NO_OVERHEAD
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Once an overhead channel error occurs, however, HEH automatically

migrates the overhead channels, Pilot/Sync/Access (P/S/A) and Page,
for the carrier under test to idle traffic Channel Elements (CEs) on
another CCU. If the overhead channels are migrated to another CCU
controlled by the bad CCC, the next OCFT again will quite likely fail
and the overhead channels will again be migrated. Ultimately they will
be migrated to another CCU behind a CCC that is not bad. Subsequently,
there will be no additional OCFT failures involving the bad CCC (CCC
# 2 in the current example). Nevertheless, whether or not the bad CCC
initially causes OCFT failures to occur, the bad CCC will cause TPFT
failures, as illustrated in the following ROP message:
REPT:CELL 150 HEH,
CRTU
CCC
CCU
CE
REASON
2
2
2
TRFFICFL
2
2
4
TRFFICFL
2
2
5
TRFFICFL
2
3
1
TRFFICFL
2
3
2
TRFFICFL
2
3
4
TRFFICFL
2
4
1
TRFFICFL
PART 1 OF 1
COMPLETED
RESULT
FAILED
FAILED
FAILED
FAILED
FAILED
FAILED
FAILED
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 47
2
2
4
4
3
4
TRFFICFL
TRFFICFL
FAILED
FAILED
...........................................................................................................................................................................
The pattern of failures in the above ROP message differs clearly and
markedly from that shown in the previous example. In this case, all of
the CEs belonging to all of the CCUs that are controlled by the bad CCC
cause TPFT failures. A ROP message that looks like the above example
provides strong evidence that the most likely cause of failure is a bad
CCC board, CCC # 2 in this example.
Important!Note, however, that the above ROP message does not
indicate with 100% certainty that the faulty hardware is the CCC
#2 board. It is (remotely) possible that CCC # 2 is actually O.K.,
and that the reasons for all of the TPFT failures listed in the ROP
message are due to a coincidental simultaneous failure of the three
different CCU boards: CCU # 2, CCU # 3, and CCU # 4.
Simultaneous failures of so many boards is a very unlikely
occurrence. It is much more reasonable to assume in this case that
the failures are due to the CCC # 2 board being bad. The
likelihood of this assumption being correct increases if several
successive ROP messages or a CRTUMON Summary Output
Report for some extended time period show the same failure
patterns involving TPFT failures of CCC # 2.
...........................................................................................................................................................................
Suppose, however, that we now consider a variant of the present

example: namely, a case in which the bad CCC board controls only a
single CCU. In this case the ROP-file output message would something
like this:
REPT:CELL 150 HEH,
CRTU
CCC
CCU
CE
REASON
2
1
2
TRFFICFL
2
1
4
TRFFICFL
2
1
5
TRFFICFL
PART 1 OF 1
COMPLETED
RESULT
FAILED
FAILED
FAILED
...........................................................................................................................................................................
It is now impossible to ascertain which component board is faulty. From

the information available in the ROP message, one can deduce only that
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 48

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
it is equally likely that either the CCC # 2 board is bad or the CCU # 1
board is bad. (In addition, there is a small likelihood that both boards
could be bad.) Additional ROP messages and CRTUMON Summary
Output Reports for extended time periods will only serve to increase our
certainty that one (or both) of these two different boards may be bad;
they will not help to resolve the ambiguity regarding which board is in
fact bad.
Analysis
Based on the reasoning presented in the previous paragraph, the

following general statement can be made:
Greater ambiguity exists in the fault-isolation process for systems
involving smaller configurations with fewer hardware component
boards.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 49
Example 4: Failed ACU Board
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Problem Description
In this example, we consider a case in which a single Analog

Conversion Unit (ACU) board fails, but all other hardware remains
fully operational. For this example, it is helpful to refer to the figure
below, showing a schematic diagram of a portion of the primary frame
of a PCS CDMA Minicell with three fully interconnected shelves that
form a subcell supporting a 3-sector configuration. Any CE located
anywhere within the 3 shelves comprising the subcell is available to
any of the 3 sectors supported by the subcell. This CDMA subcell
configuration is required for softer handoff, which occurs during
handoff of a call between two different sectors of a subcell .
Important!A mobile involved in softer handoff communicates
simultaneously with a traffic CE through 2 paths and 2 sectors.
The traffic CE combines the signals received from the 2 sectors
and uses the result to demodulate the signal.
PCS CDMA Minicell with 3

Interconnected Shelves
Subcell of a PCS CDMA Minicell with 3 interconnected shelves.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 50

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
ACU Board Failure Will

Cause FT Failures
From the figure we can observe that each shelf contains a single CCC
board, which is connected (through its CCU boards) to a single ACU
board, also on the same shelf. It follows that failure of an ACU board
will cause FT failures to occur for the CCC board (and its associated
CCU boards) that are directly linked to the bad ACU on the same shelf.
Because of this one-to-one relationship between the ACU and the CCC
on the same shelf, the FT failure patterns observable are essentially the
same as what was discussed in the previous example.
Overhead Channel
Migration
As in the previous example, initial failure of an OCFT would ultimately

cause the overhead channels to be migrated away from the failed ACU.
Suppose, for example, that the bad ACU is ACU # 2 on Shelf # 1 (the
shelf with the BCR supporting the alpha sector). Then after the initial
OCFT failure caused by ACU # 2, the overhead channels for the alpha
sector would ultimately be migrated either to ACU # 4 on Shelf # 2
(the shelf supporting the beta sector) or to ACU # 6 on Shelf # 3 (the
shelf supporting the gamma sector). In either case, as soon as the alphasector overhead channel migration has been completed, subsequent
OCFTs for sector alpha would pass.
TPFT Failures
The bad ACU will continue to cause TPFT failures to occur, however.
Because of the direct one-to-one linkage between ACU # 2 and CCC #
2, essentially the same TPFT failure patterns as those described in the
previous example would be observed. As a result, there would exist an
ambiguity in the fault isolation process: it would not be possible to
determine with certainty whether the observed FT failures are due to
the ACU board or to the CCC board directly linked to it on the same
shelf.
Important!Note, however, that if the suspect CCC board is in fact
bad, then depending upon the nature of the CCC failure, the
dedicated CDMA packet pipe that terminates on the CCC may
experience trouble. The status of the Packet Pipe Trunk Group
Number (PP TG No.) that matches the suspect CCC should be
checked on Status Display Page (SDP) 2139. If the packet pipe
status is either blocked or out of service, it is more likely that the
TPFT failures are being caused by the CCC board; if the status of
the packet pipe shows no sign of trouble, it is more likely that the
TPFT failures are being caused by the ACU board.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 51
Example 5: Failed BCR Board
Example 5: Failed BCR Board
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Problem Description
In this example, we consider a case in which a single Baseband

Combiner Radio (BCR) board fails, but all other hardware remains
fully operational. For definiteness, we refer to the figure PCS CDMA
Minicell with 3 Interconnected Shelves: page 10-50 introduced in the
previous example and assume that the bad BCR board is BCR # 2 on
Shelf # 1.
Analysis
It is clear from the figure PCS CDMA Minicell with 3 Interconnected

Shelves: page 10-50 that all calls in the alpha sector must utilize BCR #
2. Consequently, when BCR # 2 fails, the alpha sector goes dead and
can no longer support calls. Both OCFTs and TPFTs will show a pattern
of failure of all calls associated with the alpha sector when BCR # 2
fails.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 52

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Example 6: Failed BIU Board
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Problem Description
In this example, we consider a case in which a single Bus Interface Unit

(BIU) board fails, but all other hardware remains fully operational. For
definiteness, we refer to the figure PCS CDMA Minicell with 3
Interconnected Shelves: page 10-50 utilized in the previous two
examples and assume that the bad BIU board is BIU # 2 on Shelf # 1.
BIU Description
The BIU is the interface between the Time Division Multiplexed

(TDM) bus and the BCR and ACU components of the BBA (BCRBIU-ACU) trio comprising the CDMA radio set. As such, it provides a
control bus interface to the CCC, CCUs, ACU, and BCR. In addition, it
provides power conversion and alarm control functions.
Analysis
It can be seen from figure PCS CDMA Minicell with 3 Interconnected

Shelves: page 10-50 that BCR # 2 is directly connected to and is
supported by BIU # 2. As a result, if BIU # 2 fails, BCR # 2 can no
longer operate properly and effectively fails. Hence, as in the previous
example, the alpha sector goes dead and can no longer support calls.
Both OCFTs and TPFTs will show a pattern of failure of all calls
associated with the alpha sector.
Important!Note, however, that there is an ambiguity in fault
isolation. From the observed pattern of failures of all calls
associated with the alpha sector, it is not possible to determine
with certainty whether the problem is caused by a bad BIU board
or by a bad associated BCR board.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 53
Use of Cell Site Housekeeping

Software for Troubleshooting
Overview
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Purpose
The cell site has excellent housekeeping software: faults such as

are constantly monitored and are automatically reported to the ECP. In
most cases, fault detection, diagnosis, and recovery are automatic. The
cell site detects faults by various means including functional tests ,
diagnostic tests, software audits, software asserts, hardware integrity
checks, board self-tests, and hardware alarm scanning.
CDMA Functional Testing
This section provides troubleshooting tips for manually clearing errors

disclosed by CDMA functional testing at the CDMA Series II Cell Site,
Cellular CDMA Minicell, or PCS CDMA Minicell. Also described in
this section are some of the typical CDMA functional test errors
experienced during in-house testing or reported by field service
engineers. Likely causes of the errors and error remedies are also
described in this section. Additional information regarding CDMA
functional tests is included also in Functional Tests, and
Troubleshooting with OCFT and TPFT: page 10-27 of this document.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 54

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting with Functional Tests
Troubleshooting with Functional Tests
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Functional Test Failures
MOST Call Setup Failure
CDMA functional tests make use of many hardware units at the cell
and involve communication between many software subsystems at the
cell and at the switch. Any failure in hardware or software during a
CDMA functional test is reported as an error to the FT software
subsystem, which reports the error to the RMS and HEH software
subsystems. Typical reasons why CDMA functional tests fail include:
Missing RC/V parameters
Programming errors in the CRTUm
Hardware failures in CRTUi, CRTUm, or RSP
Hardware failures in test call path such as defective BBA, CCC, or

CCU.
Failure to set up properly the initial MOST call is one of the most
common failures observed at a cell site having a newly installed CRTU.
If FT aborts the functional test due to a failed origination, RMS will
report a CALL SETUP FAILED error for a manual request, and HEH
will report a NOCALLORIG error for an automatic request. If FT
aborts the functional test due to a lost call information message, RMS
will report a CALL SETUP FAILED error for a manual request, and
HEH will report a NOCALLINF error for an automatic request.
Important!Note that it is normal for some CDMA functional test
errors to occur intermittently without valid cause. Currently, about
one such error may be expected to occur every couple of days,
depending upon functional test interval values, cell equipage, and
so on.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 55
RC/V Problems
RC/V Problems
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Missing CDMA MOST

Directory Number
The CRTU dials the CDMA MOST directory number to start a CDMA
functional test. If FT aborts the functional test due to a missing CDMA
MOST directory number, RMS will report a CALL SETUP FAILED
error for a manual request, and HEH will report a NOCALLORIG error
for an automatic request.
Error remedy
Use the CDMA Functional Test MOST DN field on screen 16 of the

RC/V sub form to find/enter the CDMA MOST directory number. Go
to screen 1 of the RC/V sub form and enter the CDMA MOST
directory number and other mobile-related data. Set the Mobile
Directory Number Type field to o (oh) and the Mobile Serial Number
field to h0000000f.
Missing CRTU Directory
Number
This number is the ten-digit CRTU mobile phone number. If FT aborts

the functional test due to a missing CRTU directory number, RMS will
report a CALL SETUP FAILED error for a manual request, and HEH
will report a NOCALLINF error for an automatic request.
Error remedy
Go to screen 1 of the RC/V sub form and enter the CRTU directory
number and other mobile-related data. Set the Mobile Directory
Number Type field to y.
Incorrect Mobile Country
Code
If the mobile country code parameter for the CRTU is not correct, FT
will abort thefunctional test. RMS will report a CALL SETUP FAILED
Error remedy
Use the Mobile Country Code field on screen 5 of the RC/V cgsa form
to enter the correct mobile country code (310 in USA).
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 56

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
CRTU Problems
CRTU Problems
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Incorrect Mobile Setup
If the CRTU mobile-related parameters are not set up properly, FT will

abort the functional test. RMS will report a CALL SETUP FAILED
Error remedy
Visit the cell site and use the Programming Setup Tool (PST) to check/
change the following CRTU mobile-related parameters at the CRTUm:
Programming CRTU Carrier
CRTUm Attenuator Values
Ten-digit CRTU mobile phone numberSpecified by service

provider
Home system identification (SID) numberSpecified by service

provider
Mobile country code (MCC)Set to 310 in USA
Mobile network code (MNC)Specified by service provider
Mobile station identification number (MSIN)Set to the CRTU

mobile phone number.
CDMA channel number assignmentsSet to the carrier 1 value

specified in the RC/V cgsa or cell2 form.
Note that as of CDMA Release 6.0, the CRTUm must be programmed

with the carrier 1 value specified in the RC/V cgsa or cell2 form in all
four CDMA channel number locations. This restriction ensures that the
CRTUm will not attempt to acquire the system on any other carrier but
carrier 1 during CDMA functional testing, even if carrier 1 is faulty for
the sector under test.
The CRTUm also has in-line attenuators in its transmit and receive
paths to adjust the RF test signals to their proper levels. You should
check these CRTUm in-line attenuators (located in the Series II Cell
Site at the RCB RF switch assembly) to ensure that they have the
following values:
Series II Cell Site: CRTUm Tx port attenuator = 26 dB; CRTUm

Rx port attenuator = 40 dB
Cellular CDMA Minicell: CRTUm Tx port attenuator = 26 dB ;

CRTUm Rx port attenuator = 40 dB
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 57
CRTU Problems
Communication With
Mobile Failure
PCS CDMA Minicell: CRTUm Tx port attenuator = 0 dB;

CRTUm Rx port attenuator = 20 dB (with multi-carrier kit) or 15
dB (without multi-carrier kit)
If the CRTUi fails to communicate properly with the CRTUm, FT will

aborts the functional test. RMS will report a COMM. WITH TEST
MOBILE FAILED error for a manual request, and HEH will report a
RTU2MOBL error for an automatic request.
Error remedy
Visit the cell site and check that the CRTUm has operating power (+24
Vdc); check the cables between the CRTUi and the CRTUm; replace
the CRTUm, if necessary.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 58

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
RSP Problems
RSP Problems
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RSP Configuration Request
If the Radio Switch Panel (RSP) fails to respond to an RSP

configuration request from the CRTUi, FT will abort the functional test.
RMS will report an RSP FAILED TO GET REQUESTED SECTOR
error for a manual request, and HEH will report an RSP2SECTOR
error for an automatic request.
Error remedy
Visit the cell site and check that the RSP has operating power (+24
Vdc); check the cables between the CRTUi and the RSP; replace the
RSP, if necessary.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 59
Problems Due to No Traffic CE Available
Problems Due to No Traffic CE Available
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Problems Allocating a
Traffic CE
Problems can occur if RCC call processing cannot allocate a traffic CE

to either:
set up the initial MOST call, or
receive the handed-off call.
There are several reasons why RCC call processing might not be able
to allocate a traffic CE, including:
Interconnected 3-Shell
Subshelf
BBA for the sector under test is out-of-service
LAC for the sector under test is in an alarm state
Packet pipes for the sector under test are out-of-service or blocked
(blocked from the cell, blocked from the DCS)
CCCs for the sector under test are out-of-service.
In the case of a fully interconnected 3-shelf subcell, as is shown PCS

CDMA Minicell with 3 Interconnected Shelves: page 10-50, the third
and fourth items in the above list require additional clarification. In this
case, in order for absolutely NO traffic CE to be available to start the
CRTU TPFT, ALL packet pipes and/or ALL CCCs in the entire logical
subcell must be out of service. If there is ANY healthy CCC with a
healthy packet pipe, then the TPFT would be able to get started. If no
such healthy CCC with a healthy packet pipe exists anywhere within
the 3-shelf logical subcell, then not only is the CRTU TPFT blocked,
but no subscribers can place calls either.
Important!This problem, because of its severity, should have
been seen earlier by alert technicians. However, it would be a
highly unlikely event that ALL CCCs in the subcell are OOS,
unless there are only 1 or 2 of them.
Error remedy:
Consult the cell site status display pages to check hardware status at the
cell; if necessary, visit the cell site and manually identify, isolate, and
clear the error.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 60

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
List of CDMA Functional Test Faults & Likely

Causes
List of CDMA Functional Test Faults & Likely Causes
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
Error Code Format
The list of CDMA Functional test faults & likely causes, which is
adapted from Table 32-3 on pages 32-106 through 32-109 of the
Issue 6, January 1998, tabulates the Error Codes of the possible reasons
why CDMA functional tests can fail. Each Error Code is followed by a
brief description of what the failing Error Code means, and this, in turn,
is followed by one or more high-level causes that are most probably
responsible for causing the CDMA functional test error. These probable
causes are based on the failing reason reported by HEH.
Each of the entries in the list has the following general format:
ERROR CODE [Description of Error] => Probable Cause or Causes
List of CDMA Functional

Test Faults & Likely Causes
ACCESSCHAN [CRTUm is unable to acquire access channel] =>

RF transmission (Tx) path; CRTUm
BADMOBILSTAT [CRTUm is in invalid state] => CRTUm;

CRTUi
CELLSYSTEMERR [Unexpected condition] =>See assert

manual
CP_ACTIV_FAIL [Unable to complete handoff due to channel

activation failure] =>RF Tx path
CP_CALL_KILLED [Unable to complete handoff due to call is

killed] => RF Tx path
CP_CCC_NAVAIL [Unable to start handoff due to CCC not

available] => CCC unavailable (e.g., CCC blocked or OOS)
CP_CCC_NRSP [Unable to complete handoff due to no response

from CCC] => RCC did not get acknowledgment for handoff from
CCC; RF Tx path
CP_CCC_SDCALL [Unable to complete handoff due to CCC

shutting down the call] => RF Tx path
CP_CCP_FAIL [Unable to complete handoff due to CCP failure

on CCC] => RF Tx path
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 61

Causes
CP_CE_NAVAIL [Unable to start handoff due to traffic CE not

available] => Traffic CE blocked (e.g., packet pipe, DCS); RF Tx
path; DCS
CP_FRCD_RLS [Unexpected call drop] => RF Tx path; CRTUm
CP_FRM_OFBLCKD [Unable to start handoff due to frame offset

blocked] => Traffic CE on requested frame offset is blocked
CP_HHO [Unexpected call drop] => RF Tx path; CRTUm
CP_HNDOFF_ACTV [Unable to start handoff due to handoff

already active on the CE that is currently carrying the call] => RF
Tx path
CP_INTERNAL [Unexpected call drop] => RF Tx path; CRTUm
CP_LOST_CALL [Unexpected call drop] RF Tx path; CRTUm
CP_MOB_RLS [Unexpected call drop] => RF Tx path; CRTUm
CP_NO_CCC_HOACK [Unable to complete handoff due to no

CCC_HOACK from primary CE] RF Tx path
CP_NO_HOCMPLT [Unable to complete handoff due to CCC did

not receive EC_RTC_HOCMPLT message] => RF Tx path;
CRTUm
CP_NO_VC_CNFRM [Unable to complete handoff due to no

voice channel confirmation] => packet pipe
CP_PCTRL_BLCKD [Unable to start handoff due to power

control blocked] => Power capacity for calls exceeded; RF Tx
path
CP_PGCH_ECPRLS [Unexpected call drop] => RF Tx path;

CRTUm
CP_PGCH_RLS [Unexpected call drop] => RF Tx path; CRTUm
CP_RCC_ERROR [Unable to start handoff] => Unexpected

condition
CP_RLS_UNKNOWN [Unexpected call drop] => RF Tx path;

CRTUm
CP_RRHOREQNRSP [Unable to complete handoff] => No

response to handoff request message
CP_SEC_BLCKD [Unable to start handoff] => Sector blocked

(e.g., BBA OOS, LAC alarm)
CP_SHLOSS_CRLS [Unexpected call drop] => RF Tx path;

CRTUm
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 62

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Causes
CP_SHLOSS_MRLS [Unexpected call drop] => RF Tx path;

CRTUm
CP_SHO_SH_PROB [Unable to complete handoff] DCS (speech

handler)
CP_TRCH_ECPRLS [Unexpected call drop] => RF Tx path;

CRTUm
CP_TRCH_RLS [Unexpected call drop] => RF Tx path; CRTUm
CRTU2MOBL [CRTUi failed to communicate with CRTUm] =>

CRTUm; CRTUi
DIALDNFAIL [CRTUm could not dial] => CRTUm; CRTUi
DIALDNTMO [CRTUm did not respond to DIAL request] =>

CRTUm; CRTUi
DIALHOFAIL [RCC did not receive acknowledgment for handoff

from CRTUi] => CRTUi; CRTUm
FHOFAILED [Handoff failed. Cell attempted handoff but was

unable to complete handoff] => RF Tx path
HOREQFAILS [CRTUm did not send the handoff request, or cell

did not receive the request, or cell is unable to process the request]
=> RF Tx path; CRTUm
INTERNAL [Unexpected condition] => See assert manual
NOCALLINF [Cell received CALLORIG message from CRTUm

but unable to complete call setup] => Needed resource is
unavailable (e.g., packet pipe, DCS); RF Tx path; DCS
NOCALLORIG [CRTUm did not send CALLORIG message or

cell did not receive the message] => RF Tx path; RSP; CRTUm
NOCEAVAIL [Traffic CE blocked] => Traffic CE blocked (e.g.,

packet pipe, DCS); RF Tx path, DCS
NO_OVERHEAD [CRTUm unable to acquire pilot channel] =>

RF Tx path; CRTUm
PAGE_ACCESSFL [CRTUm unable to acquire paging channel]

=> RF Tx path; CRTUm
PILOTCHAFL [Handoff failed and there are no calls on carrier]

=> RF Tx path; bad pilot or traffic CE
PWROVLD [Forward/reverse link power over-load condition

detected] => Power capacity for calls exceeded; RF Tx path
RCC2CRTUI [RCC could not send message to CRTUi] =>

CRTUi; RCC
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 63

Causes
Complementary
Troubleshooting Tools
RCCFTTMRFL [RCC did not receive message from CRTUi] =>

CRTUi; RCC
RSP2SECTOR [Command to configure RSP failed] => RSP;

CRTUi
SYNCCHANFL [CRTUm unable to acquire sync channel] => RF

Tx path; CRTUm
TRFFICFL [CRTUm is not in conversation state] => RF Tx path;

CRTUm
The above list of CDMA Functional Test Faults & Likely Causes
provides a useful starting point for troubleshooting faults revealed by
CDMA Functional Tests. However, by itself it is not sufficient to
completely identify, locate, and correct system faults. The list should be
used for initial guidance in troubleshooting, then it should be followed
by use of one or more of the following complementary troubleshooting
tools to gather more detailed information about the nature and probable
cause(s) of the fault:
Status Display Pages (See pages 32-62 through 32-66 of the

Issue 8, January 1999)
ECP ROP Files (See pages 32-66 through 32-67 of the

RMS Output Messages (See pages 32-68 through 32-76 of the

HEH Output Messages (See pages 32-77 through 32-86 of the

CRTUMON ROP Processing Tool (See pages 32-87 through 3292 of the AUTOPLEX Cellular Telecommunications Systems,
System 1000, Operations, Administration, and Maintenance
Guide 401-610-160 Issue 8, January 1999)
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 64

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Causes
Operational Fault Detection - Access Channels (See pages 32-62

through 32-66 of the OA&M Guide, AUTOPLEX Cellular
Telecommunications Systems, System 1000, Operations,
Administration, and Maintenance Guide 401-610-160 Issue 8,
January 1999)
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 65
Troubleshooting with Diagnostic Tests
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Diagnostic tests are run automatically by software control when a fault

is detected. Before a diagnostic test is run, the unit to be tested will be
placed out of service (OOS).
Running Diagnostic Tests
Diagnostic tests may also be called manually on an off-line unit. You

can run diagnostics on specific cell site units. The diagnose
maintenance action can be applied to a unit in the out-of-service or
growth state, to a redundant unit in the standby state, or to a redundant
unit in the active state. In the latter case, MRA initiates a switch before
executing the diagnose request.
In addition, the diagnose maintenance action can be applied to a CCC
or TCU/ECU in the active state. The first step in a diagnose
maintenance action for an active CCC or TCU/ECU is the automatic
execution of a conditional remove.
Except for BBAs, CCCs, and CCUs, units are left in the out-of-service
state after completion of diagnostics. These units are returned to the
state they were in prior to running diagnostics.
Important!For redundant units, if the targeted unit is in the active
state but the mate is out-of-service, the diagnose aborts with no
action taken.
DGN Command Use and

Format
The DGN command described below may be used to diagnose

suspected faulty units. When you have isolated the fault, either adjust
or replace the isolated hardware, as appropriate. After you correct the
fault, manually run the CDMA functional tests ( OCFT, TPFT, and/or
PLFT) again to ensure that no additional errrors were introduced and
that the original error was, in fact, corrected.
Command Format:
DGN:CELL a,b [;[RPT c ][,RAW][,UCL][:[PH d

][,TLP][,CHANL e]] [CLASS f ]
Important!Reference should be made to the latest issue of the

Cell Site/DCS Input/Output Messages 401-610-107, for current
input commands.
Command Legend
Meaning of Parameters:
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 66

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
a Indicates the cell site number (1-222).

NOTE: This parameter may be a single number, a range (maximum
32), or a list separated by commas and enclosed in parentheses.
However, the a parameter must be a single cell site number if the b
parameter is one of the following: BBA x, CAT x, CCC x[, CCC
x],CCU y, DL x
b Indicates the cell site unit:
BBA x - CDMA BIU-BCR-ACU (BBA) set (1-30).
CAT x - Clock and tone (0-5 for a CDMA cell or 0-3 for a non-CDMA
cell).
CCC x - CDMA cluster controller (1-30).
CCC x,CCU y - CDMA cluster controller (1-30), CDMA channel unit
(1-7)
CSC x - Cell site controller (0 or 1).
CSC x,AL - Cell site controller (0-1) alarm interface.
CSC x,CPI y - Cell site controller (0-1), Communications processor
interface (0 or 1).
CSC x,CPU y - Cell site controller (0-1), Central processor interface (0
or 1).
CSC x,MEM y - Cell site controller (0-1), Memory (0 or 1).
CSC x,NCI y - Cell site controller (0-1), Network control interface (0
or 1).
DL x - Data links (0 or 1).
c Indicates the number of times you want the diagnostic to run (132,767). The default value is 1.
NOTE: If the unit is a data link (DL), the range is 1-256.
RAW Indicates printing the diagnostic results of every phase. The
default is the first five failures of each failing phase.
UCL Indicates unconditional execution of diagnostic and prints all
failures. Normal mode stops on first failure.
PHd Indicates execution of particular phase numbers. Numbers are in
decimal and may be a single number or a range of numbers:
1 - BBA
1-2 - CAT [NOTE: Phase 2 of the CAT diagnostic is a CDMA only
diagnostic.]
1 - CCC
1 - CCC, TCU
1-16 - CSC
1 - CSC,AL
1 - CSC, CPI
1 - CSC, MEM
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 67
1 - CSC, NCI
2 - DL
1 - DS1
TLP Indicates executing trouble locating procedure (TLP) at the
conclusion of the diagnostic. TLP generates a list of suspected faulty
equipment.
NOTE: It is recommended that you do not specify the TLP and UCL
parameters in the same command line because the accuracy of the TLP
listing could be affected.
CHANLe Indicates the channel number (1-1023) used to diagnose the
location radio, setup radio, or the test generator test unit. If the channel
is not available at the cell site, the diagnostic request is denied.
NOTE: If the CHANL parameter is not specified, the diagnostic
supervisor chooses any available channel.
CLASSf Indicates message class override (151-213).
NOTE: This option can only be used if the Virtual System Output
Message Routing feature is supported.
The following is an example of a successful output report made in
response to the issuance of a DGN:CELL diagnostic request:
DGN CELL 1 BBA 7 COMPLETED ATP
Each diagnostic test is supported by a Trouble Locating Procedure
(TLP) that identifies the suspect unit(s) at fault when the diagnostic
encounters a failure. The location of suspect units at fault is given in
hard-copy format. In most cases, when a diagnostic failure occurs, you
will be able to clear the trouble by replacing one of the suspect units
listed on the TLP.
Important!It is important to include the TLP option when issuing
the DGN:CELL diagnostic request so that the TLP list of
suspected faulty units will be printed at the conclusion of the
diagnostic.
TLP Output Message
The specific format of the TLP output (Message Type 316) is described
under DGN CELL TLP in the AUTOPLEX Cellular
Telecommunications Systems, System 1000, Output Messages 401-610057. It is reproduced here for Series II Cell Sites.
DGN:CELL a b, TLP
LIST UID FRAME SHELF SLOT

d b
e g h
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 68

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
This output message indicates the unit ID, the frame, the class of
circuits, and the vertical and horizontal location of each board in the
trouble-location procedure (TLP) list whenever the TLP option is
selected in a DGN request. This message is printed following a sometest-failed (STF) message.
VARIABLE FIELD
DEFINITIONS:
a = Cell site number (1-222).

b = Cell site unit. Series II only list includes:
BBA x - BCR-BIU-ACU units. x = (1 - 30).
CAT x - Clock and tone, x = (0 - 3).
CAT(SCT) x - Synchronous clock and tone, x = (0 - 5).
CCC x - CDMA cluster controller, x = (1 - 30).
CCC x, CCU y - CDMA channel unit (CCU), x = (1 - 30), y = (1 - 7).
CRTU - Radio test unit (CDMA).
CSC x - Cell site controller, x = (0 or 1).
CSC x, CPI - Cell site controller, communications processor interface,
x = (0 or 1).
CSC x, AL - Cell site controller, alarm interface, x = (0 or 1).
CSC x, MEM - Cell site controller, memory, x = (0 or 1).
CSC x, NCI y - Cell site controller, x = (0 or 1).
network control interface, y = (0 or 1).
DL x - Data links, x = (0 or 1).
DS1 x - Digital service 1, x = (0 - 13).
DS1(DFI) x - Digital facility interface, x = (0 - 13).
GPS - Global Positioning System.
LAC x - Linear amplifier circuit, x = (0 - 31).
(NOTE: Cannot be diagnosed.)
LC x - Location radio, x = (0 - 39).
RA x - Radio, x = (0 - 191).
RCG - Reference calibration generator.
RG x - Reference generator, x = (0 - 1).
RSP - RTU Switch Panel.
RTU - Radio test unit (AMPS).
SU x - Setup radio, x = (0 - 7 or 0 - 35 with Directional Setup).
TRTU - Radio test unit (TDMA).
VDRU - Voice Digital Radio Unit.
d = A number from 1 to 8, which indicates the order in which the
suspect circuits should be replaced.
e = Radio (0 - 7).
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 69
g = Shelf number.
h = Slot number.
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 70

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Troubleshooting with Software Audits
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Running Audits
Audit Complexity
Audits in AUTOPLEX System 1000 normally run automatically and

autonomously. Audits also can be requested manually to help locate
and analyze specific software or hardware problems. If a problem is
suspected with a particular data structure, the audits associated with
that data structure can be run to obtain data dumps that will aid in
isolating the error. If a hardware problem is suspected, an audit
message may be useful for identifying the error.
Using audits to detect hardware and software problems is not an easy
task. Skill in using audits as a troubleshooting tool comes with practice
and with knowledge of the overall system software. Generally, you
need to know how to request audits and how to interpret the problems
revealed in the output message printouts. For specific information on
how to do these things, consult the Cell Site Audits Manual, reference
[6].
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

10 - 71
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 - 72

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
GLO Glossary
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

GLO - 1
Glossary
.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ACDN Administrative call processing/database nodea CDN (call

processing/database node) that has been designated the administrative
CDN by the AUTOPLEX system software. An ACDN can assign call
processing tasks to itself as well as to all other available CDNs.
ACU Analog conversion unitprovides the baseband combining from
all the CEs in a CCC; performs A/D, D/A conversion. Currently
associates with one face; in the future will have access to any face.
AM Access managera 3B20D or 3B21D computer and its
associated I/O (input/output) devices. This processor controls system
operations.
AMPS Advanced mobile phone servicethe original name of the
world's first cellular radio system, which was introduced in 1978. Now
the term refers to analog technology radios.
BBA trio Bus interface, baseband, and analog components for one
CDMA radio shelf. Redundant BBA trio is optional.
BCR Baseband combiner and radioused in the CDMA-equipped
cell site to modulate the spread-spectrum voice, sync, and pilot
channels.
BER Bit error ratethe number of digital pulses detected as errors in
a specific time period. Error rates measure the quality of a digital
circuit.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GLO - 2
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Glossary
CCC CDMA cluster controllerterminates the packet pipe from the

DCS and controls the channel elements in the cell site.
CDMA Code division multiple accessassigns each active call a
unique pseudonoise code that is used by the system to distinguish that
call from all other calls occupying the same CDMA carrier band.
CDMA Carrie rBand A contiguous 1.23-MHz spectrum in the 1.8 to
2.0 GHz range, allocated specifically to CDMA service. Wireline and
nonwireline each may have as many as ten CDMA carrier bands.
CE Channel elementvoice processing unit of the Minicell that
provides CDMA radio service.
Cell A geographical area, usually depicted as hexagon-shaped, that is
served by a cellular system. Cellular technology is based on the
premise that a group of radio frequencies used within one cell can be
used again in distant cells.
Cell Site Node Link node that provides the interface between the cell
site and the IMS ring. Each PCS access manager has at least two CSNs.
Each CSN can have a maximum of eight cell site data links.
Channel A channel is a portion of the cellular frequency band
designated for a single cellular telephone conversation. A channel is an
actual cellular RF channel as identified by the Federal
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

GLO - 3
Glossary
Communications Commission (FCC), 30 kHz for analog and 1.25 MHz

for CDMA.
CNI Common network interfacethe hardware/software that
provides SS7 connectivity between 5ESS-2000 Switch DCS offices and
the access manager.
CPI Communications processor interfaceused by the active RCC to
send and receive data link messages from/to the PCSC.
CPU Core processor unita component of the AM, the CPU provides
high-speed control functions, such as logic, control, and arithmetic
processes as required by the 3B21D computer.
CRC Cyclic redundancy checka process in which a desired
sequence of bits is encoded in a prescribed manner to enable detection
and correction of bit errors.
CRTU CDMA radio test unitmodified mobile used to perform
transmitter and receiver tests on the Minicell.
CRTUi CRTU interfacecircuit board on the RCC shelf that gives
the active RCC control of the CRTU.
D
DCS Digital cellular switchthe AUTOPLEX system trunk switch

that terminates all voice trunks in the cellular system. The DCS is a
5ESS-2000 Switch DCS.
DFI Digital facilities interfacea DS1 board, located in the cell sites,
that contains either one or two E1/T1 facilities.
DFI2 Digital facilities interface 2digital trunk interface, located in
the 5ESS-2000 Switch DCS II that supports one or two T1 facilities.
DFU Digital facilities unita DS1 board, located in the cell site, that
contains either one or two E1/T1 facilities; also known as DFI board.
Direct sequence spread-spectrum A type of CDMA classification,
used in the CDMA product. A DS generator encodes voice signals and
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GLO - 4
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Glossary
assigns a unique PN code to each user. The DS system reduces

interference and ensures privacy.
DLTU Digital line trunk unitused in the AUTOPLEX application to
house the digital trunk units.
DMM Dual mode mobilean IS-95 compliant mobile that supports
CDMA radio technology and analog mode or an IS-54 mobile station
that can operate in digital mode (TDMA) or analog mode (FDMA).
DPC Dynamic power controla feature that allows cellular
transceivers to adjust their transmit power level in response to changes
in the RF environment.
DS0 Digital signal level 0the basic channel in the digital hierarchy,
DS0 consists of digital signal of 64 kbps (kilobits per second).
DS1 Digital signal level 1a level of the digital hierarchy that
transmits a time multiplexed signal that contains 24 DS0 channels. A
DS1 channel has a bandwidth of 1.544 Mbps. Also referred to as a T1
facility or span.
F
FDMA Frequency division multiple accessalso known as AMPS or

analog service.
FER Frame error ratethe number of frames detected with errors in
a specific time period. Error rates are used to measure the quality of a
digital circuit.
FRPH Frame relay protocol handlerperforms packet selection
based on the frame error rate (FER) of each packet.
GPS Global positioning systema system of 24 satellites that

provides, among other things, extremely accurate timing information to
CDMA-equipped cell sites.
Handoff An automatic transfer of a cellular telephone call from one

cell to another, maintaining call quality as the mobile user moves
throughout the coverage area.
HLR Home Location Registerthe database in charge of managing
mobile phone subscribers. The HLR stores a permanent copy of a
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

GLO - 5
Glossary
mobile subscriber's subscriber information, and some location

information to enable call routing to the access manager where the
subscriber is located.
I
IMS Interprocess message switcha subsystem of the access

manager complex consisting of nodes that provide the hardware and
software that interface the system data links.
IRN2 Integrated ring node 2processes ring messages to and from
the RPCNs (ring peripheral control units). RPCNs exist both in the
access manager and the 5ESS-2000 Switch DCS.
IS-95 Interim Standard-95the TIA standard that defines the
technical requirements for CDMA Minicell site and mobile operation.
LEDs Light-emitting diodesused as status indicators on various

circuit packs.
MIN Mobile identification numbera 34-bit number that is the

digital representation of the 10-digit directory number assigned to the
mobile station.
NCT Network control and timing linksfiber optic links between the
SMs and the CM in the 5ESS-2000 Switch DCS. NCT links process 512
time slots; NCT2 links process 1024 time slots.
Neighbor cell A neighbor cell is a cell that is adjacent to the cell
currently serving a mobile subscriber.
Neighbor group A group of cell sites near the cell site serving a call.
When a handoff is required from the serving cell site, the system tries to
handoff the call to one of the cells in the group.
Neighbor list A list of cell sites in a neighbor group.
NVM Nonvolatile memorya device that retains its memory even
after power is removed. NVM updates are normally performed after
cell site generic program changes.
OMP Operations and maintenance platformSun Microsystems

SPARCstation that provides OA&M access directly to the access
manager and remotely to the 5ESS-2000 Switch DCS.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GLO - 6
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Glossary
Packet pipe A group of DS0s, in the same DS1, that transmit and
receive voice and data between the speech handler and CCC in the cell
site.
PAF Physical antenna facea transmit antenna and its associated
receive antennas. The cells can have from one to six physical antenna
faces.
PCM Pulse code modulationthe 8-bit code that is created during
the encoding step of analog/digital conversion.
PCS Personal communications services are services planned for new
digital RF equipment operating in the 2-GHz spectrum.
PCSC PCS switching centerthe access manager, combined with at
least one DCS and an IMS.
PHA PSU2-to-ATM interfaceoptional board that provides
connectivity from PSU2 to ATM network when handoff between
different 5ESS-2000 Switch DCSs is performed.
PHV Protocol handler voicecontains either 8 kbps or 13 kbps in
PSU2. Also called PHV1 for 8 kbps and PHV2 for 13 kbps in PSU2.
Pilot Channel CDMA channel used by the mobile unit to determine
correct transmit power level.
PN Pseudorandom noiserandom code used to spread CDMA voice
or data prior to modulation.
PSTN Public switched telephone network consists of switching
equipment external to the PCSC. May consist of local, long-distance,
and SS7 networks.
PSU Packet switch unit 2transforms DS0s into packet pipes. A
packet pipe handles approximately four time the calls that a DS0 does.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

GLO - 7
Glossary
RCC Radio control complexmain processor of the primary radio

cabinet.
RS-442 Data link used by the CRTUi to control the CRTU during
diagnostic testing.
SCT Synchronized clock, and tone boardprovides precise timing to

the CDMA-equipped cell sites by GPS signals; also provides tones
during diagnostic and FCC test sequences.
SM-2000 Switch modulehouses digital trunks (or lines) in the
AUTOPLEX application.
Soft handoff Bridged CDMA handoff between neighbor cells or faces
within the speech handler of the 5ESS-2000 Switch DCS.
SS7 Signaling system 7a protocol standard used to communicate
between telecommunications sites. Large communications networks
can be built with sites using SS7-compatible equipment. SS7 networks
carry signaling information separately from the voice/data
communications path.
Sync Channel CDMA channel used to provide CDMA mobile unit
with system information and timing data.
TCU CDMA channel unitssupports two CDMA CEs (channel

elements).
TDM Time division multiplex busa parallel bus that provides
control and data transfer within the CDMA cluster. The TDM buses
connect all radios and circuit pack components in the CDMA cluster.
TDMA Time division multiple accessa digital technology available
with Series II cell site. TDMA uses DRUs to provide the transmission of
three voice channels over the 30-kHz RF bandwidth of one FDMA
channel.
Traffic Channel CDMA voice handling channel similar in function to
a voice channel.
Vocoder Voice coder/decodermay be either 8 kbps or 13 kbps.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GLO - 8
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Glossary
Walsh function Binary sequence of 64 chips used to differentiate

traffic, sync, and pilot channels in a CDMA system.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

GLO - 9
Glossary
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GLO - 10
401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Pcs Cdma Minicell

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Pcs Cdma Minicell

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PCS Systems

Mandatory Customer Information

Support Telephone Number

Lucent Technologies Proprietary

How Are We Doing?

Identification No.: 401-703-301

Issue No.: Issue 8

Date: April 1999

Improve the overview/introduction

Make it more concise/brief

Please provide details for the suggested improvement.

3. What did you like most about this CIP?

4. Feel free to write any comments below or on an attached sheet.

------------------------------------------------------------ Do Not Cut Fold Here And Tape ---------------------------------------------------------------------

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

How Are We Doing?

Identification No.: 401-703-301

Issue No.: Issue 8

Date: April 1999

Improve the overview/introduction

Make it more concise/brief

Please provide details for the suggested improvement.

3. What did you like most about this CIP?

4. Feel free to write any comments below or on an attached sheet.

------------------------------------------------------------ Do Not Cut Fold Here And Tape ---------------------------------------------------------------------

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

Introduction to PCS CDMA

PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description

Cabling, Connections, and Software

Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell

PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance

Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell

Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting Techniques

Lucent Technologies - Proprietary

Manual Coverage and Revisions

Lucent Technologies - Proprietary

Manual Coverage and Revisions

Reason for Reissue

For ease of access, the information contained in this manual is divided

The documentation useful in maintaining the Minicell comes from two

training courses and student guides wirelesscourse@lucent.com.

The AUTOPLEX Cellular Telecommunications Systems System 1000

Asia Pacific and China

North America (excluding U.S.) and all

FAX for all international customers

To order documentation by mail, please use the following address:

Lucent Technologies - Proprietary

For related documentation, refer to the table below:

System Description and Planning Guide

To determine which hardware/software options are currently available,

Lucent Technologies runs extensive tests on all its products to ensure

Lucent Technologies - Proprietary

The PCS CDMA Minicells are designed to provide self-contained

Warranty and Repair

The Minicell is warranted upon shipment for 24 months. If installed by

Preventive maintenance is defined as those activities performed at

Lucent Technologies warrants that all PCS System equipment that it

As a customer option, it may be to your advantage to become involved

Lucent Technologies - Proprietary

Introduction to PCS CDMA

PCS stands for Personal Communication Services, and designates a